See in Reader
3521 lines
1.4 MiB
3521 lines
1.4 MiB
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
|
||
ACT front intro mw28 0 # Introduction to Acts<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the book of Acts<br><br>1. The apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem (1:1–6:7)<br>2. The church expands into Judea and Samaria (6:8–9:31)<br>3. The church expands to include Gentiles (9:32–12:24)<br>4. Paul goes to Asia Minor as an apostle to the Gentiles (12:25–16:5)<br>5. The church expands into the middle Mediterranean area (16:6–19:20)<br>6. Paul reaches Rome, but as a prisoner and after several trials (19:21–28:31)<br><br>Luke makes transitional statements at 6:7, 9:31, 12:24, 16:5, and 19:20 to mark the movement from each major part of the book to the next part.<br><br>### What is the book of Acts about?<br><br>The book of Acts tells the story of the early church. It relates how more and more people, from different backgrounds and in different parts of the Roman Empire, became believers in Jesus. It shows the power of the Holy Spirit helping the early Christians. The events in this book begin with the return of Jesus to heaven and they end about 30 years later.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Acts of the Apostles.” Or translators may choose a different title, for example, “The Acts of the Holy Spirit through the Apostles.”<br><br>### Who wrote the book of Acts?<br><br>The author of this book does not give his own name. However, the book is dedicated to Theophilus, the same person to whom Luke dedicated his story of the life of Jesus, the Gospel of Luke. Also, in parts of this book, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person who traveled with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that Luke was the author of the book of Acts as well as the Gospel of Luke.<br><br>Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. He personally witnessed many of the events that he describes in the book of Acts.<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What is the church?<br><br>The church is the community of people who believe in Jesus as their Lord and Savior. The church includes both Jewish and Gentile believers. The book of Acts shows God helping the church. It shows God doing signs and wonders to confirm the church’s testimony to Jesus, leading many people to have faith in Jesus, guiding the church about where and how to share the good news, and enabling believers to resolve conflicts and endure persecution.<br><br>### The kingdom of God<br><br>The “kingdom of God” is a major concept in the book of Acts, as it is in the Gospel of Luke. This concept is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Figurative usages in the book of Acts<br><br>“arise/arising”<br><br>Luke often says “arise” or “arising” to mean taking action to get an enterprise under way, rather than to mean getting up from a sitting or lying position. Notes will indicate where this figurative usage occurs.<br><br>“brothers”<br><br>Luke often uses the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Although this term is masculine, Luke uses the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain this figurative usage in your translation, you could state “brothers and sisters” to indicate that the word has this generic sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])### Possible translation difficulties in the book of Acts<br><br>“to the same”<br><br>The phrase “to the same” occurs five times in this book (1:15, 2:1, 2:44, 2:47, 4:26). It is not entirely clear what this phrase means. In the first three instances it could mean “in the same place,” but it could also mean “in one accord,” that is, “in full agreement.” In 2:47 it seems to mean “to their group.” Paul uses the same phrase in 1 Corinthians 11:20 and 14:23, where it could mean “in the same place” or it could have the sense of full agreement and mean something like “in Christian fellowship.” That sense would fit Acts 2:47, where the phrase could be translated “to their Christian fellowship.” In 4:26 it could mean “to the same place,” but it could also mean “by agreement.” Notes will discuss the different possibilities in each case where the phrase could mean more than one thing.<br><br>“in/to/into the temple”<br><br>Luke uses this phrase many times in this book, but it does not refer to the temple building itself. Only priests were allowed to enter that building, so the phrase refers to the courtyard or area around the temple. The phrase “in the porch that is called Solomon’s” in 3:11 makes it clear that Peter and John and the crowd that gathered on the occasion that chapter describes were not inside the temple building. Notes will address this phrase to explain its meaning each time it occurs in the book.<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Acts?<br><br>The following are the most significant textual issues in Acts. Notes will address them where they occur in the book.<br><br>First, there are some verses that are found in traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. Some modern versions put these verses in square brackets \[ \]. The ULT and UST also put them in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including these verses if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that these verses may not be original. You could put them in brackets, for example, or in footnotes. These verses are:<br>- Acts 8:37, “Philip said, ‘If you believe with all your heart, you may be baptized.’ The Ethiopian answered, ‘I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God.’”<br>- Acts 15:34, “But it seemed good to Silas to remain there.”<br>- Acts 24:6-8, “And we wanted to judge him according to our law. But Lysias, the officer, came and forcibly took him out of our hands, sending him to you.”<br>- Acts 28:29, “When he had said these things, the Jews departed, having a great dispute among themselves.”<br><br>Second, in some verses, it is uncertain what the original text said. The ULT uses the first readings listed below, but it includes the second readings in footnotes. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider following the same reading that it does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the same reading that ULT does. These verses are:<br>- Acts 3:22, “the Lord our God.” Some versions read “the Lord your God,” and other versions read “the Lord God.”<br>- Acts 7:46, “a dwelling for the house of Jacob.” Some versions read “for the God of Jacob.”<br>- Acts 10:19, “three men.” Some versions read “two men” or “some men.”<br>- Acts 10:30, “Four days ago, at this hour, I was praying at the ninth {hour} in my house.” Some versions read, “From the fourth day until this hour, I was fasting, and at the ninth hour I was praying in my house.”<br>- Acts 12:25, “They returned from Jerusalem.” Some versions read, “They returned to Jerusalem” (or “to there”).<br>- Acts 13:18, “he put up with them.” Some versions read, “he cared for them.”<br>- Acts 15:17-18, “This is what the Lord says, who has done these things that have been known from ancient times.” Some older versions read, “This is what the Lord says, to whom are known all his deeds from ancient times.”<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
|
||
ACT 1 intro vyg9 0 # Acts 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>The UST has set the words “Dear Theophilus” apart from the other words. This is because English speakers often start letters this way. You may want to start this book in the way that people start letters in your culture.<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the two quotations from the book of Psalms in 1:20.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### The Ascension<br><br>This chapter records an event that is commonly known as the “Ascension.” That word describes how Jesus returned to heaven after he became alive again. In the future he will come back to earth again, and his return to earth is known as his “Second Coming.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]])<br><br>### Baptism<br><br>Luke uses the word “baptize” with two different meanings in [1:5](../01/05.md). In the first instance, it refers literally to the water baptism of John. In the second instance, it refers to people being filled with the Holy Spirit. Luke uses the term “filled” to mean this same thing in [2:4](../02/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]])<br><br>### “He spoke things concerning the kingdom of God”<br><br>Some scholars believe that when Jesus spoke “things concerning the kingdom of God,” as Luke describes in [1:3](../01/03.md), he explained to the disciples why the kingdom of God had not come while he was on earth the first time. Other scholars believe that the kingdom of God did begin while Jesus was on earth and that Jesus explained that it had come in a form different from the one the disciples had expected. Since Christians hold different views about the kingdom of God coming, translators should be careful to avoid letting how they understand that issue affect how they translate this verse.<br><br>## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Long sentence<br><br>As was common in compositions of this time, for stylistic purposes Luke begins this book with a very long sentence. It goes from the beginning of [1:1](../01/01.md) to the end of [1:3](../01/03.md). ULT represents all of this as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.<br><br>### The details of the death of Judas<br><br>There are some differences in detail between the way Luke describes the death of Judas in the book of Acts and the way Matthew describes it in his gospel. Luke says that Judas used the money he got for betraying Jesus to buy a field; Matthew says that Judas returned the money to the Jewish leaders and that they bought the field with it. Luke says that Judas killed himself by falling onto the field from a height; Matthew says that Judas hanged himself. Luke says that the field was named the “Field of Blood” because Judas died a bloody death there; Matthew says the field was given that name because it was purchased with “blood money,” that is, money paid to ensure someone’s death.<br><br>It is possible to reconcile many of these details. For example, the body of Judas may have fallen and split open on the field if he fell when he tried to hang himself. Luke may say that Judas bought the field because the Jewish leaders would not take back the money that they had paid him, and so in a sense it was still his money when the field was purchased with it.<br><br>But it would probably be best to avoid trying to reconcile these details within your translation. For example, when Luke says in [1:18](../01/18.md) that Judas fell onto the field, instead of saying that he fell when he was trying to hang himself, you could let Luke and Matthew each tell the story the way they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible.<br><br>### The 12 disciples<br><br>There is one small difference between the list of the 12 disciples that Matthew and Mark provide in their gospels and the list that Luke provides in his gospel and in the book of Acts.<br><br>All three writers list Simon Peter and his brother Andrew; James and John, the two sons of Zebedee; Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot. But Matthew and Mark say that the twelfth disciple was Thaddeus, while Luke says he was Judas the son of James. However, it is quite likely that Thaddeus was another name by which this other Judas was known.<br><br>Once again it is not necessary to try to reconcile these details within your translation. Specifically, in [1:13](../01/13.md) instead of saying, “Judas the son of James, who was also known as Thaddeus,” you can let each of the biblical writers tell the story in the way that they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible.
|
||
ACT 1 1 q9ep figs-explicit τὸν μὲν πρῶτον λόγον ἐποιησάμην 1 I made the first account Luke assumes that Theophilus will know that by **the first account** he means the book that has become known as the Gospel of Luke. Since that book was not known by that title at this time, it would not be accurate to put the title in your translation as a name that Luke would have used to describe the book to Theophilus. However, you could explain this in a footnote and use another expression here. Alternate translation: “I wrote in my first volume” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 1 a000 ὦ Θεόφιλε 1 O Theophilus Here Luke is identifying and addressing the man for whom he complied this account of the early church. Since this is like the salutation of a letter, in your translation you may wish to follow your culture’s way of identifying and greeting the addressee of a letter. UST models this by saying “Dear Theophilus” and putting the phrase at the beginning of the sentence.
|
||
ACT 1 1 ryj5 translate-names Θεόφιλε 1 Theophilus **Theophilus** is the name of a man. It means “friend of God.” It may be his actual name, or it may describe what this man was like. Most translations treat it as his name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 1 1 a001 figs-explicitinfo περὶ πάντων & ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν 1 all that Jesus began both to do and to teach Luke is using the word **began** to indicate that Jesus had been doing something else (working as a carpenter) but then began to do something new when he started his ministry. In your language, it might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. Alternate translation: “all that Jesus both did and taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
|
||
ACT 1 1 a002 figs-hyperbole περὶ πάντων & ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν 1 all that Jesus began both to do and to teach This is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “about some of the most important things that Jesus did and taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 1 2 a003 figs-idiom ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας 1 until that day when While this did happen on a specific day, Luke is likely using the word **day** to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “up to the time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 1 2 n435 figs-activepassive ἀνελήμφθη 1 he was taken up If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 1 2 a424 figs-explicit ἀνελήμφθη 1 he was taken up Luke is referring to Jesus being **taken up** into heaven. See the discussion of “Ascension” in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “he was taken up into heaven” or “God took him up into heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 3 a004 οἷς καὶ παρέστησεν ἑαυτὸν ζῶντα, μετὰ τὸ παθεῖν αὐτὸν, ἐν πολλοῖς τεκμηρίοις 1 to whom also, after he had suffered, he presented himself living with many proofs As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Jesus also presented himself alive with many proofs to his apostles after he had suffered”
|
||
ACT 1 3 dup3 figs-explicit μετὰ τὸ παθεῖν αὐτὸν 1 after he had suffered This refers to how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. Alternate translation: “after he had suffered and died on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 3 a005 figs-explicit ἐν πολλοῖς τεκμηρίοις 1 with many proofs The word translated **proofs** describes items of evidence that are decisive and convincing. Alternate translation: “with many definitive proofs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 3 yc16 figs-explicit δι’ ἡμερῶν τεσσεράκοντα, ὀπτανόμενος αὐτοῖς, καὶ λέγων 1 appearing to them for 40 days and speaking While the antecedent of **whom** is “the apostles whom he had chosen” in the previous verse, Jesus actually appeared to many other disciples besides his apostles. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “For 40 days he appeared to his apostles and many of his other disciples, and he spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 3 a006 figs-abstractnouns τὰ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 things concerning the kingdom of God See the discussion of the concept of the **kingdom of God** in Part 2 of the General Introduction to Acts. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **kingdom**, you could express this with a verb such as “rule,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 1 4 a007 figs-doublenegatives ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, μὴ χωρίζεσθαι, ἀλλὰ 1 not to depart from Jerusalem, but If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **depart**. Alternate translation: “to remain in Jerusalem and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 1 4 vb7g figs-quotemarks ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, μὴ χωρίζεσθαι 1 not to depart from Jerusalem The content of Jesus’ instructions to the apostles on this occasion begins here. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate and punctuate the material from here to the end of the verse as a direct quotation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 1 4 sg4h figs-metonymy τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πατρὸς 1 the promise of the Father Jesus is referring to the Holy Spirit by association with the way God made a **promise** to send the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit, whom the Father promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 1 4 a009 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρὸς 1 of the Father **Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “of God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
|
||
ACT 1 4 tj6r figs-quotations ἣν ἠκούσατέ μου 1 which you heard from me In keeping with his engaging storytelling style, Luke begins a quotation from Jesus here without introducing it with a formula such as “he said.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could include an introductory formula in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He said, ‘You heard about this from me’” or “He said, ‘I told you about this’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 1 4 d3kr figs-you ἠκούσατέ 1 you heard Here, **you** is plural because Jesus is speaking to the apostles, so use the plural form of “you” in your translation if your language marks that distinction. In [1:6](../01/06.md), “you” is singular because Jesus alone is being addressed, so the singular form would be accurate there. In general these notes will not discuss whether **you** is singular or plural when this should be clear from the context, but they will address ambiguous cases where this may not be clear. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||
ACT 1 5 fnq5 figs-explicit Ἰωάννης 1 John Jesus is referring to the man who was known as John the Baptist because he baptized people. It may help to identify him if you use that title after his name in your translation. However, because the word “Baptist” is associated with a group of churches in many parts of the world, it may be helpful to your readers to use a different form of the word as a title, as UST does by saying “Baptizer.” Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Baptizer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 5 a075 figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς & ἐν Πνεύματι βαπτισθήσεσθε Ἁγίῳ 1 you will be baptized in the Holy Spirit After describing earlier in the verse how John baptized people literally, Jesus is using baptism in this second instance as a metaphor. See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will come and empower you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 1 5 dzj1 figs-activepassive ὑμεῖς & βαπτισθήσεσθε 1 you will be baptized You may wish to retain the metaphor of baptism in your translation. If you do, and If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will baptize” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 1 5 a010 figs-litotes οὐ μετὰ πολλὰς ταύτας ἡμέρας 1 after these not many days Jesus is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “just a few days from now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 1 6 n9wt writing-pronouns οἱ μὲν οὖν συνελθόντες, ἠρώτων αὐτὸν 1 They therefore having assembled, they were asking him In the first instance, **they** describes Jesus and the apostles, while in the second instance, **they** refers to the apostles. (Other disciples could have been present on this occasion, but the instructions that Jesus gives about being “witnesses” in [1:8](../01/08.md) apply specifically to the apostles, so it would be good to name them directly.) Alternate translation: “When the apostles were together with Jesus, the apostles were asking him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 1 6 a011 figs-idiom εἰ ἐν τῷ χρόνῳ τούτῳ, ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ 1 if you are restoring the kingdom to Israel at this time This is an idiomatic way of asking a question. Alternate translation: “are you restoring the kingdom to Israel at this time” or “will you now restore the kingdom to Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 1 6 f7uj figs-abstractnouns εἰ & ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ 1 if you are restoring the kingdom to Israel If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **kingdom**, you could express the same idea with a noun such as “king.” Alternate translation: “are you going to give Israel its own king again” or “are you going to become the restored king of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 1 7 a012 figs-explicit οὐχ ὑμῶν ἐστιν γνῶναι 1 It is not for you to know Jesus is saying implicitly by this response that he is not going to tell the apostles when the thing they are asking about will happen. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “I am not going to tell you when that will happen, because it is not for you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 7 y1fu figs-doublet χρόνους ἢ καιροὺς 1 the times or the seasons The words **times** and **seasons** could: (1) refer to different kinds of time. Alternate translation: “the general period of time or the specific date” (2) have similar meanings, being used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the exact time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 1 7 a013 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ 1 the Father **Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
|
||
ACT 1 7 a014 figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ 1 by his own authority If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **authority**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “control.” Alternate translation: “as the one who controls all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 1 8 ld4k grammar-connect-logic-result λήμψεσθε δύναμιν, ἐπελθόντος τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς, καὶ ἔσεσθέ μου μάρτυρες 1 you will receive power when the Holy Spirit has come upon you, and you will be my witnesses Jesus is using the word translated **and** to describe a result. Alternate translation: “when the Holy Spirit comes upon you, then you will receive power to be my witnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 1 8 a015 figs-abstractnouns δύναμιν 1 power If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **power**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “powerful.” Alternate translation: “powerful ability” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 1 8 vb4m figs-idiom ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 to the end of the earth This is a reference to place, not to time. Jesus does not mean “until the world ends.” Alternate translation: “all over the world” or “to the places on the earth that are farthest away from here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 1 9 e1q1 figs-explicit βλεπόντων αὐτῶν 1 as they were looking Your language may require you to specify the object of **looking**. Alternate translation: “as they were looking at him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 9 l1cq figs-activepassive ἐπήρθη 1 he was raised up If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. (See the discussion of “Ascension” in the General Notes to this chapter.) Alternate translation: “he rose up” or “God raised him up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 1 9 ug58 figs-metonymy ἀπὸ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν 1 from their eyes Luke is using the **eyes** of the apostles to mean their capacity to see. Alternate translation: “from their sight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 1 10 enu1 figs-explicit ἀτενίζοντες ἦσαν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 they were looking intently into heaven Since a cloud was able to block the apostles’ view, it is clear that Luke is using the word translated **heaven** here in one of its specific senses to mean “sky.” It would be good to make clear that the apostles were not seeing into heaven itself. Alternate translation: “gazing at the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 10 a017 figs-metaphor καὶ ἰδοὺ ἄνδρες δύο 1 and behold, two men Luke is using the term **behold** to focus readers’ attention on how suddenly these **two men** appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then two men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 1 10 a018 grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ 1 and Luke uses the word translated **And** to indicate that the event of the men appearing happened after the event of Jesus going up. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
|
||
ACT 1 10 a019 figs-explicit ἄνδρες δύο 1 two men These were actually angels. Luke calls them **men** because they appeared in human form. Alternate translation: “two angels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 10 a020 ἐσθήσεσι λευκαῖς 1 white clothes In this context, the word **white** likely has the specific sense of “bright” or “shining.” Alternate translation: “bright clothes” or “shining clothes”
|
||
ACT 1 11 a021 figs-explicit οἳ & εἶπαν 1 they said This could mean: (1) one of the angels had spoken on behalf of both of them. Alternate translation: “one of them said” (2) the two angels had each said different parts of the quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 11 a022 figs-verbs οἳ & εἶπαν 1 they said If you retain the word **they** in your translation and if your language uses dual forms for verbs, it would be accurate to use the dual form here, since two men are speaking. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
|
||
ACT 1 11 gpg3 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Γαλιλαῖοι 1 Men, Galileans This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You Galileans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 1 11 a024 figs-rquestion τί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν? 1 why do you stand looking into heaven? The angels are not looking for information. They are using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “there is no reason for you to stand looking into heaven!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 1 11 a025 figs-idiom τί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες 1 why do you stand looking The expression **stand** means to continue doing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “why do you keep looking” or “there is no reason for you to keep looking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 1 11 a026 figs-explicit ὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς ἀφ’ ὑμῶν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν & ἐθεάσασθε αὐτὸν πορευόμενον εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν 1 who has been taken up from you into heaven … you saw him going into heaven In its second occurrence in this sentence, the term translated **heaven** likely means “the sky,” as in the previous sentence and in the previous verse. However, in its first occurrence in this sentence, the term likely means “heaven” itself. It would not be accurate to say that Jesus was just “taken up from you into the sky.” Alternate translation: “who has been taken up from you into heaven … you saw him going into the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 11 a027 figs-activepassive ὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς 1 who has been taken up If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who has done the action. Alternate translation: “whom God has taken up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 1 11 cue7 ὃν τρόπον 1 in which manner Alternate translation: “in the same way in which”
|
||
ACT 1 12 x2nk writing-pronouns ὑπέστρεψαν 1 they returned The word **they** refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “the apostles returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 1 12 a028 figs-activepassive ὄρους τοῦ καλουμένου Ἐλαιῶνος 1 the hill that is called Olivet If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the hill that people call Olivet” or “the hill whose name is Olivet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 1 12 a029 translate-names ὄρους τοῦ καλουμένου Ἐλαιῶνος 1 the hill that is called Olivet **Olivet** is the name of a hill. If your readers might recognize it better if you called it the Mount of Olives, you could use that name in your translation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 1 12 a030 figs-idiom Σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν 1 having a journey of a Sabbath The expression **having a journey** refers to a distance. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a Sabbath-day’s journey away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 1 12 p19g translate-unknown Σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν 1 having a journey of a Sabbath The **journey of a Sabbath** was the distance that interpreters of the law of Moses had determined people could walk on the Sabbath without that being “work.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the distance in the measurement that your culture uses. Alternate translation: “about a kilometer away” or “about half a mile away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 1 13 vis2 figs-explicit ὅτε εἰσῆλθον 1 when they arrived The previous verse explains that the apostles returned to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that again explicitly here. Alternate translation: “when they arrived back in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 13 zt12 translate-unknown εἰς τὸ ὑπερῷον, ἀνέβησαν οὗ ἦσαν καταμένοντες 1 they went up into the upper chamber where they were staying In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built on top of other rooms. The expression **upper chamber** describes such a room, which was reached by stairs. If your culture does not have houses like that, it may be helpful to explain the meaning of the expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “they climbed the stairs to the room where they were staying, which had been built on top of other rooms in the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 1 13 a032 figs-idiom Ἰάκωβος Ἁλφαίου & Ἰούδας Ἰακώβου 1 James of Alphaeus … Judas of James These are two occurrences of an idiom. Alternate translation: “James the son of Alphaeus … Judas the son of James” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 1 13 a033 translate-names Ἰάκωβος & Ἁλφαίου & Ἰούδας & Ἰακώβου 1 James … Alphaeus … Judas … James These are the names of four men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 1 13 a034 translate-names Σίμων ὁ Ζηλωτὴς 1 Simon the Zealot **Simon** is the name of a man, and **Zealot** is another name by which he was known. (1) **Zealot** could be a title that indicates that this man was part of the group of people who wanted to free the Jewish people from Roman rule. Alternate translation: “Simon the Patriot” (2) **Zealot** could also be a description that indicates that this man was zealous for God to be honored. Alternate translation: “Simon the Passionate One” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
|
||
ACT 1 14 z6cf ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 unanimously The word **unanimously** indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. Alternate translation: “with one accord” or “harmoniously”
|
||
ACT 1 14 a035 figs-explicit γυναιξὶν 1 the women Luke assumes that his readers will know he is referring to the women who accompanied Jesus and his disciples during his ministry. These women provided for them out of their own means, and they had traveled with them to Jerusalem. These women are described in [Luke 8:2–3](../luk/08/02.md) and [23:49](../luk/23/49.md). Alternate translation: “the women who had helped Jesus and his disciples during his ministry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 14 a037 translate-kinship τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς αὐτοῦ 1 his brothers These were Jesus’ younger brothers. They were the sons of Mary and Joseph. Since the Father of Jesus was God, and their father was Joseph, they were actually his half-brothers. That detail is not normally translated, but if your language has a specific word for “younger brother,” you may wish to use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
|
||
ACT 1 15 il8w writing-newevent καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 And in those days Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. The phrase refers to the period of time after Jesus ascended, when the disciples were meeting in the upper chamber. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 1 15 cup2 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 in those days Luke is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “during that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 1 15 a038 translate-symaction ἀναστὰς 1 having stood up Peter **stood up** to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “having stood up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 1 15 liz1 figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “his fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 1 15 a039 figs-gendernotations τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Luke is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. As the General Introduction to Acts suggests, here and throughout the book, if you retain this figurative usage in your translation, you could state “brothers and sisters” to indicate that it has this generic sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 1 15 tl5m writing-background ἦν τε ὄχλος ὀνομάτων ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ὡς ἑκατὸν εἴκοσι 1 and the multitude of names to the same was about 120 Luke provides this background information to help readers appreciate what happens shortly afterwards in the story, when the church grows in one day to many times this size. It may be helpful to put this background information first in the verse as a separate sentence, in which case it would not have to be in parentheses. Alternate translation: “Now the number of people in that one place was about 120.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 1 15 a040 figs-metonymy ὄχλος ὀνομάτων 1 the multitude of names Luke is using the term **names** to mean “people,” by association with the way that people have names. Alternate translation: “the number of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 1 15 a041 ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ 1 to the same See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in that one place” or “in their Christian fellowship”
|
||
ACT 1 16 a042 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 1 16 a043 figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 1 16 a045 figs-infostructure ἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν, ἣν προεῖπε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον διὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ περὶ Ἰούδα, τοῦ γενομένου ὁδηγοῦ τοῖς συλλαβοῦσιν Ἰησοῦν 1 it was necessary for the scripture to be fulfilled that the Holy Spirit spoke before by the mouth of David concerning Judas, who became a guide to the ones who arrested Jesus If it would be helpful in your language, you could put the information that Peter provides to identify this **scripture** before his statement that it had to be **fulfilled**. It may be helpful to make that statement a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit spoke before by the mouth of David concerning Judas, who became a guide to the ones who arrested Jesus. It was necessary for that scripture to be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 1 16 i8tl figs-activepassive ἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν 1 it was necessary for the scripture to be fulfilled If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the things needed to take place that the scripture described” or, if you put the background information first as a separate sentence, “What that scripture described needed to take place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 1 16 a046 προεῖπε 1 spoke before Alternate translation: “spoke beforehand” or “spoke in advance”
|
||
ACT 1 16 f3um figs-metonymy διὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ 1 by the mouth of David Peter is using the word **mouth** to refer to words that David spoke or sang using his mouth and that he recorded in the book of Psalms, as Peter indicates in [1:20](../01/20.md). Alternate translation: “through the words of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 1 16 a048 figs-synecdoche τοῦ γενομένου ὁδηγοῦ τοῖς συλλαβοῦσιν Ἰησοῦν 1 who became a guide to the ones who arrested Jesus Peter is using the act of guiding **the ones arresting Jesus** to represent all of the things that Judas did to betray Jesus. This also included meeting beforehand with his enemies, receiving payment for the betrayal, and looking for the best opportunity to catch Jesus away from the crowds. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in more general terms. Alternate translation: “who betrayed Jesus to his enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 1 17 q73y grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 For Peter uses the word **For** to introduce the reason for a result that is described in [1:21–22](../01/21.md), after Luke provides further background information and Peter quotes the scripture he referred to in [1:16](../01/16.md). The overall meaning is, “Since Judas was one of us apostles, we need to replace him with another witness of the ministry of Jesus.” But since so much material comes between the reason and the result, it may be helpful to give an indication here that Peter has a response in mind. Alternate translation: “There is something important we need to do in response to this scripture being fulfilled, since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 1 17 a049 figs-parallelism κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν, καὶ ἔλαχεν τὸν κλῆρον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης 1 he was numbered with us and received a share of this ministry These two phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “Jesus chose him to be an apostle along with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||
ACT 1 17 a050 κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν 1 he was numbered with us Peter is using the term **numbered** in one of its specific senses. Alternate translation: “he was considered to be one of us apostles”
|
||
ACT 1 17 a051 figs-activepassive κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν 1 he was numbered with us If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he belonged to our group of apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 1 17 tmv2 figs-exclusive ἐν ἡμῖν 1 with us Although Peter is addressing a larger group of people, he is using the word **us** to refer only to himself and the other apostles. So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive “us,” it would be accurate to use the exclusive form here. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that **us** is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “with us apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 1 17 a052 figs-quotemarks τὸν κλῆρον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης 1 a share of this ministry Luke temporarily ends his quotation from Peter after this phrase so that he can provide further background information about Judas in [1:18–19](../01/18.md). The quotation resumes in [1:20](../01/20.md). If you are identifying quotations in your translation by putting them within quotation marks or by using some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, there should be an ending quotation mark or the equivalent after this phrase. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 1 18 tmv1 writing-background μὲν οὖν 1 Now indeed Luke is using this expression to introduce further background information that he provides in this verse and the next one about how Judas died and about what people called the field where he died. This is not part of Peter’s speech. You may want to indicate that by putting these verses in parentheses or by using the equivalent convention in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 1 18 dd58 figs-nominaladj οὗτος 1 this one Luke is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Judas. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could state “he” or use the name “Judas.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 1 18 a053 figs-abstractnouns ἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας 1 from the wage of unrighteousness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **unrighteousness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “unrighteous.” Alternate translation: “with the money that he received for doing an unrighteous deed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 1 18 w83j figs-metonymy ἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας 1 from the wage of unrighteousness Luke is using the term **unrighteousness** to describe Judas betraying Jesus, by association with the way that was an unrighteous thing to do. Alternate translation: “with the money that he received for betraying Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 1 18 kg3q figs-explicit πρηνὴς γενόμενος 1 having fallen headfirst Be sure that it is clear in your translation that Judas did not fall down accidentally. Rather, he threw himself onto the field intentionally in order to kill himself. The implications are that he must have done this from a height. Alternate translation: “because he then threw himself down from a height onto that field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 1 18 a054 πρηνὴς γενόμενος 1 having fallen headfirst The word **headfirst** describes someone falling forward, as opposed to falling backwards. Alternate translation: “having fallen forward”
|
||
ACT 1 18 a055 figs-activepassive ἐξεχύθη πάντα τὰ σπλάγχνα αὐτοῦ 1 all his entrails were poured out If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “all his inward parts poured out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 1 19 a056 γνωστὸν ἐγένετο πᾶσι τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 it became known to all those living in Jerusalem The verb form is not passive here, since **known** is an adjective rather than a participle. Even so, it may be helpful to your readers to make **it** the object rather than the subject. Alternate translation: “all those living in Jerusalem heard about it”
|
||
ACT 1 19 a057 figs-hyperbole γνωστὸν ἐγένετο πᾶσι τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 it became known to all those living in Jerusalem Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “it became well known to those living in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 1 19 a058 figs-activepassive ὥστε κληθῆναι τὸ χωρίον ἐκεῖνο 1 Therefore that field was called If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “So they called that field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 1 19 mxf3 translate-transliterate Ἁκελδαμάχ 1 Akeldama **Akeldama** is an Aramaic word. Luke spells it out using Greek letters so his readers will know how it sounds, and then he says what it means, **Field of Blood**. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
|
||
ACT 1 20 mz13 figs-quotemarks γέγραπται γὰρ 1 For it is written Luke now resumes his quotation of what Peter said on this occasion. If you are identifying quotations in your translation by putting them within quotation marks or by using some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, there should be an opening quotation mark or the equivalent before this phrase. It may also be helpful to indicate explicitly that the quotation resumes here. Alternate translation: “Peter went on to say, ‘For it is written’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 1 20 d7pk figs-quotesinquotes γέγραπται & ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν, γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ; καί, τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος 1 it is written in the book of Psalms, ‘Let his habitation be made desolate, and let not one dwelling be in it,’ and ‘Let another take his overseership.’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “it is written in the book of Psalms that his habitation should be made desolate, with no one dwelling in it, and that another should take his overseership” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 1 20 ip5w figs-activepassive γέγραπται & ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν 1 it is written in the book of Psalms If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “David wrote in the book of Psalms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 1 20 g30d figs-imperative3p γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May his habitation become desolate, and may no one be dwelling in it” or “His habitation should become desolate, and no one should be dwelling be in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
|
||
ACT 1 20 crk3 figs-imperative γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. The psalmist is asking God to judge and punish the wicked. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please let his habitation become desolate, and please let no one be dwelling in it” or “Please may his habitation become desolate, and please may no one be dwelling in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
|
||
ACT 1 20 hiul figs-123person γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ 1 It may be more natural in your language to use the second person for this imperative. Alternate translation: “God, please make his habitation desolate, and please make no one dwell in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||
ACT 1 20 mc45 figs-parallelism γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ 1 Let his habitation be made desolate, and let not one dwelling be in it These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Or you could combine the phrases if you think that would be the clearest thing to do. Alternate translation: “Let his habitation be made desolate, yes, let no one dwell in it” or “Let his habitation be made completely desolate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||
ACT 1 20 chq4 figs-metaphor γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ 1 Let his habitation be made desolate, and let not one dwelling be in it The word **habitation** likely refers to Judas’ home and is a metaphor for his family line. Alternate translation: “May he leave no descendants, none to continue his family line” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 1 20 a059 τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος 1 Let another take his overseership The word **overseership** refers to a position of leadership and supervision. It is the same term that Paul uses for a spiritual leader in [1 Timothy 3:1](../1ti/03/01.md). Alternate translation: “Let someone else take his leadership position”
|
||
ACT 1 20 uctm figs-imperative3p τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May another take his overseership” or “Another should take his overseership” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
|
||
ACT 1 20 jdsg figs-imperative τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. The psalmist is continuing God to judge and punish the wicked. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please let another take his overseership” or “Please may another take his overseership” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
|
||
ACT 1 20 elz8 figs-123person τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος 1 It may be more natural in your language to use the second person for this imperative. Alternate translation: “God, make another take his overseership” or “God, please give his overseership to another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||
ACT 1 21 t916 translate-versebridge 0 To help your readers understand Peter’s main point in this verse and the next one, you could combine both verses into a verse bridge. You could put his main point in a first sentence and his further explanation in a second sentence. Alternate translation: “Therefore it is necessary for someone else to become a witness with us of Jesus’ resurrection. It should be one of the men who accompanied us during all the time that the Lord Jesus came in and went out among us, beginning from the baptism of John until the day that he was taken up from us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
|
||
ACT 1 21 xz69 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν & ἡμᾶς 1 us … us In the first instance of **us**, Peter means himself and his fellow apostles, not everyone to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of the word if your language marks that distinction. However, in the second instance of **us**, Peter could well mean himself and his entire audience, so use the inclusive form in that instance. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 1 21 zuf7 figs-idiom εἰσῆλθεν καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ὁ Κύριος Ἰησοῦς 1 the Lord Jesus came in and went out among us Peter is speaking in an idiomatic way. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus lived among us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 1 22 qb8j figs-abstractnouns ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ τοῦ βαπτίσματος Ἰωάννου 1 beginning from the baptism of John If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **baptism**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “baptize.” Alternate translation: “beginning from when John started baptizing people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 1 22 a061 figs-idiom τῆς ἡμέρας ἧς 1 the day on which While Jesus was taken up to heaven on a specific **day**, Peter may be using the word **day** to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “the time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 1 22 a062 writing-pronouns ἀνελήμφθη & τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ 1 he was taken up … his resurrection The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus, not to John the Baptist. The pronoun **his** also refers to Jesus. For clarity, you may want to use the name Jesus instead of one or both of these pronouns. Alternate translation: “Jesus was taken up … the resurrection of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 1 22 yi3a figs-activepassive ἀνελήμφθη ἀφ’ ἡμῶν 1 he was taken up from us If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up from us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 1 22 a063 figs-exclusive ἀφ’ ἡμῶν & σὺν ἡμῖν 1 from us … with us When Peter says **from us**, he is referring to God taking Jesus from everyone to whom he is speaking. But when Peter says **with us**, he means only himself and the other apostles. So the word “us” would be inclusive in the first instance and exclusive in the second instance, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 1 22 mrx7 figs-nominaladj ἕνα τούτων 1 one of these is Peter is using the demonstrative adjective **these** as a noun to refer to specific people, the men whose qualifications he has just described. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “one of these men is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 1 22 g3n9 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ 1 of his resurrection If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “that God made him alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 1 23 lz7y writing-pronouns ἔστησαν δύο 1 they stood up two The pronoun **they** refers to all of the believers who were present on this occasion. This is the group that Luke describes as “the brothers” in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “the believers stood up two” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 1 23 a064 figs-nominaladj ἔστησαν δύο 1 they stood up two Luke is using the adjective **two** as a noun to refer to specific people, two men who met the qualifications Peter described. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning, and you could also describe these men more specifically. Alternate translation: “the believers stood up two men” or “the believers stood up two men who met the qualifications that Peter described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 1 23 a065 translate-symaction ἔστησαν δύο 1 they stood up two When the believers **stood up** these two men, that is, when they had them stand up within the group, this was a symbolic way of proposing them as candidates to replace Judas. Alternate translation: “the believers proposed two men who met the qualifications that Peter described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 1 23 a066 translate-names Ἰωσὴφ & Βαρσαββᾶν & Ἰοῦστος 1 Joseph … Barsabbas … Justus **Joseph** is the name of a man, and **Barsabbas** and **Justus** are two other names by which he was known. **Barsabbas** is probably a patronymic, that is, an indication of who his father was. If your language and culture identify people by patronymics, it may be helpful to translate this name as “the son of Sabbas,” as UST does. **Justus** is a Roman name, and it may be a name that this man used for official purposes and in interactions with people who spoke Latin. (It would be like the name Paul, by which Saul of Tarsus was also known in the Roman Empire.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 1 23 s1ff figs-activepassive τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν, ὃς ἐπεκλήθη Ἰοῦστος 1 the one called Barsabbas, who was named Justus If it would be helpful in your language, you could state both of these things with active forms. Alternate translation: “whom people called Barsabbas and whose other name was Justus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 1 23 a067 translate-names Μαθθίαν 1 Matthias **Matthias** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 1 24 a068 translate-versebridge 0 Judas betrayed Jesus and abandoned his position as an apostle. The person who is praying says that in the next verse. As a result, the believers are asking God to show them whom he has chosen to replace Judas, as the person praying says in this verse. You could put the reason before the result by creating a verse bridge. UST provides a model for doing that. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
|
||
ACT 1 24 a069 figs-hendiadys προσευξάμενοι, εἶπαν 1 praying they said Together the words **praying** and **said** indicate that the believers said what they did while praying. Alternate translation: “they said in prayer” or “they prayed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 1 24 zd1f figs-synecdoche προσευξάμενοι, εἶπαν 1 praying they said The pronoun **they** refers to all of the believers, but one of the apostles alone probably spoke these words on behalf of everyone. Alternate translation: “as the believers were all praying together, one of the apostles said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 1 24 a070 σὺ Κύριε, καρδιογνῶστα πάντων 1 You, Lord, heart-knower of all Alternate translation: “You, Lord, who know the hearts of all people”
|
||
ACT 1 24 se6m figs-metaphor σὺ Κύριε, καρδιογνῶστα πάντων 1 You, Lord, heart-knower of all Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “You, Lord, who know the thoughts and motives of all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 1 24 a071 figs-youformal σὺ Κύριε 1 you, Lord The word **you** is singular because the person who is praying is addressing God. If your language has a formal form of “you” that it uses to address a superior respectfully, you may wish to use that form in your translation. However, it might be more natural in your language for someone who has a good, close relationship with God to address God using the informal form of “you.” Use your best judgment about what form to use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
|
||
ACT 1 24 a072 figs-nominaladj ὃν ἐξελέξω ἐκ τούτων τῶν δύο ἕνα 1 which one from these two The person who is praying is using the adjective **two** as a noun to refer to specific people, the two men whom the believers have proposed. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “which one of these two men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 1 25 mg47 figs-hendiadys λαβεῖν τὸν τόπον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης καὶ ἀποστολῆς 1 to take this place of ministry and apostleship The person who is praying is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **apostleship** identifies what kind of **ministry** this is. Alternate translation: “to take this place of apostolic ministry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 1 25 ryv6 figs-metaphor ἀφ’ ἧς παρέβη Ἰούδας 1 from which Judas turned aside The expression **turned aside** means that Judas stopped performing this ministry. Alternate translation: “which Judas stopped fulfilling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 1 25 tx6n figs-euphemism πορευθῆναι εἰς τὸν τόπον τὸν ἴδιον 1 to go to his own place This phrase uses a mild expression to describe Judas’ death and likely also his judgment after death. Alternate translation: “and died under God’s judgment as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
|
||
ACT 1 26 a073 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce what the believers did as a result of Peter’s speech. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 1 26 r84c writing-pronouns ἔδωκαν κλήρους αὐτοῖς 1 they cast lots for them The pronoun **they** refers to the believers and the pronoun **them** refers to Joseph and Matthias. You may want to specify that for clarity. (But if you decide to retain the pronoun **them** and if your language marks the dual form, **them** would be dual because it refers to those two men.) Alternate translation: “the believers cast lots to decide between Joseph and Matthias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 1 26 a074 translate-unknown ἔδωκαν κλήρους αὐτοῖς 1 they cast lots for them The term **lots** describes objects with various markings on different sides that were used, most likely by dropping them on the ground, to select between possibilities. The belief was that God would control which way these objects fell and so guide the selection process. Alternate translation: “they threw marked objects on the ground, trusting that God would use these to guide them whether to choose Joseph or Matthias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 1 26 w4ph figs-idiom ἔπεσεν ὁ κλῆρος ἐπὶ Μαθθίαν 1 the lot fell to Matthias The word **fell** means “selected.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the lot selected Matthias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 1 26 fk4x figs-activepassive συνκατεψηφίσθη 1 he was chosen If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the believers chose him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 intro x8fr 0 # Acts 2 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>Some translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35.<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the material that is quoted in 2:31.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Pentecost<br><br>The events described in this chapter took place on the day of Pentecost. That was a festival that the Jews observed each year 50 days after Passover. It was a harvest festival that celebrated the first produce from the fields. That produce was known as “firstfruits.” Many people believe that the church began to exist when the Holy Spirit came to live inside believers on this particular day of Pentecost. Those believers were the “firstfruits” of all those who would become part of the church down through the years.<br><br>### Tongues<br><br>Luke uses the Greek word “tongues” to mean two different things in this chapter. In 2:3, Luke describes what came down from heaven as “tongues as if of fire.” A “tongue of fire” means a “flame of fire” (as in Isaiah 5:24, for example), so this means “something like flames of fire.” In 2:4, Luke uses the word “tongues” in the different sense of “languages” to describe the languages that the people spoke after the Holy Spirit filled them. For clarity, ULT translates the use in 2:3 as “tongues” and the use in 2:4 as “languages.”<br><br>### Last days<br><br>In 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy from Joel that describes something that will happen in the “last days.” Some scholars understand the “last days” to mean a time in the future just before Jesus returns. Other scholars understand the “last days” to mean the entire time from when Jesus first came to when he will return. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this expression where it occurs in 2:17. It may be best not to say more about this than ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]])<br><br>### The prophecy of Joel<br><br>In 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy of Joel about what would happen in the “last days.” Some of the things that prophecy describes did happen on the day of Pentecost, for example, the pouring out of the Spirit (2:17–18). Some other things did not happen, at least not literally, for example, the sun turning to darkness (2:20). Depending on how scholars understand the “last days,” they may say either that these other things await a literal future fulfillment or that they were fulfilled in some spiritual sense on the day of Pentecost. Once again it may be best not to say any more than ULT does and to allow preachers and teachers of the Bible to interpret and explain the meaning of Peter’s statement in 2:16, “this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])<br><br>### Baptize<br><br>In this chapter, the word “baptize” refers to water baptism as an expression of faith in Jesus for the forgiveness of sins. That is how Luke uses the term in 2:38 and 2:41. Jesus did promise the disciples in 1:5 that they would be baptized in the Holy Spirit, and the events that Luke describes in 2:1-11 are the fulfillment of that promise. But Luke does not use the word “baptize” to describe those events in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]])<br><br>### Wonders and signs<br><br>These words refer to things that only God could do that showed that Jesus was who the disciples said he was. See the notes to this expression in 2:43.<br><br>## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “You killed” (2:23)<br><br>The Romans were the ones who killed Jesus, but they killed him because the Jews captured him, brought him to the Romans, and urged the Romans to kill him. For this reason Peter tells the people in the crowd on the day of Pentecost that they were guilty of killing Jesus. See the note to this phrase in 2:23 for suggestions about how to make clear in your translation what Peter means when he says this.<br><br>### Long sentences<br><br>There is a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:9 to the end of 2:11. ULT represents all of it as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.<br><br>There is also a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:44 to the end of 2:47. Once again it may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.<br><br>### Poetry<br><br>The quotations from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35 are poetry. For advice about how to represent this literary form in your translation, see: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]].
|
||
ACT 2 1 i4sa writing-newevent καὶ ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς 1 And when the day of Pentecost was completely filled Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 2 1 a076 figs-idiom ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς 1 when the day of Pentecost was completely filled This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “when the day of Pentecost had come” or, if your language does not speak of days “coming,” “on the day of Pentecost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 1 a425 figs-activepassive ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς 1 when the day of Pentecost was completely filled Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to use an active form of the verb “fill” in place of the passive form of that verb here. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 1 i4sb writing-pronouns ἦσαν πάντες ὁμοῦ 1 they were all together Here the word **they** refers to the apostles and the other 120 believers whom Luke mentions in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “the apostles and all the other believers were together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 1 a077 ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό 1 to the same See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in the same place” or “in united Christian fellowship”
|
||
ACT 2 2 qjc3 ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 from heaven The word translated **heaven** could mean: (1) “the sky.” Alternate translation: “from the sky” (2) the sound came from **heaven** itself.
|
||
ACT 2 2 a078 figs-simile ὥσπερ φερομένης πνοῆς βιαίας 1 as of a strong wind being borne along Luke is using a simile to describe what this wind was like. You could use the same simile in your translation, or you could use a different comparison, to a similar loud sound that your readers would recognize. It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It sounded like a strong wind being borne along” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
|
||
ACT 2 2 jec5 figs-metaphor φερομένης πνοῆς βιαίας 1 a strong wind being borne along Luke speaks of the wind as if it were being carried through the air. Alternate translation: “a mighty, rushing wind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 2 a079 figs-metaphor ἐπλήρωσεν ὅλον τὸν οἶκον 1 it filled the whole house Luke speaks of this sound as if it **filled** the **house**. Alternate translation: “it could be heard throughout the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 2 t4y4 ὅλον τὸν οἶκον 1 the whole house Luke may be using the word translated **house** in one of its specific senses to mean a building. So this could have been either a private home or a larger building. Alternate translation: “the entire building”
|
||
ACT 2 2 a080 figs-idiom οὗ ἦσαν καθήμενοι 1 where they were sitting Luke may be using the term **sitting** to mean “meeting.” Alternate translation: “in which they were meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 3 re3t γλῶσσαι ὡσεὶ πυρός 1 tongues as if of fire This phrase means “something like tongues of fire,” and a “tongue of fire” means a “flame of fire.” (The expression is used with that meaning in [Isaiah 5:24](../isa/05/24.md), for example.) This is not a simile. Luke is describing what these objects looked like. Alternate translation: “objects that looked like flames of fire”
|
||
ACT 2 3 xtk4 διαμεριζόμεναι 1 distributing themselves This means that the objects that looked like flames of fire spread out so that there was one on each person. Alternate translation: “spreading around”
|
||
ACT 2 3 a081 writing-pronouns ἐκάθισεν ἐφ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον αὐτῶν 1 they sat upon each one of them The pronoun **they** refers to the objects, and the pronoun **them** refers to the disciples. Alternate translation: “one of the objects sat upon each one of the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 3 a082 figs-metaphor ἐκάθισεν ἐφ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον αὐτῶν 1 they sat upon each one of them Luke is using the word **sat** to indicate that the objects remained in one place once they had spread around. Alternate translation: “one of the objects remained on each one of the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 4 v7hi figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 they were all filled with the Holy Spirit If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 4 a251 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 they were all filled with the Holy Spirit Luke is speaking as if the believers were containers that the Holy Spirit **filled**. Alternate translation: “they were all inspired by the Holy Spirit” or “the Holy Spirit inspired them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 4 a083 figs-explicitinfo ἤρξαντο λαλεῖν ἑτέραις γλώσσαις 1 they began to speak in other tongues Luke is using the word **began** to indicate that the disciples had been doing something else (speaking in their own languages) but then began to do something new when the Holy Spirit filled them. It might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “they spoke in other languages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
|
||
ACT 2 4 nr9f figs-explicit ἤρξαντο λαλεῖν ἑτέραις γλώσσαις 1 they began to speak in other tongues The implication, as [2:6–11](../02/06.md) makes clear, is that the disciples were speaking languages that they did not know. Alternate translation: “they began to speak in languages that they did not know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 4 a084 καθὼς τὸ Πνεῦμα ἐδίδου ἀποφθέγγεσθαι αὐτοῖς 1 as the Spirit was giving them to speak out Here, **giving** has the sense of enabling. Alternate translation: “as the Spirit was enabling them to speak out”
|
||
ACT 2 4 a085 καθὼς τὸ Πνεῦμα ἐδίδου ἀποφθέγγεσθαι αὐτοῖς 1 as the Spirit was giving them to speak out The word translated **to speak out** means to speak clearly and articulately. To express this meaning, it may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “The Spirit was enabling them to speak these languages clearly and articulately”
|
||
ACT 2 5 dz1l grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 Now Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. You can translate it with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
|
||
ACT 2 5 yft2 figs-gendernotations ἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς 1 godly men Luke is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “godly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 2 5 stq9 figs-hyperbole παντὸς ἔθνους 1 every nation The word **every** is a generalization that emphasizes that the people came from many different nations. Alternate translation: “many different nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 2 5 a086 figs-idiom ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανόν 1 under heaven The expression **under heaven** is a way of referring to being on earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 6 bpj7 figs-activepassive συνεχύθη 1 was confused If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state what did the action. Alternate translation: “what they heard confused them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 6 u9hc writing-pronouns ἤκουον εἷς ἕκαστος τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ λαλούντων αὐτῶν 1 each one was hearing them speaking in his own language The pronoun **them** refers to the believers and the pronoun **his** refers to each person in the multitude. Alternate translation: “each person in the multitude could hear one of the disciples speaking in that person’s own language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 7 m8kd figs-doublet ἐξίσταντο & καὶ ἐθαύμαζον 1 they were … amazed and were marveling The terms **amazed** and **marveling** mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were … greatly amazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 2 7 a087 figs-activepassive ἐξίσταντο & πάντες καὶ ἐθαύμαζον 1 they were all amazed and were marveling The expression **were … amazed** is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed all of them and they were marveling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 7 a088 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Behold **Behold** is an expression that speakers use to focus the attention of their listeners on what they are about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” the term can be used to get people to pay attention. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 7 wnk2 figs-rquestion οὐχ & ἅπαντες οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ λαλοῦντες Γαλιλαῖοι 1 are not all these who are speaking Galileans? The speakers are not looking for information. They are using the question form to express their amazement. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “all of these people who are speaking are Galileans!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 2 8 hzm8 figs-rquestion καὶ πῶς ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ ἡμῶν, ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν? 1 And how are we hearing, each in our own language in which we were born? The speakers do not expect someone to be able to answer this question for them. Rather, they are using the question form to express their amazement. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “So we should not each be hearing them speak in our own languages in which we were born!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 2 8 a090 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And The speakers are using the word translated **And** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 2 8 a091 figs-explicit πῶς ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος 1 how are we hearing, each Your language may require you to specify the object of **hearing**. Alternate translation: “how are we each hearing them speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 8 a092 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς & ἡμῶν 1 we … our The speakers are using the words **we** and **our** to refer to themselves and to their listeners, so use the inclusive forms of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 2 8 wb5t figs-metaphor ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν 1 in which we were born The speakers say that they **were born** in these languages to mean that they learned them from birth. Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 8 a093 figs-activepassive ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν 1 in which we were born If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. However, since this is a metaphor, it would be preferable to use another expression to explain its meaning, rather than to say something like “in which our mothers gave birth to us.” Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 9 f1ve translate-names Πάρθοι & Μῆδοι & Ἐλαμεῖται 1 Parthians … Medes … Elamites These are names of three people groups. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 2 9 dm23 translate-names τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν, Ἰουδαίαν & Καππαδοκίαν, Πόντον & Ἀσίαν 1 Mesopotamia, Judea … Cappadocia, Pontus … Asia These are names of five areas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 2 10 tmb4 translate-names Φρυγίαν & Παμφυλίαν, Αἴγυπτον & Λιβύης 1 Phrygia … Pamphylia, Egypt … Libya These are names of four areas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 2 11 w8jy Ἰουδαῖοί τε καὶ προσήλυτοι 1 both Jews and proselytes The term **proselytes** describes converts to the Jewish religion. The phrase **both Jews and proselytes** could apply specifically to the visitors from Rome mentioned at the end of the previous verse, or it could apply to the whole list of people in [2:9–11](../02/09.md). Alternate translation: “both Jews and converts to the Jewish religion”
|
||
ACT 2 11 jnp7 translate-names Κρῆτες & Ἄραβες 1 Cretans and Arabians These are names of two people groups. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 2 11 a097 figs-nominaladj τὰ μεγαλεῖα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the great things of God The speakers are using the adjective **great** as a noun. (The term is plural; ULT adds **things** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the great things that God has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 2 12 el2f figs-doublet ἐξίσταντο & πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο 1 they were all amazed and were perplexed The words **amazed** and **perplexed** mean similar things. Luke is using them together to emphasize that the people could not understand what was happening. Alternate translation: “they were very perplexed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 2 12 a098 figs-activepassive ἐξίσταντο & πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο & λέγοντες 1 they were all amazed and were perplexed, saying These are not passive verbal forms. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed and perplexed all of them, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 12 a099 figs-idiom τί θέλει τοῦτο εἶναι 1 What does this want to be The expression **want to be** is a way of referring to what something means. Your language may have a similar expression that you could use in your translation. Or, if it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What does this mean?” or “What is the explanation for this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 13 a100 figs-activepassive γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν 1 They are filled with sweet wine If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. However, it would be preferable to use an equivalent expression that conveys the meaning rather than to say something like “sweet wine has filled them.” Alternate translation: “They have drunk their fill of sweet wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 13 fg59 figs-explicit γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν 1 They are filled with sweet wine The implications of this statement are that the disciples have gotten drunk and are babbling and that this is the explanation for the languages the people think they are hearing. Alternate translation: “They have gotten drunk on sweet wine, and so what we are hearing is just drunken babbling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 13 jj1n translate-unknown γλεύκους 1 with sweet wine This refers to wine that is thicker and more intoxicating than ordinary wine. If your readers would not be familiar with this drink, you could use the name of another strong drink that they would recognize, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “with strong liquor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 2 14 k5hr translate-symaction σταθεὶς δὲ ὁ Πέτρος σὺν τοῖς ἕνδεκα, ἐπῆρεν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτοῦ 1 But Peter, having stood with the Eleven, raised up his voice Peter **stood** to show that he had something important to say, and the other apostles **stood** with him to show their support for him as he spoke. You could indicate that in your translation, perhaps as a separate sentence, if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “But Peter stood up to show that he had something important to say, and the other apostles stood with him to show their support for him as he spoke. Peter raised up his voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 2 14 c919 figs-nominaladj τοῖς ἕνδεκα 1 the eleven Luke is using the adjective **eleven** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the other 11 apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 2 14 d9tb figs-idiom ἐπῆρεν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀπεφθέγξατο αὐτοῖς 1 raised up his voice and spoke out to them The idiom **raised up his voice** means that Peter spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “spoke out to them in a loud voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 14 a102 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Men, Jews This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 14 a103 figs-gendernotations ἄνδρες, Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Men, Jews Peter is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the idiomatic form of address in your translation, follow the convention in your language that indicates a mixed group of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 2 14 a104 figs-explicit οἱ κατοικοῦντες Ἰερουσαλὴμ πάντες 1 all who are inhabiting Jerusalem This seems to mean implicitly people who are not Jews but who live in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all of you non-Jews who are residents of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 14 ei5j τοῦτο ὑμῖν γνωστὸν ἔστω 1 let this be known to you This expression means that Peter wants to explain the meaning of what the people are seeing and hearing. Alternate translation: “let me explain this to you” or “I am going to explain this to you”
|
||
ACT 2 14 hal2 figs-imperative3p τοῦτο ὑμῖν γνωστὸν ἔστω 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may this be known to you” or “this should be known to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
|
||
ACT 2 14 brjc figs-activepassive τοῦτο ὑμῖν γνωστὸν ἔστω 1 The word translated **known** is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be clearer for your readers if you use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. The adjective **known** expresses the result of action by a different agent (**you**), so you can use an active form with that agent as the implied subject. Alternate translation: “know this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 14 a105 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 and Peter uses the word translated **and** to indicate what his listeners should do as a result of what he has just told them. Alternate translation: “so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 2 14 qp16 figs-metonymy ἐνωτίσασθε τὰ ῥήματά μου 1 take my words into your ears Peter is using the term **words** to mean what he is about to say by using words, and he is using the term **ears** to mean the capacity for listening. Alternate translation: “listen carefully to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 15 a106 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For Peter says **for** in this first instance to introduce the reason why the crowd should listen to him. Alternate translation: “You should listen to me because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 2 15 a107 writing-pronouns οὗτοι 1 these The demonstrative pronoun **these** refers to the disciples who are speaking different languages. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could add more information to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “these people who are speaking different languages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 15 a108 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 2 For Peter says **for** in this second instance to introduce the reason why the people speaking different languages are not drunk. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They are not drunk, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 2 15 a109 ἔστιν & ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας 1 it is the third hour of the day In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “it is nine o’clock in the morning”
|
||
ACT 2 15 h28q figs-explicit ἔστιν & ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας 1 it is the third hour of the day Peter assumes that his listeners will know that people do not get drunk that early in the day. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is only nine o’clock in the morning, and people do not get drunk that early” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 15 a110 translate-ordinal ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας 1 the third hour of the day If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour three of the day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||
ACT 2 16 f9hz figs-activepassive τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Ἰωήλ 1 this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “this is what God said through the prophet Joel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 16 ktw9 figs-explicit τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Ἰωήλ 1 this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel The implication is that God is now making happen what he said through Joel. Alternate translation: “you are seeing God make happen what he announced earlier through the prophet Joel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 17 a111 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ ἔσται ἐν ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις, λέγει ὁ Θεός, ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα 1 ‘“And it will be in the last days,” God says, “I will pour out from my Spirit on all flesh” The material in [2:17–21](../02/17.md) contains a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Luke is quoting Peter, Peter is quoting Joel, and Joel is quoting God. You could avoid having a third-level quotation by moving the phrase **God says** to before the quotation from Joel. (The phrase itself does not occur in the passage from Joel that Peter quotes. It appears to be something that Peter supplies within the quotation to show that God is the speaker. Since that is the case, putting it before the quotation would not change the actual biblical text.) Alternate translation: “God said, ‘And it will be in the last days, I will pour out from my Spirit on all flesh’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 2 17 a112 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ ἔσται ἐν ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις, λέγει ὁ Θεός, ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα 1 ‘“And it will be in the last days,” God says, “I will pour out from my Spirit on all flesh” You could also avoid having a second-level quotation by turning the direct quotation into an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that in the last days he would pour out his Spirit on all flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 2 17 ijl8 καὶ ἔσται 1 And it will be Alternate translation: “This is what will happen” or “This is what I will do”
|
||
ACT 2 17 a113 ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 the last days See the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to this chapter, which recommend not interpreting or explaining it, but representing it simply as ULT does.
|
||
ACT 2 17 u2d1 figs-metaphor ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου 1 I will pour out from my Spirit God says that he will **pour out** his Spirit, as if the Spirit were a liquid, to mean that he will give the Spirit generously and abundantly. Alternate translation: “I will lavish my Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 17 a114 figs-metonymy ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα 1 on all flesh God refers to **flesh** to mean people by association with the way that people are made of flesh. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 17 a115 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ προφητεύσουσιν οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν, καὶ αἱ θυγατέρες ὑμῶν; καὶ οἱ νεανίσκοι ὑμῶν ὁράσεις ὄψονται, καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι ὑμῶν ἐνυπνίοις ἐνυπνιασθήσονται 1 and your sons and your daughters will prophesy, and your young men will see visions, and your old men will dream dreams If you have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation, also do that here in the rest of the verse. It may be helpful to make this a new sentence. Alternate translation: “God said that our sons and our daughters would prophesy and our young men would see visions and our old men would dream dreams” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 2 17 a116 figs-exclusive ὑμῶν -1 your If you turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation and translate these instances of **your** as “our,” use the inclusive form of the word “our” in each instance if your language marks that distinction, since Joel would be referring to himself and his listeners. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 2 17 a117 figs-gendernotations οἱ νεανίσκοι & οἱ πρεσβύτεροι 1 young men … old men God speaks separately of **sons** and **daughters** in this verse and of “male servants” and “female servants” in the next verse. But here the contrast is between **young** and **old**. So the word **men** could have a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “young people … old people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 2 18 uwd7 figs-quotations καί γε ἐπὶ τοὺς δούλους μου, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς δούλας μου, ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου, καὶ προφητεύσουσιν 1 And even on my male servants and on my female servants in those days I will pour out from my Spirit, and they will prophesy You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that even on his male servants and on his female servants in those days he would pour out from his Spirit, and they would prophesy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 2 18 nd34 ἐπὶ τοὺς δούλους μου, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς δούλας μου 1 on my male servants and on my female servants If your language has masculine and feminine forms of the word “servant,” it would be accurate to use those forms here. Other languages can indicate this distinction in other ways, as ULT does with the adjectives “male” and “female.”
|
||
ACT 2 18 a118 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 in those days Here, **days** means a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 18 wz2i figs-metaphor ἐπὶ & ἐπὶ & ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου 1 on … on … I will pour out from my Spirit See how you translated this in [2:17](../02/17.md). Alternate translation: “to … to … I will give my Spirit abundantly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 19 a119 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ δώσω 1 And I will give You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that he would give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 2 19 a120 δώσω τέρατα & καὶ σημεῖα 1 I will give wonders … and signs Alternate translation: “I will show wonders … and signs”
|
||
ACT 2 19 a121 ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ ἄνω 1 in the heaven above Since God specifies in the next verse that these **wonders** will affect the sun and the moon, the word translated **heaven** likely has the specific sense of “sky.” Alternate translation: “in the sky above”
|
||
ACT 2 19 p5zi figs-possession ἀτμίδα καπνοῦ 1 vapor of smoke Here the possessive form describes **vapor** that looks smoky or that has **smoke** in it. Alternate translation: “smoky vapor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 2 20 ylv7 figs-quotesinquotes ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα, πρὶν ἢ ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ 1 The sun will be turned to darkness, and the moon to blood before the great and remarkable day of the Lord comes You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that sun would be turned to darkness, and the moon to blood before the great and remarkable day of the Lord came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 2 20 a6yh figs-activepassive ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος 1 The sun will be turned to darkness If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will turn the sun to darkness” or, if you are making this an indirect quotation, “God said that he would turn the sun to darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 20 a122 figs-metaphor ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος 1 The sun will be turned to darkness God is speaking as if he would change the **sun** into something else. Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” or “The sun will no longer shine brightly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 20 a123 figs-abstractnouns ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος 1 The sun will be turned to darkness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **darkness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “dark.” Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 20 a124 figs-ellipsis καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα 1 and the moon to blood Here some words have been left out that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and the moon will be turned to blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 2 20 a125 figs-activepassive καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα 1 and the moon to blood If you decide to supply words as the previous note suggests, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form. Alternate translation: “and I will turn the moon to blood” or, if you are making this an indirect quotation, “and that he would turn the moon to blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 20 f34k figs-metaphor καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα 1 and the moon to blood God is speaking as if he would change the **moon** into something else. Alternate translation: “and the moon will look like blood” or “and the moon will appear to be red” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 20 swb2 figs-doublet ἡμέραν & τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ 1 the great and remarkable day The words **great** and **remarkable** mean similar things. They are being used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the very great day” or “the truly remarkable day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 2 20 lc4g figs-idiom ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου 1 the day of the Lord comes This is an expression that many of the prophets use. It refers to the time when God will judge and punish people for their sins. Alternate translation: “the time when the Lord judges and punishes people for their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 20 a126 figs-123person ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου 1 the day of the Lord comes In this expression, God is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “time arrives when I judge and punish people for their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||
ACT 2 21 a127 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ ἔσται, πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται 1 And it will be, everyone who may call on the name of the Lord will be saved You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “And God said it would happen that everyone who called on the name of the Lord would be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 2 21 a128 καὶ ἔσται, πᾶς 1 And it will be, everyone Alternate translation: “And this is what will happen: Everyone”
|
||
ACT 2 21 vql5 figs-activepassive πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται 1 everyone who may call on the name of the Lord will be saved If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Lord will save everyone who calls on his name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 21 a129 figs-idiom πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται 1 everyone who may call on The expression **call on** means to make an appeal. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everyone who may appeal to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 21 a130 figs-123person τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου 1 the name of the Lord God is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “my name” or “me by name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||
ACT 2 21 a131 figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου 1 the name of the Lord Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 21 a132 figs-explicit τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου 1 the name of the Lord The implication is that people would appeal to God to show them mercy and save them. Alternate translation: “the Lord for mercy and salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 21 a133 figs-quotemarks σωθήσεται 1 will be saved This is the end of Joel’s quotation of the Lord. If you chose to mark the Lord’s words as a third-level quotation, indicate that ending here with a closing third-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. It is also the end of Peter’s quotation of Joel. If you chose to mark Joel’s words as a second-level quotation, similarly indicate the ending of that quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 2 22 sa78 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται 1 Men, Israelites This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 22 g6vj figs-metonymy ἀκούσατε τοὺς λόγους τούτους 1 hear these words Peter is using the term **words** to mean what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “listen to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 22 f2t1 figs-activepassive ἀποδεδειγμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 attested to you by God If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom God proved he had sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 22 a135 figs-doublet δυνάμεσι, καὶ τέρασι, καὶ σημείοις 1 with mighty deeds and wonders and signs The terms **mighty works**, **wonders**, and **signs** mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “by means of many great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 2 23 a136 figs-nominaladj τοῦτον 1 This one Peter is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Jesus. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “This Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 2 23 i6un figs-activepassive τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἔκδοτον 1 given up by the determined counsel and foreknowledge of God The term translated **given up** is an adjective, not a passive verbal form, but even so you may wish to translate it with an active verbal form. Alternate translation: “whom God gave up by his determined counsel and foreknowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 23 s38b figs-abstractnouns τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 by the determined counsel and foreknowledge of God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **counsel** and **foreknowledge**, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “as God had planned in a determined way for things he knew about ahead of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 23 a137 figs-activepassive τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 by the determined counsel and foreknowledge of God The word **determined** is a passive verbal form that you could express with an active form. Alternate translation: “in a way that God had determined as he planned for things he knew about ahead of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 23 f5kn figs-synecdoche ἀνείλατε 1 you killed It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says that the Jewish people in the crowd killed him because their demands led to his death. Alternate translation: “you demanded to be killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 2 23 e38a figs-metonymy διὰ χειρὸς ἀνόμων 1 of the lawless Here, **hand** refers to actions. Alternate translation: “through the actions of the lawless” or “by what the lawless did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 23 a138 figs-nominaladj ἀνόμων 1 the lawless Peter is using the adjective **lawless** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could supply the word “people” to show this. Alternate translation: “lawless people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 2 23 f6kd figs-metonymy ἀνόμων 1 of the lawless By **lawless**, Peter does not mean people who disregard the law and break the law. He is describing Gentiles (that is, people who are not Jews) by association with the fact that they do not have the Jewish law. Alternate translation: “of the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 23 a197 προσπήξαντες 1 having fastened This is a reference to the crucifixion of Jesus. Alternate translation: “having nailed him to a cross” or “by crucifying him”
|
||
ACT 2 24 a140 ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἀνέστησεν 1 whom God raised up It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “But God raised him up”
|
||
ACT 2 24 ei37 figs-idiom ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἀνέστησεν 1 whom God raised up The idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “whom God brought back to life” or, as a new sentence, “But God brought him back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 24 s8j3 figs-metaphor λύσας τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ θανάτου 1 having loosed the agonies of death Peter speaks of the **agonies of death** as if they were ropes with which Jesus had been tied, and of God bringing Jesus back to life as if God had untied those ropes and set him free. Alternate translation: “delivering him from the agonies of death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 24 a141 figs-possession τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ θανάτου 1 the agonies of death Peter uses the possessive form to describe **death** as something that is characterized by **agonies.** Alternate translation: “agonizing death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 2 24 a142 figs-explicit καθότι οὐκ ἦν δυνατὸν κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 because it was not possible for him to be held by it If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly why this was **not possible**. Alternate translation: “because God is so much stronger than death that it was not possible for him to be held by it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 24 ykq4 figs-activepassive κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 for him to be held by it If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for death to hold him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 24 vuf4 figs-personification κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 for him to be held by it Peter speaks of death as if it were a living thing that held Jesus captive. Alternate translation: “for him to remain dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 2 25 dd5a figs-quotesinquotes Δαυεὶδ γὰρ λέγει εἰς αὐτόν, προορώμην τὸν Κύριον ἐνώπιόν μου διὰ παντός, ὅτι ἐκ δεξιῶν μού ἐστιν, ἵνα μὴ σαλευθῶ 1 For David says about him, ‘I saw the Lord always before me, for he is at my right so that I should not be moved In order to avoid having a second-level quotation, you could turn Peter’s quotation from David into an indirect quotation. (Peter is quoting from [Psalm 16:8–11](../psa/16/08.md).) Alternate translation: “For David said about him that he saw the Lord before him through all, for he was at his right so that he should not be moved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 2 25 a143 writing-pronouns Δαυεὶδ γὰρ λέγει εἰς αὐτόν, προορώμην τὸν Κύριον ἐνώπιόν μου διὰ παντός, ὅτι ἐκ δεξιῶν μού ἐστιν, ἵνα μὴ σαλευθῶ 1 For David says about him, ‘I saw the Lord always before me, for he is at my right so that I should not be moved The pronoun **him** refers to the Messiah, about whom David is prophesying. This means that within the quotation, the pronouns **I** and **my** are spoken by the Messiah. If you turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation and change these pronouns to “he,” “him,” and “his,” it may be helpful to indicate the references in some cases so that your readers will recognize this. Alternate translation: “For David said about the Messiah that he saw the Lord before him through all, for the Lord was at the Messiah’s right so that he should not be moved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 25 a144 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For Peter uses the word **For** to introduce a reason why the crowd should believe him when he says that God brought Jesus back to life. The reason is that the Scriptures predicted this. As a result, the crowd should be confident that it did happen. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You can be confident that God did bring Jesus back to life, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 2 25 a145 figs-explicit Δαυεὶδ & λέγει εἰς αὐτόν 1 David says about him Peter assumes that the crowd will know that he is referring to what **David says** in one of the psalms that he wrote, and that David is prophesying what the Messiah would say. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “David says in one of his psalms that the Messiah will say” or “David wrote in one of his psalms that the Messiah would say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 25 n2ls figs-metaphor ἐνώπιόν μου 1 before me The phrase **before me**, which means “in front of me,” is a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “present with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 25 tqak figs-ellipsis διὰ παντός 1 The phrase **through all** is an ellipsis for “through all times.” It means “always.” Alternate translation: “at all times” or “always” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 2 25 a146 figs-nominaladj ἐκ δεξιῶν μού 1 at my right Here the adjective **right** is being used as a noun to indicate the right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could state that specifically. Alternate translation: “at my right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 2 25 l6xp figs-metaphor ἐκ δεξιῶν μού 1 at my right In this context, to be at someone’s right side means to be in a position to help and sustain that person. Alternate translation: “there to help me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 25 a147 figs-metaphor μὴ σαλευθῶ 1 I should not be moved Here, **moved** means to be taken out of a safe and secure position, and so it means to be harmed. Alternate translation: “I will not be harmed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 25 s4yp figs-activepassive μὴ σαλευθῶ 1 I should not be moved If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “no one will harm me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 26 a148 figs-quotesinquotes διὰ τοῦτο ηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδία μου, καὶ ἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά μου; ἔτι δὲ καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 Because of this, my heart was glad and my tongue exulted. And indeed, my flesh will also dwell in hope You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation of David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “Because of this, his heart was glad and his tongue exulted, and indeed his flesh would also dwell in hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 2 26 z8vw figs-metaphor ηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδία μου 1 my heart was glad Here, the **heart** represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “I felt glad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 26 a149 figs-metonymy ἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά μου 1 my tongue exulted Here, the **tongue** represents the capacity for speech. Alternate translation: “I said joyful things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 26 zz6k figs-metonymy καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 my flesh will also dwell in hope Here, **flesh** means the human body by association with the way that is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “my body will also dwell in hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 26 a150 figs-abstractnouns καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 my flesh will also dwell in hope If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **hope**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “hopefully.” Alternate translation: “my body will also live hopefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 26 a151 figs-personification καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 my flesh will also dwell in hope The Messiah is speaking as if his body itself would live hopefully. Alternate translation: “I will also have hope for my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 2 26 a152 figs-explicit καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 my flesh will also dwell in hope If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what **hope** the Messiah had for his body. Alternate translation: “I will also have hope that God will bring my body back to life after I die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 27 m3ij figs-quotesinquotes ὅτι οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 For you will not abandon my soul to Hades, nor will you allow your Holy One to see decay You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. If so, it may be necessary to add some introductory material here. Alternate translation: “The Messiah knew that God would not abandon his soul to Hades and that God would not allow his Holy One to see decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 2 27 a153 figs-parallelism οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 you will not abandon my soul to Hades, nor will you allow your Holy One to see decay These two statements mean similar things. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it may be helpful to show that to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **nor** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon my soul to Hades, no, you will not allow your Holy One to see decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||
ACT 2 27 whi3 figs-youformal οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις & οὐδὲ δώσεις & σου 1 you will not abandon … nor will you allow your The words **you** and **your** are singular, and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in your translation in [1:24](../01/24.md) in a similar case where God is addressed as “you.” You may have decided in such cases to use a formal form of “you” that your language may have, or you may have decided to use an informal form of “you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
|
||
ACT 2 27 a154 figs-synecdoche οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην 1 you will not abandon my soul to Hades The Messiah says **my soul** to mean himself, using one part of his being to represent his whole being. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon me to Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 2 27 a156 figs-explicit τὸν Ὅσιόν σου 1 your Holy One The expression **Holy One** is a title for the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your Messiah” or “your holy Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 27 rld3 figs-123person τὸν Ὅσιόν σου 1 your Holy One The Messiah is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “me, your Holy One” or “me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||
ACT 2 27 a157 figs-idiom ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 to see decay Here the word **see** is being used to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “to experience decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 27 l5cd figs-explicit ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 to see decay The term **decay** refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to experience the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 28 a158 figs-quotesinquotes ἐγνώρισάς μοι ὁδοὺς ζωῆς; πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου 1 You made known to me the paths of life; you will fill me with gladness with your face You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation of David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. If so, it may be helpful to add some introductory material here. Alternate translation: “The Messiah said that God had made known to him the paths of life and that God would fill him with gladness with his face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 2 28 a159 figs-youformal ἐγνώρισάς & πληρώσεις & σου 1 You made known … you will fill … your The words **you** and **your** are singular and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in the similar case in [1:24](../01/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
|
||
ACT 2 28 xhi3 figs-metaphor ἐγνώρισάς μοι ὁδοὺς ζωῆς 1 You made known to me the paths of life The Messiah speaks of **life** as if it consisted of **paths** that a person walked along. Those represent the various pursuits and adventures that people have in life. The word **known** refers to experiential knowledge. Alternate translation: “You enabled me to experience the adventures of life once again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 28 ej5m figs-metaphor πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης 1 you will fill me with gladness The Messiah speaks as if he were a container that God could **fill** with **gladness**. Alternate translation: “you will give me great gladness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 28 y7gf figs-metaphor μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου 1 with your face Here, the word **face** represents the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “by your presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 28 a161 figs-quotemarks μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου 1 with your face This is the end of Peter’s quotation of David. If you chose to mark David’s words as a second-level quotation, in your translation you can indicate this ending with a closing second-level quotation mark or whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 2 29 pv1x figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 29 ps7c figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” or “My brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 29 wh97 figs-metaphor τοῦ πατριάρχου Δαυεὶδ 1 the patriarch David A **patriarch** is literally the ancestor of a group of people. David was not the ancestor of all the Jews to whom Peter is speaking. So he is likely using the term to identify David as the king who established the Israelite kingdom as a lasting dynasty. Alternate translation: “David, the founder of our kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 29 vtc6 figs-activepassive ἐτάφη 1 he was buried If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “people buried him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 29 a162 figs-idiom ἄχρι τῆς ἡμέρας ταύτης 1 to this day Peter is using the word **day** to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 30 a163 grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Therefore Peter uses the word **Therefore** to introduce the logical result of what he has just said. Alternate translation: “We can therefore conclude that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 2 30 a164 figs-explicit προφήτης & ὑπάρχων, καὶ εἰδὼς 1 being a prophet and having known Peter is still speaking about David. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because David was a prophet and he knew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 30 x11q figs-metonymy ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ 1 to set from the fruit of his loins upon his throne Peter is using the word **loins** to represent David himself by association with the way the reproductive organs are in the loins. He is using the word **fruit** in a broad sense to mean what someone or something produces, in this case a descendant. Alternate translation: “to set one of his descendants upon his throne” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 30 hq71 figs-synecdoche ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ 1 to set from the fruit of his loins upon his throne When Peter says that God promised to **set** one of David’s descendants **upon his throne**, he is using that one action to represent God’s promise to David that this descendant would succeed him as king. Alternate translation: “to make one of his descendants succeed him as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 2 31 a165 writing-pronouns ἐλάλησεν & ἐνκατελείφθη & αὐτοῦ 1 he spoke … was he abandoned … his The first instance of **he** refers to David, and the second instance of **he** and the pronoun **his** refer to Christ. Alternate translation: “David spoke … was Christ abandoned … Christ’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 31 a166 figs-abstractnouns ἐλάλησεν περὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 he spoke about the resurrection of the Christ If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “he described how God would make Christ alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 31 tn4b figs-activepassive οὔτε ἐνκατελείφθη εἰς ᾍδην 1 neither was he abandoned to Hades If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “neither did God abandon him to Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 31 a167 figs-explicit τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 the Christ **Christ** is the Greek word for “Messiah.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use the term “Messiah” in your translation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 31 a169 figs-idiom οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 nor did his flesh see decay Here the word **see** is being used to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “nor did his flesh experience decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 31 a170 figs-metonymy οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 nor did his flesh see decay Peter is using the word **flesh** to mean the body of Jesus by association with the way the body is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “nor did his body experience decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 31 up5x figs-explicit οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 nor did his flesh see decay The term **decay** refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “nor did his body experience decomposition” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 32 udn1 figs-idiom ἀνέστησεν ὁ Θεός 1 God has raised up As in [2:24](../02/24.md), the idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “God has brought back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 32 kw6a figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 we By **we**, Peter means himself and the other apostles, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 2 33 a171 grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Therefore Peter is using the word **Therefore** to introduce a result. But it is not the immediate result of what he has just said. He is not saying that Jesus has done what the people see and hear because God raised him from the dead. Instead, this is an overall conclusion. Peter is saying that Jesus sending the Holy Spirit is the reason why the disciples are able to speak in other languages. The crowd should not conclude that they are babbling drunkenly, as some of them have suggested. UST models a way of expressing this sense of the word **Therefore**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 2 33 kij2 figs-activepassive τῇ δεξιᾷ οὖν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὑψωθεὶς 1 having been exalted to the right of God If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “now that God has exalted Jesus to his right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 33 c9mr figs-nominaladj τῇ δεξιᾷ & τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to the right of God Peter is using the adjective **right** as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:25](../02/25.md). Alternate translation: “to the right side of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 2 33 a172 figs-explicit τῇ δεξιᾷ & τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to the right of God In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 33 a173 figs-possession τήν τε ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πνεύματος τοῦ Ἁγίου 1 the promise of the Holy Spirit from the Father Peter is using the possessive form to describe the Holy Spirit as someone whom God the Father promised to send. Alternate translation: “the promised Holy Spirit from the Father” or “the Holy Spirit whom the Father promised to send” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 2 33 a174 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρὸς 1 the Father **Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
|
||
ACT 2 33 c1dr writing-pronouns ἐξέχεεν 1 he has poured out The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus has poured out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 33 wsg9 figs-metaphor ἐξέχεεν 1 he has poured out Peter says that Jesus has **poured out** the things that the people are seeing and hearing as if those things were a liquid. Peter means that Jesus has given these things generously and abundantly. See how you translated the similar statement in [2:17](../02/17.md), to which Peter is likely alluding here. Alternate translation: “he has generously given” or “he has abundantly given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 34 m7fy figs-quotesinquotes λέγει & αὐτός, εἶπεν Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου 1 he himself says, ‘The Lord said to my Lord, “Sit at my right The material in [2:34–35](../02/34.md) contains a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Luke is quoting Peter, Peter is quoting another psalm by David ([Psalm 110:1](../psa/110/01.md)), and David is quoting God. You could avoid having second-level and third-level quotations by translating this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “he himself says that the Lord told his Lord to sit at his right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 2 34 i8wu figs-explicit εἶπεν Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου 1 The Lord said to my Lord **The Lord** means God here, and **my Lord** means the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God said to the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 34 a175 figs-nominaladj ἐκ δεξιῶν μου 1 at my right Here the adjective **right** is used as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:25](../02/25.md). Alternate translation: “at my right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 2 34 kvn8 figs-explicit ἐκ δεξιῶν μου 1 at my right In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in a place of honor next to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 35 nf1x figs-metaphor ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 until I make your enemies a stool for your feet The psalm says that God would make the Messiah’s **enemies** a **stool** for his **feet** to mean that God would conquer those enemies and make them submit to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “until I conquer your enemies for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 35 a176 figs-quotemarks τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 for your feet This is the end of David’s quotation of the Lord and of Peter’s quotation of David. If you chose to mark these in your translation as a third-level and a second-level quotation, indicate that ending here with the appropriate closing quotation marks or the comparable punctuation or convention in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 2 36 a177 grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Therefore Peter is using the word **Therefore** to introduce the result of what he has just said. Alternate translation: “Since David was not talking about himself, but about the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 2 36 msqt figs-imperative3p γινωσκέτω πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may all the house of Israel know” or “all the house of Israel should know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
|
||
ACT 2 36 tgbf figs-123person γινωσκέτω πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ 1 It may be more natural in your language to use the second person for this imperative, since to this point in his speech Peter has been addressing his audience in the second person. Alternate translation: “all you in the house of Israel, know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||
ACT 2 36 pnp5 figs-metaphor πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ 1 all the house of Israel Here, **house** means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So **the house of Israel** means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the entire nation of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 37 s85q figs-activepassive ἀκούσαντες & κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν 1 hearing this, they were pierced in the heart If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what they heard Peter say pierced their heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 37 xan1 writing-pronouns κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν 1 they were pierced in the heart Here the word **they** refers to the people in the crowd to whom Peter spoke. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd were pierced in the heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 37 w1ma κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν 1 they were pierced in the heart Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **heart**. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd were pierced in their hearts”
|
||
ACT 2 37 l15x figs-metaphor κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν 1 they were pierced in the heart Luke is speaking. The people were not literally **pierced in the heart** by anything. He means that the people felt guilty and became very sad. Alternate translation: “they felt guilty and became very sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 37 zls6 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “Our brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 37 a178 figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “Our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 37 a179 figs-exclusive τί ποιήσωμεν 1 what should we do The people in the crowd are asking about themselves but not the apostles, so use the exclusive form of **we** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 2 38 a180 figs-you μετανοήσατε & βαπτισθήτω ἕκαστος ὑμῶν & τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν & λήμψεσθε 1 Repent … each of you be baptized … of your sins … you will receive The words **you** and **your** are plural, **you will receive** is a plural verb form, and the implied “you” in the imperative **Repent** is also plural. But the implied “you” in the imperative **be baptized** is singular, since the subject is **each**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||
ACT 2 38 cmb7 figs-activepassive βαπτισθήτω 1 be baptized If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “allow us to baptize you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 38 geb2 figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in the name of Jesus Christ Here the **name** of Jesus represents his authority. By being baptized, these believers were acknowledging Jesus’ authority over their lives as their Lord and Savior. Alternate translation: “to express your allegiance to Jesus Christ as your Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 38 a181 figs-abstractnouns εἰς ἄφεσιν τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν 1 for the forgiveness of your sins If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **forgiveness**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “forgive.” Alternate translation: “to show that you want God to forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 39 a182 figs-metonymy ἐστιν ἡ ἐπαγγελία 1 the promise is Peter is speaking of the Holy Spirit by association with the way God promised to send the Holy Spirit, as Peter says specifically in [2:33](../02/33.md). Alternate translation: “God has promised the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 39 a183 figs-explicit ὑμῖν & καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν 1 to you and to your children Peter showed the people in [2:17](../02/17.md) that God’s promise through Joel to pour out his Spirit included their “sons” and “daughters.” So the implication could be that the people in the crowd should not think that any of them have to reach a certain age before professing faith in Jesus and being baptized. Alternate translation: “to all of you, no matter what your age,” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 39 a184 figs-metaphor ὑμῖν & καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν 1 to you and to your children Peter could also be using the word **children** in a figurative sense to mean “descendants.” In that case, he would be saying that faith in Jesus as the Messiah was not something just for the people living at this time, but also for people living at all times in the future. That would parallel what he says next about faith in Jesus not being just for those who are present in this place, but for people living in all places. Alternate translation: “to you and your descendants” or “to you and everyone who will live after you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 39 v8vi figs-explicit πᾶσι τοῖς εἰς μακρὰν 1 to all who are at a distance Since Peter is speaking to Jews as a fellow Jew, this is likely an implicit reference to the Jews who were living in other parts of the Roman Empire. However, this statement took on greater meaning when the church realized that “God has also given repentance unto life to the Gentiles,” as its leaders say in [11:18](../11/18.md). So you could either express the likely initial meaning here in your translation, or you could leave the statement more general. Alternate translation: “to the Jews living in faraway parts of the empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 39 a185 figs-exclusive Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν 1 the Lord our God By **the Lord our God**, Peter means the God of the Jews. He is speaking of himself and his fellow apostles and of the people in the crowd, so use the inclusive form of the word **our** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 2 39 a186 figs-idiom ἂν προσκαλέσηται 1 may call Peter is using the word **call** in an idiomatic sense here. Alternate translation: “may bring to salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 40 a187 figs-metonymy ἑτέροις & λόγοις πλείοσιν 1 with many other words Luke is using the term **words** to mean things that Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “by saying many other things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 40 v6ip figs-hendiadys διεμαρτύρατο, καὶ παρεκάλει αὐτοὺς 1 he testified and urged them Here Luke is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The word **urged** tells in what way Peter **testified** further about faith in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this same idea with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “he testified urgently to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 2 40 a188 figs-activepassive σώθητε 1 Be saved If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “Let God save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 40 wtd5 figs-explicit ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης 1 from this perverse generation The implication is that God is going to punish **this perverse generation**. Alternate translation: “from the punishment that this perverse generation will suffer if it does not repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 40 a189 figs-explicit τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης 1 this perverse generation The word **perverse** describes things or actions that do not conform to what is right and expected. Peter may be referring implicitly to how the people of this **generation** rejected and killed Jesus. Alternate translation: “this wicked generation that rejected and killed Jesus” or “the wicked people of this time who rejected and killed Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 41 k1kj writing-endofstory οὖν 1 Therefore Luke uses the word **Therefore** to introduce information about what happened after the story of Pentecost as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||
ACT 2 41 r9qz figs-idiom ἀποδεξάμενοι τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ 1 having received his word Here, **received** means that the people in the crowd accepted that what Peter said was true. Alternate translation: “because they believed his word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 2 41 a190 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ 1 his word Luke is using the term **word** to mean what Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “what Peter said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 41 kz64 figs-activepassive οἱ & ἐβαπτίσθησαν 1 they were baptized If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. The apostles themselves may have baptized all these people, but because so many people repented and wanted to be baptized, it is possible that some of the other believers may have baptized some of them. Alternate translation: “the apostles baptized them” or “the believers baptized them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 41 sv5j figs-synecdoche ψυχαὶ 1 souls Luke is using one part of these people, their **souls**, to mean the people themselves. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 2 41 a47f figs-activepassive προσετέθησαν 1 were added If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “became part of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 42 a191 figs-abstractnouns ἦσαν & προσκαρτεροῦντες τῇ διδαχῇ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῇ κοινωνίᾳ, τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου, καὶ ταῖς προσευχαῖς 1 they were continuing in the teaching of the apostles and in fellowship, in the breaking of bread and in prayers If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **teaching** and **fellowship**, you could express the same ideas with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “they continued to learn from what the apostles taught and to share life with one another, and to break bread together and to pray together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 42 gc59 figs-synecdoche τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου 1 in the breaking of bread Luke could be using the word **breaking** to mean “eating,” and he could be using the word **bread** to mean “food.” In each case he would be using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking bread is one thing people do when they eat it, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing meals together. Alternate translation: “in sharing meals” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 2 42 a192 figs-explicit τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου 1 in the breaking of bread By **the breaking of bread**, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it and also sharing a cup of wine. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in observing the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 43 a193 figs-personification ἐγίνετο & πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος 1 fear was coming on every soul Here the word **fear** describes a deep respect for God. Luke describes this **fear** as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Alternate translation: “every soul began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 2 43 gi9v figs-synecdoche ἐγίνετο & πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος 1 fear was coming on every soul Luke is using one part of a person, the **soul**, to mean the entire person. Alternate translation: “every person began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 2 43 a194 figs-hyperbole ἐγίνετο & πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος 1 fear was coming on every soul Luke says **every** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “very many people began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 2 43 ys3y figs-explicit πολλά & τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα διὰ τῶν ἀποστόλων ἐγίνετο 1 many wonders and signs were happening through the apostles Since Luke says that these things happened **through the apostles**, the implication is that God was doing them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make God the subject of this sentence and **wonders and signs** the object. Alternate translation: “God performed many wonders and signs through the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 2 43 q6dm figs-doublet πολλά & τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα 1 many wonders and signs The terms **wonders** and **signs** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:22](../02/22.md). Alternate translation: “many great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 2 44 u8qk ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ 1 to the same See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in the same place” or “united in Christian fellowship”
|
||
ACT 2 44 jy2w figs-hyperbole εἶχον ἅπαντα κοινά 1 had all things in common Luke may be saying **all** as a generalization to emphasize the powerful spirit of generosity among the believers. The next verse explains more specifically how the believers showed this generosity, and you could give some indication of that here. Alternate translation: “shared their belongings with one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 2 45 h8tn figs-doublet τὰ κτήματα καὶ τὰς ὑπάρξεις ἐπίπρασκον 1 they were selling their properties and their possessions The words **properties** and **possessions** mean similar things. Luke may be using these words together for emphasis. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They were selling many valuable things that they owned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 2 45 f74s writing-pronouns καὶ διεμέριζον αὐτὰ 1 they were distributing them Here the pronoun **they** refers to believers who sold things they owned, and the pronoun **them** refers to the money they received from these sales. Alternate translation: “the believers who sold these things were distributing the money that they received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 45 n9hi πᾶσιν, καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν 1 to all, as anyone might have need Alternate translation: “to everyone who needed help”
|
||
ACT 2 46 in43 καθ’ ἡμέραν τε προσκαρτεροῦντες ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 and, continuing unanimously The word **unanimously** indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in [1:14](../01/14.md). As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Continuing to meet with one accord” or “Continuing to meet harmoniously”
|
||
ACT 2 46 a427 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 2 46 q1ge figs-synecdoche κλῶντές & κατ’ οἶκον ἄρτον 1 breaking bread in each house See how you translated the similar expression in [2:42](../02/42.md). There were two possible meanings there, but here **breaking bread** seems to mean specifically sharing meals. Alternate translation: “having meals together in their homes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 2 46 i2yk figs-metaphor ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας 1 with exultation and sincerity of heart Here, the **heart** represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “with feelings of exultation and sincerity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 2 46 a195 figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας 1 with exultation and sincerity of heart If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **exultation** and **sincerity**, you could express the same ideas with adverbs that would indicate feelings. Alternate translation: “joyfully and sincerely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 2 47 z6ig figs-hyperbole αἰνοῦντες τὸν Θεὸν καὶ ἔχοντες χάριν πρὸς ὅλον τὸν λαόν 1 praising God and having favor with the whole people Luke says **the whole people** as a generalization to emphasize how widely the people favored the believers. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They praised God and enjoyed wide favor with the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 2 47 kc42 figs-activepassive τοὺς σῳζομένους 1 those who were being saved If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom he was saving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 2 47 a196 ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό 1 to the same See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “to their Christian fellowship”
|
||
ACT 3 intro hpd9 0 # Acts 3 General Notes<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### The covenant God made with Abraham<br><br>This chapter explains that Jesus came to the Jews in fulfillment of the covenant that God made with Abraham.<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “Servant”<br><br>Twice in this chapter Peter uses the word “Servant” as a title to mean “Messiah” (3:13, 3:26). He and other believers use the word in the same sense twice in Chapter 4 as well (4:27, 4:30). The word takes on this meaning by allusion to the book of Isaiah, where Isaiah uses it to mean the person whom God has chosen for the special purpose of bringing salvation. In your translation, indicate in some way that “Servant” is a Messianic title. Jesus was not a servant of God in the more ordinary sense, in which the believers apply it to themselves in 4:29, for example. Jesus was fully the Son of God, sent to earth on a special mission. If you would not be able to make this clear by using the word “Servant,” you may wish to use the word “Messiah” instead.<br><br>### “You killed” (3:15)<br><br>For the same reasons as when he was speaking on the day of Pentecost (2:23), Peter tells people in this chapter that they were guilty of killing Jesus. But he also tells them that they are the first ones to whom God has sent Jesus’ followers to invite them to repent (3:26). For further information and suggestions for how to make clear in your translation what Peter means, see the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to Chapter 2 and the notes to this phrase in 2:23 and 3:15. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
|
||
ACT 3 1 b5rm grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 Now Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. You can translate it with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
|
||
ACT 3 1 br7i figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν 1 to the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “to the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 3 1 a198 τὴν ἐνάτην 1 the ninth hour In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this time in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “three o’clock in the afternoon”
|
||
ACT 3 1 a199 translate-ordinal τὴν ἐνάτην 1 the ninth hour If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour nine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||
ACT 3 2 f227 figs-activepassive καί τις ἀνὴρ, χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ ὑπάρχων, ἐβαστάζετο, ὃν ἐτίθουν καθ’ ἡμέραν πρὸς τὴν θύραν τοῦ ἱεροῦ 1 And a certain man, being lame from the womb of his mother, was being carried, whom each day they placed at the gate of the temple If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form **was being carried**. Alternate translation: “And there was a certain man who had been lame since birth whom people would carry to the temple every day and place at the gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 3 2 u6nu writing-background καί τις ἀνὴρ 1 And a certain man In this verse, Luke provides background information about this man to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 3 2 j68t figs-metonymy ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 from the womb of his mother Luke is describing the time of the lame man’s birth by association with the way he came from the **womb** of his **mother** when he was born. Alternate translation: “since birth” or “since he was born” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 3 2 a200 figs-activepassive τὴν λεγομένην 1 that is called If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” or “whose name is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 3 2 a201 translate-names Ὡραίαν 1 Beautiful **Beautiful** is the name of one of the gates of the Jerusalem temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 3 2 a202 figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ἱερόν 1 into the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 3 3 a203 figs-explicit ἠρώτα ἐλεημοσύνην λαβεῖν 1 asked to receive alms The man specifically asked Peter and John to give him **alms** (that is, a charitable gift). Alternate translation: “asked to receive alms from them” or “asked them to give him alms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 3 4 xq4u ἀτενίσας & Πέτρος εἰς αὐτὸν σὺν τῷ Ἰωάννῃ εἶπεν 1 Peter, looking intently at him with John, said This means that both Peter and John looked at the man. It does not mean that Peter looked at the man and at John, and it does not mean that both Peter and John spoke to the man. Alternate translation: “Peter and John looked intently at him, and Peter said”
|
||
ACT 3 4 e3c6 figs-exclusive βλέψον εἰς ἡμᾶς 1 Look at us Peter is asking the man to look at him and John, not to look at himself as well, so use the exclusive form of **us** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 3 6 x6bm figs-metonymy ἀργύριον καὶ χρυσίον 1 silver and gold Peter is referring to money by association with the way that **silver** and **gold** were used for money at this time. Alternate translation: “money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 3 6 zi9t figs-explicit ὃ δὲ ἔχω, τοῦτό σοι δίδωμι 1 but what I have, this I give to you What happens next in the story shows that by **what I have**, Peter implicitly means the authority that Jesus has given him to heal. Alternate translation: “but Jesus has given me the authority to heal, and I will use it on your behalf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 3 6 t2vf figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου 1 In the name of Jesus Christ the Nazarene Here the **name** of Jesus represents his authority. Alternate translation: “By the authority of Jesus Christ the Nazarene, I command you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 3 6 a205 figs-imperative περιπάτει 1 walk This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, it was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Alternate translation: “I give you the ability to walk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
|
||
ACT 3 7 ec6j writing-pronouns πιάσας αὐτὸν τῆς δεξιᾶς χειρὸς, ἤγειρεν αὐτόν; παραχρῆμα δὲ ἐστερεώθησαν αἱ βάσεις αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ σφυδρά 1 seizing him by the right hand, he raised him up, and immediately his feet and ankles were made strong In this verse, the pronoun **he** refers to Peter, while the pronouns **him** and **his** refer to the lame man. You could indicate that specifically in at least some of the cases if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “seizing the man by the right hand, Peter raised him up, and immediately the man’s feet and ankles were made strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 3 7 a206 figs-activepassive ἐστερεώθησαν αἱ βάσεις αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ σφυδρά 1 his feet and ankles were made strong If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “his feet and ankles became strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 3 8 a207 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Luke is using the word translated **And** to indicate that the events in this verse happened as a result of the events in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 3 8 abc1 writing-pronouns ἔστη καὶ περιεπάτει, καὶ εἰσῆλθεν σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 he stood and began to walk, and he entered with them The pronoun **he** refers to the man who had been lame, and the pronoun **them** refers to Peter and John. You could indicate that specifically if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the man stood and began to walk, and the man entered with Peter and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 3 8 q13i figs-explicitinfo ἔστη καὶ περιεπάτει, καὶ εἰσῆλθεν σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 Luke is using the word **began** to indicate that this man had been doing something else (sitting at the gate begging) but then began to do something new when was healed. It might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “he stood and walked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
|
||
ACT 3 8 zp7x figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν 1 into the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 3 9 a208 figs-hyperbole πᾶς ὁ λαὸς 1 all the people The word **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the crowd that was in the courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 3 10 zy7h ἐπεγίνωσκον & αὐτὸν, ὅτι αὐτὸς ἦν ὁ & καθήμενος 1 they recognized him, that he was the one sitting Alternate translation: “they realized that he was the man who had been sitting”
|
||
ACT 3 10 p2zh translate-names τῇ Ὡραίᾳ Πύλῃ 1 the Beautiful Gate This was the name of one of the entrances to the temple area. See how you translated the similar expression in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 3 10 a209 figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ 1 they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with wonder and amazement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 3 10 j6zf figs-doublet ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ 1 they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him The words **wonder** and **amazement** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. You can combine the words in your translation if that might be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with complete amazement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 3 10 a210 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ 1 they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him Luke is speaking as if the people were containers that these responses could fill. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him made them completely amazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 3 10 a211 figs-abstractnouns ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ 1 they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wonder** and **amazement**, you could express the same idea with verbs. Alternate translation: “they wondered and marveled greatly at what had happened to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 3 11 a212 figs-hyperbole πᾶς ὁ λαὸς 1 all the people The word **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the crowd that was there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 3 11 rk1m translate-names τῇ στοᾷ τῇ καλουμένῃ Σολομῶντος 1 the porch that is called Solomon’s This is the name of a covered walkway in the Jerusalem temple courtyard. It consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof. People had named this porch after King Solomon. Alternate translation: “Solomon’s Porch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 3 11 rj43 figs-activepassive τῇ καλουμένῃ 1 that is called If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” or “whose name is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 3 12 ndi3 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται 1 Men, Israelites This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 3 12 uyg1 figs-rquestion τί θαυμάζετε ἐπὶ τούτῳ 1 why do you marvel at this? Peter does not expect the crowd to tell him why they are marveling. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you should not marvel at this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 3 12 j6ld figs-rquestion ἢ ἡμῖν τί ἀτενίζετε, ὡς ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ εὐσεβείᾳ πεποιηκόσιν τοῦ περιπατεῖν αὐτόν? 1 Or why do you look intently at us, as if we have made him to walk by our own power or godliness? Peter is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Do not stare at us. We did not make him walk by our own power or godliness!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 3 12 g4y1 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν & ἰδίᾳ 1 at us … our own By **us** and **our own**, Peter means himself and John but not also the people in the crowd. So use the exclusive forms of **us** and **our** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 3 12 mwd9 figs-hendiadys ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ εὐσεβείᾳ 1 by our own power or godliness Peter may be expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **or.** The term **godliness** describes what the crowd may consider the source or nature of the **power** that he and John have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “by our own godly power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 3 13 q8q2 translate-names Ἀβραὰμ & Ἰσαὰκ & Ἰακώβ 1 Abraham … Isaac … Jacob These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 3 13 a213 figs-metaphor τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Peter is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 3 13 kmqw figs-gendernotations τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 The term **fathers** could mean: (1) in a generic sense that includes both men and women, the ancestors of the Israelites. If you decide to retain this metaphor in your translation, you could state “fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (2) Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. In that case, Peter would be repeating the meaning of the previous phrase, and the term would have a masculine meaning. Alternate translation: “of the patriarchs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 3 13 a214 τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, Ἰησοῦν 1 his Servant Jesus See the discussion of the term **Servant** in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “Jesus his Messiah”
|
||
ACT 3 13 a215 παρεδώκατε 1 delivered up Alternate translation: “handed over for trial”
|
||
ACT 3 13 cp1j figs-idiom κατὰ πρόσωπον Πειλάτου 1 before the face of Pilate Here the phrase **before the face of** means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “in the presence of Pilate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 3 13 yy96 figs-nominaladj κρίναντος ἐκείνου ἀπολύειν 1 when that one had decided to release him Peter is using the demonstrative adjective **that** as a noun to refer to a certain person, Pilate. (ULT adds **one** to indicate that.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could indicate specifically whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “when Pilate had decided to release him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 3 14 a217 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 But Peter uses this word to introduce a contrast between what Pilate wanted to do and what these people demanded he do instead. Alternate translation: “Even though Pilate wanted to release Jesus,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
|
||
ACT 3 14 a218 figs-nominaladj τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον 1 the Holy and Righteous One Peter is using both the adjective **Holy** and the adjective **Righteous** to indicate a certain person, Jesus. (ULT adds **One** to indicate that.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could indicate specifically whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who was holy and righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 3 14 a219 figs-doublet τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον 1 the Holy and Righteous One The terms **Holy** and **Righteous** mean similar things. Peter is using the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Supremely Holy One” or “Jesus, who was supremely holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 3 14 a220 figs-explicit τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον 1 the Holy and Righteous One This description of Jesus is an implicit assertion that he is the Messiah. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 3 14 s6qj figs-activepassive ᾐτήσασθε ἄνδρα, φονέα χαρισθῆναι ὑμῖν 1 for a man, a murderer, to be granted to you If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “asked Pilate to release to you a man who was a murderer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 3 15 a221 figs-synecdoche ἀπεκτείνατε 1 you killed It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says that the Jewish people in the crowd killed him because their demands led to his death. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “you demanded the death of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 3 15 ljn8 figs-explicit τὸν & Ἀρχηγὸν τῆς ζωῆς 1 the Originator of Life Peter is using the expression **the Originator of Life** as another title for Jesus. This expression could be a reference to the way Jesus, as the Son of God, took part in the original creation of all life. It could also be a reference to the way Jesus gives spiritual life to all who believe in him. Or it could mean both things. In any event, Peter is drawing a contrast between the life-giving Jesus whom the people rejected and the life-taking murderer whom they asked Pilate to release. It may be best in your translation to bring out this contrast while leaving the specific meaning open. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who gives life rather than taking it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 3 15 a222 figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Peter is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 3 15 jwb1 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 we Peter is speaking at least of himself and John, and perhaps also of the other apostles, but not of the people he is addressing. So use the exclusive form of **we** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that **we** is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “we and the other apostles whom Jesus chose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 3 15 a223 writing-pronouns ἡμεῖς 1 we If you conclude that Peter is referring only to himself and John, and if your language uses dual forms, use the dual form of the pronoun **we** here, since it would apply to two people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 3 16 abc2 figs-infostructure ἐπὶ τῇ πίστει τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ, τοῦτον ὃν θεωρεῖτε καὶ οἴδατε, ἐστερέωσεν τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 by faith in his name, this one whom you see and know, his name has made strong Your language might naturally present the phrases in this sentence in a different order. Alternate translation: “this man whom you see and know had faith in his name, and his name has made him strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 3 16 qt8w writing-pronouns τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ & τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 in his name … his name The pronoun **his** refers to Jesus in both of these instances. Alternate translation: “in the name of Jesus … that name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 3 16 a224 figs-metonymy τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ & τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 in his name … his name Peter is using the **name** of Jesus to mean his authority or power. Alternate translation: “in the authority of Jesus … the authority of Jesus” or “in the power of Jesus … the power of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 3 16 abc3 writing-pronouns ἡ πίστις ἡ δι’ αὐτοῦ, ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ 1 the faith that is through him has given to him The first instance of the pronoun **him** refers to Jesus, and the second instance refers to the man who had been lame. Alternate translation: “the faith that is through Jesus has given to this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 3 16 a225 figs-personification ἡ πίστις ἡ δι’ αὐτοῦ, ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ τὴν ὁλοκληρίαν ταύτην 1 the faith that is through him has given to him this complete health Peter is speaking of **faith** as if it were a living thing that could have given **complete health** to the man. Alternate translation: “because this man had faith in Jesus, Jesus has given him this complete health” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 3 17 v45t καὶ νῦν 1 And now Peter uses the expression **And now** to shift the people’s attention away from the lame man so that he can speak to them directly. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this same purpose.
|
||
ACT 3 17 a226 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Peter addresses the people as his **brothers** because they are related to him as fellow descendants of the founders of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “my kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 3 17 x62k figs-explicit κατὰ ἄγνοιαν ἐπράξατε 1 you acted in ignorance Peter likely means that the people **acted in ignorance** of the fact that Jesus was the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you acted in ignorance of the fact that Jesus was the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 3 17 a228 figs-ellipsis ὥσπερ καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες ὑμῶν 1 as also your rulers Peter is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and that your rulers also acted in ignorance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 3 18 gcc1 figs-infostructure ὁ δὲ Θεὸς ἃ προκατήγγειλεν διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, παθεῖν τὸν Χριστὸν αὐτοῦ, ἐπλήρωσεν οὕτως 1 But what God foretold through the mouth of all the prophets, that his Christ would suffer, he has fulfilled thus Your language might naturally put first in this sentence the information that God **fulfilled** prophecies when Christ suffered. Alternate translation: “But in this way God has fulfilled what he foretold through the mouth of all the prophets, that his Christ would suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 3 18 ms6d διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν 1 through the mouth of all the prophets Since Peter is speaking of a group of people, **the prophets**, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **mouth**. Alternate translation: “through the mouths of all the prophets”
|
||
ACT 3 18 z3l7 figs-metonymy διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν 1 through the mouth of all the prophets Peter is using the **mouth** of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what all the prophets said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 3 18 a229 figs-hyperbole πάντων τῶν προφητῶν 1 of all the prophets Peter is using the word **all** as a generalization. It is true that the overall witness of Old Testament prophecy is that the Messiah would come first in humility and suffering, but not every prophet spoke specifically of the sufferings of Christ. Alternate translation: “of many prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 3 19 cw18 figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψατε 1 turn back Peter is speaking of his listeners as if they were traveling somewhere and had taken the wrong way and needed to **turn back** onto the right way. Alternate translation: “start obeying the Lord again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 3 19 zm6y figs-activepassive πρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας 1 for your sins to be wiped away If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “so that God will wipe away your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 3 19 a230 figs-metaphor πρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας 1 for your sins to be wiped away Peter is speaking of sins as if they would be physically **wiped away** when God forgave them. Alternate translation: “so that God will forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 3 20 a231 figs-personification ὅπως ἂν ἔλθωσιν καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου 1 so that times of refreshment may come from the face of the Lord Peter is speaking of these **times** as if they could actively **come** to his listeners on their own. Alternate translation: “so that the Lord may send you times of refreshing from his face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 3 20 x3ca figs-abstractnouns καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως 1 times of refreshment If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **refreshment**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “refreshing” or “restful.” Alternate translation: “refreshing times” or “restful times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 3 20 f2wm figs-metaphor ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου 1 from the face of the Lord Peter is using the term **face** to represent the presence of the Lord. Alternate translation: “from the presence of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 3 20 h3nk figs-explicit ἀποστείλῃ 1 he may send Peter is referring implicitly to Christ’s coming again. Alternate translation: “he may again send” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 3 20 yzr6 figs-activepassive τὸν προκεχειρισμένον ὑμῖν 1 the one appointed for you If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the one whom he has appointed for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 3 21 vgn8 figs-personification ὃν δεῖ οὐρανὸν μὲν δέξασθαι 1 whom it is necessary for heaven to receive Peter is speaking of **heaven** as if it were a person who has welcomed Jesus into his home. Alternate translation: “who must remain in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 3 21 x2f3 figs-abstractnouns ἄχρι χρόνων ἀποκαταστάσεως πάντων 1 the times of the restoration of all things If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **restoration**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “restore.” Alternate translation: “until the times when God will restore all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 3 21 a2m8 figs-idiom ἀπ’ αἰῶνος 1 from the age The expression **from the age** means that something happened a long time ago. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 3 21 a12i figs-metonymy διὰ στόματος τῶν ἁγίων & αὐτοῦ προφητῶν 1 through the mouth of his holy prophets Peter is using the **mouth** of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what his holy prophets said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 3 22 a232 figs-quotesinquotes Μωϋσῆς μὲν εἶπεν, ὅτι προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα, ὅσα ἂν λαλήσῃ πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Moses indeed said, ‘The Lord our God will raise up for you a prophet like me from your brothers. You will listen to him according to everything—whatever he may speak to you If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses indeed said that the Lord our God would raise up a prophet like himself for us Israelites from among our brothers. Moses said that we were to listen to him according to everything—whatever he might speak to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 3 22 a249 translate-textvariants Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν 1 The Lord our God Some ancient manuscripts read “the Lord our God.” Peter would be quoting Deuteronomy 18:15 somewhat loosely but with the same basic meaning. ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the Lord your God.” Peter would be quoting Deuteronomy 18:15 exactly. Still other ancient manuscripts read simply “the Lord God.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
|
||
ACT 3 22 a250 figs-exclusive Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν 1 The Lord our God Moses is speaking of himself and his fellow Israelites, whom he is addressing, so use the inclusive form of the word **our** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 3 22 v5nf figs-idiom ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει 1 will raise up for you Here the expression **raise up** does not mean “bring back to life,” as it did in [2:24](../02/24.md) and [2:32](../02/32.md). In this context, it refers instead to God giving someone the mission to go as a prophet to certain people with a message for them. Alternate translation: “will send to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 3 22 t8di figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν 1 your brothers Moses is using the term **brothers** to mean people who are fellow descendants with his listeners of the founders of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “your kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 3 22 a234 figs-declarative αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα 1 You will listen to him according to everything Moses is using a future statement to give a command. Alternate translation: “You must listen to everything he tells you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
|
||
ACT 3 22 a235 figs-idiom αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα 1 You will listen to him according to everything Here, **listen** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “You must obey every command that he gives you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 3 23 a236 figs-quotesinquotes ἔσται δὲ πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ 1 But it will be that every soul that does not listen to that prophet will be destroyed from the people If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses also said that every soul that did not listen to that prophet would be destroyed from the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 3 23 t8a5 figs-activepassive πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ 1 every soul that does not listen to that prophet will be destroyed from the people If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will destroy from the people every soul that does not listen to that prophet” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 3 23 a237 figs-declarative πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ 1 every soul that does not listen to that prophet will be destroyed from the people Moses could be using a future statement to give a command, in which case he would be telling the people to take this action. Alternate translation: “you must destroy from the people every soul that does not listen to that prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
|
||
ACT 3 23 a238 figs-synecdoche πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις 1 every soul that Moses is using one part of a person, the **soul**, to mean the entire person. Alternate translation: “every person who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 3 23 a239 figs-idiom ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου 1 does not listen to that prophet Here, **listen** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “does not obey that prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 3 24 u6x3 figs-hyperbole πάντες & οἱ προφῆται 1 all the prophets Here the phrase **all the prophets** is probably not the same kind of generalization that it seems to be in [3:18](../03/18.md). It is true in a more literal sense that all the prophets **announced these days**. There was something in the messages of each one of them that pointed to the culmination of God’s work in the coming of Jesus. So even if your language does not use generalizations for emphasis, you could translate these words just as Peter says them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 3 24 xp9h ἀπὸ Σαμουὴλ καὶ τῶν καθεξῆς 1 from Samuel and those after him Alternate translation: “beginning with Samuel and continuing with those who lived after he did”
|
||
ACT 3 24 m9pr figs-idiom τὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας 1 these days Peter is using the word **days** to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “this time” or “these times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 3 24 a241 figs-explicit τὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας 1 these days Peter is referring to a specific time to mean implicitly what is happening at that time. Alternate translation: “the things that are happening now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 3 25 rh2n figs-metonymy ὑμεῖς ἐστε οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 You are the sons of the prophets Peter is using the word **sons** in the sense of “heirs,” by association with the way that children inherit from their parents. He means that the Israelites living at this time are going to receive something as a legacy from those who lived before them. Alternate translation: “You are the ones who are going to receive what the prophets promised” or “You are the ones who are going to experience what the prophets foretold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 3 25 a242 figs-gendernotations οἱ υἱοὶ 1 the sons Although the term **sons** is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could state “the sons and daughters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 3 25 a243 figs-metonymy καὶ τῆς διαθήκης ἧς διέθετο ὁ Θεὸς πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν 1 and of the covenant that God made with your fathers The figurative sense of **sons** as “heirs” continues in this phrase. Alternate translation: “and who are going to receive what God promised to your fathers when he made a covenant with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 3 25 a244 figs-quotesinquotes πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν, λέγων πρὸς Ἀβραάμ, καὶ ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου ἐνευλογηθήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς 1 with your fathers, saying to Abraham, ‘And in your seed will all the families of the earth be blessed’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “with your fathers when he said to Abraham that in his seed all the families of the earth would be blessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 3 25 a245 figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν 1 your fathers Here, **fathers** means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “your ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 3 25 wid4 figs-gendernotations τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν 1 Although the term **fathers** is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could state “your fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 3 25 mad5 figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου 1 in your seed The term **seed** means “offspring.” It is a word picture. Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. Alternate translation: “through your descendants” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 3 25 a246 figs-explicit ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου 1 in your seed As the apostle Paul notes in [Galatians 3:16](../gal/03/16.md), God used the singular form of the word **seed** when he said this to Abraham, and so the ultimate fulfillment of this promise came when God sent Jesus as the Savior for everyone in the world who would believe in him. That may also be what Peter has in view here, since he refers in the next verse to God’s “Servant,” meaning the Messiah. Alternate translation: “through the Messiah, who will be your descendant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 3 25 a247 figs-activepassive ἐνευλογηθήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς 1 will all the families of the earth be blessed If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will bless all the families of the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 3 25 g31m figs-metonymy πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς 1 all the families of the earth Here, **families** refers to people groups or nations by association with the way that many of them consist of people who have a common ancestry. Alternate translation: “all the nations of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 3 26 b7tz figs-idiom ἀναστήσας ὁ Θεὸς τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, ἀπέστειλεν αὐτὸν 1 God, having raised up his Servant, sent him The expression **raised up** has the same meaning here as in [3:22](../03/22.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “When God appointed Jesus as the Messiah, he sent him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 3 26 z5q6 τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ 1 his Servant See the discussion of the term **Servant** in the General Notes to this chapter, and see how you translated that term in [3:13](../03/13.md). Alternate translation: “his Messiah”
|
||
ACT 3 26 x8ss figs-metaphor τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν 1 by turning each of you from your wickedness Here, **turning** someone **from** something means leading that person to stop doing that thing. See how you translated the similar expression in [3:19](../03/19.md). Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to repent of your wickedness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 3 26 a248 figs-abstractnouns τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν 1 by turning each of you from your wickedness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wickedness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “wicked.” Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to stop doing wicked things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 intro pv3a 0 # Acts 4 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:25–26.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Unity<br><br>The first Christians wanted very much to be united. They wanted to believe the same things and share everything they owned and help those who needed help.<br><br>### “Signs and wonders”<br><br>This phrase refers to things that only God can do. The Christians wanted God to do what only he could do so that people would believe that what they said about Jesus was true.<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### The “head of the corner” or cornerstone (4:11)<br><br>The cornerstone was the first piece of stone that people put down when they were building a building out of stone. Peter refers to it as the “head of the corner” in 4:11. This is a metaphor for the most important part of something, the part on which everything else depends. To say that Jesus is the cornerstone of the church is to say that nothing in the church is more important than Jesus and that everything in the church depends on Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “no other name” (4:12)<br><br>“There is no other name under heaven given among men by which we must be saved” (Acts 4:12). As a note to this verse explains, in this expression the term “name” represents a person. So with these words, Peter was saying that no other person who has ever been on the earth or who will ever be on earth can save people. This statement might cause some controversy in some places today, but it is an essential part of the Christian message, and it should be translated so that its meaning is clear.
|
||
ACT 4 1 abc4 writing-pronouns λαλούντων & αὐτῶν 1 as they were speaking The pronoun **they** refers to Peter and John. Alternate translation: “as Peter and John were speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 1 ew3l figs-explicit ὁ στρατηγὸς τοῦ ἱεροῦ 1 the captain of the temple The temple had its own guards, and this man was their commanding officer. Alternate translation: “the commander of the temple guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 1 m74s figs-explicit οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι 1 the Sadducees The Sadducees would have been particularly upset that Peter and John were saying that God raised Jesus from the dead, because they did not believe in the resurrection. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain that explicitly here. Alternate translation: “the Sadducees, who do not believe in the resurrection,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 1 d3tv figs-synecdoche οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι 1 the Sadducees Luke is using the name of the whole group to mean some of its members. Alternate translation: “some of the Sadducees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 4 2 abc5 writing-pronouns διαπονούμενοι διὰ τὸ διδάσκειν αὐτοὺς 1 greatly troubled because they were teaching The pronoun **they** refers to Peter and John. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “These men were greatly troubled because Peter and John were teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 2 mg5l figs-abstractnouns καταγγέλλειν ἐν τῷ Ἰησοῦ τὴν ἀνάστασιν, τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 proclaiming in Jesus the resurrection that is from the dead If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with an equivalent phrase. Peter and John were saying that God would raise people from the dead in the same way that he had raised Jesus. Translate this in a way that allows **the resurrection** to refer to both Jesus’ resurrection and the general resurrection of other people. Alternate translation: “proclaiming that God makes people alive again who have died, just as God had done for Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 2 np5g figs-nominaladj τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Peter is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 4 3 a254 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce what the men who came up to Peter and John did because they were so troubled by their teaching. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 4 3 a255 writing-pronouns ἐπέβαλον αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας 1 they laid hands on them The pronoun **they** refers to the priests, the captain of the temple, and the Sadducees. The pronoun **them** refers to Peter and John. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the priests, the captain of the temple, and the Sadducees laid hands on Peter and John” or “the men who had come up to Peter and John laid hands on them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 3 zla7 figs-metonymy ἐπέβαλον αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας 1 they laid hands on them The expression **laid hands on** means to arrest someone by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their **hands**. Alternate translation: “they arrested them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 3 a256 figs-abstractnouns ἔθεντο εἰς τήρησιν 1 put them in custody If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **custody**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “imprison.” Alternate translation: “they imprisoned them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 3 h5f9 figs-explicit ἦν γὰρ ἑσπέρα ἤδη 1 since it was already evening The implication is that the ruling council, which Luke describes in [4:5–6](../04/05.md), would not meet to question anyone at night. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “since it was already evening and the council would not meet to question them at night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 4 a257 writing-endofstory δὲ 1 But Luke uses the word **But** to introduce information about what happened after this much of the story as a result of the events within the story itself. This is not the end of the whole story, but it is the end of a significant part of it. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a significant part of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||
ACT 4 4 a258 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Peter and John shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 4 bm1f figs-gendernotations ἀριθμὸς τῶν ἀνδρῶν 1 the number of the men Luke is not using the word **men** in a generic sense here. The figure of 5,000 is the number of the men alone. It does not include women and children. So it would not be accurate to translate **men** as “people.” Instead, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this distinction explicitly. Alternate translation: “the number of the men alone, not counting the women and children,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 4 4 qd8g figs-explicit ἐγενήθη & ὡς χιλιάδες πέντε 1 became about 5,000 The word translated **became** could mean: (1) the community of believers in Jesus grew to a total of 5,000 as a result of the professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “in the community of believers grew to about 5,000” (2) “was,” and that would indicate that 5,000 men made professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “who put their faith in Jesus that day was about 5,000” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 5 lw2d writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 4 5 cdj1 figs-explicit συναχθῆναι αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς 1 their rulers and elders and scribes were gathered together Luke is implicitly describing the Sanhedrin, the Jewish ruling council, which consisted of these three groups of people. Luke describes this council explicitly as “the Sanhedrin” in [4:15](../04/15.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could identify it by name here. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, consisting of their rulers and elders and scribes, was gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 5 j6p8 writing-pronouns αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς 1 their rulers and elders and scribes The pronoun **their** refers to the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “the rulers and elders and scribes of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 5 i9tj figs-activepassive συναχθῆναι 1 were gathered together If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 6 a259 figs-explicit Ἅννας ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς, καὶ Καϊάφας 1 Annas the high priest, and Caiaphas Luke describes Annas as **the high priest**, but the actual situation was complicated. At this time the Romans were appointing the high priests for Judea. One Roman official had appointed Annas some years earlier, but ten years after that, another official deposed him and named his son-in-law Caiaphas high priest instead. However, the Jews still recognized Annas’ claim to the position. If you decide to clarify this for your readers, it would probably be best to state the matter as simply as possible. Alternate translation: “Annas, whom the Jews recognized as the high priest, and Caiaphas, whom a Roman official had appointed as the high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 6 l44n translate-names Ἅννας & Καϊάφας & Ἰωάννης & Ἀλέξανδρος 1 Annas … Caiaphas … John … Alexander These are the names of four men. The **John** mentioned here was a member of the high priest’s family. This is not the same John as the apostle. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 4 6 a260 ὅσοι ἦσαν ἐκ γένους ἀρχιερατικοῦ 1 as many as were from the high priestly family Alternate translation: “all the other members of the high priestly family who were members of the council”
|
||
ACT 4 7 abc6 writing-pronouns στήσαντες αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ μέσῳ, ἐπυνθάνοντο 1 having set them in their midst, they asked them The pronoun **them** refers to Peter and John, and the pronouns **their** and **they** refer to the council members. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the council members had set Peter and John in their midst, the members asked them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 7 t1eq figs-doublet ἐν ποίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόματι ἐποιήσατε τοῦτο ὑμεῖς? 1 By what power or in what name have you done this? The words **power** and **name** (meaning authority; see next note) mean similar things. The council members may be using them together to ask a comprehensive or emphatic question. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “By whatever means were you able to do this?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 4 7 jc21 figs-metonymy ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόματι 1 in what name Here, **name** refers to authority. Alternate translation: “by what authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 7 a261 figs-youdual ὑμεῖς 1 you Since the council members are speaking to two men, **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. (All other pronouns in this account that refer to Peter and John would also be dual, such as **them** in its two instances in this verse.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
|
||
ACT 4 8 su5x figs-activepassive Πέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, εἶπεν 1 Peter, filled with the Holy Spirit, said If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. See how you translated the comparable expression in [2:4](../02/04.md). Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled Peter and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 8 a262 figs-metaphor Πέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, εἶπεν 1 Peter, filled with the Holy Spirit, said Luke is speaking of Peter as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit **filled**. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired Peter and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 4 8 a263 figs-merism ἄρχοντες τοῦ λαοῦ καὶ πρεσβύτεροι 1 Rulers of the people and elders Peter is addressing the entire council by referring to its two components. Some of the members had ruling responsibilities. Others, the **elders**, were added to the council to bring its total membership up to 70, since according to [Exodus 24:1](../exo/24/01.md), that was the number of elders who accompanied Moses when God confirmed the covenant with Israel at Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “You members of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||
ACT 4 8 a264 figs-explicit τοῦ λαοῦ 1 of the people Here, **the people** means specifically the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 9 pq85 figs-irony εἰ ἡμεῖς σήμερον ἀνακρινόμεθα ἐπὶ εὐεργεσίᾳ ἀνθρώπου ἀσθενοῦς, ἐν τίνι οὗτος σέσωσται 1 if we are being questioned today concerning a good deed to a sick man, by what means he was made well Peter is not suggesting seriously that the subject of the questioning is uncertain. He knows the subject, but he is suggesting ironically that it is uncertain so that he can describe it from his own perspective. The council asked by what power or authority he and John did “this,” implying that “this” was something bad, a public disturbance that troubled the authorities. In response, Peter asserts that “this” was instead something good, **a good deed to a sick man**. If it would be helpful to your readers, in your translation you could indicate the meaning that Peter is communicating through this irony. Alternate translation: “what we actually did was a good deed for a sick man, and if you want to know by what means he was made well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
|
||
ACT 4 9 je6d figs-activepassive ἡμεῖς & ἀνακρινόμεθα 1 we are being questioned If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you are questioning us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 9 b92n figs-activepassive οὗτος σέσωσται 1 he was made well If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he became healthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 10 q9ss figs-imperative3p γνωστὸν ἔστω πᾶσιν ὑμῖν καὶ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραὴλ 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may this be known to you and to all the people of Israel” or “this should be known to you and to all the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
|
||
ACT 4 10 snd5 figs-activepassive γνωστὸν ἔστω πᾶσιν ὑμῖν καὶ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραὴλ 1 let it be known to you all and to all the people of Israel The word translated **known** is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be clearer for your readers if you use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. The adjective **known** expresses the result of action by a different agent, so you can use an active form with that agent as the subject. Alternate translation: “you and all the people of Israel, know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 10 j3px writing-pronouns πᾶσιν ὑμῖν 1 to you all The pronoun **you** refers to the council members. Alternate translation: “to all of you council members” or “to all of you who are questioning us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 10 khn7 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι 1 in the name Here, **name** refers to power and authority. Alternate translation: “through the power” or “by the authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 10 a265 translate-names Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου 1 of Jesus Christ the Nazarene See how you translated this in [2:22](../02/22.md) and [3:6](../03/06.md). Alternate translation: “of Jesus Christ of Nazareth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 4 10 a266 figs-synecdoche ὃν ὑμεῖς ἐσταυρώσατε 1 whom you crucified It was the Romans who literally crucified Jesus, but Peter says that these Jewish leaders crucified him because their demands led to his death. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “whom you demanded to be crucified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 4 10 jyj6 figs-idiom ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 whom God raised from the dead As in [2:24](../02/24.md), the idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “whom God made alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 4 10 a267 figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Peter is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 4 11 nwg6 writing-pronouns οὗτός 1 He The pronoun **He** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 11 w195 figs-metaphor ὁ λίθος ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων, ὁ γενόμενος εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 the stone that was rejected by you, the builders, which has been made into the head of the corner Peter is quoting from [Psalm 118:22](../psa/118/22.md), and the quotation contains a metaphor. This psalm is describing the Messiah as if he were a stone that builders chose not to use. This means that people will reject him. When the psalm says that this stone became the cornerstone, this means that God will nevertheless make the Messiah the ruler of these people. However, since this is a quotation from Scripture, we recommend that you translate the words directly rather than providing a non-figurative explanation of them, even if your language does not customarily use such figures of speech. If you want to explain the meaning of the metaphor, we recommend that you do that in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 4 11 c1bh figs-activepassive ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων 1 that was rejected by you, the builders If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that you, the builders, rejected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 11 f1nx figs-idiom κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 the head of the corner The phrase **the head of the corner** is an idiom that refers to a large stone with straight edges that builders would place down first and use as a reference to make sure that the walls of a stone building were straight and that the building was oriented in the right direction. Your language may have its own term for such a stone. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the cornerstone” or “the reference stone for the whole building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 4 12 a268 figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία 1 there is no salvation in anyone else In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “there is no salvation in no one else.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he is the only one in whom there is salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 4 12 tq3z figs-abstractnouns οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία 1 there is no salvation in anyone else If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **salvation**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “he is the only one who is able to save” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 12 l66w figs-activepassive οὐδὲ & ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν τὸ δεδομένον 1 there is no other name under heaven given If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God has not given any other name under heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 12 iz7k figs-metonymy οὐδὲ & ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον & ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς 1 there is no other name … by which we must be saved Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “there is no other person … by whom we must be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 12 jm25 figs-idiom ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 under heaven This is an idiom. See how you translated it in [2:5](../02/05.md). Alternate translation: “on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 4 12 a269 figs-gendernotations ἐν ἀνθρώποις 1 among men Peter is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “among people” or “to people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 4 12 gg8h figs-activepassive ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς 1 by which we must be saved If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that can save us” or, if you translate “name” as “person,” “who can save us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 12 tdw8 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 we Peter is using the word **we** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 4 13 r6d6 figs-idiom θεωροῦντες 1 seeing Luke is using the word **seeing** to mean that the council members noticed this and found it significant. Alternate translation: “taking note of” or “impressed with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 4 13 t6kc figs-abstractnouns τὴν τοῦ Πέτρου παρρησίαν καὶ Ἰωάννου 1 the boldness of Peter and John Here the abstract noun **boldness** refers to the way in which Peter and John responded to the Jewish leaders. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the same idea with an adverb or an adjective. Alternate translation: “how boldly Peter and John had spoken” or “how bold Peter and John were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 13 qaa5 figs-explicit καταλαβόμενοι 1 realizing The implication is that the Jewish leaders realized this because of the way Peter and John spoke. Alternate translation: “realizing from the way they spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 13 xn39 writing-pronouns ἐθαύμαζον; ἐπεγίνωσκόν τε αὐτοὺς, ὅτι σὺν τῷ Ἰησοῦ ἦσαν 1 they marveled, and they recognized them, that they had been with Jesus Here the pronoun **they** refers in its first two instances to the council members, and in its third instance it refers to Peter and John, as does the pronoun **them**. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this and to state the meaning here more concisely. Alternate translation: “the council members marveled, and they recognized that Peter and John had been with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 13 erv7 figs-doublet ἄνθρωποι ἀγράμματοί εἰσιν καὶ ἰδιῶται 1 they were uneducated and ordinary men The words **uneducated** and **ordinary** mean similar things. Both words indicate that Peter and John had no formal education. Luke uses them together for emphasis, to express from the council members’ perspective how amazed they were. Alternate translation: “they had no formal education at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 4 14 h3cy figs-activepassive τόν & ἄνθρωπον & τὸν τεθεραπευμένον 1 the man who had been healed If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 14 a270 writing-pronouns σὺν αὐτοῖς ἑστῶτα, τὸν τεθεραπευμένον, οὐδὲν εἶχον 1 standing with them, they had nothing The pronoun **them** refers to Peter and John, and the pronoun **they** refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “standing with Peter and John, the council members had nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 14 fq4w figs-explicit οὐδὲν εἶχον ἀντειπεῖν 1 they had nothing to say in opposition The implication is that anything the council members said **in opposition** would have been in an attempt to discredit the claim that the man had been healed in the name of Jesus. But there was nothing they could say, since the evidence that the claim was true was right in front of them in the person of the formerly lame man standing on his own. Alternate translation: “they had nothing to say to discredit the account” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 15 ql31 writing-pronouns κελεύσαντες & αὐτοὺς ἔξω τοῦ Συνεδρίου ἀπελθεῖν, συνέβαλλον πρὸς ἀλλήλους 1 having commanded them to go outside the Sanhedrin, they conferred among themselves The pronoun **them** refers at least to Peter and John, and probably also to the man who was healed, while the pronoun **they** refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “having commanded Peter and John and the man who was healed to go outside the Sanhedrin, the council members conferred among themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 15 a272 figs-metonymy τοῦ Συνεδρίου 1 the Sanhedrin Luke is using the name of the Jewish ruling council to mean the meeting place of that council. Alternate translation: “the place where the Sanhedrin met” or “the council chamber” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 16 p4g6 figs-rquestion τί ποιήσωμεν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις? 1 What should we do to these men? This could mean: (1) the Jewish leaders were using the question form to express their frustration because they realize that they cannot punish Peter and John. As [4:21](../04/21.md) indicates explicitly, and as the leaders suggest here, they are afraid of how the people might respond if they do. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is very difficult to know what we should do to these men!” (2) the leaders were asking one another a genuine question, because ultimately they do decide to do something to Peter and John. They warn them not to speak or teach in the name of Jesus, with an implied threat of punishment if they do. In that case it would be accurate to translate this as a question. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 4 16 jn12 figs-hyperbole πᾶσιν τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλὴμ 1 everyone who lives in Jerusalem This is a generalization that the leaders are making to emphasize how widely the news of the healing has spread. Alternate translation: “people who live throughout Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 4 16 nh5s γνωστὸν σημεῖον 1 a notable sign Here the word **sign** has the same sense that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in [2:22](../02/22.md) and [2:43](../02/43.md). It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “a remarkable miracle”
|
||
ACT 4 17 a273 figs-activepassive ἵνα μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον διανεμηθῇ 1 so that it may not be spread If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “so that it does not spread” or “so that they will not spread it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 17 f71l figs-explicit ἵνα μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον διανεμηθῇ 1 so that it may not be spread By **it**, the council members do not mean the news of the man’s healing, since they have already said that everyone in Jerusalem knows about it. They mean the teaching that Jesus is Messiah, since they then try to prevent this from spreading by not allowing the apostles to speak to anyone about Jesus. Alternate translation: “so that this teaching about Jesus does not spread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 17 a274 ἐπὶ πλεῖον 1 unto more Alternate translation: “any further”
|
||
ACT 4 17 w52j figs-metonymy λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ 1 to speak in this name Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “to speak about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 17 a275 figs-doublenegatives μηκέτι λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ μηδενὶ ἀνθρώπων 1 no longer to speak in this name to any of men In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “no longer to speak in this name to none of men.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “to stop speaking in this name to any of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 4 17 a276 figs-gendernotations μηδενὶ ἀνθρώπων 1 to any of men Here, **men** has a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “to any person” or “to anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 4 18 a277 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 So Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce what the council members did as a result of their discussion. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 4 18 a278 writing-pronouns καλέσαντες αὐτοὺς, παρήγγειλαν 1 summoning them, they commanded them The pronoun **them** refers in both instances to Peter and John, and the pronoun **they** refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “summoning Peter and John, the council members commanded them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 18 a279 figs-doublet μὴ φθέγγεσθαι μηδὲ διδάσκειν 1 neither to speak nor to teach The words **speak** and **teach** mean similar things. The council members may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “not to say anything publicly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 4 18 a280 figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 in the name of Jesus Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 19 a281 figs-hendiadys ὁ & Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον 1 answering, Peter and John said Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Peter and John responded to the council. Alternate translation: “Peter and John responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 4 19 a282 figs-explicit ὁ & Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον 1 answering, Peter and John said This could mean: (1) Peter and John each said different parts of the quotation in [4:19–20](../04/19.md). (2) Peter spoke these words on behalf of both of them, since the Holy Spirit had inspired him to speak to the council in [4:8–12](../04/08.md). Alternate translation: “Peter responded on their behalf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 19 jf1d figs-metonymy εἰ δίκαιόν ἐστιν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Whether it is right before God Here the phrase **before God** refers to God’s opinion by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “Whether God thinks it is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 19 a283 figs-idiom ὑμῶν ἀκούειν μᾶλλον ἢ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to listen to you rather than to God Here, **listen** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “to obey you rather than God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 4 20 a284 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For Peter and John are using the word **For** to introduce the reason why the council needs to judge whether it would be right for them to obey the council rather than God. Alternate translation: “The reason why you must judge whom we should obey is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 4 20 hf3u figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς & εἴδαμεν καὶ ἠκούσαμεν 1 we … we have seen and heard Peter and John are using the word **we** to refer to themselves but not to their listeners, so use the exclusive form of the word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 4 20 a285 figs-doublenegatives οὐ δυνάμεθα & ἡμεῖς & μὴ λαλεῖν 1 we are not able not to speak You could state the meaning of this double negative positively. Alternate translation: “we must speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 4 21 y5y1 writing-pronouns οἱ δὲ προσαπειλησάμενοι ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς 1 having warned them further, they released them The pronoun **them** refers in both instances to Peter and John, and the pronoun **they** refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “having warned Peter and John further, the council members released them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 21 z2bx figs-explicit διὰ τὸν λαόν 1 on account of the people The implication is that the Jewish leaders were afraid that the people would riot if they punished Peter and John. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They were afraid that if they did punish Peter and John, the people would riot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 21 jbl6 figs-hyperbole πάντες ἐδόξαζον τὸν Θεὸν 1 they were all glorifying God Here, **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “large numbers of them were glorifying God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 4 22 gy8d writing-background ἐτῶν γὰρ ἦν πλειόνων τεσσεράκοντα ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐφ’ ὃν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως 1 For the man to whom this sign of healing had happened was more than 40 years old In this verse, Luke provides background information about the age of the man who was healed to help readers understand why the people considered his healing such a remarkable miracle. In your translation, present this background information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 4 22 a286 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For Luke is using the word **For** to introduce the reason why the people were glorifying God. Alternate translation: “The people were glorifying God because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 4 22 ju4w figs-personification ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐφ’ ὃν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως 1 the man to whom this sign of healing had happened Luke is speaking as if the **healing** had **happened** on its own. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had miraculously healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 4 22 a287 figs-possession τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως 1 this sign of healing Luke is using the possessive form to describe a **sign** that consisted of a **healing**. The word **sign** has the same sense here that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in [2:22](../02/22.md) and [2:43](../02/43.md). It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “this miraculous healing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 4 23 a288 figs-activepassive ἀπολυθέντες 1 having been released If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “after the council members had released Peter and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 23 a289 figs-go ἦλθον πρὸς τοὺς ἰδίους 1 they came to their own people In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “they went to their own people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
|
||
ACT 4 23 j2cx figs-explicit τοὺς ἰδίους 1 their own people The phrase **their own people** refers to the community of believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 23 a290 figs-merism οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι 1 the chief priests and the elders As Peter does in [4:8](../04/08.md), here Luke is referring to the entire council by naming its two components. Alternate translation: “the members of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||
ACT 4 24 j3ap writing-pronouns οἱ & ἀκούσαντες & ἦραν 1 having heard, they raised The phrase **having heard** refers to the other believers, but the pronoun **they** seems to include Peter and John as well, since those who pray ask for boldness to keep speaking the message about Jesus ([4:29](../04/29.md)). It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the other believers heard this report, together with Peter and John they raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 24 a291 ἦραν φωνὴν 1 they raised their voice Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **voice**. Alternate translation: “they raised their voices”
|
||
ACT 4 24 zu28 figs-idiom ἦραν φωνὴν 1 they raised their voice The expression **they raised their voice** is an idiom that means they spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “they prayed loudly” or “they prayed out loud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 4 24 a292 ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 unanimously The word **unanimously** indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in [1:14](../01/14.md). Alternate translation: “with one accord” or “harmoniously”
|
||
ACT 4 24 a293 figs-youformal σὺ 1 you The word **you** is singular, and it refers to God. The same is true of the words “you” and “your” in [4:25–30](../04/25.md). You may have decided to use a formal form of “you” in your translation in such cases. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
|
||
ACT 4 24 a160 figs-merism ποιήσας τὸν οὐρανὸν, καὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 who made the heaven and the earth and the sea and all that is in them The believers are referring to all of creation by naming its components. Alternate translation: “who created everything that exists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||
ACT 4 24 a294 τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 the heaven The believers are using the word translated **heaven** in one of its specific senses to mean the sky. Alternate translation: “the sky”
|
||
ACT 4 25 ka83 figs-metonymy ὁ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου εἰπών 1 the one who said by the Holy Spirit from the mouth of our father David, your servant The word **mouth** refers to what David said by using his mouth. Alternate translation: “the one whose Holy Spirit inspired our father David, your servant, to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 25 vc5z figs-quotesinquotes τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου εἰπών, ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά? 1 who said by the Holy Spirit from the mouth of our father David, your servant, ‘Why did the Gentiles rage, and the peoples imagine useless things?’ As the believers pray together, they quote from one of the psalms that David composed, [Psalm 2:1–2](../psa/02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “whose Holy Spirit inspired our father David, your servant, to ask why the nations raged and why the peoples imagined useless things.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 4 25 a295 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our The believers are using the word **our** to refer to themselves but not to God, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 4 25 kat6 figs-metaphor τοῦ πατρὸς 1 father Here, **father** means “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 4 25 a296 παιδός 1 servant The believers are using the word **servant** here in its ordinary sense, not as a title for the Messiah, so it would not be appropriate to translate it as “Messiah,” as you may have done when it was a title in [3:13](../03/13.md) and [3:26](../03/26.md).
|
||
ACT 4 25 a297 figs-ellipsis ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά 1 Why did the Gentiles rage, and the peoples imagine useless things Here some words have been left out that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “Why did the nations rage, and why did the peoples imagine useless things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 4 25 a298 figs-parallelism ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά 1 Why did the Gentiles rage, and the peoples imagine useless things These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “Why did the nations rage, indeed, why did the peoples imagine useless things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||
ACT 4 25 f1x6 figs-rquestion ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά? 1 Why did the Gentiles rage, and the peoples imagine useless things? In this psalm, David uses the question form to emphasize the futility of opposing God. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “The nations should not have raged, and the peoples should not have imagined useless things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 4 25 w622 figs-explicit κενά 1 useless things The phrase **useless things** implicitly describes plans to oppose God, which can never succeed. Alternate translation: “ways to oppose God, which always prove useless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 26 fb5a figs-quotesinquotes παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ κατὰ τοῦ Κυρίου, καὶ κατὰ τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 The kings of the earth took their stand and the rulers were gathered to the same against the Lord and against his Christ This is the rest of the quotation from Psalm 2 that the believers started in [4:25](../04/25.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “David said that the kings of the earth had taken their stand and the rulers had gathered to the same against the Lord and against his Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 4 26 w2by figs-parallelism παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ 1 The kings of the earth took their stand and the rulers were gathered to the same In keeping with the conventions of Hebrew poetry, these two phrases mean basically the same thing. If the repetition might be confusing for your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “The kings of the earth took their stand, yes, the rulers were gathered to the same” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||
ACT 4 26 w64b figs-idiom παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς 1 The kings of the earth took their stand The expression **took their stand** describes an army lining up for battle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The kings of the earth lined up their troops for battle” or “The kings of the earth formed their battle lines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 4 26 a299 figs-activepassive οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν 1 the rulers were gathered If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the rulers gathered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 26 a300 ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ 1 to the same See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Here it could mean “by agreement” or “in the same place.” You could use either phrase as an alternate translation.
|
||
ACT 4 26 yv19 figs-explicit τοῦ Κυρίου & τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 the Lord … his Christ Here the word **Lord** refers to God and the word **Christ** refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “God the Lord … his Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 27 b1g9 figs-activepassive συνήχθησαν 1 were gathered together If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 27 nuc1 figs-explicit ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ 1 in this city The phrase **this city** refers to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “here in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 27 ca33 παῖδά 1 Servant Here the word **Servant** is a title for the Messiah. See the discussion of that term in the General Notes to Chapter 3, and see how you translated it in [3:13](../03/13.md) and [3:26](../03/26.md). Alternate translation: “Messiah”
|
||
ACT 4 27 a303 figs-metaphor ὃν ἔχρισας 1 whom you anointed In the Old Testament, ceremonial oil was poured on a person who was being given the authority to assume an office or to do a special task. The believers are speaking of anointing to indicate that God appointed Jesus to be the Messiah. Alternate translation: “whom you appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 4 28 yz7m figs-metonymy ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι 1 all that your hand and your counsel had predetermined to happen Here, **hand** means God’s power and **counsel** means God’s plan. Alternate translation: “all that your power and your plan had predetermined to happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 28 a304 figs-hendiadys ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι 1 all that your hand and your counsel had predetermined to happen The words **hand** and **counsel**, joined by **and**, are expressing a single idea. The word **hand**, meaning “power,” tells by what means God intended to carry out his **counsel**, that is, his plan. Alternate translation: “all that you planned in advance to make happen by your power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 4 28 a305 figs-personification ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι 1 all that your hand and your counsel had predetermined to happen The believers are speaking of God’s **hand** and his **counsel** (that is, his power and his plan) as if they had **predetermined** what would happen to Jesus. They mean that God himself had done this. Alternate translation: “all that you planned in advance to make happen by your power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 4 29 b38z καὶ τὰ νῦν 1 And now The believers use the expression **And now** to direct God’s attention to the request they are making in light of what they have said to this point in their prayer. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this same purpose.
|
||
ACT 4 29 t5qm figs-idiom ἔπιδε ἐπὶ τὰς ἀπειλὰς αὐτῶν 1 look upon their threats The phrase **look upon** is an idiomatic way of asking God to pay attention to the threats that the Jewish leaders have made against the believers. Alternate translation: “pay attention to the threats they have made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 4 29 a306 figs-123person τοῖς δούλοις σου 1 to your servants The believers are speaking of themselves in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “to us, your servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||
ACT 4 29 zh7j figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον σου 1 your word The believers are using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 29 a307 figs-abstractnouns μετὰ παρρησίας πάσης 1 with all boldness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **boldness**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “boldly.” The word **all** is an intensifier. Alternate translation: “very boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 30 x9r1 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ τὴν χεῖρά σου, ἐκτείνειν σε εἰς ἴασιν, καὶ σημεῖα, καὶ τέρατα, γίνεσθαι 1 as you stretch out your hand to heal and for signs and wonders to happen Here the **hand** represents God’s power. To **stretch out** the hand means to use it. So this is a prayer for God to do powerful things. Alternate translation: “as you do powerful things to heal people and to make signs and wonders happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 30 a308 figs-doublet σημεῖα, καὶ τέρατα 1 signs and wonders The terms **signs** and **wonders** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:43](../02/43.md). Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 4 30 t5uw figs-metonymy διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος 1 through the name Here, **name** refers to authority. Alternate translation: “by the authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 30 txb5 τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ ἁγίου παιδός σου, Ἰησοῦ 1 the name of your holy Servant Jesus Here the word **Servant** is a title for the Messiah. See the discussion of that term in the General Notes to Chapter 3, and see how you translated it in [3:13](../03/13.md), [3:26](../03/26.md), and [4:27](../04/27.md). Alternate translation: “the name of Jesus, your holy Messiah”
|
||
ACT 4 31 a309 writing-endofstory καὶ 1 And This verse is the end of the whole story of how the lame man was healed and how Peter and John were arrested as a result. Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||
ACT 4 31 a310 figs-activepassive ἐν ᾧ ἦσαν συνηγμένοι 1 in which they were gathered together If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “where they had gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 31 x9b3 figs-activepassive ἐσαλεύθη 1 was shaken If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “shook” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 31 ps3m figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 they were all filled with the Holy Spirit If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. See how you translated the same expression in [2:4](../02/04.md). Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 31 a311 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 they were all filled with the Holy Spirit Luke is speaking as if the believers were containers that the Holy Spirit **filled**. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 4 31 a312 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 31 a313 figs-abstractnouns μετὰ παρρησίας 1 with boldness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **boldness**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “boldly.” Alternate translation: “boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 32 a314 grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 Now Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information in [4:32–37](../04/32.md) that will help readers understand further episodes in the story. These verses introduce Barnabas, who will be an important character in the book, and they also help account for what happens to Ananias and Sapphira in the next chapter. You can translate the word **Now** with a term or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
|
||
ACT 4 32 xu3j figs-metonymy ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία 1 was one in heart and soul Here the word **heart** seems to represent the emotions and the word **soul** seems to represent the desires. Alternate translation: “thought the same way and desired the same things” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 4 32 a315 figs-doublet ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία 1 was one in heart and soul The terms **heart** and **soul** mean similar things, and Luke may be using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine the terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “was genuinely united” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 4 32 a316 τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτῷ 1 of the things that were to him Alternate translation: “of the things that he owned”
|
||
ACT 4 32 zyp5 figs-hyperbole ἦν αὐτοῖς πάντα κοινά 1 everything was common to them The word **everything** may be a generalization that emphasizes the powerful spirit of generosity among the believers. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:44](../02/44.md). Alternate translation: “they shared their belongings with one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 4 33 a317 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 of the resurrection of the Lord Jesus If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “of how God made the Lord Jesus alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 33 a318 writing-pronouns χάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 great grace was upon them all The pronoun **them** refers back to “the multitude of those who believed” in [4:32](../04/32.md). It does not refer just to the **apostles**, who are mentioned in this verse. Alternate translation: “great grace was upon all of the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 33 d8dr figs-abstractnouns χάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 great grace was upon them all If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **grace**, you could express the same idea with an equivalent expression. The word could describe: (1) how God was blessing the believers. Alternate translation: “God was blessing all of the believers in wonderful ways” (2) how the people in Jerusalem held the believers in high esteem. Alternate translation: “the people of Jerusalem thought very highly of all the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 34 a331 translate-versebridge οὐδὲ γὰρ ἐνδεής τις ἦν ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 For there was not anyone needy among them This statement expresses the result of the rest of what Luke says in this verse and what he says in the next verse. If it would be helpful in your language to put this result after the reasons for it, you could create a verse bridge by moving this statement to the end of the next verse and beginning it with the word “So” instead of **For**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
|
||
ACT 4 34 a319 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For Luke uses the word **For** in its first instance in this verse to introduce the evidence or reason for his statement at the end of the previous verse that “great grace was upon them all.” The meaning here depends on the meaning there. Alternate translation: (1) “The way God was blessing the believers could be seen in the fact that” or (2) “One thing that made the people think very highly of the believers was that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 4 34 a320 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 2 for Luke uses the word **for** in its second instance in this verse to introduce the reason why no one in the community of believers was needy. Alternate translation: “and the reason for this was that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 4 34 gw3v figs-hyperbole ὅσοι γὰρ κτήτορες χωρίων ἢ οἰκιῶν ὑπῆρχον 1 all who were owners of lands or houses The phrase **as many as** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many believers who owned lands or houses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 4 34 l938 figs-activepassive τὰς τιμὰς τῶν πιπρασκομένων 1 the price of the things being sold If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the money that they received from the things they sold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 35 a321 translate-symaction ἐτίθουν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 they were laying it at the feet of the apostles The expression **laying it at the feet** indicates that believers who sold possessions were putting the money they received onto the ground in front of the apostles. In this culture, that was a symbolic way of presenting it to them as a gift to be used to help others in the community. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “they were presenting it to the apostles” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction)
|
||
ACT 4 35 vv4z translate-symaction ἐτίθουν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 they were laying it at the feet of the apostles In this culture, putting the money on the ground in front of the apostles was a symbolic way of presenting it to them as a gift to be used to help others in the community. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “they were presenting it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 4 35 a322 figs-activepassive διεδίδετο 1 it was being distributed If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the apostles were distributing it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 35 ps4s figs-abstractnouns ἑκάστῳ, καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν 1 to each one, according as anyone had need If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **need**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “need.” Alternate translation: “to every person in the amount that he needed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 36 uc2a writing-participants Ἰωσὴφ δὲ 1 Then Joseph Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 4 36 a323 translate-names Ἰωσὴφ & Βαρναβᾶς 1 Joseph … Barnabas **Joseph** and **Barnabas** are two names for the same man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 4 36 a324 figs-activepassive ὁ ἐπικληθεὶς Βαρναβᾶς, ἀπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 who was called Barnabas by the apostles If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom the apostles called Barnabas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 36 a325 figs-activepassive ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 which, being translated, is Son of Encouragement If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of the passive verbal form **being translated** with an active form. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 4 36 a326 figs-explicit ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 which, being translated, is Son of Encouragement Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is saying what the name Barnabas means when **translated** from the Aramaic language. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement in Aramaic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 4 36 nr4v figs-idiom υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 Son of Encouragement The expression **Son of** describes a person who shares the qualities of something. The apostles used this name to describe Joseph’s behavior and character, since he was a person who encouraged others. Alternate translation: “the Encourager” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 4 36 a327 figs-abstractnouns υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 Son of Encouragement If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **Encouragement**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “encourage.” Alternate translation: “the One who Encourages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 4 37 a330 ὑπάρχοντος αὐτῷ 1 that was to him See how you translated the similar expression in [4:32](../04/32.md). Alternate translation: “that he owned”
|
||
ACT 4 37 gtv5 translate-symaction ἔθηκεν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 laid it at the feet of the apostles See how you translated the similar expression in [4:35](../04/35.md). Alternate translation: “presented it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 5 intro k2uh 0 # Acts 5 General Notes<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### “Why has Satan filled your heart for you to lie to the Holy Spirit?” (5:3)<br><br>No one knows for sure whether Ananias and Sapphira were truly Christians when they decided to lie about the land that they sold (5:1-10), because Luke does not say. However, Peter knew that they lied to the believers, and he knew that they had listened to and obeyed Satan. When they lied to the believers, they also lied to the Holy Spirit. This is because the Holy Spirit lives inside believers.<br><br>## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Long sentences<br><br>Acts 5:36 consists of a single long sentence. ULT represents all of it as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.<br><br>There is also a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 5:38 to nearly the end of 5:39. In this case as well it may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.
|
||
ACT 5 1 v27a writing-participants ἀνὴρ δέ τις 1 Now a certain man Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 5 1 ysl9 translate-names Ἁνανίας 1 Ananias **Ananias** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 5 1 a332 writing-participants σὺν Σαπφείρῃ τῇ γυναικὶ αὐτοῦ 1 with Sapphira his wife Luke uses this phrase to introduce another new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 5 1 a333 translate-names Σαπφείρῃ 1 Sapphria **Sapphira** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 5 2 a334 figs-explicit ἐνοσφίσατο ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς 1 he kept back from the price The implication, as the story later makes clear, is that Ananias did not tell anyone except his wife that he was keeping some of the money for himself. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly, and you could state why he did this. Alternate translation: “he kept some of the money from the sale for himself, but he did not admit that he was doing that, because he wanted everyone to think he was being completely generous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 2 xm1t συνειδυίης καὶ τῆς γυναικός, καὶ ἐνέγκας μέρος τι & ἔθηκεν 1 his wife also knowing, and bringing a certain portion, he laid It may be helpful to make two new sentences here, particularly if you add information to the previous phrase as suggested in the preceding note. Alternate translation: “His wife also knew that he was keeping back part of the sale money. He brought a certain portion of the money and laid it”
|
||
ACT 5 2 dy8b figs-idiom παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων ἔθηκεν 1 he laid it at the feet of the apostles This means that he presented to money to the apostles. See how you translated the same expression in [4:37](../04/37.md). Alternate translation: “he presented it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 5 3 grr9 figs-rquestion διὰ τί ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ Σατανᾶς τὴν καρδίαν σου, ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς τοῦ χωρίου? 1 why has Satan filled your heart for you to lie to the Holy Spirit and to keep back from the price of the land? Peter is using the question form to rebuke Ananias. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you should not have let Satan fill your heart so that you lied to the Holy Spirit and kept back from the price of the land!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 5 3 pqd4 figs-metaphor διὰ τί ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ Σατανᾶς τὴν καρδίαν σου 1 why has Satan filled your heart Peter is speaking of the **heart** of Ananias as if it were a container that Satan had **filled**. Alternate translation: “why have you allowed Satan to influence your heart so strongly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 3 a335 figs-metaphor τὴν καρδίαν σου 1 your heart Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “your thoughts and motives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 3 a426 figs-events ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς τοῦ χωρίου 1 for you to lie to the Holy Spirit and to keep back from the price of the land Ananais first withheld some of the money, then he lied to the Holy Spirit about this by pretending he was giving all of the money. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to describe the events in that order. Alternate translation: “for you to keep back from the price of the land and lie to the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
|
||
ACT 5 3 zz5u figs-metonymy ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον 1 for you to lie to the Holy Spirit Ananias did not lie literally to the Holy Spirit, but he did lie to the apostles and to all of the believers who would have learned about his gift, and the Holy Spirit was present in them. So by lying to them, he was effectively also lying to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “for you to lie to the Holy Spirit, who is present in us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 3 a336 figs-explicit καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς 1 and to keep back from the price of the land The implication of what Peter says here is that Ananias claimed or pretended that he was giving the entire amount that he had received from selling his land. Alternate translation: “by pretending that you were giving us the entire amount when you had kept back some for yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 4 vu7g figs-rquestion οὐχὶ μένον σοὶ ἔμενεν, καὶ πραθὲν ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν? 1 While it remained, did it not remain yours, and being sold, was it not in your authority? Peter continues to use the question form to rebuke Ananias. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “While it remained, it remained yours, and after it was sold, it was still in your authority.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 5 4 vi8w ἔμενεν 1 While it remained Alternate translation: “While it remained unsold” or “Before you sold it”
|
||
ACT 5 4 k7nc figs-activepassive πραθὲν 1 being sold If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “once you had sold it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 4 a337 writing-pronouns ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν 1 was it not in your authority The pronoun **it** refers to the money that Ananias received from the sale of the land. Alternate translation, as a statement: “you could still do whatever you wanted with the money you received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 4 a338 writing-pronouns ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν 1 was it not in your authority The implications are that Ananias was not obligated to give all of the money to the apostles. He was free to keep some if he wished or if he needed it. He could simply have acknowledged that he was doing that, and giving the rest of the money would still have been a generous act because there was no compulsion. Alternate translation, as a statement: “you could have kept some and acknowledged that and you would have still been making a generous gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 4 i5dw figs-rquestion τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο? 1 How is it that you placed this thing in your heart? Peter continues to use the question form to rebuke Ananias. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have placed this thing in your heart!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 5 4 a339 figs-metaphor τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο? 1 How is it that you placed this thing in your heart? Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts. Alternate translation, as an exclamation: “You should not have placed this thing in your thoughts!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 4 a340 figs-metaphor τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο? 1 How is it that you placed this thing in your heart? Peter speaks of **this thing**, that is, the plan to keep back some of the money, as if Ananias had **placed** it in his **heart**, meaning his thoughts. Alternate translation, as an exclamation: “You should not even have thought of doing such a thing!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 4 a341 figs-metonymy οὐκ ἐψεύσω ἀνθρώποις, ἀλλὰ τῷ Θεῷ 1 You have not lied to men, but to God Ananaias actually has **lied to men**, but Peter is speaking of the ultimate implications of his act. As in the previous verse, where Peter says that Ananias has lied to the Holy Spirit, here he means that Ananias has lied to the apostles and other believers, and God is present in them. So by lying to them, he has effectively also lied to God. Alternate translation: “You have not lied merely to men, but also to God, who is present in us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 4 a342 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώποις 1 to men Peter is using the term **men** in a generic sense to mean “human beings.” Alternate translation: “to human beings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 5 5 a343 figs-metonymy ἀκούων δὲ & τοὺς λόγους τούτους 1 And hearing these words Luke is using the term **words** to mean what Peter used words to say. Alternate translation: “When he heard what Peter said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 5 cc5y figs-euphemism πεσὼν ἐξέψυξεν 1 falling down, expired The word translated **expired** means that Ananias “breathed out for the last time.” It is a mild way of saying that he died. Alternate translation: “fell down and died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
|
||
ACT 5 5 a344 figs-events πεσὼν ἐξέψυξεν 1 falling down, expired Ananias fell down because he died. He did not die because he fell down. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to say first that he died and then that he fell. Alternate translation: “died and fell to the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
|
||
ACT 5 5 a345 figs-personification ἐγένετο φόβος μέγας ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας 1 great fear came upon all who heard Luke describes this **fear** as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Here the word **fear** describes a deep respect for God. Alternate translation: “everyone who heard about it came to feel a very deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 5 6 a346 figs-idiom ἀναστάντες δὲ, οἱ νεώτεροι συνέστειλαν αὐτὸν 1 rising up, the young men wrapped him up Here the expression **rising up** means that the young men took an action that they recognized they needed to take. It does not mean that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “the young men took action and wrapped him up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 5 6 a347 figs-explicit οἱ νεώτεροι 1 the young men This could refer to: (1) some strong young men who were present who realized that burying Ananias was a task they could help with. Alternate translation: “some strong young men who were present” (2) a group of young men among the believers who regularly helped the apostles with tasks that required physical strength. Alternate translation: “the young men who regularly helped the apostles with physical tasks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 6 a348 translate-unknown συνέστειλαν αὐτὸν 1 wrapped him up It was the custom in this culture to wrap linen cloths around the bodies of people who had died, in order to prepare the bodies for burial. If your readers would not be familiar with such a custom, you could describe it more specifically, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “wrapped a linen burial cloth around his body” or “prepared his body for burial” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 5 7 a349 figs-idiom ἐγένετο δὲ ὡς ὡρῶν τριῶν διάστημα, καὶ 1 And an interval of about three hours happened, and This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time passing. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “After about three hours had gone by,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 5 7 ry54 writing-pronouns ἡ γυνὴ αὐτοῦ 1 his wife The pronoun **his** refers to Ananias. Alternate translation: “the wife of Ananias” or “Sapphira” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 7 k3c9 figs-explicit τὸ γεγονὸς 1 what had happened If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what this means. Alternate translation: “that Peter had exposed their lie and that her husband was dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 8 a350 ἀπεκρίθη & πρὸς αὐτὴν 1 said to her The word translated **said** means to continue or resume a conversation. Alternate translation: “asked her, based on what her husband had said”
|
||
ACT 5 8 a351 figs-youdual ἀπέδοσθε 1 you sold Since Peter is speaking of two people, Ananaias and Sapphira, **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
|
||
ACT 5 8 bcf6 figs-explicit τοσούτου & ναί, τοσούτου 1 for so much … yes, for so much This refers to the amount of money that Ananias had given to the apostles. Peter may be naming the amount or, as UST suggests, he may be showing Sapphira the money. Alternate translation: “for this amount of money … yes, for that amount of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 9 v7sw figs-rquestion τί ὅτι συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου? 1 How is it that it was agreed together by you to test the Spirit of the Lord? Peter is using the question form to rebuke Sapphira. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have agreed together to test the Spirit of the Lord!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 5 9 hc22 figs-activepassive συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν 1 it was agreed together by you If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you agreed together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 9 w1lb figs-you ὑμῖν & σου & σε 1 by you … your … you The word **you** in its first instance refers to two people, Ananias and Sapphira, so it would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. The word **your** and the word **you** in its second instance refer only to Sapphira, so those words are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||
ACT 5 9 pg1e πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου 1 to test the Spirit of the Lord Here the word **test** means to challenge. Ananias and Sapphira were trying to see if they could get away with lying about how much they received for the land they sold. Alternate translation: “to challenge the Spirit of the Lord”
|
||
ACT 5 9 a352 figs-metonymy πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου 1 to test the Spirit of the Lord Ananias and Sapphira actually tested or challenged the apostles, but Peter is speaking of the ultimate implications of their act, as he does similarly in [5:3](../05/03.md) and [5:4](../05/04.md). Since the Spirit of the Lord was present in the apostles, by challenging them, Ananias and Sapphira effectively lied to the Spirit. Alternate translation: “to test the Spirit of the Lord, who is present in us apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 9 a353 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, οἱ πόδες 1 Behold, the feet Peter says **Behold** to get Sapphira to focus her attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “And now the feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 9 xj1l figs-metonymy οἱ πόδες τῶν θαψάντων τὸν ἄνδρα σου ἐπὶ τῇ θύρᾳ 1 the feet of those who buried your husband are at the door Peter is referring to the return of the young men who buried Ananaias. Their **feet** represent them by association with the way they are using their feet to walk back. The **door** represents their return by association with the way they will come through the door when they return. Alternate translation: “the young men who buried your husband are just now returning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 9 a354 figs-explicit οἱ πόδες τῶν θαψάντων τὸν ἄνδρα σου ἐπὶ τῇ θύρᾳ 1 the feet of those who buried your husband are at the door Peter is telling Sapphira implicitly that her husband died as a judgment from God when Peter confronted him with the lie about the price of the land. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your husband died as a judgment from God when I confronted him with the lie you both told about the price of the land, and the young men who buried him are just now returning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 9 a355 figs-explicit καὶ ἐξοίσουσίν σε 1 and they will carry you out The implications are that Sapphira is also going to die and that the same young men will **carry** her **out** to bury her. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You are also going to die as a judgment from God, and those same young men are going to carry you out and bury you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 10 s7en figs-euphemism ἔπεσεν & πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐξέψυξεν 1 she fell down at his feet and expired The word translated **expired** means that Sapphira “breathed out for the last time.” It is a mild way of saying that she died. Alternate translation: “she fell down at his feet and died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
|
||
ACT 5 10 a356 figs-events ἔπεσεν & πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐξέψυξεν 1 she fell down at his feet and expired Sapphira fell down because she died. She did not die because she fell down. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to say first that she died and then that she fell. Alternate translation: “she died and fell down at his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
|
||
ACT 5 10 nwb9 figs-metonymy ἔπεσεν & πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ 1 she fell down at his feet This means that she fell to the ground in front of Peter. This expression should not be confused with the idea of “falling down at a person’s feet,” that is, bowing down to the ground in front of someone as a sign of humility. Alternate translation: “she collapsed onto the ground in front of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 10 a357 figs-explicit οἱ νεανίσκοι 1 the young men See how you translated this expression in [5:6](../05/06.md). However, it may not be necessary to explain again here who these **young men** were in terms of their role in the community. Instead, you could identify them by their role in the story. Alternate translation: “the same young men who had buried Ananias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 11 vym8 writing-endofstory καὶ 1 And This verse is the end of the story about Ananias and Sapphira. Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||
ACT 5 11 a358 figs-personification ἐγένετο φόβος μέγας ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, καὶ ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας ταῦτα 1 great fear came upon the whole church and upon all those hearing these things Luke describes this **fear** as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. See how you translated the similar expression in [5:5](../05/05.md). Alternate translation: “the whole church and everyone who heard about these things came to feel a very deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 5 12 c2e7 grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 And Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce background information in [5:12–16](../05/12.md) that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. You can translate this word with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
|
||
ACT 5 12 sri8 figs-metonymy διὰ & τῶν χειρῶν τῶν ἀποστόλων, ἐγίνετο σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα πολλὰ 1 many signs and wonders were happening through the hands of the apostles Luke is using the **hands** of the apostles to represent their actions. Alternate translation: “the apostles were doing many signs and wonders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 12 ux3n figs-doublet σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα 1 signs and wonders The terms **signs** and **wonders** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated this expression in [4:30](../04/30.md). Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 5 12 aud2 writing-pronouns ἦσαν & πάντες 1 they were all The pronoun **they** refers to the whole community of believers. Alternate translation: “the whole community of believers was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 12 a359 ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 unanimously The word **unanimously** indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in [1:14](../01/14.md). Alternate translation: “meeting together with one accord” or “meeting together harmoniously”
|
||
ACT 5 12 k99k translate-names τῇ Στοᾷ Σολομῶντος 1 the Porch of Solomon This was a covered walkway that consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof. It was named after King Solomon. See how you translated the phrase “the porch that is called Solomon’s” in [3:11](../03/11.md), which is a description of this same walkway. Alternate translation: “Solomon’s Porch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 5 13 a360 figs-explicit τῶν & λοιπῶν, οὐδεὶς 1 none of the others The expression **the others** refers to people who were not believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “none of the people who were not believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 13 a361 figs-explicit ἐτόλμα κολλᾶσθαι αὐτοῖς 1 dared to join them If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly why no unbelievers **dared to join them**. The reason seems to be that the Jewish leaders had commanded the apostles not to speak or teach about Jesus ([4:18](../04/18.md)), but they were still doing that. Later in this chapter, in [5:28](../05/28.md), the Sanhedrin indicates that it has arrested the apostles for violating that command. Alternate translation: “would meet with them, because the apostles were still preaching about Jesus even though the Jewish leaders had commanded them not to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 14 a362 figs-metonymy προσετίθεντο & τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 were being added to the Lord Luke says **the Lord** to mean the community of people who believed in the Lord. Alternate translation: “were being added to the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 14 m9wx figs-activepassive προσετίθεντο & τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 were being added to the Lord If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:41](../02/41.md). Alternate translation: “were becoming part of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 14 oxni writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 5 15 a364 grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 so that Luke says **so that** to introduce a result, but it is not the direct result of what he said just before, that many men and women became part of the church. It is the result of what he said in [5:12](../05/12.md), that the apostles were doing “many signs and wonders.” All of [5:12–15](../05/12.md) could be understood as a single sentence, and in that case what Luke says here would more clearly follow logically and grammatically from what he says in [5:12](../05/12.md). However, ULT divides the material into several sentences, which is another way in which it can be understood. UST models a way to show how what Luke says here introduces a result of what he said in [5:12](../05/12.md) about the “signs and wonders” that the apostles were doing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 5 15 l9bs writing-pronouns ἐκφέρειν 1 they … carried The pronoun **they** refers to the people who lived in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “people who lived in Jerusalem … carried” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 15 a365 figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀσθενεῖς 1 the sick Luke is using the adjective **sick** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who were sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 5 15 a366 figs-doublet κλιναρίων καὶ κραβάττων 1 cots and mats The words **cots** and **mats** mean similar things. Luke could be using them together for emphasis, although he could also be describing two different ways that people managed to make their sick relatives and friends reasonably comfortable as they waited in the streets for Peter to walk by. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “improvised beds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 5 15 y2ev figs-explicit ἡ σκιὰ ἐπισκιάσῃ τινὶ αὐτῶν 1 his shadow might overshadow any one of them The implication is that God was healing sick people whom Peter’s shadow touched. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “his shadow might overshadow any one of them and God would heal that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 15 a367 ἡ σκιὰ ἐπισκιάσῃ τινὶ αὐτῶν 1 his shadow might overshadow Luke is using a construction in which the subject and verb come from the same root. You may be able to use the same construction in your language to express the meaning here. Alternatively, your language may have its own way of describing this. Alternate translation: “his shadow might fall on”
|
||
ACT 5 16 a368 figs-nominaladj ἀσθενεῖς 1 the sick See how you translated the expression **the sick** in [5:15](../05/15.md). Alternate translation: “people who were sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 5 16 fu1a figs-activepassive ὀχλουμένους ὑπὸ πνευμάτων ἀκαθάρτων 1 those afflicted by unclean spirits If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom unclean spirits were afflicting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 16 lyc7 figs-activepassive οἵτινες ἐθεραπεύοντο ἅπαντες 1 who were all healed If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “and the apostles healed them all” or “and God used the apostles to heal them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 16 a369 figs-hyperbole οἵτινες ἐθεραπεύοντο ἅπαντες 1 who were all healed It does not appear that **all** is a generalization for emphasis in this case. So it would not be accurate to treat **all** as figurative and say something like “and large numbers of them were healed.” Luke is describing what remarkable things God did through the apostles at this time, and he does seem to mean that every sick person whom the people brought to Jerusalem was healed. So it would be appropriate to say in your translation just what ULT says here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 5 17 x2ed grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 But Luke uses the word **But** to introduce a strong contrast into the story. Your language may have its own way of introducing a contrasting narrative. You could also refer back to the previous action in order to highlight the contrast. Alternate translation: “But even though the apostles were doing so much good,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
|
||
ACT 5 17 f9ye figs-events ἀναστὰς & ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου, 1 rising up, the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy The high priest and these Sadducees were first **filled with jealousy** and then they rose up (took action) against the apostles. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to describe the events in that order. Alternate translation: “the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy and they rose up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
|
||
ACT 5 17 pc45 figs-activepassive ἀναστὰς & ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου, 1 rising up, the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form **were filled**. Alternate translation: “jealousy filled the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) and they rose up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 17 a370 figs-idiom ἀναστὰς 1 rising up Here the expression **rising up** means that the high priest decided to take action, not that he stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “taking action” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 5 17 a371 figs-explicit πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων 1 all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) The phrase **all those with him** means specifically all the other priests who joined the high priest in taking action against the apostles. Luke observes here that those other priests were from the group known as the **Sadducees**. As a note to [4:1](../04/01.md) explains, they opposed the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and all of the priests from the group known as the Sadducees who wanted to oppose the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 17 a372 figs-abstractnouns ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου 1 were filled with jealousy If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **jealousy**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “jealous.” Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 17 a373 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου 1 were filled with jealousy Luke is speaking as if the high priest and his allies were containers that jealousy **filled**. Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 18 j58p figs-metonymy ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους 1 they laid hands on the apostles The expression **laid hands on** means to arrest someone by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their **hands**. Alternate translation: “they arrested the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 18 a374 figs-synecdoche ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους 1 they laid hands on the apostles The high priest and his allies did not arrest the apostles personally. They would have ordered the temple guards to arrest them. But Luke speaks as if the high priest and his allies did this action because they had a significant part in it by ordering it. Alternate translation: “they had the temple guards arrest the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 5 19 wd37 writing-pronouns ἐξαγαγών & αὐτοὺς 1 bringing them out The pronoun **them** refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “bringing the apostles out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 20 qm16 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when the angel says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 20 z1x3 figs-metonymy πάντα τὰ ῥήματα τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης 1 all the words of this life The angel is using the term **words** to mean the message that the apostles were to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the entire message about this life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 20 a375 τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης 1 of this life Alternate translation: “about the everlasting life that God gives through Jesus” or “about the new way of living that people can have as followers of Jesus”
|
||
ACT 5 21 a376 figs-idiom ἀκούσαντες 1 having heard this Luke may be using the word “hear” in an idiomatic sense to mean “obey.” Alternate translation: “in obedience to this command from the angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 5 21 df1u figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν 1 into the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 21 l7uf figs-explicit ὑπὸ τὸν ὄρθρον 1 about daybreak The implication is that although the angel led the apostles out of the jail during the night, the sun was rising by the time they reached the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “as it was beginning to get light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 21 a377 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous δὲ 1 And Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce other events that took place around the same time as the events he has just described. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
|
||
ACT 5 21 a378 figs-explicit παραγενόμενος 1 having arrived This does not mean that the high priest and his allies **arrived** in the temple courtyard where the apostles were. Rather, it means that they went into the chamber where the Sanhedrin met so that they could summon the rest of its members to join them there. Alternate translation: “having arrived in the council chamber” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 21 a379 figs-explicit τὸ Συνέδριον καὶ πᾶσαν τὴν Γερουσίαν τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ 1 the Sanhedrin, even all the elders of the sons of Israel The phrase **even all the elders of the sons of Israel** clarifies the name **Sanhedrin** by describing it membership. Luke is using the word **elders** here in a general sense to mean “leaders.” He is not making a distinction between “elders” and “rulers” as he does in [4:5](../04/05.md). Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, which was composed of the leaders of the sons of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 21 a380 figs-metaphor τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ 1 the sons of Israel Here, **sons** means “descendants.” Luke is identifying the Israelites as descendants of their ancestor Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 21 li6a figs-ellipsis ἀπέστειλαν εἰς τὸ δεσμωτήριον 1 sent to the prison Luke is leaving out a word that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. He means that the high priest and his allies sent someone to the prison to get the apostles. Alternate translation: “sent someone to the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 5 23 a381 figs-activepassive τὸ δεσμωτήριον εὕρομεν κεκλεισμένον ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ, καὶ τοὺς φύλακας 1 We found the prison shut in all security and the guards If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an active verbal form in place of the passive form **shut**, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “We found that the guards had shut the prison in all security and we found the guards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 23 a382 figs-abstractnouns ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ 1 in all security If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **security**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “securely.” The word **all** is an intensifier. Alternate translation: “very securely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 23 a383 figs-explicit ἀνοίξαντες 1 having opened Your language may require you to specify the object of **opened**. Alternate translation: “once we opened the doors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 23 ld7d figs-hyperbole ἔσω οὐδένα εὕρομεν 1 we found no one inside By **no one**, the officers mean that they found none of the men they had been sent to bring, that is, none of the apostles. It is possible that other people were also being held in the prison, but the angel would not have released them, and they would still have been inside. Alternate translation: “we did not find any of the apostles inside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 5 24 k5g6 figs-metonymy τοὺς λόγους τούτους 1 these words Luke is using the term **words** to mean the report that the officers gave. Alternate translation: “this report” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 24 baw2 writing-pronouns περὶ αὐτῶν 1 concerning them The pronoun **them** does not refer to the apostles but to the **words** that the officers spoke in giving their report. Alternate translation: “about the things the officers had told them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 24 p78m figs-idiom τί ἂν γένοιτο τοῦτο 1 as to what this might become The expression **what this might become** refers to a possible result. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “wondering what would happen as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 5 25 a384 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, οἱ ἄνδρες 1 Behold, the men This person says **Behold** to get the council members to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “Right now the men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 25 a8dz figs-you ἔθεσθε 1 you put Here the word **you** refers to the captain of the temple and the chief priests and so it is plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||
ACT 5 25 c1am figs-explicit ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, ἑστῶτες 1 standing in the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when the messenger says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “standing in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 26 e24h writing-pronouns τότε ἀπελθὼν, ὁ στρατηγὸς σὺν τοῖς ὑπηρέταις ἦγεν αὐτούς, οὐ μετὰ βίας, ἐφοβοῦντο γὰρ τὸν λαόν, μὴ λιθασθῶσιν 1 Then the captain, going with the officers, brought them back, not with violence, for they feared the people, lest they stone them The first instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the apostles, but the second instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the captain and the officers. The captain and officers were not afraid that the people would stone the apostles. They were afraid that they would be stoned themselves if they used violence against the apostles. You could reword this to make the referents clear. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “Then the captain went with the officers and brought the apostles back. But the captain and officers did not use any violence, because they were afraid that the people would stone them if they did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 27 iq7w writing-pronouns ἀγαγόντες δὲ αὐτοὺς 1 And having brought them The pronoun **them** refers to the apostles in all three instances in this verse. It may be helpful to specify this here in the first instance. Alternate translation: “Once they had brought the apostles back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 28 a385 παραγγελίᾳ παρηγγείλαμεν ὑμῖν 1 We commanded you with a command For emphasis, the high priest is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. If your language uses the same construction for emphasis, it would be appropriate to use it here in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of conveying this emphasis. Alternate translation: “we commanded you very strictly”
|
||
ACT 5 28 f7pz figs-you ὑμῖν & πεπληρώκατε & ὑμῶν & βούλεσθε 1 you … you have filled … your … you desire In this verse the words **you** and **your** refer to the apostles, and so those words are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||
ACT 5 28 g2hi figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ 1 in this name The high priest is using the term **name** to mean the person of Jesus. See how you translated the similar expression in [4:17](../04/17.md). Alternate translation: “about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 28 a386 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, πεπληρώκατε 1 behold, you have filled The high priest says **behold** to get the apostles to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “nevertheless you have filled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 28 j4kr figs-metaphor πεπληρώκατε τὴν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τῆς διδαχῆς ὑμῶν 1 you have filled Jerusalem with your teaching The high priest is speaking of the city of **Jerusalem** as if it were a container that the apostles had **filled** with their teaching. Alternate translation: “you have taught people who live in every part of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 28 a387 figs-metaphor βούλεσθε ἐπαγαγεῖν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς 1 you desire to bring upon us The high priest is speaking as if the apostles wanted to put the blood of Jesus on him and his fellow Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you want to make us responsible for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 28 a388 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 us By **us**, the high priest means himself and his fellow Jewish leaders, but not the apostles to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 5 28 ym1k figs-metonymy τὸ αἷμα 1 the blood The high priest is using the term **blood** to mean death by association with the way Jesus’ blood was shed when he died. Alternate translation: “the death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 28 a389 figs-explicit τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τούτου 1 this man The phrase **this man** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “this man Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 29 a390 figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς & Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι εἶπαν 1 answering, Peter and the apostles said Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Peter and the other apostles responded to the high priest. Alternate translation: “Peter and the apostles responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 5 29 di9u figs-explicit Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι εἶπαν 1 Peter and the apostles said Luke seems to mean implicitly that Peter said what follows on behalf of all of the apostles. Alternate translation: “Peter said on behalf of all of the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 29 a391 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώποις 1 men Peter is using the term **men** in a generic sense to mean “human beings.” Alternate translation: “human beings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 5 30 a392 figs-metaphor τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 of our fathers Peter is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 30 kwsc figs-gendernotations τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 Although the term **fathers** is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could state “of our fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 5 30 r7av figs-idiom ἤγειρεν Ἰησοῦν 1 raised up Jesus As in [2:24](../02/24.md), the idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “brought Jesus back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 5 30 a393 figs-you ὃν ὑμεῖς διεχειρίσασθε 1 whom you killed The word **you** is plural. Even though Peter is responding to the high priest, who has been interrogating the apostles, Peter is referring here to the entire council. If your language does not use separate forms for singular and plural “you,” you could indicate that in some other way. Alternate translation: “whom you Sanhedrin members killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||
ACT 5 30 a394 figs-synecdoche ὃν ὑμεῖς διεχειρίσασθε 1 whom you killed It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says that the Sanhedrin members killed him because their demands led to his death. Alternate translation: “whom you demanded to be killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 5 30 pu5j figs-metonymy κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου 1 having hung him on a tree The word translated as **tree** can mean either an actual tree or something made of wood. Peter is using the word to refer to the cross, which was made out of wood. Alternate translation: “having hung him on a wooden cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 30 a395 figs-explicit κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου 1 having hung him on a tree In some languages the word **hung** would suggest a different method of execution. For clarity, you could use a different word that might indicate the actual meaning better. Alternate translation: “having suspended him from a wooden cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 31 a396 figs-nominaladj τοῦτον 1 this one Peter is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Jesus. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “this Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 5 31 a397 figs-nominaladj τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ 1 to his right Peter is using the adjective **right** as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:25](../02/25.md). Alternate translation: “to his right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 5 31 uh2d translate-symaction τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ 1 to his right God placing Jesus at his **right** side was a symbolic way of giving him great honor. Alternate translation: “to a place of great honor next to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 5 31 mr1d figs-abstractnouns τοῦ δοῦναι μετάνοιαν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ καὶ ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν 1 to give repentance and forgiveness of sins to Israel If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **repentance** and **forgiveness**, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “to give the people of Israel an opportunity to repent and have God forgive their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 31 q1il figs-personification Ἰσραὴλ 1 Israel Peter is referring to all of the people of Israel as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 5 32 a398 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 we Peter is addressing the Sanhedrin, but he is using the word **we** to refer only to himself and the other apostles. So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive “us,” it would be accurate to use the exclusive form here. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that **we** is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “we apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 5 32 a399 figs-ellipsis καὶ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, ὃ ἔδωκεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς πειθαρχοῦσιν αὐτῷ 1 and the Holy Spirit, whom God has given to those obeying him Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and the Holy Spirit, whom God has given to those obeying him, is also a witness of these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 5 32 yml6 figs-explicit ὃ ἔδωκεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς πειθαρχοῦσιν αὐτῷ 1 whom God has given to those obeying him Here at the end of his response to the high priest, Peter is echoing what he said at the beginning: “It is necessary to obey God rather than men.” He is defining himself and his fellow apostles as people who are committed to obeying God and to testifying about Jesus even if the authorities forbid them to do that. Peter is saying that God has given the apostles the Holy Spirit to empower them to give that testimony in obedience to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “whom God has given us to empower us to obey him by testifying about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 33 abx6 writing-pronouns οἱ & ἀκούσαντες διεπρίοντο, καὶ ἐβούλοντο ἀνελεῖν αὐτούς 1 having heard this, they were furious and wanted to kill them The pronoun **they** refers to the council members and the pronoun **them** refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “the council members were furious when they heard this, and they wanted to kill the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 34 i2rr writing-participants τις & Φαρισαῖος ὀνόματι Γαμαλιήλ 1 a certain Pharisee, Gamaliel by name Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 5 34 a401 translate-names Γαμαλιήλ 1 Gamaliel **Gamaliel** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 5 34 a402 writing-background νομοδιδάσκαλος τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 a law teacher, honored by all the people Luke provides this background information about Gamaliel to help readers understand what happens next in the story, when the council members follow Gamaliel’s advice to be patient rather than acting immediately against the apostles. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. It may be helpful to do that in a separate sentence, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 5 34 fpr4 figs-activepassive τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 honored by all the people If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom all the people honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 34 a403 figs-hyperbole τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 honored by all the people The word **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “whom the people greatly honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 5 34 a404 translate-symaction ἀναστὰς 1 rising up Here, **rising up** means that Gamaliel stood up. He did that to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “standing up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 5 34 xk6g figs-explicit ἐκέλευσεν ἔξω & τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ποιῆσαι 1 commanded to put the apostles outside Your language may require you to specify the object of **commanded**. Alternate translation: “commanded the officers to take the apostles outside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 34 a405 figs-nominaladj βραχὺ 1 for a little Luke is using the adjective **little** as a noun in order to indicate a length of time. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could supply a word such as “while” to show this. Alternate translation: “for a little while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 5 35 a406 grammar-connect-time-sequential τε 1 And Luke is using the word translated **And** to indicate that Gamaliel spoke after the officers had taken the apostles out of the council chamber. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
|
||
ACT 5 35 a407 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται 1 Men, Israelites This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 5 35 ae1u figs-explicit προσέχετε ἑαυτοῖς ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις τί μέλλετε πράσσειν 1 pay attention to yourselves, what you are about to do to these men Gamaliel is warning the council members not to do something that they will later regret. He means “be very careful about what you do to these men,” and you could state that as an alternate translation. However, the implication is that the council should not kill the apostles, as [5:33](../05/33.md) says they want to do. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you need to be very cautious and not kill these men, because you might deeply regret that later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 36 a408 figs-idiom πρὸ & τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν 1 before these days Gamaliel is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “some time ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 5 36 a409 translate-names Θευδᾶς 1 Theudas **Theudas** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 5 36 uaj6 figs-metaphor ἀνέστη 1 rose up In this context, **rose up** means that Theudas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 36 b3nl figs-idiom λέγων εἶναί τινα ἑαυτόν 1 saying himself to be somebody In this context, the expression **somebody** means a person of importance. Your language may use this expression in the same way. Or, if it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “saying that he was an important person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 5 36 a410 figs-activepassive ᾧ προσεκλίθη ἀνδρῶν ἀριθμὸς 1 to whom was joined a number of men If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom a number of men joined” or, as a new sentence, “A number of men joined him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 36 ie3x figs-activepassive ὃς ἀνῃρέθη 1 who was killed If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. It may be helpful to begin another new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom the Romans killed” or, as a new sentence, “But the Romans killed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 36 juz1 figs-activepassive ὅσοι ἐπείθοντο αὐτῷ 1 as many as were persuaded by him If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as many as he had persuaded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 36 a411 figs-activepassive διελύθησαν 1 were dispersed If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “dispersed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 36 rzg5 καὶ ἐγένοντο εἰς οὐδέν 1 and they came to nothing Alternate translation: “and their plans did not succeed”
|
||
ACT 5 37 f33y figs-nominaladj μετὰ τοῦτον 1 After this one Gamaliel is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Theudas. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could use a pronoun or this man’s name. Alternate translation: “After him” or “After Theudas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 5 37 a412 translate-names Ἰούδας ὁ Γαλιλαῖος 1 Judas the Galilean The word **Judas** is the name of a man. See how you translated the same name in [1:13](../01/13.md) and [1:16](../01/16.md). (Those verses describe two other men with this name, not the same Judas as here.) **Galilean** is the name for someone who is from the region of Galilee. See how you translated that name in [1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 5 37 a413 figs-metaphor ἀνέστη 1 rose up As in [5:36](../05/36.md), **rose up** here means that Judas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 37 p56f figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῆς ἀπογραφῆς 1 in the days of the census Gamaliel is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at the time of the census” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 5 37 kz4s figs-idiom ἀπέστησε λαὸν ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ 1 drew away people after him Here, **drew away** is an idiom that means Judas persuaded people to rebel with him against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “persuaded people to join him in rebellion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 5 37 a414 figs-nominaladj κἀκεῖνος 1 That one also Gamaliel is using the demonstrative adjective **that** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Judas. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you use a pronoun or this man’s name. Alternate translation: “He also” or “Judas also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 5 37 a415 figs-activepassive ὅσοι ἐπείθοντο αὐτῷ 1 as many as were persuaded by him If your language would not use the passive form **were persuaded**, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as many as he had persuaded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 37 a416 figs-activepassive διεσκορπίσθησαν 1 were scattered If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “scattered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 38 i4bw καὶ τὰ νῦν λέγω ὑμῖν 1 And now I say these things to you Gamaliel uses this expression to shift the council members’ attention away from the stories of Theudas and Judas so that he could give them some direct advice. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this same purpose.
|
||
ACT 5 38 a417 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Gamaliel is using the word translated **And** to introduce what he wants the council to conclude as a result of the two examples he has given. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 5 38 wz89 ἀπόστητε ἀπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων τούτων καὶ ἄφετε αὐτούς 1 keep away from these men and release them When Gamaliel tells the council to **keep away from these men**, he implicitly means that they should not execute them, as [5:33](../05/33.md) says they wanted to do. Alternate translation: “do not execute these men or put them back in prison”
|
||
ACT 5 38 zh1d ἐὰν ᾖ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων, ἡ βουλὴ αὕτη ἢ τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο 1 if this counsel or this work is from men Alternate translation: “if men have devised this plan or are doing this work”
|
||
ACT 5 38 a418 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 men Gamaliel is using the term **men** in a generic sense to mean “humans.” Since he contrasts **from men** here with “from God” in the next verse, it may be appropriate to add the word “mere” to help show that contrast. Alternate translation: “mere humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 5 38 uql8 figs-activepassive καταλυθήσεται 1 it will be destroyed If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “someone will destroy it” or “it will not last” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 39 a419 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 but Gamaliel uses this word to introduce a contrast between what would happen if the work the apostles are doing were “from men” and what would happen if it were **from God**. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation, as a new sentence: “However,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
|
||
ACT 5 39 j819 writing-pronouns εἰ & ἐκ Θεοῦ ἐστιν 1 if it is from God Here the pronoun **it** refers back to the phrase “this counsel or this work” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “if God has devised this plan or commanded these men to do this work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 5 39 a420 figs-explicit μήποτε 1 lest It may be helpful to state the implications of the word **lest** explicitly. Alternate translation: “and if you do try to destroy them,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 5 39 a421 figs-activepassive καὶ θεομάχοι εὑρεθῆτε 1 you may even be found If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. However, since this is also an idiom (see next note), it would only be meaningful to do that in your translation if your language uses the verb “find” in the same idiomatic sense. Alternate translation: “people may even find you to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 39 a422 figs-activepassive εὑρεθῆτε 1 be found The expression **be found** means to turn out to be something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “turn out to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 39 cyp1 figs-activepassive ἐπείσθησαν & αὐτῷ 1 they were persuaded by him If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Gamaliel persuaded them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 40 z31c grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce what the Sanhedrin did as a result of Gamaliel’s advice. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 5 40 p6lz figs-synecdoche προσκαλεσάμενοι τοὺς ἀποστόλους, δείραντες παρήγγειλαν 1 summoning the apostles, having beaten them, they commanded them The Sanhedrin would have ordered their officers to bring back the apostles and beat them. They did not do those things personally. But Luke speaks as if they did do those things because they ordered them to be done. Alternate translation: “they had their officers bring back the apostles and beat them, and then they commanded them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 5 40 fca9 figs-metonymy λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 to speak in the name of Jesus The Sanhedrin members are using the term **name** to mean the person of Jesus. See how you translated the similar expression in [4:17](../04/17.md). Alternate translation: “to speak about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 41 a423 figs-metaphor ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Συνεδρίου 1 from the face of the Sanhedrin Luke is using the word **face** to mean “presence.” Alternate translation: “from the presence of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 5 41 cv8y figs-activepassive κατηξιώθησαν 1 they had been considered worthy If your language would not use the passive form **had been considered**, you could state this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “God had considered them worthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 5 41 lk82 figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος 1 for the Name Here, **the Name** means Jesus. Alternate translation: “for Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 42 jj94 writing-endofstory τε 1 And Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened after this story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||
ACT 5 42 kyp6 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 5 42 x424 figs-litotes οὐκ ἐπαύοντο, διδάσκοντες καὶ εὐαγγελιζόμενοι 1 they did not cease teaching and proclaiming the gospel Luke is expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “they continued to teach and to proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 6 intro z5r5 0 # Acts 6 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>Acts [6:7](../06/07.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the end of the first major part of the book.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### The distribution to the widows<br><br>The believers in Jerusalem gave food every day to women whose husbands had died. All of them had been raised as Jews, but some of them spoke Hebrew and had lived mostly in Judea, while others spoke Greek and may have lived in Gentile areas. Those who gave out the food gave it to the Hebrew-speaking widows but not equally to the Greek-speaking widows. To please God, the church leaders appointed Greek-speaking men to make sure the Greek-speaking widows received their share of the food. One of these Greek-speaking men was Stephen.<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “His face was like the face of an angel”<br><br>No one knows for sure what it was about Stephen’s face that was like the face of an angel, because Luke does not tell us. A note to this phrase offers one suggestion, which you may choose to follow. However, you might also decide to say only what the ULT says about this.
|
||
ACT 6 1 f8br writing-newevent ἐν δὲ ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 Now in those days Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 6 1 cg5t figs-idiom ἐν & ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 in those days Luke is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 6 1 e7vb translate-names τῶν Ἑλληνιστῶν 1 of the Hellenists **Hellenists** was the name for Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke the Greek language and followed Greek customs. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 6 1 s4qy figs-activepassive παρεθεωροῦντο ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ αἱ χῆραι αὐτῶν 1 their widows were being overlooked in the daily service If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you can say who was doing the action. Alternate translation: “those who were distributing food each day were overlooking their widows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 6 1 rde8 figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ 1 in the daily service If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **service**, you could express the same idea with an equivalent expression. Alternate translations: “by those who were distributing food each day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 6 2 kwvo grammar-connect-logic-result δὲ 1 So Luke is using the word **So** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this same purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 6 2 n5r4 figs-nominaladj οἱ δώδεκα 1 the Twelve Luke is using the adjective **Twelve** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people, the apostles who led the church. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 6 2 is74 translate-names οἱ δώδεκα 1 the Twelve Alternatively, even if your language does not ordinarily use adjectives as nouns, you may be able to do that in this case, since this is a title by which the apostles were known. Even though it is a number, if you translate it as a title, as ULT does, follow the conventions for titles in your language. For example, capitalize main words and write out numbers rather than use digits. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 6 2 jm17 figs-metaphor καταλείψαντας τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to leave behind the word of God The apostles are speaking as if they would walk away from the **word of God** and **leave** it **behind** them. Alternate translation: “to stop preaching and teaching the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 6 2 w9re figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 6 2 fwk6 figs-metaphor διακονεῖν τραπέζαις 1 to serve tables To describe the work that would be required for them personally to monitor the church’s program of distributing food to people in need, the apostles speak as if they would be bringing food to people who were sitting at tables. Alternate translation: “to give our attention to food distribution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 6 3 lcyx figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 6 3 p1yz figs-activepassive ἄνδρας & μαρτυρουμένους 1 men being attested The expression **being attested** is a passive verbal form. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the same meaning with an active form. Alternate translation: “men to whose honesty people attest” or “men whom people say they trust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 6 3 mgid figs-metaphor πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας 1 full of the Spirit and of wisdom The apostles are speaking of these men as if they were containers that the Holy Spirit and wisdom could fill. Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who possess great wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 6 3 pxe5 figs-abstractnouns πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας 1 full of the Spirit and of wisdom If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wisdom**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “wisely.” Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who act very wisely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 6 3 i27a figs-metaphor ἐπὶ τῆς χρείας ταύτης 1 over this task When the apostles say that they will appoint these men **over** the work of food distribution, they are using a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “to be responsible for this task” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 6 4 b3bj figs-metonymy τοῦ λόγου 1 of the word The apostles are using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to teach and preach by using words. Alternate translation: “of teaching and preaching the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 6 5 wh9t figs-metonymy ἤρεσεν ὁ λόγος ἐνώπιον παντὸς τοῦ πλήθους 1 the statement was pleasing before the whole multitude Luke is using the word **before** to refer to the opinion of the believers, since people assess things that come to their attention in front of them. Alternate translation: “what the apostles recommended pleased all of the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 6 5 jayc grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 2 And Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce what the believers did as a result of the apostles’ request. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 6 5 ajq1 translate-names Στέφανον & Φίλιππον & Πρόχορον & Νικάνορα & Τίμωνα & Παρμενᾶν & Νικόλαον 1 Stephen … Philip … Prochorus … Nicanor … Timon … Parmenas … Nicolaus These are the names of seven men. They are all Greek names, and this suggests that all of the men selected were from the group of Greek-speaking Jews among the believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 6 5 vsyk figs-metaphor ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 a man full of faith and of the Holy Spirit Luke is speaking of Stephen as if he was a container that faith and the Holy Spirit had filled. Alternate translation: “a man who possessed great wisdom and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 6 5 yqsj figs-abstractnouns ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 a man full of faith and of the Holy Spirit If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trust.” Alternate translation: “a man who confidently trusted in God and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 6 5 cg5s translate-names Ἀντιοχέα 1 an Antiochian The name **Antiochian** describes a person who comes from the city of Antioch. Alternate translation: “who came from Antioch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 6 6 lvaj figs-events προσευξάμενοι, ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας 1 This could mean: (1) that the apostles first prayed and then placed their hands on these men. Alternate translation: “after they had prayed, they placed their hands upon them” (2) that the apostles placed their hands on the men while they were praying for them. Alternate translation: “they prayed for them with their hands placed upon them” or “they placed their hands upon them and prayed for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
|
||
ACT 6 6 wu1y translate-symaction ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας 1 and placed their hands upon them The apostles **placed their hands** on the seven men to show publicly that they were giving them the responsibility and authority to oversee the food distribution. Alternate translation: “and placed their hands on them to show that they were giving them responsibility and authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 6 7 x48w writing-endofstory 0 As the outline in the General Introduction indicates, this verse is the end of the first major section of the book of Acts. That section describes how the apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem. Luke uses this verse to summarize what happened as a result of the events within this whole section of the book. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such a summary relates to a significant part of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||
ACT 6 7 wu4l figs-metaphor ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν 1 the word of God was growing Luke is speaking of the way the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread as if the word of God itself were **growing**. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 6 7 ueie figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν 1 the word of God was growing Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that God told the believers to spread by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 6 7 jg8y figs-synecdoche ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει 1 became obedient to the faith Luke speaks generally of **the faith** (that is, belief in Jesus) to indicate that these priests **became obedient** to one part of it, Jesus’ teachings about how to live. But that obedience showed that the priests genuinely embraced faith in Jesus as Messiah in its entirety. Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 6 7 qq3l figs-abstractnouns ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει 1 became obedient to the faith If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believe.” Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 6 8 et2j writing-participants Στέφανος δὲ 1 Now Stephen Luke uses this phrase to introduce Stephen as the main character in this part of the story. Your language may have its own way of doing that. If so, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 6 8 pzr0 figs-metaphor Στέφανος & πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει 1 Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing Luke is speaking as if Stephen were a container that **grace and power** were filling. Alternate translation: “Stephen had abundant grace and power, and so he was doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 6 8 h8sg figs-hendiadys Στέφανος & πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει 1 Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing Luke may be using the two words **grace** and **power** together to express a single idea. The word **grace** would describe the character of the **power** that Stephen had. Specifically, it would be power that God was giving him. Alternate translation: “Stephen, full of gracious power, was doing” or “Stephen, full of power from God, was doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 6 8 xscq figs-abstractnouns Στέφανος & πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει 1 Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **grace** and **power**, you could express the same ideas with adverbs. Alternate translation: “Stephen was supernaturally and powerfully doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 6 8 m0zh figs-doublet τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα μεγάλα 1 great wonders and signs The terms **wonders** and **signs** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:22](../02/22.md). Alternate translation: “many great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 6 9 d74m figs-idiom ἀνέστησαν 1 rose up Here the expression **rose up** means that these people took action, specifically to oppose Stephen, not that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “took action to oppose Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 6 9 nei0 figs-activepassive τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων 1 the synagogue called Freedmen If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the synagogue whose name was Freedmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 6 9 k88n figs-explicit τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων 1 the synagogue called Freedmen The word **Freedmen** probably refers to former slaves. Alternate translation: “the synagogue that former slaves attended” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 6 9 e7b0 translate-names Κυρηναίων & Ἀλεξανδρέων & Κιλικίας & Ἀσίας 1 of the Cyrenians … of the Alexandrians … Cilicia … Asia The word **Cyrenians** is the name for people from the city of Cyrene, and the word **Alexandrians** is the name for people from the city of Alexandria. The words **Cilicia** and **Asia** are the names of two Roman provinces. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 6 10 v5ia figs-idiom οὐκ ἴσχυον ἀντιστῆναι 1 they were not able to stand against In this context, the expression **stand against** means to try to defeat by argument. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they could not argue successfully against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 6 10 fnb2 figs-hendiadys τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει 1 the wisdom and the Spirit with which he spoke Luke may be using the two words **wisdom** and **Spirit** together to express a single idea. The word **Spirit** would describe the source and character of the **wisdom** that Stephen was displaying. The word **Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Spirit-inspired wisdom by which he spoke” or “the wisdom that the Holy Spirit gave him as he spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 6 10 psha figs-abstractnouns τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει 1 the wisdom and the Spirit with which he spoke If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wisdom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “the wise things he said as the Spirit inspired him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 6 11 ren5 figs-explicit ὑπέβαλον ἄνδρας λέγοντας 1 they instigated men to say The word **instigated** means that Stephen’s opponents in some way persuaded these men to lie about what Stephen was saying. They may have offered them money, or they may have convinced them that Stephen was a dangerous person who needed to be stopped. Since Luke does not specify the means, it may be best not to suggest a means in your translation. But it would be appropriate to indicate that what these men were recruited to say about Stephen was a lie. Alternate translation: “recruited some men to lie about Stephen by saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 6 11 s2cl figs-exclusive ἀκηκόαμεν 1 We have heard The men are using the word **We** to refer only to themselves, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 6 11 x747 figs-metonymy λαλοῦντος ῥήματα βλάσφημα 1 speaking blasphemous words The men are using the term **words** to mean the things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying blasphemous things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 6 12 tqk9 writing-pronouns συνεκίνησάν 1 They … stirred up In this verse and the next one, the word “they” continues to refer back to the opponents of Stephen who are named in [6:9](../06/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 6 12 l251 figs-metaphor συνεκίνησάν τε τὸν λαὸν, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς 1 They also stirred up the people, the elders, and the scribes Luke says that Stephen’s opponents **stirred up** these other groups, as if calm waters were being disturbed. He means that they said things to make them very upset with Stephen. Alternate translation: “They also said things that made the people, the elders, and the scribes very upset with Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 6 13 zv6s figs-doublenegatives οὐ παύεται λαλῶν 1 does not stop speaking If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **stop**. Alternate translation: “continually speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 6 13 ju6w figs-metonymy λαλῶν ῥήματα 1 speaking words The men are using the term **words** to mean things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 6 13 o3j2 figs-metonymy τοῦ τόπου τοῦ ἁγίου 1 the holy place The men are describing the temple in Jerusalem by referring to it by something associated with it, that it is a **holy place**. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 6 14 uok4 figs-explicit τὸν τόπον τοῦτον 1 this place By **this place**, the false witnesses mean the temple, which they described as “the holy place” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “this temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 6 14 vak4 figs-metonymy τὰ ἔθη ἃ παρέδωκεν ἡμῖν Μωϋσῆς 1 the customs that Moses handed down to us The phrase **handed down** is an idiom that refers to something that is passed from generation to generation. The false witnesses are describing how the ancestors of the Jews have passed on the teachings originally received from Moses to each successive generation. Alternate translation: “the customs that our ancestors learned from Moses and have taught each successive generation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 6 15 k8rw figs-simile εἶδον τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ, ὡσεὶ πρόσωπον ἀγγέλου 1 saw his face as the face of an angel Luke offers this comparison but he does not say specifically in what way Stephen’s face was like **the face of an angel**. However, this may mean that his face was shining brightly, since descriptions of angels in the Bible often say they were shining brightly. So you might choose to say that in your translation. Alternate translation: “saw that his face was shining brightly, like the face of an angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
|
||
ACT 7 intro p9h4 0 # Acts 7 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>This chapter presents Stephen’s defense against the charges that false witnesses had made against him, as Luke describes in [6:13–14](../06/13.md). Those witnesses had said, “This man does not stop speaking words against the holy place and the law. For we have heard him say that this Jesus the Nazarene will destroy this place and change the customs that Moses handed down to us.” In response, Stephen shows that he respects the law, but he then shows how the Israelites have not kept the law. He next shows that he respects the temple, but he then explains that God does not live in temples made by people. Luke presents Stephen’s speech within the narrative setting of his trial by the Sanhedrin.<br>- (v. 1) The high priest asks Stephen to answer the charges against him<br>- (vv. 2–19) Stephen tells the story of the Israelites up to the time of Moses<br>- (vv. 20–37) Stephen explains how Moses gave the law<br>- (vv. 38–43) Stephen shows that the Israelites did not keep the law that Moses gave<br>- (vv. 44–47) Stephen tells how the tabernacle and temple were built<br>- (vv. 48–50) Stephen explains that God does not live in temples that people build<br>- (vv. 51–54) Stephen makes his own charges against the Sanhedrin members<br>- (vv. 55–60) The Sanhedrin members, enraged, execute Stephen by stoning<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 7:42–43 and 49–50.<br><br>A note to 7:36–38 suggests making each of these verses a separate paragraph or using formatting in some other way to highlight the repeated phrases that Stephen uses to describe Moses.<br><br>It appears that 8:1 is part of the narrative of this chapter.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### “Stephen said”<br><br>Stephen told the history of Israel very briefly. He paid special attention to the times that the Israelites had rejected the people God had chosen to lead them. At the end of the story, he said that the Jewish leaders he was talking to had rejected Jesus just as the evil Israelites had always rejected the leaders God had appointed for them.<br><br>### “Full of the Holy Spirit”<br><br>The Holy Spirit completely controlled Stephen so that he said only and all of what God wanted him to say.<br><br>### Foreshadowing<br><br>When an author speaks of something that is not important at that time but will be important later in the story, this is called foreshadowing. Luke mentions Saul in [7:58](../07/58.md), even though he is not an important person in this part of the story. This is because Saul, also known as Paul, is an important person in the rest of the Book of Acts.<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Implied information<br><br>Stephen was talking to Jews who knew the law of Moses well, so he did not explain things that his hearers already knew. But you may need to explain some of these things so that your readers will be able to understand what Stephen was saying. For example, you may need to make explicit that when Joseph’s brothers “sold him into Egypt” ([Acts 7:9](../act/07/09.md)), Joseph was going to be a slave in Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])<br><br>### Metonymy<br><br>Stephen spoke of Joseph ruling “over Egypt” and over all of Pharaoh’s household. By this he meant that Joseph ruled over the people of Egypt and of the people and possessions in Pharaoh’s household. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])<br><br>## Important Textual issues in this Chapter<br><br>### “a dwelling for the house of Jacob” (7:46)<br><br>In [7:46](../07/46.md), some ancient manuscripts read “a dwelling for the house of Jacob.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “a dwelling for the God of Jacob.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Background knowledge<br><br>The Jewish leaders to whom Stephen spoke already knew much about the events he was describing. They knew what Moses had written in the book of Genesis. If the book of Genesis has not been translated into your language, it may be difficult for your readers to follow what Stephen said. It may be helpful to provide some background information, either in the text or in notes.<br><br>### Reference of “our” and “you”<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Stephen uses the word “our” to refer to himself and to his listeners. When he means only them, he says “you,” and “you” is plural.
|
||
ACT 7 1 hy9r figs-explicit ὁ ἀρχιερεύς 1 Connecting Statement: Luke assumes that his readers will know that **the high priest** was there and that he asked Stephen to testify because he was a member of the Sanhedrin and its leader. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the high priest, who was the leader of the Sanhedrin,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 2 abc7 writing-pronouns ὁ δὲ ἔφη 1 Then he said The pronoun **he** refers to Stephen, not the high priest. Alternate translation: “Then Stephen said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 2 zbq0 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 The phrase **Men, brothers and fathers** is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You brothers and fathers of mine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 2 v5si figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 brothers, and fathers, listen to me Stephen is using the word **brothers** to refer to his fellow Israelites. He is likely using the word **fathers** to refer to the leaders of Israel, the members of the Sanhedrin. In both cases he is speaking respectfully. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites and you leaders of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 2 kfep figs-abstractnouns ὁ Θεὸς τῆς δόξης 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **glory** with an adjective such as “glorious.” Alternate translation: “The glorious God” or “God, who is glorious,” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 2 n09p figs-explicit ὁ Θεὸς τῆς δόξης 1 Stephen apparently chooses to describe God in this way at the beginning of his speech in order to refute the charge made in [6:11](../06/11.md) that he says blasphemous things about God. Calling him the **God of glory** acknowledges that people should rightfully give glory to God. You might choose to bring out this implication in your translation. Alternate translation: “God, to whom we should rightfully give glory,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 2 pt4h figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here and throughout this chapter, Stephen is using the word **our** to refer to himself and to his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 7 2 w1ya figs-metaphor τῷ πατρὶ ἡμῶν Ἀβραὰμ 1 Stephen is using the term **father** to mean “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “to Abraham our ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 3 uksj figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτόν, ἔξελθε ἐκ τῆς γῆς σου καὶ ἐκ τῆς συγγενείας σου, καὶ δεῦρο εἰς τὴν γῆν ἣν ἄν σοι δείξω 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this verse so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “God told Abraham to go out from his land and from his relatives and come into the land that he would show him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 7 3 kgef writing-pronouns εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτόν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to God, while the pronoun **him** refers to Abraham. Alternate translation: “God said to Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 4 pfg3 writing-pronouns κατῴκησεν & αὐτοῦ & μετῴκισεν αὐτὸν 1 The pronouns **his** and **him** and the first instance of the word **he** refer to Abraham, while the second instance of the word **he** refers to God. For clarity, in your translation you might say “Abraham lived” and “God brought him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 4 pfg4 figs-you ὑμεῖς 1 you The word **you** is plural. Stephen is using it to refer not just to the high priest, whose question he is answering, but also to all of the council members and the others who are listening to him. So you can use the plural form of the word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
|
||
ACT 7 5 tnsm writing-pronouns οὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ & ἐπηγγείλατο & αὐτῷ & αὐτοῦ & αὐτόν & οὐκ ὄντος αὐτῷ 1 The pronouns **him** and **his** and the third instance of **he** refer to Abraham, while the first two instances of **he** refer to God. For clarity, in your translation you might say “God did not give Abraham,” “God promised,” and “although Abraham did not have.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 5 ax1j οὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ κληρονομίαν ἐν αὐτῇ 1 he did not give him an inheritance in it Alternate translation: “he did not give any of it to him as an inheritance”
|
||
ACT 7 5 qff6 figs-explicit οὐδὲ βῆμα ποδός 1 not even a stride of a foot This could mean: (1) not enough ground to stand on or (2) not enough ground on which to take a step. Either way, the expression is implicitly describing a very small area. Alternate translation: “not even a tiny piece of ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 5 u6iw figs-metaphor αὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν & καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν 1 to him for a possession, and to his seed after him The term **seed** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “to him for a possession, and to his descendants after him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 5 j09v figs-abstractnouns αὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν & καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **possession** with a verb such as “possess.” Stephen is saying that Abraham possessed the land in the sense that it was something that God had promised to him but that it was his descendants who came into actual possession of it. Alternate translation: “as something that his descendants would one day possess” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 6 orw2 figs-quotations ἐλάλησεν δὲ οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς ὅτι ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα αὐτοῦ, πάροικον ἐν γῇ ἀλλοτρίᾳ, καὶ δουλώσουσιν αὐτὸ καὶ κακώσουσιν ἔτη τετρακόσια 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “But God spoke to him like this, ‘Your seed would be a stranger in a foreign land, and they will enslave him and treat him badly for 400 years’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 7 6 tn6b figs-explicit ἐλάλησεν & οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς 1 God spoke to him like this Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this occurred some time after the statement in the previous verse. It may be helpful to state that in your translation. Alternate translation: “Subsequently God told Abraham that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 6 jymv writing-pronouns ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα αὐτοῦ, πάροικον ἐν γῇ ἀλλοτρίᾳ, καὶ δουλώσουσιν αὐτὸ καὶ κακώσουσιν 1 Stephen is using the singular word **seed** to mean “descendants,” and so he uses the singular noun **stranger** and the singular pronoun **him**. For clarity in your translation, to show that he is not referring to a single individual, you could state “descendants” and “strangers” and use the plural pronoun **them**. Alternate translation: “his descendants would be strangers in a foreign land, whose people would enslave them and treat them badly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 7 k8pz figs-quotesinquotes καὶ τὸ ἔθνος ᾧ ἐὰν δουλεύσωσιν κρινῶ ἐγώ, ὁ Θεὸς εἶπεν; καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα, ἐξελεύσονται καὶ λατρεύσουσίν μοι ἐν τῷ τόπῳ τούτῳ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But God said that he would judge the nation that would enslave him and that after that they would come out and serve him in this place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 7 7 f7fw figs-metonymy τὸ ἔθνος 1 I will judge the nation Here, **nation** refers to the people who belong to that nation. Alternate translation: “the people of the nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 7 q7y6 writing-pronouns ἐὰν δουλεύσωσιν 1 the nation that will enslave him As in [7:6](../07/06.md), Stephen is using the singular pronoun **him** because he is using the singular word **seed** to mean “descendants.” For clarity, particularly if you said “descendants” in the previous verse, you could use the plural pronoun “them” instead. That would help readers recognize that Stephen also means Abraham’s descendants when he says “they” later in the verse. Alternate translation: “will enslave them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 8 iwfx writing-pronouns ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ & ἐγέννησεν 1 The first instance of the pronoun **he** refers to God, while the word **him** and the second instance of the pronoun **he** refer to Abraham. For clarity, in your translation you might say “God gave Abraham … Abraham fathered.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 8 mwc9 figs-explicit ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ διαθήκην περιτομῆς 1 God gave him the covenant of circumcision Stephen’s listeners would have known that this **covenant** required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family. Alternate translation: “he made a covenant that required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 8 g67f translate-names τὸν Ἰσαὰκ & τὸν Ἰακώβ 1 These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 7 8 ams1 figs-ellipsis καὶ Ἰσαὰκ τὸν Ἰακώβ, καὶ Ἰακὼβ τοὺς δώδεκα πατριάρχας 1 Jacob of the 12 patriarchs Stephen is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and Isaac fathered Jacob, and Jacob fathered the 12 patriarchs” or “and Isaac became the father of Jacob, and Jacob became the father of the 12 patriarchs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 7 8 gaww figs-explicit τοὺς δώδεκα πατριάρχας 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is using the word **patriarchs** to mean the sons of Jacob who became the ancestors of the tribes of Israel. Alternate translation: “12 sons who became the ancestors of the tribes of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 9 n981 translate-kinship οἱ πατριάρχαι 1 the patriarchs Here the word **patriarchs** refers to the older sons of Jacob in their relationship with Joseph. If you refer to them in your translation as Joseph’s brothers, use the word for an older brother if your language makes that distinction. Alternate translation: “Jacob’s older sons” or “Joseph’s older brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
|
||
ACT 7 9 tik7 figs-explicit ἀπέδοντο εἰς Αἴγυπτον 1 sold him into Egypt Stephen’s listeners would have known that this meant that their ancestors sold Joseph into slavery and that he was taken to Egypt to be a slave there. Alternate translation: “sold him into slavery and he was taken to Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 9 w1is figs-idiom ἦν & μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 was with him When Stephen says that God **was with** Joseph, this is an idiom that means God helped him. Alternate translation: “helped him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 10 kxgk writing-pronouns ἐξείλατο αὐτὸν ἐκ πασῶν τῶν θλίψεων αὐτοῦ; καὶ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ 1 In these phrases the word **he** refers to God and the words **him** and **his** refer to Joseph. Alternate translation: “God rescued Joseph from all his afflictions, and God gave Joseph” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 10 bfoo figs-abstractnouns ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ χάριν καὶ σοφίαν ἐναντίον Φαραὼ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **favor** and **wisdom** with adjectives. Alternate translation: “God made Pharaoh favorable towards Joseph and enabled Joseph to give Pharaoh wise advice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 10 vpir figs-idiom ἐναντίον Φαραὼ 1 Here the phrase **before Pharaoh** may be an idiom that means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “whenever he was in the presence of Pharaoh” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 10 s5vk figs-metonymy ἐναντίον Φαραὼ 1 The phrase **before Pharaoh** could also refer to Pharaoh’s opinion by association with the way that Pharaoh would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “in Pharaoh’s perspective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 10 nycs writing-pronouns κατέστησεν αὐτὸν ἡγούμενον ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον, καὶ ὅλον τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ 1 In these phrases the words **he** and **his** refer to Pharaoh and the word **him** refers to Joseph. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh appointed Joseph governor over Egypt and all his household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 10 yr7m figs-metonymy ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον 1 over Egypt The word **Egypt** refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “over all the people of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 10 pb4p figs-metonymy ὅλον τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ 1 over all his household The word **household** refers to Pharaoh’s own servants and all his possessions. Alternate translation: “over all his servants and everything he owned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 11 p42j figs-personification ἦλθεν & λιμὸς ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν Αἴγυπτον καὶ Χανάαν, καὶ θλῖψις μεγάλη 1 came a famine Here, Stephen speaks of **famine** and **tribulation** as if they **came** to Egypt and Canaan on their own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “there was a famine over all Egypt and Canaan, and there was great tribulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 7 11 frd4 figs-abstractnouns καὶ θλῖψις μεγάλη 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **tribulation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and people suffered greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 11 p37v figs-explicit οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Stephen is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” He means specifically Jacob and his sons (Joseph’s older brothers), as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 12 pia8 figs-explicit ὄντα σιτία εἰς Αἴγυπτον 1 grain Stephen assumes that his readers will know that with Joseph as his administrator, Pharaoh had stored up grain during prosperous years and was now selling it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that people could buy stored grain from Pharaoh in Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 12 cvhm figs-explicit ἐξαπέστειλεν τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν πρῶτον 1 By **first**, Stephen does not mean that Jacob sent Joseph’s older brothers to Egypt before he sent anyone else, or before he did anything else. He means that Jacob sent them for a first time and would later send them for a second time, as Stephen’s listeners would have understood. Alternate translation: “he sent our fathers on a first trip there to buy food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 12 mbg8 figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Stephen is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Here he means specifically Joseph’s older brothers, as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 13 a5f3 figs-nominaladj ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ 1 Stephen is using the adjective **second** as a noun, to mean the second time that Joseph’s brothers went to Egypt. ULT adds **time** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “when Jacob sent them to Egypt again to buy more food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 7 13 ce2b translate-ordinal ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ 1 On their second time If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “during trip number two” or “on their next trip” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||
ACT 7 13 m37e figs-activepassive ἀνεγνωρίσθη Ἰωσὴφ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς αὐτοῦ 1 was made known If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Joseph made himself known to his brothers” or “Joseph revealed to his brothers his identity as their brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 7 13 jxk8 figs-activepassive φανερὸν ἐγένετο τῷ Φαραὼ τὸ γένος Ἰωσήφ 1 the family of Joseph became known to Pharaoh The phrase **became known** is not actually a passive form in Greek, but it might sound like one in other languages. If your language does not use passive forms, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh learned that they were Joseph’s family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 7 14 aam5 grammar-connect-logic-goal ἀποστείλας & Ἰωσὴφ μετεκαλέσατο Ἰακὼβ 1 sending them back Stephen means that Joseph sent his brothers back home in order to get their father Jacob. Alternate translation: “Joseph sent his brothers back to Canaan to get Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
|
||
ACT 7 14 wl32 figs-idiom ἐν ψυχαῖς ἑβδομήκοντα πέντε 1 Stephen is using a Hebrew idiom here. Alternate translation: “who amounted to 75 people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 15 zasp figs-idiom κατέβη Ἰακὼβ εἰς Αἴγυπτον 1 Stephen says that Jacob **went down** because he traveled from the hilly and mountainous terrain of Canaan to the lowlying land of Egypt. Alternate translation: “Jacob traveled to Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 15 w2sm figs-explicit ἐτελεύτησεν αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 he and our fathers died Stephen’s listeners would have known that Jacob and his sons lived in Egypt for some time. Make sure that your translation does not make it sound as if they **died** as soon as they arrived in Egypt. Alternate translation: “eventually Jacob and our ancestors died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 15 fe56 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 he and our fathers Stephen is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Here he means specifically Jacob’s sons (Joseph’s older brothers), as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “Jacob and his sons who became our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 16 slg3 figs-activepassive μετετέθησαν εἰς Συχὲμ, καὶ ἐτέθησαν 1 they were carried over … and laid If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jacob’s descendants brought his body and his son’s bodies to Shechem and buried them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 7 16 la8a figs-metonymy τιμῆς ἀργυρίου 1 for a price in silver Stephen is referring to money by association with the way, in this culture, people used **silver** as money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for a sum of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 17 tuq2 figs-events καθὼς δὲ ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας & ηὔξησεν ὁ λαὸς καὶ ἐπληθύνθη 1 And as the time of the promise … approached, the people increased and multiplied In your language it may be helpful to say that the people **increased and multiplied** before saying that **the time of the promise** approached. Alternate translation: “the people increased and multiplied in Egypt as the time of the promise … approached” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
|
||
ACT 7 17 kh8g figs-personification καθὼς & ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, ἧς ὡμολόγησεν ὁ Θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ 1 Stephen is speaking of this **time** as if it were a person and could have **approached** on its own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “when it was almost time for God to fulfill the promise he had sworn to Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 7 17 tlh9 figs-explicit καθὼς & ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, ἧς ὡμολόγησεν ὁ Θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ 1 the time of the promise … approached Stephen is referring to **the promise** that he described in [7:7](../07/07.md). God promised Abraham that he would deliver his descendants from a nation that would enslave them and that he would bring them back to the land of Canaan. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as the time approached of the promise that God had sworn to Abraham, that he would deliver his descendants from slavery and bring them back to Canaan,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 17 s2oe figs-hendiadys ηὔξησεν ὁ λαὸς καὶ ἐπληθύνθη 1 Stephen is using the two words **increased** and **multiplied** together to express a single idea. The word **multiplied** tells in what way the people **increased**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “the people increased greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 7 18 whe7 figs-metaphor ἀνέστη βασιλεὺς ἕτερος ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον 1 there arose over Egypt another king When Stephen says that this next king **arose**, he is using a spatial metaphor to mean that this king began his reign. Alternate translation: “another king began to rule over Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 18 g2wq figs-metonymy ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον 1 over Egypt The word **Egypt** refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “over the people of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 18 e2y6 figs-metonymy ὃς οὐκ ᾔδει τὸν Ἰωσήφ 1 who did not know Joseph Stephen is not saying that this king **did not know Joseph** personally. Joseph had been dead for centuries by this point. Rather, **Joseph** refers to the reputation of Joseph. Alternate translation: “who did not know that Joseph had helped Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 19 qwbi writing-pronouns οὗτος 1 **He** refers to the new king of Egypt, not to Joseph. Alternate translation: “This king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 19 z312 figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας 1 Here and frequently throughout the rest of his speech to the Sanhedrin, Stephen is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If your readers might not understand this, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 19 ug6c figs-gendernotations τοὺς πατέρας 1 Although the term **fathers** is masculine, when Stephen uses it to mean “ancestors,” it has a generic sense that includes both men and women. Here and throughout the speech, if you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could state “our fathers and mothers” to indicate this generic sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 7 19 rh3k figs-explicit τοῦ ποιεῖν τὰ βρέφη ἔκθετα αὐτῶν 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that by **exposed** he means “left outside.” This was an unfortunate means of infanticide in the ancient world. Alternate translation: “forcing them to leave their babies outside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 19 n2vl figs-doublenegatives εἰς τὸ μὴ ζῳογονεῖσθαι 1 Stephen is using a double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the verb **keep alive**, which was negative from Pharaoh’s perspective, since it was contrary to his intentions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “in order to kill them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 7 20 nib6 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ἐν ᾧ καιρῷ 1 Stephen uses this phrase to introduce something that happened while Pharaoh was trying to kill the Israelite babies. Alternate translation: “While this was happening,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
|
||
ACT 7 20 q66s writing-participants ἐγεννήθη Μωϋσῆς 1 At that time Moses was born Here Stephen introduces **Moses** into his story. See how you translated his name in [3:22](../03/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 7 20 cz9w figs-activepassive ἐγεννήθη Μωϋσῆς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the birth of Moses took place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 7 20 cd5z figs-idiom ἦν ἀστεῖος τῷ Θεῷ 1 he was beautiful to God This could mean: (1) that Moses was **beautiful** in God’s perspective. Alternate translation: “God considered him to be beautiful” (2) in an idiiom, that Moses was very **beautiful**. Alternate translation: “he was very beautiful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 20 pnb1 figs-activepassive ὃς ἀνετράφη & ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ τοῦ πατρός 1 was nourished If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could make Moses’ parents the subject. Alternate translation: “his parents cared for him … in their home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 7 21 w3iu figs-activepassive ἐκτεθέντος δὲ αὐτοῦ 1 But when he was exposed Moses **was exposed** because of Pharaoh’s command. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the context suggests that it was Moses’ parents. Alternate translation: “when his parents had to place him outside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 7 21 el3b figs-metaphor ἀνείλατο αὐτὸν 1 This could mean: (1) that Pharaoh’s daughter adopted Moses. The verb can have this figurative legal meaning. Alternate translation: “adopted him” (2) that she lifted him up out of the basket he was in on the banks of the Nile. (This story is told in Exodus [2:1-10](../exo/02/01.md).) Alternate translation: “rescued him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 22 c9nw figs-activepassive ἐπαιδεύθη Μωϋσῆς πάσῃ σοφίᾳ Αἰγυπτίων 1 Moses was educated If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Egyptians educated Moses in all of their wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 7 22 att9 figs-hyperbole πάσῃ σοφίᾳ Αἰγυπτίων 1 in all the wisdom of the Egyptians Stephen says **all** as an exaggeration for emphasis. Alternate translation: “thoroughly in the wisdom of the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 7 22 m3dm δυνατὸς ἐν λόγοις καὶ ἔργοις αὐτοῦ 1 mighty in his words and works Alternate translation: “effective in his speech and actions” or “influential in what he said and did”
|
||
ACT 7 23 o4cg figs-idiom ὡς & ἐπληροῦτο αὐτῷ τεσσερακονταετὴς χρόνος 1 This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after Moses had turned forty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 23 b9gd figs-activepassive ὡς & ἐπληροῦτο αὐτῷ τεσσερακονταετὴς χρόνος 1 Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” and use an active verbal form instead of the passive form. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 7 23 ckxj figs-idiom ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ 1 The expression **it came up on his heart** means that Moses felt a desire. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he felt a desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 23 fj9s figs-metonymy ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ 1 it came into his heart Here, **heart** is a metonym for the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “he felt a desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 23 x493 figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ 1 to visit his brothers, the sons of Israel Stephen is using the word **brothers** to mean “kinsmen,” and he is using the word **sons** to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “his kinsmen, the descendants of Israel” or, if the word “Israel” might make your readers think of the nation rather than the person, “his kinsmen, the descendants of Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 23 i4ko figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ 1 Although the terms **brothers** and **sons** are masculine, Stephen is using these words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain the metaphor in your translation, you could state “brothers and sisters” and “sons and daughters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 7 24 l4zv figs-activepassive ἰδών τινα ἀδικούμενον 1 And seeing a certain one being mistreated, he defended him and made vengeance for the one being oppressed by striking the Egyptian If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was **the Egyptian** who is mentioned later in the verse. Alternate translation: “seeing an Egyptian mistreating an Israelite” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 7 24 y3yh figs-activepassive ἐποίησεν ἐκδίκησιν τῷ καταπονουμένῳ, πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “avenged him by striking the Egyptian who was oppressing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 7 24 r2e8 figs-explicit πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον 1 by striking the Egyptian Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses hit **the Egyptian** so hard that he died. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “striking and killing the Egyptian” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 25 hrsh figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 Stephen is using the word **brothers** to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “his kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 25 f6sn figs-abstractnouns δίδωσιν σωτηρίαν αὐτοῖς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. In context, the word refers to God using Moses to deliver the Israelites from slavery. Alternate translation: “was delivering them from slavery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 25 nhb9 figs-metonymy διὰ χειρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 by his hand was giving salvation to them Here, **hand** refers to the actions of Moses. Alternate translation: “through his actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 26 t2vc figs-explicit αὐτοῖς 1 to them as they were quarreling It is clear from the context that these were two Israelite men, though Stephen does not say that specifically. Alternate translation: “to two Israelite men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 26 qyc2 figs-youdual αὐτοῖς & αὐτοὺς & ἐστε & ἀδικεῖτε 1 Since Moses is speaking to two people, these uses of **them** and **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, they would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
|
||
ACT 7 26 mpc7 figs-abstractnouns συνήλλασσεν αὐτοὺς εἰς εἰρήνην 1 he urged them to peace If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he urged them to stop fighting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 26 kyde figs-quotesinquotes εἰπών, ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί ἐστε. ἱνα τί ἀδικεῖτε ἀλλήλους? 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “telling them that they were brothers and asking them why they were hurting each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 7 26 zzt4 figs-idiom ἄνδρες 1 Men, you are brothers This is an idiomatic form of address. Translate it with an expression that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Friends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 26 z5g2 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Moses is using the word **brothers** to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 26 k1ku figs-rquestion ἱνα τί ἀδικεῖτε ἀλλήλους? 1 Why is it that you are hurting each other? Moses is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not be hurting each other!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 7 27 xef7 writing-pronouns αὐτὸν 1 The word **him** refers to Moses, not to the neighbor. Alternate translation: “Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 27 iq30 figs-quotesinquotes εἰπών, τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν ἐφ’ ἡμῶν? 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “asking him who appointed him a ruler and a judge over them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 7 27 q2r4 figs-rquestion τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν ἐφ’ ἡμῶν? 1 Who appointed you a ruler and a judge over us? The man is using a rhetorical question to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one appointed you a ruler and judge over us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 7 27 wtq4 figs-doublet ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν 1 In this context, the words **ruler** and **judge** mean basically the same thing. The man is using repetition to emphasize the fact that he feels that Moses has no authority over them. If your language does not use repetition for such a purpose, you could use a single phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “an authority with power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 7 27 t1hw figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 The man is using the word **our** to refer to himself and to his neighbor, but not to Moses, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 7 28 vow8 figs-doublenegatives μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον 1 The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding **do you?** Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Do you want to kill me the way you killed the Egyptian yesterday” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 7 28 hk1g figs-rquestion μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον? 1 You do not want to kill me in the same way you killed the Egyptian yesterday, do you? The man is using a rhetorical question implicitly to threaten Moses by indicating that he and probably others knew that Moses had killed the Egyptian. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I suppose you want to kill me the way you killed the Egyptian yesterday!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 7 28 qfxh figs-quotesinquotes μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον? 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The man asked Moses if he wanted to kill him the way he had killed the Egyptian the day before.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 7 28 jxka ὃν τρόπον 1 Alternate translation: “in the same way in which”
|
||
ACT 7 29 l149 figs-explicit ἔφυγεν & Μωϋσῆς ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ 1 General Information: The implication is that Moses fled because he recognized that these Israelites, and probably others, knew that he had killed an Egyptian. Moses feared that he would be punished or even killed for this crime. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses ran away at this word to try to escape from being punished” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 29 rbhm figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ 1 Stephen is using the term **word** to mean what the man said by using words. Alternate translation: “at this statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 29 q8qv figs-explicit οὗ ἐγέννησεν υἱοὺς δύο 1 at this statement Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses married a Midianite woman when he fled from Egypt. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “where he married a Midianite woman and fathered two sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 30 zx1c figs-idiom πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα 1 And when 40 years were past This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after 40 years had gone by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 30 qci0 figs-activepassive πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα 1 Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” and use an active verbal form instead of the passive form. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 7 30 veft figs-idiom ὤφθη αὐτῷ & ἄγγελος 1 The word **appeared** does not mean that Moses simply saw this angel in a vision. Rather, this expression indicates that the angel was actually present with Moses. Alternate translation: “suddenly an angel was there with Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 30 f7yu figs-explicit ὤφθη αὐτῷ & ἄγγελος 1 an angel appeared Stephen assumes that his listeners know that God came to speak with Moses through the **angel**. The UST makes this explicit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 31 q6w6 figs-explicit ἐθαύμασεν τὸ ὅραμα 1 he marveled at the sight Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses **admired the sight** because the bush was not burning up, even though it was on fire. Alternate translation: “marveled at what he saw, because the fire was not consuming the bush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 31 uk7u figs-personification ἐγένετο φωνὴ Κυρίου 1 and as he approached to look at it Stephen is speaking of **the voice of the Lord** as if it were a person and that it **came** on its own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the Lord spoke to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 7 32 b26o figs-quotesinquotes ἐγὼ ὁ Θεὸς τῶν πατέρων σου, ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ Ἰακώβ 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Lord told Moses that he was the God of his fathers, the God of Abraham, and of Isaac, and of Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 7 33 bpml figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν & αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου, ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “the Lord told Moses to untie the sandals that were on his feet, because the place on which he was standing was holy ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 7 33 x7cd translate-symaction λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου, ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν 1 Untie the sandals In this culture, removing footwear was a symbolic way of acknowledging that a place was sacred. Footwear that had been worn elsewhere should not touch it. Your readers may understand the symbolic meaning of this action. If not, you could explain it in your translation. Alternate translation: “Untie your sandals and remove them to acknowledge that the place on which you are standing is holy ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 7 33 rxnj figs-explicit λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 The implication is that God wanted Moses not only to untie his sandals but also to remove them. Alternate translation: “Untie your sandals and remove them from your feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 33 xl9p τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 Since this refers to both sandals, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **sandals**. If your language uses the dual form, it would be appropriate to use that here. Alternate translation: “the sandals on your feet” or “the sandals you are wearing”
|
||
ACT 7 33 clk4 figs-explicit ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν 1 for the place on which you are standing is holy ground The implication is that where God is present, the immediate area around God is considered or made **holy** by God. Alternate translation: “for the place on which you are standing has been made holy by my presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 34 l0au figs-quotesinquotes ἰδὼν, εἶδον τὴν κάκωσιν τοῦ λαοῦ μου τοῦ ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ, καὶ τοῦ στεναγμοῦ αὐτῶν ἤκουσα, καὶ κατέβην ἐξελέσθαι αὐτούς; καὶ νῦν δεῦρο, ἀποστείλω σε εἰς Αἴγυπτον. 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Lord said that he had certainly seen the oppression of his people who were in Egypt and that he had heard their groaning and that he had come down to rescue them. He told Moses to get ready because he was sending him to Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 7 34 yz7b figs-idiom ἰδὼν, εἶδον 1 I have certainly seen Stephen is reproducing a Hebrew idiom from the biblical account of Moses at the burning bush. The verb **seen** is repeated in Hebrew. This repetition expresses the intensity, certainty, or clarity of Yahweh’s having seen how his people were being oppressed. This Hebrew practice of verb repetition for intensification cannot be directly translated into English. Use a natural form of strengthening a verb from your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 34 x5bg figs-possession τοῦ λαοῦ μου 1 of my people God uses the possessive word **my** to emphasize that these people were in a covenant relationship with him based on his promises to their ancestors. Alternate translation: “of the descendants of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 7 34 j32c figs-metaphor κατέβην ἐξελέσθαι αὐτούς 1 I have come down to rescue them God describes himself as having **come down** from heaven to earth to help the Israelites. His presence was in the burning bush, but he also means that he is taking action to **rescue** them. Alternate translation: “I will personally bring about their release” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 34 atdo grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 3 God is using the word translated **And** to introduce what he wants Moses to do as a result of what he has told him. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 7 34 sq8y figs-imperative νῦν δεῦρο 1 now come God is giving an order here. Alternate translation: “get ready” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
|
||
ACT 7 34 x34c figs-declarative ἀποστείλω σε εἰς Αἴγυπτον 1 God is not asking Moses’ permission when he says **let me send you to Egypt**. This is a way of saying “I will send you to Egypt,” and that statement in turn is functioning as a command. Alternate translation: “you must go to Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
|
||
ACT 7 35 x4p2 figs-litany τοῦτον τὸν Μωϋσῆν 1 General Information: Verses 35, 36, 37, and 38 contains a series of similar phrases emphasizing the role of Moses. Stephen says **This Moses**, “This one,” “This is the Moses,” and “This is the one.” If possible, use similar statements in your own translation to emphasize Moses. You may also wish to make each of these verses a separate paragraph or use formatting in some other way to highlight the repeated phrases. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
|
||
ACT 7 35 nv5g figs-quotesinquotes εἰπόντες, τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν? 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. See what you did in [7:27](../07/27.md). Alternate translation: “asking him who appointed him a ruler and a judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 7 35 vuqy figs-rquestion τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν? 1 See how you translated this rhetorical question in [7:27](../07/27.md). Alternate translation: “No one appointed you a ruler and a judge!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 7 35 oic6 figs-doublet ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστήν 1 See how you translated the combination of **ruler** and **judge** in [7:27](../07/27.md). Alternate translation: “an authority with power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 7 35 vp7e λυτρωτὴν 1 a redeemer In this context, the word translated **redeemer** refers to someone who delivers people from earthly troubles, not someone who brings eternal salvation. Alternate translation: “a rescuer”
|
||
ACT 7 35 yjz9 figs-metonymy σὺν χειρὶ ἀγγέλου 1 with the hand of the angel who appeared to him in the bush Here, **hand** is a metonym for the capability and actions of someone. Alternate translation: “accompanied by the power of the angel” or “through the actions of the angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 35 abc9 figs-idiom ὀφθέντος αὐτῷ ἐν τῇ βάτῳ 1 appeared to him See how you translated the word **appeared** in [7:30](../07/30.md). Here as well, the word does not mean that Moses simply saw this angel in a vision. Alternate translation: “who was with him at the bush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 36 gz9r figs-doublet τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα 1 during 40 years The terms **wonders** and **signs** mean similar things. Stephen is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:22](../02/22.md). Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 7 36 n75x translate-names Ἐρυθρᾷ Θαλάσσῃ 1 Stephen is using the name that was common in his culture, **the Red Sea**, to refer to the body of water that the Old Testament calls “the Sea of Reeds.” Decide whether you want to use the name that Stephen uses here or the name that you are using in your translation in the Old Testament, if they are different. Alternate translation: “the Sea of Reeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 7 37 k710 figs-quotesinquotes ὁ εἴπας τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραήλ, προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει ὁ Θεὸς, ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “who told the sons of Israel that God would raise up a prophet like him for them from their brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 7 37 vykp figs-metaphor τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραήλ 1 Stephen is using the word **sons** to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “to the descendants of Israel” or “to the descendants of Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 37 b4sg figs-idiom προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει & ὡς ἐμέ 1 will raise up a prophet Here, the expression **raise up** describes God giving someone the mission to go as a prophet to certain people. See how you translated it in [3:22](../03/22.md). Alternate translation: “will send you a prophet like me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 37 j2rx figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν 1 from among your brothers Stephen is using the word **brothers** to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “your kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 38 fd25 writing-pronouns οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ γενόμενος 1 This is the one **This is the one** refers to Moses. You may have decided to use similar language and special formatting in verses 35–38 to highlight the way Stephen is emphasizing Moses. However, if you think the reference would not be clear at this point, you could state his name. Alternate translation: “Moses is the one who was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 38 z1z7 figs-infostructure μετὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου τοῦ λαλοῦντος αὐτῷ ἐν τῷ Ὄρει Σινά, καὶ τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, ὃς ἐδέξατο λόγια ζῶντα 1 It might be more natural to put the information about **Mount Sinai** next to the information about Moses receiving **living words**. Alternate translation: “with our fathers and with the angel who was speaking to him on Mount Sinai, who received living words” or “with our fathers and with the angel who was speaking to him on Mount Sinai, where he received living words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 7 38 vdnz writing-pronouns τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, ὃς ἐδέξατο 1 This second instance of **who** in the verse refers to Moses, not to the **fathers**. For clarity, you could state his name and start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “with our fathers. Moses received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 38 y2zu figs-explicit ὃς ἐδέξατο λόγια ζῶντα 1 who received living words to give to us It may be helpful in your language to specify who gave Moses the **words** that he **received.** Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this was God. Alternate translation: “to whom God gave living words” or “to whom God spoke living words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 38 p3xk figs-metonymy λόγια ζῶντα 1 living words Stephen is using the term **words** to mean the message that God communicated through words. Alternate translation: “a living message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 38 w2gs figs-metaphor λόγια ζῶντα 1 Stephen is using the term **living** to describe God’s **words** as if they were alive. This could mean: (1) that God’s message is always effective. Alternate translation: “an enduring message” (2) that God’s message shows how to live as God wishes. Alternate translation: “a life-giving message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 39 ab0s writing-pronouns ᾧ οὐκ ἠθέλησαν ὑπήκοοι γενέσθαι οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 The word **whom** refers to Moses. It may be helpful to state his name and to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Our fathers were not willing to be obedient to Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 39 mvz8 figs-metaphor ἀπώσαντο 1 they pushed him away Stephen is speaking to emphasize the Israelites’ rejection of Moses. Alternate translation: “they rejected him as their leader” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 39 z3ze figs-metonymy ἐστράφησαν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν εἰς Αἴγυπτον 1 turned back in their hearts Here, **hearts** is a metonym for people’s desires. Alternate translation: “made it their desire to return to Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 40 l8u7 figs-quotesinquotes εἰπόντες τῷ Ἀαρών, ποίησον ἡμῖν θεοὺς οἳ προπορεύσονται ἡμῶν. ὁ γὰρ Μωϋσῆς οὗτος, ὃς ἐξήγαγεν ἡμᾶς ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, οὐκ οἴδαμεν τί ἐγένετο αὐτῷ. 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “They asked Aaron to make gods for them who would go ahead of them, because they did not know what had happened to Moses, who had brought them from the land of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 7 40 kb3o εἰπόντες τῷ Ἀαρών 1 It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They said to Aaron”
|
||
ACT 7 40 a68q figs-infostructure ὁ γὰρ Μωϋσῆς οὗτος, ὃς ἐξήγαγεν ἡμᾶς ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, οὐκ οἴδαμεν τί ἐγένετο αὐτῷ 1 It may be more natural to put the information about Moses at the end of the sentence. Alternate translation: “For we do not know what has happened to this Moses who brought us from the land of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 7 41 ux1j figs-explicit ἐμοσχοποίησαν 1 they made an image of a calf Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this **image of a calf** was a statue that the Israelites wanted to worship as an idol. Stephen refers to it as **the idol** later in the sentence. Alternate translation: “they made a statue that looked like a calf to worship as an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 41 v6tx figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 Stephen is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 41 hjp0 writing-pronouns ἐμοσχοποίησαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers back to “our fathers” in verse 39, that is, to the Israelites whom Moses led out of Egypt. Alternate translation: “the Israelites made an image of a calf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 41 hh77 figs-metonymy τοῖς ἔργοις τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν 1 they made an image of a calf … to the idol … the work of their hands Stephen describes what he also calls the **calf** and the **idol** as **the works of their hands** by association with the way the Israelites used their hands to make the calf. Alternate translation: “the statue they had made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 42 d3dd figs-metaphor ἔστρεψεν & ὁ Θεὸς 1 God turned away Stephen is speaking as if **God** had physically **turned away**. He speaks this way to emphasize that God was not pleased with the Israelites and no longer helped them. Alternate translation: “God stopped helping them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 42 u7lx figs-metaphor τῇ στρατιᾷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 the host of heaven Here, the word **host** means “army,” and the word **heaven** means “sky.” Stephen is speaking of the stars in the sky as if they were an army. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the stars in the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 42 ya6v figs-activepassive γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the book of the prophets says” or “the book of the prophets records” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 7 42 f314 figs-explicit βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν 1 the book of the prophets This was apparently a collection of the writings of several of the Old Testament prophets on one scroll. Alternate translation: “the scroll that records sayings of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 42 w38i figs-quotemarks μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ 1 This is the beginning of a quotation from the prophet Amos, which continues through the end of verse 43. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Amos as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 7 42 o5ly figs-doublenegatives μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ? 1 The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding **did you?** Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Did you offer slain beasts and offerings to me for 40 years in the wilderness, O house of Israel?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 7 42 gd1b figs-rquestion μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ? 1 You did not offer to me slain beasts and sacrifices for 40 years in the wilderness, did you, O house of Israel? Speaking through the prophet Amos, God used the question form to emphasize to the people of **Israel** that they did not really worship Him **in the wilderness** with their sacrifices. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You did not honor me when you offered slain beasts and sacrifices for 40 years in the wilderness, O house of Israel!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 7 42 q9rr figs-yousingular μὴ & προσηνέγκατέ 1 **You** is plural in these instances, even though the addressee (**house**) is singular, because God is actually speaking to all of the Israelites. If it would not be natural in your language to use the plural in such a case, you could use singular **you** in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
|
||
ACT 7 42 tck0 figs-merism σφάγια καὶ θυσίας 1 In a figure of speech, God is using the two main categories of sacrifices, those that involve shedding blood (**slain beasts**) and those that are bloodless (**offerings**), to mean sacrifices of all kinds. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “all kinds of sacrifices” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||
ACT 7 42 j4q8 figs-metaphor οἶκος Ἰσραήλ 1 O house of Israel Here, **house** means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So the **house of Israel** means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “nation of Israel” or “people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 43 zek5 καὶ ἀνελάβετε τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ, καὶ τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν, τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε προσκυνεῖν αὐτοῖς. καὶ μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος. 1 The quotation from the prophet Amos continues here.
|
||
ACT 7 43 h20h grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 **And** at the beginning of this verse introduces God’s own answer to the question he asked in the previous verse, [7:42](../07/42.md): “You did not offer slain beasts and offerings to me …, did you?” The answer is in contrast to what the question asks. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation, followed by a sentence break: “No!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
|
||
ACT 7 43 q85n figs-irony ἀνελάβετε & μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς 1 The term **took up** indicates that the Israelites carried the idols this verse describes around with them as they traveled in the wilderness. The term **remove** in this context means that God will send them into exile as a punishment, with the sense of carrying them away from their homeland. So the punishment is ironic; if possible, use similar terms in your language that will bring out this irony. Alternate translation: “you carried around … I will carry you away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
|
||
ACT 7 43 gxh2 figs-yousingular ἀνελάβετε & ὑμῶν & ἐποιήσατε & ὑμᾶς 1 As in [7:42](../07/42.md), **you** is plural here, even though the addressee (“house”) is singular, since God is speaking to all of the Israelites. In this verse **your** is also plural. If it would not be natural in your language to use the plural in these cases, you could use the singular in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
|
||
ACT 7 43 im7e figs-explicit τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ 1 the tabernacle of Molech The **tabernacle of Molech** was a tent or shrine that housed an idol of the false god Molech. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 43 cq47 figs-explicit τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν 1 the star of your god Rephan The Israelites were not carrying around an actual **star**, but an image designed to look like a star. This image was used in the worship of the false god Rephan. (This may have been the planet Saturn.) Alternate translation: “the star-shaped image of your god Rephan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 43 gm4g figs-explicit τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε 1 and the images that you made The word **images** refers to the idol of Molech and the star-shaped image of Rephan. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You made that idol of Molech and that star-shaped image of Rephan so that you could worship those false gods.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 43 zgq6 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 3 I will carry you away beyond Babylon Speaking through Amos, God uses the word translated **and** to introduce what he will do as a result of the Israelites’ unfaithfulness and disobedience. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 7 43 rrn8 figs-quotemarks μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος 1 This is the end of the quotation from the prophet Amos that began in verse 42. See how you marked the beginning of the quotation there. It would be appropriate to mark its ending here with a closing second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a second-level quotation. If you used special formatting to set off the quotation, you could return to regular formatting after this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 7 44 fs4q 0 Connecting Statement: Stephen continues his response to the high priest and the council which he began in [Acts 7:2](../07/02.md).
|
||
ACT 7 44 hfmx figs-ellipsis ἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου ἦν τοῖς πατράσιν ἡμῶν ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, καθὼς διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ 1 Stephen is not saying that the **tabernacle** was **with** the Israelites just as God had commanded. He means that the tabernacle was built **according to the pattern** that Moses saw on Mount Sinai. To make this clear, it may be helpful to supply some of the words that Stephen is leaving out. It may also be helpful to introduce a sentence break. Alternate translation: “The tabernacle of the testimony was with our fathers in the wilderness. It was built just as the one speaking to Moses had commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 7 44 m9gw figs-metonymy ἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου 1 The tabernacle of the testimony Stephen calls this tent the **tabernacle of the testimony** by association with the way it housed the ark of the covenant, which was also known as the ark of the testimony. The “testimony” of the ark, as UST indicates, was to the covenant between God and the Israelites and to his presence with them wherever they went in the wilderness. Alternate translation: “the tent that housed the ark of the covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 44 fk06 figs-infostructure καθὼς διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ, ποιῆσαι αὐτὴν κατὰ τὸν τύπον ὃν ἑωράκει 1 It may be more natural to put the information about the command to Moses before the information about how Moses fulfilled the command. It may also be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The one speaking to Moses had commanded him to make the tabernacle according to the pattern that he had seen, and he made it just that way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 7 44 masq figs-explicit διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the way God spoke to Moses on Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “God commanded Moses when he spoke to him on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 44 avqh figs-explicit τὸν τύπον ὃν ἑωράκει 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the **pattern** for the tabernacle that God showed Moses on Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “the pattern that he showed him on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 45 uqca figs-pronouns ἣν καὶ εἰσήγαγον, διαδεξάμενοι οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 The pronoun **which** refers to the tabernacle. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Our ancestors received the tabernacle from their ancestors, and they brought it in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 45 qjov διαδεξάμενοι 1 The phrase **having received … in turn** translates a Greek verb that refers to receiving something in succession, in this case from one’s ancestors. Alternate translation: “having received it from their ancestors”
|
||
ACT 7 45 n2sc εἰσήγαγον & μετὰ Ἰησοῦ 1 Our fathers, under Joshua, received it and brought it with them When Stephen says that the Israelites brought in the tabernacle **with Joshua**, he does not mean that they brought in both the tabernacle and Joshua. He means that the Israelites did the things he describes in obedience to Joshua’s directions. Alternate translation: “brought in as Joshua directed them”
|
||
ACT 7 45 e3gu figs-explicit εἰσήγαγον 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the Israelites entering the land of Canaan. Alternate translation: “brought in to the land of Canaan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 45 eww5 figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ κατασχέσει τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 Stephen is using the term **nations** to mean the land that these people groups occupied. Alternate translation: “when they took possession of land that had been occupied by the nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 45 spm5 figs-metaphor ἀπὸ προσώπου τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 when they took possession of the nations who God drove out from the face of our fathers Stephen is using the word **face** to mean “presence.” Alternate translation: “from the presence of our ancestors” or “so that our ancestors alone would live there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 45 zjlj figs-ellipsis ἕως τῶν ἡμερῶν Δαυείδ 1 Stephen is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The tabernacle remained there until the days of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 7 45 wot8 figs-idiom τῶν ἡμερῶν Δαυείδ 1 Stephen is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “the time of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 46 k9vh figs-idiom εὑρεῖν 1 Stephen is speaking. David did not ask God if he could go look for this **dwelling**. David asked God if he could build it. Alternate translation: “to build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 46 x4kl figs-pronouns ὃς εὗρεν χάριν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The pronoun **who** refers to David. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “David found favor before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 46 ykio figs-metonymy ὃς εὗρεν χάριν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here the phrase **before God** refers to God’s opinion by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “God regarded David with favor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 46 yl80 figs-idiom εὑρεῖν 1 Stephen is speaking. David did not ask God if he could go look for this **dwelling**. David asked God if he could build it. Alternate translation: “to build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 46 w3cu figs-metaphor σκήνωμα 1 a dwelling place for the house of Jacob The word **dwelling** refers to a permanent habitation, that is, a house. Stephen is using the word to mean a temple. He is speaking of this temple as if it was a house in which God lived, since God’s presence was there. Alternate translation: “a house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 46 in7m translate-textvariants τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰακώβ 1 Some ancient manuscripts read “the house of Jacob.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the God of Jacob.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
|
||
ACT 7 46 fsmp figs-metaphor τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰακώβ 1 Here, **house** means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So **the house of Jacob** means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 47 k54c figs-metaphor αὐτῷ οἶκον 1 Stephen is using the word **house** to mean a temple. Alternate translation: “a temple for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 47 dlk8 writing-pronouns αὐτῷ οἶκον 1 The pronoun **him** refers to God. Alternate translation: “a temple for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 48 wuce translate-names ὁ Ὕψιστος 1 This a name for God. UST suggests one way to express its meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 7 48 fwvu figs-nominaladj χειροποιήτοις 1 Stephen is using the adjective **made with hands** (or “handmade”) as a noun, to mean structures built by humans. ULT adds **houses** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “temples that people build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 7 48 c822 figs-synecdoche χειροποιήτοις 1 houses made with hands Stephen is using the word **hand**, one part of a person, to mean the whole person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “houses that people build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 7 48 ota0 figs-metaphor χειροποιήτοις 1 The word **houses** means “temples.” Alternate translation: “temples that people build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 48 d4fh figs-explicit καθὼς ὁ προφήτης λέγει 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that by **the prophet**, he means Isaiah. Alternate translation: “as the prophet Isaiah says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 49 oyax figs-quotemarks ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου 1 This is the beginning of a quotation from the prophet Isaiah, which continues through the end of verse 50. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Isaiah as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 7 49 k2vn figs-metaphor ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου 1 Heaven is my throne, and the earth is the footstool for my feet Speaking through Isaiah, God describes **Heaven** as his **throne** and **the earth** as his **footstool**. If your readers would not understand what these figures mean, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture, or you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. This could mean: (1) that God is present both in heaven and on earth. Alternate translation: “I dwell in heaven, and I am also present throughout the earth” (2) that God rules over heaven and earth. Alternative translation: “I rule from heaven, and I have complete authority over the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 49 i4u3 figs-merism ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου 1 God is using the two parts of creation, **Heaven** and **earth**, to mean all of creation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. This could mean: (1) Alternate translation: “I am present everywhere in creation” (2) Alternate translation: “I rule over all of creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||
ACT 7 49 wc9m figs-rquestion ποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι? λέγει Κύριος, ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου? 1 What kind of house will you build for me? God is using the question form to emphasize that human beings cannot build a temple worthy of him or adequate for him. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You can not build a temple that is worthy of me or a place to live that is adequate for me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 7 49 rqr4 figs-parallelism ποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι? λέγει Κύριος, ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου? 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. God says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “You can not build a temple that is worthy for me to live in!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||
ACT 7 49 mshp figs-metaphor ποῖον οἶκον 1 The word **house** means a “temple.” Alternate translation: “What kind of temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 49 vjaq figs-abstractnouns τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **rest**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the place where I can live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 50 hqjr figs-quotemarks οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα? 1 This is the end of the quotation from the prophet Isaiah that began in verse 49. See how you marked the beginning of the quotation there. It would be appropriate to mark its ending here with a closing second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a second-level quotation. If you used special formatting to set off the quotation, you could return to regular formatting after this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 7 50 rfk1 figs-rquestion οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα? 1 Did my hand not make all these things? God is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “My hand made all these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 7 50 jlg1 figs-synecdoche οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα? 1 God is using one part of himself, his **hand**, to represent all of himself in the act of creating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “Did I not make all these things?” or, if you choose to represent the rhetorical question as an exclamation, “I made all these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 7 50 gzw0 figs-explicit ταῦτα πάντα 1 The phrase **all these things** refers back to “Heaven” and “earth” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “everything in creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 51 umq6 figs-exclamations σκληροτράχηλοι καὶ ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 O stiff-necked Stephen is using the exclamatory word **O** to make a transition in his speech. Up to this point, he has been identifying with the Sanhedrin members, saying “our fathers” as he describes what earlier generations of Israelites did. Now, as he shifts to rebuking them, he addresses them with the vocative **O**. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for this same purpose. Alternate translation: “You stiff-necked people who are uncircumcised in your heart and ears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
|
||
ACT 7 51 yxe3 figs-nominaladj σκληροτράχηλοι καὶ 1 Stephen is using the adjective **stiff-necked** as a noun, to describe a kind of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “O people who are stiff-necked and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 7 51 vn7h figs-metaphor σκληροτράχηλοι 1 O stiff-necked Stephen is speaking of the Sanhedrin members as if they were horses or mules that stiffened their necks in order not to be turned in one direction or another. He means that they are being stubborn. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture, or you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “O stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 51 zp55 figs-metonymy ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 uncircumcised in heart and ears Stephen speaks of the Sanhedrin members’ **heart and ears** as **uncircumcised** by association with the way that Gentiles, who are uncircumcised because they are not part of the covenant community, do not obey or listen to God. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 7 51 esfc figs-synecdoche ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 Stephen is using one part of a person, the **heart**, meaning the desires and will, to represent all of a person in the act of obeying or disobeying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 7 51 jslb figs-synecdoche ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 Stephen is using one part of a person, the **ears**, to represent all of a person in the act of listening. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 7 51 zgon figs-hyperbole ὑμεῖς ἀεὶ τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ Ἁγίῳ ἀντιπίπτετε 1 The word **always** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “You keep resisting the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 7 51 w164 figs-yousingular ὑμεῖς & ὑμῶν & ὑμεῖς 1 The words **you** and **your** are plural, since Stephen is speaking to all the members of the Sanhedrin. So use plural forms in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
|
||
ACT 7 51 d2v8 figs-ellipsis ὡς οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν, καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 Stephen is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “As your ancestors disobeyed God and did not listen to him, so you disobey God and do not listen to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 7 52 x7kf figs-rquestion τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν? 1 Which of the prophets did your fathers not persecute? Stephen is not asking for information. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Your ancestors persecuted each of the prophets!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 7 52 eiw2 figs-hyperbole τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν? 1 Stephen’s rhetorical question has an implicit generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that conveys emphasis. Alternate translation: “Your ancestors kept persecuting the prophets!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 7 52 q8wb figs-nominaladj τοῦ Δικαίου 1 of the Righteous One Stephen is using the adjective **Righteous** as a noun in order to describe a specific person. ULT adds **One** to show this. This is a title that refers to the Christ, the Messiah. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of the Messiah, who was righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 7 52 agd9 οὗ νῦν ὑμεῖς προδόται καὶ φονεῖς ἐγένεσθε 1 of whom you have now become betrayers and murderers It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You have now betrayed and murdered him”
|
||
ACT 7 53 axhl writing-pronouns οἵτινες ἐλάβετε 1 The pronoun **who** refers to the Sanhedrin members whom Stephen is addressing. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 7 53 t92q figs-synecdoche οἵτινες ἐλάβετε 1 The Sanhedrin members whom Stephen is addressing did not receive **the law** themselves. Rather, Stephen is using them to represent the entire Jewish community down through the years. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “whose community received” or, if you choose to start a new sentence, “Your community received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 7 53 euw5 figs-explicit εἰς διαταγὰς ἀγγέλων 1 the law as ordained by angels Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to God giving the law to the Israelites at Mount Sinai. A later Jewish tradition said that angels acted as God’s intermediaries at that time. (Stephen says in [7:38](../07/38.md) that an angel was speaking to Moses on Mount Sinai.) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as angels delivered it on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 54 ef2g figs-activepassive ἀκούοντες & ταῦτα διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν 1 Now hearing these things If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “these things cut them to their hearts when they heard them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 7 54 u4l7 figs-idiom διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν 1 they were cut to their hearts Here, the expression **they were cut to their hearts** is an idiom that means the Sanhedrin members became very angry. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they became furious at Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 54 ae9s translate-symaction ἔβρυχον τοὺς ὀδόντας ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 they ground their teeth at him This action expressed their strong anger at Stephen. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “they became so angry at Stephen that they ground their teeth together” or “they moved their teeth back and forth as they looked angrily at Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 7 55 dlux figs-metaphor πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Luke is speaking of Stephen as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit could fill. Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 55 ntp4 figs-explicit ἀτενίσας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν, εἶδεν 1 and looking intently into heaven The implication is that only Stephen saw this vision, not anyone else who was present. Alternate translation: “staring up into heaven, he saw in a vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 55 bl2j figs-explicit δόξαν Θεοῦ 1 he saw the glory of God The implication is that Stephen saw a bright light that expressed the magnificent presence of God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “a bright light that expressed the glorious presence of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 55 zpry figs-nominaladj Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the adjective **right** as a noun in order to indicate the right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “Jesus standing at the right side of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 7 55 vamz figs-explicit Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus standing in a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 55 vyz3 translate-symaction Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 and Jesus standing at the right hand of God Elsewhere in the New Testament, Jesus is described as “sitting” **at the right of God**. Many interpreters believe that Jesus stood on this occasion to honor Stephen for his courage and faithful testimony. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “Jesus, in a place of honor next to God, standing to honor him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 7 56 gzvv figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Stephen is using the term **behold** to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “Now listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 56 p0jg figs-metaphor θεωρῶ τοὺς οὐρανοὺς διηνοιγμένους, καὶ 1 Stephen is speaking of **the heavens** being **opened** to mean that they are open to his view. Alternate translation: “the heavens are open to my view, and I see” or “I can see into heaven, and I see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 56 aqp8 figs-explicit τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Son of Man The title **Son of Man** is equivalent to “Messiah.” Jesus himself used that title to claim that role subtly and implicitly. You may want to translate the title directly into your language. Alternatively, if you think it would be helpful to your readers, you could express what it means. Alternate translation: “Jesus the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 56 imoa figs-nominaladj ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 See how you translated the nominal adjective **right** in [7:55](../07/55.md). Alternate translation: “standing at the right side of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 7 56 cr19 figs-explicit ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 See how you expressed the implicit significance of the phrase **at the right of God** in [7:55](../07/55.md). Alternate translation: “standing in a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 56 rvwp translate-symaction ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 See how you expressed the significance of the symbolic action of Jesus **standing** in [7:55](../07/55.md). Alternate translation: “the Son of Man, in a place of honor next to God, standing to honor me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 7 57 p4cg translate-symaction κράξαντες & φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, συνέσχον τὰ ὦτα αὐτῶν 1 they covered their ears The Sanhedrin members did these things to demonstrate that they did not want to hear any more of what Stephen said. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly to drown out Stephen, they put their hands over their ears to show that they did not want to hear any more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 7 57 wtwk figs-idiom κράξαντες & φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 1 This is an idiom that suggests that the Sanhedrin members had another, louder voice that they could use. It means that they raised the volume of their voices. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 57 hm0q κράξαντες & φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 1 If you would like to reproduce this idiom but it would be unusual in your language to speak as if a whole group of people had one **voice**, you could make this plural. Alternate translation: “with loud voices” or “in loud voices”
|
||
ACT 7 57 t287 ὥρμησαν ὁμοθυμαδὸν ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 This could mean: (1) that the Sanhedrin members all rushed at Stephen at the same time. Alternate translation: “rushed at him all at once” (2) that every one of the Sanhedrin members rushed at Stephen. Alternate translation: “every one of them rushed at him”
|
||
ACT 7 58 ks1u figs-metaphor ἐκβαλόντες ἔξω τῆς πόλεως 1 throwing him outside the city Luke is likely speaking when he speaks of the Sanhedrin members **throwing** Stephen outside the city. It is unlikely that they actually picked him up and heaved him through the air. Alternate translation: “seizing Stephen and forcefully taking him out of the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 7 58 teas figs-explicit οἱ μάρτυρες 1 These were the “false witnesses” whom the Sanhedrin brought in to accuse Stephen, as described in [6:13](../06/13.md). According to the Law of Moses, it was their responsibility to carry out the execution of the man they had accused. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the false witnesses, who were responsible to carry out the execution,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 58 ryrh figs-explicit ἀπέθεντο τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν, παρὰ τοὺς πόδας νεανίου καλουμένου Σαύλου 1 The implications are that the witnesses took off their long robes so that they could throw stones at Stephen more easily and that they left them with Saul for safekeeping. UST models one way to make these implications explicit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 7 58 wy7n translate-unknown τὰ ἱμάτια 1 outer garments These **outer garments** were long cloaks or robes that people wore outside to stay warm. They were also a sign of wealth and status. If your readers would not be familiar with this kind of garment, you could use the name of another garment that they would recognize, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “coats” or “robes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 7 58 sx2p figs-idiom παρὰ τοὺς πόδας 1 at the feet The expression **at the feet** means on the ground in front of someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on the ground in front of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 59 fxhz figs-hendiadys ἐπικαλούμενον καὶ λέγοντα 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The phrase **calling out** tells how Stephen was **saying** what he said. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “as he was saying loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 7 59 k2el figs-imperative δέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά μου 1 receive my spirit This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please receive my spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
|
||
ACT 7 60 u86q translate-symaction θεὶς & τὰ γόνατα 1 But having knelt down on his knees Kneeling down was an act of submission to God and a reverent posture of prayer. Alternate translation: “after he had knelt down reverently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 7 60 hi24 figs-idiom ἔκραξεν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 1 This is an idiom that means that Stephen raised the volume of his voice. Alternate translation: “he cried out loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 7 60 dfjs figs-imperative μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please do not hold this sin against them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
|
||
ACT 7 60 tvf8 figs-doublenegatives μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν 1 do not hold this sin against them If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **hold … against**. Alternate translation: “forgive them for this sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 7 60 r9vi figs-euphemism ἐκοιμήθη 1 he fell asleep Luke is describing the death of Stephen when he says **he fell asleep**. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or use plain language. Alternate translation: “he passed away” or, as in UST, “he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
|
||
ACT 8 intro q9d9 0 # Acts 8 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>The story here shifts from Stephen to Saul.<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 8:32-33.<br><br>The first sentence of verse 1 ends the description of the events in Chapter 7. Luke begins a new part of his history with the words “And on that day.”<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Receiving the Holy Spirit<br><br>In this chapter Luke speaks for the first time of people receiving the Holy Spirit ([Acts 8:15-19](../08/15.md)). The Holy Spirit had already enabled the believers to speak in tongues, to heal the sick, and to live as a community, and he had filled Stephen. But when the Jews started putting believers in prison, those believers who could leave Jerusalem did leave, and as they went, they told people about Jesus. When the people who heard about Jesus received the Holy Spirit, the church leaders knew that those people had truly become believers.<br><br>### Proclaimed<br><br>This chapter, more than any other in the book of Acts, speaks of the believers proclaiming the word, proclaiming the good news, and proclaiming that Jesus is the Christ. The word “proclaim” translates a Greek word that means to tell good news about something.
|
||
ACT 8 1 ez88 writing-background Σαῦλος δὲ ἦν συνευδοκῶν τῇ ἀναιρέσει αὐτοῦ 1 there began on that day a great persecution against the church that was in Jerusalem, and they all were scattered throughout the regions of Judea and Samaria, except the apostles Luke is providing this background information to help readers understand why Saul was persecuting the church, as he relates in [8:3](../08/03.md) and in Chapter 9. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now Saul approved of the Sanhedrin executing Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 8 1 i1tc writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, διωγμὸς μέγας ἐπὶ τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story, the scattering of the church and its witness beyond Jerusalem. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “And so began that day a great persecution against the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 8 1 vc8x figs-explicit ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 that day Here, **day** is not a figurative word for “time.” Luke is referring to a specific day, the day on which Stephen was killed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the day Stephen was killed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 1 xp25 figs-activepassive πάντες & διεσπάρησαν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they all fled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 1 u5pi figs-hyperbole πάντες & διεσπάρησαν 1 they were all scattered The word **all** is a generalization that emphasizes that a large number of the believers were affected. Alternate translation: “many of the believers were scattered” or “many of the believers fled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 8 1 k5a2 figs-explicit πλὴν τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 except the apostles The implication is that **the apostles** remained in Jerusalem, even though they too experienced this great persecution. Alternate translation: “except the apostles, who remained in Jerusalem despite the persecution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 2 tp9e translate-versebridge συνεκόμισαν δὲ τὸν Στέφανον ἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς, καὶ ἐποίησαν κοπετὸν μέγαν ἐπ’ αὐτῷ 1 General Information: It may be helpful to your readers to move these parts of the story about Stephen together by using a verse bridge for verses 1-2 as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
|
||
ACT 8 2 sjc8 figs-explicit συνεκόμισαν & τὸν Στέφανον 1 devout men The word translated **carried away** means to carry away for burial. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. You could also say explicitly that it was Stephen’s body that these men carried away. Alternate translation: “carried Stephen’s body away to bury it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 3 yd2i κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους 1 according to the houses Alternate translation: “entering one house after another”
|
||
ACT 8 3 w6vk figs-explicit κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους & τε ἄνδρας καὶ γυναῖκας 1 men and women Luke may mean **houses** where Christians met, as described in [2:46](../02/46.md), and he means **men and women** who believed in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the houses where Christians met … believers in Jesus, both men and women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 4 n52l figs-nominaladj οἱ & διασπαρέντες 1 Luke is using the participle **having been scattered**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term **ones** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the believers who had been scattered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 8 4 ymy5 figs-activepassive οἱ & διασπαρέντες 1 had been scattered If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. See how you translated it in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “the believers who had fled from the persecution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 4 su6i figs-metonymy εὐαγγελιζόμενοι τὸν λόγον 1 the word Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that these believers shared by using words. See how you translated the term in [4:4](../04/04.md). Also see the General Notes to this chapter for the meaning of the word translated **proclaiming** here and many other times in this chapter. Alternate translation: “telling the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 5 gz5m figs-idiom κατελθὼν 1 went down to the city of Samaria Luke speaks of Philip **going down** from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “traveling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 8 5 f45b figs-idiom τὴν πόλιν τῆς Σαμαρείας 1 the city of Samaria This is an idiom that means the principal city in the region of Samaria, probably the one known at that time as Sebaste, although some interpreters believe that Luke may have had the city of Sychar in mind instead. Alternate translation: “the main city in Samaria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 8 5 pk1l figs-metonymy τὸν Χριστόν 1 proclaimed to them the Christ Luke is using the name **Christ** by association to mean the message about Christ. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 6 cnt9 figs-explicit οἱ ὄχλοι 1 And the crowds Luke implicitly means **the crowds** in the city that Philip traveled to. Alternate translation: “the people in that city of Samaria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 6 jyvw ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 Alternate translation: “all together”
|
||
ACT 8 6 tt0i figs-nominaladj τοῖς λεγομένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Φιλίππου 1 Luke is using the participle **being spoken**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term **things** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the things that Philip was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 8 6 g0ft figs-activepassive τοῖς λεγομένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Φιλίππου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that Philip was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 6 wm83 τὰ σημεῖα 1 were paying attention to Here the word **signs** has the same sense that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in [2:22](../02/22.md) and elsewhere in Acts. It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “the miracles”
|
||
ACT 8 7 un6b figs-infostructure πολλοὶ γὰρ τῶν ἐχόντων πνεύματα ἀκάθαρτα, βοῶντα φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, ἐξήρχοντο 1 As Luke tells the story of this event, he changes from the people who had **unclean spirits** being the subject of the sentence to the **unclean spirits** themselves being the subject. This may be because the unclean spirits controlled people to such an extent that the spirits seemed to be the people themselves. It may be helpful to your readers to put the information about the spirits before the information about the people who had them. Alternate translation: “unclean spirits, shouting with a loud voice, were coming out of many of those who had them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 8 7 pehe figs-nominaladj τῶν ἐχόντων 1 Luke is using the participle **having**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term **those** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the people who had” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 8 7 xb2n ἐχόντων πνεύματα ἀκάθαρτα 1 having unclean spirits Alternate translation: “who were controlled by unclean spirits”
|
||
ACT 8 7 nz7y figs-idiom βοῶντα φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 1 This is an idiom that means that the unclean spirits raised the volume of their voices. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 8 7 v8uj figs-activepassive πολλοὶ & παραλελυμένοι καὶ χωλοὶ ἐθεραπεύθησαν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it would be appropriate to say Jesus, since the book of Acts shows that the apostles healed people in the name of Jesus, for example, in [4:10](../04/10.md). Alternate translation: “Jesus, through the power of his name, healed many who had been paralyzed and lame” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 7 imbh figs-nominaladj πολλοὶ & παραλελυμένοι 1 Luke is using the participle **paralyzed** as an adjective. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “many who had been paralyzed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 8 7 anq3 figs-activepassive πολλοὶ & παραλελυμένοι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “many who had paralysis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 8 s8bm grammar-connect-logic-result δὲ 1 Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce what the people in the city did as a result of the many healings that Philip performed. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 8 8 z5z3 figs-metonymy ἐγένετο & πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ 1 And there was much joy in that city The phrase **that city** refers by association to the people who lived in that city. Alternate translation: “there was much joy among the people of that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 8 r0nz figs-abstractnouns ἐγένετο & πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the people of that city rejoiced greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 9 jm7n writing-background ἀνὴρ δέ τις ὀνόματι Σίμων, προϋπῆρχεν ἐν τῇ πόλει μαγεύων 1 Luke is providing background information to help readers understand who Simon was and why he said and did the things Luke describes in the rest of this chapter. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now there was a man named Simon who had been practicing sorcery in that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 8 9 bed1 writing-participants ἀνὴρ & τις ὀνόματι Σίμων 1 But … a certain man named Simon Luke uses this phrase to introduce Simon as a new character in the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 8 9 cx7a translate-names Σίμων 1 the city **Simon** is the name of a man. See how you translated this name, for a different man, in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 8 10 mvcm writing-pronouns ᾧ προσεῖχον πάντες ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου 1 The phrase **to whom** refers to Simon. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “All of them, from little to great, were paying attention to Simon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 10 evt7 figs-hyperbole πάντες 1 they all … were paying attention Luke is using the word **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Samaritans in that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 8 10 h51l figs-nominaladj ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου 1 Luke is using the adjectives **little** and **great** as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “from the least important people to the most important ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 8 10 ibl1 figs-merism ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου 1 from least to greatest Luke is speaking, using these two extremes in order to include all of the people in between. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “no matter how important they were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||
ACT 8 10 h5ya writing-pronouns οὗτός 1 The demonstrative pronoun **This** stands for Simon. Alternate translation: “This man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 10 j3d8 translate-names ἡ Δύναμις τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡ καλουμένη Μεγάλη 1 This man is the power of God which is called Great The Samaritans believed that Simon must be the embodiment of some great power, and thinking that this power was God, the highest of powers, they called it Great. Alternate translation: “an embodiment of the Great God” or “an embodiment of the supreme God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 8 10 yw5v figs-activepassive ἡ καλουμένη 1 the power of God which is called Great If your language does not use the passive form **called**, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 11 pxj8 writing-background προσεῖχον δὲ αὐτῷ 1 General Information: This verse gives additional background information about Simon and what he was doing among the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “Now they were paying attention to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 8 12 h1hg writing-pronouns ἐπίστευσαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “the Samaritans believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 12 zwoj figs-abstractnouns εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **kingdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the good news that God had begun to rule and that Jesus the Messiah had come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 12 zjh5 figs-metonymy εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here the **name** of Jesus represents his authority, specifically as the Messiah, as the title **Christ** indicates. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the good news that God had begun to rule and that Jesus the Messiah had come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 12 jg1w figs-infostructure εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Since Jesus inaugurated the **kingdom of God** when he came to earth, it may be helpful to put the information about Jesus before the information about the kingdom of God. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the gospel about the name of Jesus Christ and the kingdom of God” or “proclaiming the good news that Jesus the Messiah had come and that God had begun to rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 8 12 vsy8 figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίζοντο 1 they were baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Philip was baptizing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 13 k2th figs-rpronouns ὁ δὲ Σίμων καὶ αὐτὸς ἐπίστευσεν 1 Simon himself also believed Luke uses the word **himself** to emphasize how significant it was that Simon, who had claimed to be an embodiment of God, had believed in Jesus as the Messiah whom God sent. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. Alternate translation: “Even Simon believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 13 bayg ἦν προσκαρτερῶν τῷ Φιλίππῳ 1 Alternate translation: “he followed Philip around everywhere”
|
||
ACT 8 13 v91t figs-activepassive βαπτισθεὶς 1 having been baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “after Philip baptized him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 13 rnr3 figs-irony θεωρῶν τε σημεῖα καὶ δυνάμεις μεγάλας 1 The word that ULT translates as **works** here is the same word that it translates as “power” in [8:10](../08/10.md). It can mean either power or works that demonstrate power. Luke is using the word to show what an ironic situation Simon is in. He claimed to be “the power … that is called Great,” but now he recognizes that **works** of power that are truly **great** are done in the name of Jesus. If your language has a word for works that demonstrate power that has the same root as its word for power, it would be appropriate to use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
|
||
ACT 8 13 d4yb figs-doublet τε σημεῖα καὶ δυνάμεις 1 The terms **signs** and **works** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation, as in UST: “miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 8 14 s7lr writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now when the apostles in Jerusalem heard Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce a new event in the story of the Samaritans becoming believers. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 8 14 lk9b figs-quotations ἀκούσαντες & ὅτι δέδεκται ἡ Σαμάρεια τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀπέστειλαν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Samaria has received the word of God,’ sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 8 14 uwxo figs-exclamations ἀκούσαντες & ὅτι δέδεκται ἡ Σαμάρεια τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀπέστειλαν 1 If you decide to have a direct quotation here, you might also decide to make it an exclamation. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Samaria has received the word of God!’ sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
|
||
ACT 8 14 ju21 figs-metonymy ἡ Σαμάρεια 1 Samaria Luke is using the word **Samaria** by association to mean the people of Samaria. Alternate translation: “the people of Samaria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 14 e682 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 had received Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Philip shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 15 af1n writing-pronouns οἵτινες καταβάντες, προσηύξαντο περὶ αὐτῶν 1 who, having come down The pronoun **who** stands for Peter and John, and the pronoun **them** stands for the Samaritans. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “When Peter and John had come down, they prayed for the Samaritans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 15 hd1w figs-youdual οἵτινες 1 Since the pronoun **who** stands for two men, it should be in the dual if your language uses that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
|
||
ACT 8 15 hk1m figs-idiom καταβάντες 1 having come down Luke speaks of Philip **having come down** from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “having traveled from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 8 15 bun9 figs-go καταβάντες 1 prayed for them Your language may say “gone” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having gone down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
|
||
ACT 8 16 d2z9 figs-metaphor οὐδέπω & ἦν ἐπ’ οὐδενὶ αὐτῶν ἐπιπεπτωκός 1 Luke is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if it could fall on the Samaritan believers. Alternate translation: “none of them had yet received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 8 16 l4ez grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Luke is using the word **For** to introduce the reason why Peter and John had to pray for the Samaritans to receive the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “They prayed for them because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 8 16 qmjp figs-doublenegatives οὐδέπω & ἦν ἐπ’ οὐδενὶ αὐτῶν ἐπιπεπτωκός 1 In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “he had not yet fallen upon none of them.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 8 16 bpzz writing-pronouns οὐδέπω & ἦν & ἐπιπεπτωκός 1 The pronoun **he** stands for the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit had not yet fallen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 16 rn3c figs-metonymy μόνον & βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 they had only been baptized into the name of the Lord Jesus Here, **the name of the Lord Jesus** represents his authority, and being baptized into his name represents being baptized in order to be under his authority. Alternate translation: “they had only been baptized to become disciples of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 16 m1nw figs-activepassive μόνον & βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον 1 they had only been baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. If you must state who did the action, the context suggests it was Philip. Alternate translation: “Philip had only baptized them” or “Philip had only baptized the Samaritan believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 17 bsll writing-pronouns ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς, καὶ ἐλάμβανον 1 The first instance of the pronoun **they** stands for Peter and John, and the pronoun **them** and the second instance of **they** stand for the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “When Peter and John were laying their hands on the Samaritans, and the Samaritans were receiving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 17 bldf figs-youdual ἐπετίθεσαν 1 Since this instance of the pronoun **they** stands for two men, it should be in the dual if your language uses that form. The same is true of “them” in [8:18](../08/18.md) and “they” and “the ones” in [8:25](../08/25.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
|
||
ACT 8 17 q7gd translate-symaction ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 they were laying their hands on them Peter and John **laying their hands** on the Samaritans who had believed Philip’s message of the gospel was a symbolic action that showed that Peter and John wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to these believers. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 8 18 rh79 figs-activepassive δίδοται τὸ Πνεῦμα 1 the Holy Spirit was being given through the laying on of the hands of the apostles If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is clear from the context that this was God. Alternate translation: “God was giving the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 19 fbw9 δότε κἀμοὶ τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην, ἵνα ᾧ ἐὰν ἐπιθῶ τὰς χεῖρας, λαμβάνῃ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον 1 so that whoever I lay my hands on may receive the Holy Spirit Alternate translation: “Give me the authority to give the Holy Spirit to anyone I lay my hands on”
|
||
ACT 8 20 df1j figs-exclamations τὸ ἀργύριόν σου, σὺν σοὶ εἴη εἰς ἀπώλειαν 1 Peter is using the exclamation form to emphasize how forcefully he rejects Simon’s offer. You may want to use an exclamation to convey this same emphasis in your language. Alternate translation: “I refuse your offer! I can see that you are going to perdition, and you can take your money with you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
|
||
ACT 8 20 y4ny figs-metonymy τὸ ἀργύριόν 1 Peter is referring to money by association with the way that **silver** was used for money at this time. Alternate translation: “money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 20 gh12 figs-metonymy τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the gift of God Peter is referring to the ability to confer the Holy Spirit by the laying on of hands. Since this is an ability that only God can give, by association Peter calls it **the gift of God**. Alternate translation: “the power to confer the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 21 p2ev figs-doublet οὐκ ἔστιν σοι μερὶς οὐδὲ κλῆρος ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ 1 There is to you no part or share in this matter The terms **part** and **share** mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “We will not let you have anything to do with this work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 8 21 ufk3 figs-possession σοι 1 The phrase **to you** represents a possessive form. Alternate translation: “yours” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 8 21 xbh2 figs-metaphor ἡ γὰρ καρδία σου οὐκ ἔστιν εὐθεῖα 1 because your heart is not right Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “your thoughts and motives are not right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 8 21 p9v4 figs-metonymy ἔναντι τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) that Simon’s **heart** is not **right** in God’s opinion by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “as far as God is concerned” (2) that Simon does not have the right thoughts about God or intentions towards God. Alternate translation: “in its attitude towards God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 22 sa6s figs-abstractnouns ἀπὸ τῆς κακίας σου ταύτης 1 this wickedness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **wickedness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for trying to buy God’s gift with money” or “for trying to bribe God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 22 ppk5 figs-metaphor ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου 1 the intention of your heart Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “what you intended to do” or “what you were thinking of doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 8 22 pe2u grammar-connect-condition-fact δεήθητι τοῦ Κυρίου, εἰ ἄρα ἀφεθήσεταί σοι ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου 1 if therefore the intention of your heart will be forgiven to you Peter is using the conditional word **if** to introduce a desired result. There is actually no doubt about whether God will forgive someone who sincerely repents and prays for forgiveness. Alternate translation: “pray to the Lord so that, as a result, the intention of your heart will be forgiven to you” or “pray to the Lord and ask him to forgive you for the intention of your heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
|
||
ACT 8 22 lq4i figs-activepassive ἀφεθήσεταί σοι ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he will forgive you for the intention of your heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 23 tf3s translate-unknown εἰς & χολὴν πικρίας 1 The **gall** plant has a bitter taste and is poisonous. If your readers would not be familiar with this plant, you could use the name of a similar plant in your area. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 8 23 kpu6 figs-metonymy εἰς & χολὴν πικρίας 1 Peter is using the **gall** plant by association to mean “poison.” Alternate translation: “in the poison of bitterness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 23 d3v7 figs-metaphor εἰς & χολὴν πικρίας 1 in the poison of bitterness Peter is describing **bitterness** as if it were made of **gall** or poison. He means that bitterness, here in the sense of envy, spiritually poisons a person, that is, it leads them towards spiritual death. Alternate translation: “dangerously envious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 8 23 j696 figs-metaphor σύνδεσμον ἀδικίας 1 the bond of unrighteousness Peter speaks of **the bond of unrighteousness** as if unrighteousness were restraining Simon and keeping him a prisoner. He means Simon is not able to stop himself from sinning. Alternate translation: “unable to stop sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 8 24 n5cw figs-youdual ὑμεῖς & εἰρήκατε 1 Even though it was only Peter who spoke to Simon, in his response, Simon is addressing both Peter and John, since he offered money to both of them, as [8:18](../08/18.md) describes. Since Simon is speaking to two men, **You** and **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise it would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
|
||
ACT 8 24 v2wy figs-imperative δεήθητε ὑμεῖς ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ πρὸς τὸν Κύριον 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please pray to the Lord for me” or “I ask you to pray to the Lord for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
|
||
ACT 8 24 hwc6 writing-pronouns δεήθητε ὑμεῖς ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ πρὸς τὸν Κύριον 1 Simon is stating the pronoun **You**, which is already implied in the verb **pray**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “Pray to the Lord for me yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 24 u1a4 ὅπως μηδὲν ἐπέλθῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ὧν εἰρήκατε 1 so that nothing of which you have spoken may happen to me Alternate translation: “so that the things you have said may not happen to me”
|
||
ACT 8 24 sk5w figs-explicit μηδὲν ἐπέλθῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ὧν εἰρήκατε 1 nothing … of which you have spoken Simon is referring implicitly to Peter’s rebuke, in which Peter spoke of Simon’s silver perishing along with him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I will not perish as you said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 25 nzvg grammar-connect-time-sequential οὖν 1 Luke is using the word translated **Then** to introduce what Peter and John did after being in the city where Philip had been telling the Samaritans about Jesus. Alternate translation: “After that,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
|
||
ACT 8 25 p3rj figs-explicit οἱ & διαμαρτυράμενοι καὶ λαλήσαντες τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 The **ones** Luke is describing are Peter and John. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter and John, after they had testified and spoken the word of the Lord,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 25 uz15 figs-nominaladj οἱ & διαμαρτυράμενοι καὶ λαλήσαντες 1 when they had testified Luke is using the participles **having testified** and **having spoken**, which function as adjectives, as nouns. ULT adds the term **ones** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the ones who had testified and spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 8 25 ww9k figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 spoken the word of the Lord Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Peter and John shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 25 eu66 figs-metonymy πολλάς & κώμας τῶν Σαμαρειτῶν 1 to many villages of the Samaritans The term **villages** refers by association to the people who lived in these villages. Alternate translation: “to the people in many Samaritan villages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 26 mbj9 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 8 26 w1nk figs-idiom ἀνάστηθι 1 Arise and go Here the word **arise** means that the angel wanted Philip to take action, not that the angel wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “Pack for a journey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 8 26 le2c figs-idiom τὴν ὁδὸν τὴν καταβαίνουσαν ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ εἰς Γάζαν 1 that goes down from Jerusalem to Gaza The angel speaks of the road **going down** from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “the road that leads from Jerusalem to Gaza” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 8 26 a18y writing-background αὕτη ἐστὶν ἔρημος 1 This is desert This sentence could be: (1) something that Luke adds to provide background information about the area through which Philip would be travelling. Alternate translation: “from Jerusalem to Gaza.’ (Now that road leads through a desert.)” (2) part of what the angel is saying to Philip. Alternate translation: “from Jerusalem to Gaza, which is a desert road.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 8 27 s0yn figs-idiom ἀναστὰς, ἐπορεύθη 1 As in the previous verse, the word **arising** means that Philip took preparatory action, not that he stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “he prepared for a journey and left” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 8 27 xy7x writing-participants ἰδοὺ 1 behold Luke is using the word **behold** to alert his audience to a new person in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 8 27 zkc5 writing-background ἀνὴρ, Αἰθίοψ εὐνοῦχος, δυνάστης Κανδάκης βασιλίσσης Αἰθιόπων, ὃς ἦν ἐπὶ πάσης τῆς γάζης αὐτῆς, ὃς ἐληλύθει προσκυνήσων εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 This verse provides background information about this Ethiopian official and why he was travelling along this road. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence and to use a natural form for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “a man from Ethiopia. Now this man was a eunuch, an official of the Kandake, the queen of the Ethiopians, who was over all her treasure, and he had come to Jerusalem to worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 8 27 i5zh figs-idiom ἀνὴρ, Αἰθίοψ 1 This is an idiomatic way of describing someone. Alternate translation: “a man from Ethiopia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 8 27 s1uf translate-unknown εὐνοῦχος, δυνάστης Κανδάκης 1 a eunuch While the word **eunuch** describes a man who has been castrated, as men sometimes were who served in royal courts in the ancient world, the emphasis here is on the fact that this man was a high government official, not on his physical state. Alternate translation: “an important official in the court of the Kandake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 8 27 t5t1 translate-names Κανδάκης 1 of Candace **Kandake** was a title for the queens of Ethiopia. It is similar to the word Pharaoh, the title that was used for the kings of Egypt. So in your translation, make clear that it is a title rather than a name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 8 27 nm48 figs-metaphor ὃς ἦν ἐπὶ πάσης τῆς γάζης αὐτῆς 1 Luke is using a spatial metaphor when says that this man was **over** the **treasure** of the Kandake. He means that the man was responsible for it. Alternate translation: “who was in charge of her treasury” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 8 27 v8q7 figs-explicit ὃς ἐληλύθει προσκυνήσων εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 who had come to Jerusalem to worship The implication is that this man was a Gentile who believed in the true God and had come to worship at the Jewish temple. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Even though he was a Gentile, he had come to worship the true God at the temple in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 27 uk32 figs-go ὃς ἐληλύθει 1 Your language may say “gone” rather than **come** in a context such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “who had gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
|
||
ACT 8 28 d3kv translate-unknown τοῦ ἅρματος 1 chariot Here and in [8:29](../08/29.md) and [8:38](../08/38.md), the term **chariot** probably means something like “carriage.” Chariots were vehicles for war, not for long-distance travel, and people stood to ride in chariots, while this man was seated. Alternate translation, as in UST: “his carriage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 8 28 bx2j figs-metonymy ἀνεγίνωσκεν τὸν προφήτην Ἠσαΐαν 1 was reading the prophet Isaiah Luke is using the phrase **the prophet Isaiah** to mean the prophecies that Isaiah spoke and recorded. Alternate translation: “he was reading from the book of Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 28 n40c figs-explicit ἀνεγίνωσκεν 1 Since Philip was able to hear what the man was reading, as [8:30](../08/30.md) explains, the implication is that the man was reading aloud. Alternate translation: “he was reading aloud from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 29 llh1 figs-metonymy πρόσελθε καὶ κολλήθητι τῷ ἅρματι τούτῳ 1 be joined to this chariot The Spirit means that Philip is to stay close to the person riding in the **chariot**. Alternate translation: “Go over to that chariot so you can be near the man in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 30 ffh7 figs-metonymy ἀναγινώσκοντος Ἠσαΐαν τὸν προφήτην 1 reading Isaiah the prophet Luke is using the phrase **Isaiah the prophet** to mean the prophecies that Isaiah spoke and recorded. Alternate translation: “reading from the book of Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 30 x98i figs-explicit ἆρά γε γινώσκεις ἃ ἀναγινώσκεις 1 Do you understand what you are reading? The Ethiopian was a literate, educated man who could read, but he lacked spiritual discernment. Philip is asking implicitly whether he understands the meaning of the passage from Isaiah. Alternate translation: “Do you understand the meaning of what you are reading?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 31 r5g2 figs-rquestion πῶς γὰρ ἂν δυναίμην ἐὰν μή τις ὁδηγήσει με? 1 how would I be able, unless someone will guide me? The man is not asking for information. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No, I cannot understand unless someone guides me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 8 31 zx9h figs-explicit παρεκάλεσέν & τὸν Φίλιππον, ἀναβάντα καθίσαι σὺν αὐτῷ 1 he summoned Philip, having come up, to sit with him The implication is that when the man invited Philip to come up and sit with him, Philip agreed to travel down the road with him to explain the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “he invited Philip to come up and sit with him and explain the Scriptures, and Philip accepted the invitation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 32 nd93 figs-explicit ὡς πρόβατον ἐπὶ σφαγὴν ἤχθη 1 This a quotation from Isaiah [53:7–8](../isa/53/07.md). It describes the Messiah, whom Isaiah calls “the servant of the Lord.” But since the Ethiopian official did not know whom Isaiah was describing and had to ask Philip, it would be better not to specify that at this point by saying, for example, “The Messiah was led like a sheep to the slaugher” or “The servant of the Lord was led like a sheep to the slaughter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 32 bgk9 figs-abstractnouns ὡς πρόβατον ἐπὶ σφαγὴν ἤχθη 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **slaughter**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “He was led like a sheep that was going to be slaughtered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 32 kh97 figs-activepassive ἤχθη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People led him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 32 lu3j translate-unknown ἐναντίον τοῦ κείραντος αὐτὸν ἄφωνος 1 like a lamb before its shearer is silent A **shearer** is a person who cuts the wool off the sheep so that it may be used. If your readers would not be familiar with this word and you have no comparable word in your language, you could express the meaning in another way. Alternate translation: “is silent while its wool is being cut off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 8 32 k8sy figs-metonymy οὐκ ἀνοίγει τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ 1 This means that the Messiah does not speak by association with the way a person would **open his mouth** in order to speak. Alternate translation: “he says nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 33 dwur figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ ταπεινώσει, ἡ κρίσις αὐτοῦ ἤρθη 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **humiliation** and **justice**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “Because he acted humbly and did not defend himself, his enemies were able to treat him unjustly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 33 y2a1 figs-activepassive ἡ κρίσις αὐτοῦ ἤρθη 1 In humiliation his justice was taken away If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his enemies denied him justice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 33 k3uz figs-rquestion τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται? 1 Who can fully describe his generation? Isaiah is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one will describe his generation.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 8 33 ec09 figs-declarative τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται? 1 Isaiah is using a future statement to describe capability. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use form that is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Who can describe his generation?” or “No one will be able to describe his generation.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
|
||
ACT 8 33 yxxn figs-abstractnouns τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται? 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **generation**, you could express the same idea in another way. This could mean: (1) that no one will be able to describe the Messiah’s descendants because he will die without having any children. Alternate translation: “No one will be able to describe his descendants.” (2) that no one will be able to describe the other people living at the same time as the Messiah because they will be so wicked. Alternate translation: “No one will be able to describe how wicked his contemporaries are.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 33 idk8 figs-activepassive αἴρεται ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς ἡ ζωὴ αὐτοῦ 1 his life was taken from the earth If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his enemies will take his life from the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 34 agq5 figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ εὐνοῦχος τῷ Φιλίππῳ εἶπεν 1 Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that the Ethiopian official responded to Philip’s question about whether he understood what he was reading. Alternate translation: “The eunuch responded to Philip’s question by saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 8 34 htb2 figs-idiom δέομαί σου 1 I am begging you The Ethiopian official is using a polite, idiomatic expression. Alternate translation: “Please tell me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 8 34 pa3m writing-pronouns ἑτέρου τινός 1 In this context, the pronoun **other** means “other person.” Alternate translation: “some other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 35 j7xw figs-metonymy ἀνοίξας & τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ 1 By association with the way a person would be **opening his mouth** in order to speak, this means that Philip spoke. The image of the open mouth suggests a certain confidence and freedom in speaking. Alternate translation: “speaking confidently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 35 uw21 figs-explicit τῆς Γραφῆς ταύτης 1 this scripture By **this scripture**, Luke implicitly means the passage that the official had been reading. Alternate translation: “the passage from Isaiah that the official had been reading” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 35 xg4i figs-metonymy εὐηγγελίσατο αὐτῷ τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 Luke is using the name **Jesus** by association to mean the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 36 ip13 figs-metonymy τι ὕδωρ & ὕδωρ 1 they were going along the road Luke and the official are using the word **water** to mean a body of water, such as a pool at a desert oasis. Alternate translation: “a pool of water … there is a pool of water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 36 muz2 figs-rquestion τί κωλύει με βαπτισθῆναι? 1 What is preventing me from being baptized? This question could be: (1) a rhetorical question that the eunuch is using as a polite way to ask Philip to baptize him. Alternate translation: “Please allow me to be baptized.” (2) a genuine request for information, since Philip seems to answer this question in [8:37](../08/37.md) by identifying something that could keep the official from being baptized. Alternate translation: “Is there a condition I must meet in order to be baptized?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 8 36 wb9j figs-activepassive με βαπτισθῆναι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you from baptizing me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 37 ov75 translate-textvariants εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ ὁ Φίλιππος ἐὰν πιστεύεις ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου σωθήσει; ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ εἶπεν Πιστεύω εἰς τὸν Χριστὸν τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ θεοῦ 1 As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this verse is found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but it is not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting the verse in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
|
||
ACT 8 37 qj5i figs-metaphor ἐὰν πιστεύεις ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου 1 Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts and intentions. Alternate translation: “If you genuinely believe in Jesus and want to be his disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 8 37 djq2 figs-activepassive σωθήσει 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 37 e3uu figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς & εἶπεν 1 Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that the eunuch responded to what Philip told him. Alternate translation: “the eunuch responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 8 38 l8wl figs-metonymy ἐκέλευσεν στῆναι τὸ ἅρμα 1 he commanded the chariot to stop Luke is using the term **chariot** by association to mean the driver of the chariot. Alternate translation: “the official told the driver of the chariot to stop” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 8 38 nn00 writing-pronouns ἐβάπτισεν αὐτόν 1 The pronoun **he** stands for Philip, and the pronoun **him** stands for the eunuch. Alternate translation: “Philip baptized the eunuch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 8 39 xp52 grammar-connect-time-sequential γὰρ 1 the eunuch did not see him anymore While the word translated **for** often introduces a reason, that does not seem to be its function here. Luke is not saying that the eunuch did not see Philip anymore because he did not look for him but instead **went on his way**. Rather, the word **for** seems simply to introduce a continuation of the narrative. Alternate translation: “but” or “nevertheless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
|
||
ACT 8 40 r1x7 figs-explicit Φίλιππος & εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον 1 Philip was found at Azotus The implication is that there was no indication of Philip traveling between where he baptized the Ethiopian and Azotus. He suddenly disappeared along the road to Gaza and reappeared at the town of Azotus. Alternate translation: “Philip suddenly reappeared at Azotus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 8 40 bbws figs-activepassive Φίλιππος & εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Philip reappeared at Azotus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 8 40 arh5 διερχόμενος 1 passed through Alternate translation: “as he passed through that area, he was”
|
||
ACT 8 40 zfn6 figs-hyperbole τὰς πόλεις πάσας 1 to all the cities Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “to the cities in that region” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 8 40 yf7i translate-names Ἄζωτον & Καισάρειαν 1 **Azotus** and **Caesarea** are the names of cities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 9 intro jm6x 0 # Acts 9 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>In [9:1](../09/01.md), the story shifts back to Saul and tells about his salvation.<br><br>In [9:32](../09/32.md), the story shifts from Saul to a new part of the story about Peter.<br><br>Acts [9:31](../09/31.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the third major part of the book.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### “Letters for the synagogues in Damascus”<br><br>The “letters” Paul asked for in 9:2 were probably legal papers that permitted him to put Christians in prison. The synagogue leaders in Damascus would have obeyed the letter because it was written by the high priest. If the Romans had seen the letter, they also would have allowed Saul to persecute the Christians, because they permitted the Jews to do as they desired to people who broke their religious laws.<br><br>### “The Way”<br><br>No one knows for sure who first started calling the community of Jesus’ followers “the Way.” This may be what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God. However, in the book of Acts the term is only used by outsiders, as in 9:2, or by believers speaking to outsiders. So it could also be a term by which the community of Jesus’ followers was known outside that community.<br><br>### “the church”<br><br>Acts 9:31 is the first use of the word **church** in the singular to refer to more than one local congregation. In that verse it refers to all the believers in all the groups throughout Judea, Galilee, and Samaria. It shows that they recognized that they all had a common identity as followers of Jesus.<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### “the Lord”<br><br>Luke refers to Jesus by a respectful title, “the Lord,” in verses 1, 10, 11, 15, 27, 28, 31, 35, and 42, and Ananias refers to Jesus the same way in verse 17. In your translation, you may wish to clarify that this means “the Lord Jesus.” Or you could state “Jesus,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### What Saul saw when he met Jesus<br><br>It is clear that Saul saw a light and that it was because of this light that he “fell upon the ground.” Some people think that Saul knew that it was the Lord speaking to him without seeing a human form, because the Bible often speaks of God as being light and living in light. Other people think that later in his life he was able to say, “I have seen the Lord Jesus” because it was a human form that he saw here.
|
||
ACT 9 1 r4n5 writing-newevent δὲ 1 General Information: Luke uses the word translated **But** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 9 1 anb6 figs-hendiadys ἐμπνέων ἀπειλῆς καὶ φόνου εἰς 1 still speaking threats even of murder against the disciples Luke is using the two words **threat** and **murder** together to express a single idea. The word **murder** tells what kind of **threat** Saul was making. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “making murderous threats against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 9 1 lrre figs-metonymy ἐμπνέων 1 Luke is using the term **breathing** by association to mean “speaking,” since people breathe out while they speak. Alternate translation: “speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 9 2 wyfp writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ & εὕρῃ & ἀγάγῃ 1 The pronoun **him** refers to the high priest and both instances of the pronoun **he** refer to Saul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 9 2 zu6j translate-unknown ἐπιστολὰς 1 See the General Notes to this chapter for an explanation of what these **letters** were. This may help you decide what word in your language to use for them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 9 2 v9lw figs-metonymy εἰς Δαμασκὸν πρὸς τὰς συναγωγάς 1 to the synagogues Luke is using the terms **Damascus** and **synagogues** by association to mean the people, probably the leaders, of the synagogues in Damascus. Alternate translation: “to the people in the synagogues of Damascus” or “to the leaders of the synagogues in Damascus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 9 2 thuy translate-names τῆς ὁδοῦ, ὄντας 1 As the General Notes to this chapter explain, **the Way** was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. Alternate translation: “who belonged to the Way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 9 2 mma1 figs-activepassive δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he might bind them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 9 2 grch figs-synecdoche δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 Luke is using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “he might arrest them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 9 2 a6z4 figs-explicit δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 having bound them, he might bring them to Jerusalem The implication is that Saul wanted to bring believers in Jesus to Jerusalem for trial and punishment by the Jewish leaders. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he might take them as prisoners to Jerusalem so that the Jewish leaders there could judge and punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 3 jf4g figs-explicit ἐν & τῷ πορεύεσθαι 1 as he was traveling Luke means implicitly that the high priest gave Saul the letters he asked for and that Saul then left Jerusalem to go to Damascus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as he was traveling to Damascus with letters that the high priest gave him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 3 by55 writing-newevent ἐγένετο 1 it happened that Luke uses the phrase **it happened that** to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 9 3 dm6c αὐτὸν περιήστραψεν φῶς ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 there shone on him a light from heaven Alternate translation: “a light from heaven shone all around him”
|
||
ACT 9 3 gua8 ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 from heaven This could mean: (1) heaven, where God lives or (2) the sky. The first meaning is preferable. Use that meaning if your language has a separate word for it.
|
||
ACT 9 4 y4u4 figs-explicit πεσὼν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν 1 he fell to the ground Saul did not fall down accidentally. This could mean: (1) that the light caused him to fall to the ground. Alternate translation: “falling to the ground stunned by the dazzling light” (2) that Saul fainted when he saw the light. Alternate translation: “falling faint because of the glorious light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 4 c9l4 figs-rquestion τί με διώκεις? 1 why are you persecuting me? The voice is using the question form to rebuke Saul. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate its words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the rebuke in another way. Alternate translation: “you should not be persecuting me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 9 5 jaq2 writing-politeness τίς εἶ, κύριε? 1 Who are you, Lord? Saul is not yet acknowledging that Jesus is **Lord**. He uses that title because he recognizes that he is speaking to someone of divine power. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use a similar term of respect. Alternate translation: “Who are you, Sir” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 9 5 abc0 writing-pronouns εἶπεν & ὁ 1 he The first instance of **he** stands for Saul, and the second instance of **he** stands for Jesus. Alternate translation: “Saul said … Jesus replied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 9 5 q8ge εἶ & σὺ 1 Both occurrences of the word **you** here are singular.
|
||
ACT 9 6 fbi6 figs-activepassive λαληθήσεταί σοι 1 it will be told to you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone will tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 9 8 puw3 figs-activepassive ἀνεῳγμένων & τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτοῦ 1 his eyes being opened If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation, as in UST: “when he opened his eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 9 8 dgg8 writing-pronouns εἰσήγαγον 1 he was seeing nothing The pronoun **they** stands for the men who were traveling with Saul, as described in [9:8](../09/08.md). Alternate translation: “the men who were traveling with him brought him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 9 9 fhn6 ἦν ἡμέρας τρεῖς μὴ βλέπων 1 he was … without sight Alternate translation: “he remained blinded for three days”
|
||
ACT 9 9 t8uc figs-explicit οὐκ ἔφαγεν οὐδὲ ἔπιεν 1 neither ate nor drank This could mean: that Saul chose not to eat or drink as a form of worship. [9:11](../09/11.md) says that Saul was praying at this time, and he may have been fasting along with his prayers. Alternate translation: “he fasted from food and drink” (2) that Saul had no appetite or thirst because he was too distressed from his situation. Alternate translation: “he was too distressed to eat or drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 10 j847 writing-participants ἦν δέ τις μαθητὴς ἐν Δαμασκῷ ὀνόματι Ἁνανίας 1 Now there was Luke uses this sentence to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 9 10 kgn9 translate-names Ἁνανίας 1 **Ananias** is the name of a man. This is not the same Ananias whom Luke described in [5:1](../05/01.md) (that man died), but you may translate the name here the same way you did there. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 9 10 vqh0 writing-politeness ὁ Κύριος 1 Here and throughout this chapter, **the Lord** is a respectful title that Luke is using to refer to Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 9 10 vl8k figs-idiom ἰδοὺ, ἐγώ, Κύριε 1 he said **Behold, I** is a Hebrew idiom that Ananias is using to identify himself as the Ananias to whom the Lord is calling. Alternate translation: “Yes, Lord, this is Ananias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 9 10 u3e1 figs-explicit ἰδοὺ, ἐγώ, Κύριε 1 Ananias is saying implicitly that he is present and available to serve **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “Yes, Lord, this is Ananias, and I am here ready to do what you ask” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 11 mn24 figs-idiom ἀναστὰς, πορεύθητι ἐπὶ τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν 1 go to the street which is called Straight Here, the word **arising** means that God wants Ananias to take action, not that Ananias is lying down or sitting down and God wants him to stand up. You may be able to convey this with a different kind of expression. Alternate translation: “Go on over to Straight Street” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 9 11 kopv figs-activepassive τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν 1 If your language does not use the passive form **called**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the street that people call Straight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 9 11 pyr2 translate-names τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν 1 **Straight** is the name of a street. Alternate translation: “Straight Street” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 9 11 ie1l translate-names Ἰούδα 1 the house of Judas **Judas** it the name of a man. This is not the disciple who betrayed Jesus (that man died); this Judas was the owner of a house in Damascus where Saul was staying. But you may translate the name here the same way you did in [1:13](../01/13.md), [1:16](../01/16.md), and [5:37](../05/37.md) for the disciple and two other men with the same name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 9 11 k3ve figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ γὰρ, προσεύχεται 1 The Lord says **behold** to get Ananias to focus his attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Now listen carefully: He is praying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 9 12 jk46 translate-symaction ἐπιθέντα αὐτῷ χεῖρας 1 laying hands on him In this culture, **laying hands on** people was a symbolic way of conveying a spiritual blessing to them, as the apostles did in [6:6](../06/06.md) for the men chosen to oversee the food distribution. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “giving him a spiritual blessing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 9 13 quxn figs-nominaladj ἀπὸ πολλῶν 1 Ananias is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “from many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 9 13 sh2m figs-abstractnouns ὅσα κακὰ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **evils**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how many harmful things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 9 13 la9t figs-metonymy τοῖς ἁγίοις σου ἐποίησεν ἐν Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 to your saints Ananias is using the term **saints** by association to mean believers in Jesus, since the term means “holy ones” or “ones who are set apart.” Alternate translation: “to the people in Jerusalem who are dedicated to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 9 14 ptd6 figs-abstractnouns ἔχει ἐξουσίαν παρὰ τῶν ἀρχιερέων 1 he has authority … to bind all If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the chief priests have authorized him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 9 14 gk5o figs-synecdoche δῆσαι 1 Ananias is using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “to arrest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 9 14 hi6x figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 Ananias is using the participle **calling**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term **ones** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the people who call on your name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 9 14 t3fl figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 who call upon your name Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “the ones calling upon you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 9 14 ampz figs-idiom τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 Here, the expression **calling on** means to worship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ones worshiping you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 9 15 jmt7 figs-possession σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς & μοι 1 this one is a chosen instrument of mine The Lord is using the possessive form to describe Saul as an **instrument** who is characterized by his **choosing**. Alternate translation: “an instrument I have chosen” or “someone I have chosen as an instrument” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 9 15 gk29 writing-pronouns οὗτος 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this** refers to Saul. Alternate translation: “this man” or “this man Saul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 9 15 ndxu figs-metaphor σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς & μοι 1 The Lord describes Saul as an **instrument** or tool to indicate that he intends to use Saul to advance his purposes. Alternate translation: “someone I have chosen to use” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 9 15 z5fj figs-metaphor τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 who will carry my name The Lord says that Saul will **carry** his **name**, meaning that he will go to many places and speak about it. Alternate translation: “to speak about my name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 9 15 h8vw figs-metonymy τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “to speak about me” or “to tell others about me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 9 15 wh8c figs-explicit ἐθνῶν 1 The term **nations** refers to people groups that are not Jewish. See how you translated it in [4:25](../04/25.md). Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 15 bbfd figs-synecdoche βασιλέων 1 The Lord is using **kings**, one kind of ruler, to mean all kinds of rulers. Saul, later known as Paul, testified before various rulers and officials. Alternate translation: “rulers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 9 15 uq9b figs-metaphor υἱῶν & Ἰσραήλ 1 The Lord is using the word **sons** to mean “descendants.” He is speaking of the Israelites, who were descendants of the patriarch Jacob, also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” or “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 9 16 kty3 figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματός μου 1 for my name Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. This could mean: (1) that Saul will suffer for telling people about Jesus. Alternate translation: “to make me known” (2) that Saul will suffer for Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “for me” or “for my sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 9 17 s8ms figs-explicit ἀπῆλθεν δὲ Ἁνανίας καὶ εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν 1 And Ananias departed, and entered into the house It may be helpful to state that **Ananias** went to **the house** before he **entered into** it. UST models one way to express this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 17 my6m translate-symaction ἐπιθεὶς ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας 1 having laid his hands on him When Ananias **laid his hands** on Saul, this was a symbolic way of giving him a blessing. See the explanation at [9:2](../09/02.md) and see how you translated the same expression there. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 9 17 q61x figs-yousingular σοι & ἤρχου & ἀναβλέψῃς 1 All of the occurrences of the word **you** in this verse are singular and refer to Saul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
|
||
ACT 9 17 cah9 figs-metaphor Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφέ 1 **Brother** is a figurative title that Ananias is using for **Saul**. The two men are not actual brothers. This could mean: (1) that Ananias is already addressing Saul as someone who shares the same faith. See how you translated “brother” with this meaning in [1:15](../01/15.md) and [6:3](../06/03.md). Alternate translation: “Saul, my fellow believer” (2) that Ananias is addressing Saul as a fellow Israelite, as the word is used in [3:17](../03/17.md) and many other places in this book. Alternate translation: “Saul, my fellow Israelite” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 9 17 cxu4 figs-nominaladj ὁ ὀφθείς σοι 1 Ananias is using the participle **having appeared**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun to mean a person, Jesus. ULT adds the term **one** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “who appeared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 9 17 ptg0 figs-go ᾗ ἤρχου 1 Your language may say “coming” rather than **going** in a context such as this. Use whichever word is more natural. Alternate translation: “by which you were coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
|
||
ACT 9 17 a89q figs-activepassive ὅπως ἀναβλέψῃς καὶ πλησθῇς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 so that you might see again and be filled with the Holy Spirit If your language does not use the passive form **filled**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that you might see again and that the Holy Spirit might fill you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 9 17 x4ey figs-metaphor πλησθῇς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Ananias is speaking as if Saul were a container that the Holy Spirit could fill. Alternate translation: “receive the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 9 18 m1hx translate-unknown λεπίδες 1 something like scales fell It may be helpful to your readers if you use something they would recognize that has scales to describe the **scales** that fell from Saul’s eyes. Alternate translation: “fish scales” or “lizard scales” or “snake scales” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 9 18 efs9 figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθη 1 rising up, he was baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Ananias baptized him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 9 19 rxfi figs-activepassive ἐνισχύθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he felt stronger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 9 20 rc49 figs-pronouns ἐκήρυσσεν τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The personal pronoun **he** refers to Saul, and the demonstrative pronoun **this** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Saul proclaimed that Jesus is the Son of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 9 20 w65r guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
|
||
ACT 9 21 xid8 figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ ἀκούοντες 1 all who were hearing Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “those who heard him” or “many who heard him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 9 21 a8j8 figs-nominaladj οἱ ἀκούοντες & ὁ πορθήσας & τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους 1 Luke is using the participles **hearing**, **having destroyed**, and **calling on**, which function as adjective, as nouns. ULT adds the terms **ones** and **one** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “those who heard … the man who destroyed … those who call” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 9 21 f4fd figs-rquestion οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ πορθήσας ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο, καὶ ὧδε εἰς τοῦτο ἐληλύθει, ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς? 1 Is not this the one who destroyed those in Jerusalem who call on this name? The people in Damascus are using the question form to emphasize that Saul was indeed the man who had persecuted the believers in Jerusalem and had come to Damascus to arrest the believers there. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “This is the man who destroyed those in Jerusalem who call on this name! And he come here for this, that he might bring them bound to the chief priests!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 9 21 ctg3 figs-explicit τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο 1 this name By **this name** the speakers implicitly mean the name of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the ones calling on the name of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 21 l82i figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο 1 Here, the **name** of Jesus represents his person. Alternate translation: “the ones calling on Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 9 21 zuoi figs-idiom τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο 1 Here, **calling on** is an idiom. See how you translated it in [9:14](../09/14.md). Alternate translation: “the ones worshiping Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 9 21 i512 figs-activepassive ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that he might bind them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 9 21 pnrp figs-synecdoche ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς 1 Like Ananias in [9:14](../09/14.md), the people here are using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “that he might arrest them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 9 22 r1np figs-explicit καὶ συνέχυννεν τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς κατοικοῦντας ἐν Δαμασκῷ, συμβιβάζων ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ Χριστός 1 was stirring up the Jews Saul was not intentionally **stirring up the Jews**. They became agitated because they could not find a way to refute Saul’s arguments that Jesus was the Messiah. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “As he proved that Jesus is the Christ, the Jews living in Damascus became agitated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 23 cg9k figs-idiom ὡς & ἐπληροῦντο ἡμέραι ἱκαναί 1 As in [2:1](../02/01.md) and [7:23](../07/23.md), this is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after many days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 9 23 nyh4 figs-activepassive ὡς & ἐπληροῦντο ἡμέραι ἱκαναί 1 Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” but use an active verbal form instead of the passive form here. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 9 23 g74c figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 9 23 g6gw writing-pronouns αὐτόν 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Saul. Alternate translation: “Saul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 9 24 gnm1 figs-infostructure ἐγνώσθη δὲ τῷ Σαύλῳ ἡ ἐπιβουλὴ αὐτῶν 1 This could mean: (1) that a person realized there was a plot by recognizing that the Jewish leaders were watching the gates, and that person told Saul. In that case it may be helpful to move this information to the end of the verse, as UST does. (2) that someone told Saul about the plot, but even so, he was not able to flee for his life, because the gates were being watched. In that case you could change the second instance of **But** in the verse to “However.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 9 24 lv62 figs-activepassive ἐγνώσθη δὲ τῷ Σαύλῳ ἡ ἐπιβουλὴ αὐτῶν 1 But their plan became known to Saul If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Saul learned about their plot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 9 24 cy9n figs-explicit παρετηροῦντο & τὰς πύλας & ὅπως αὐτὸν ἀνέλωσιν 1 indeed they were watching the gates The city of Damascus had a wall surrounding it. People could normally only enter and exit the city through **the gates** in this wall. Saul’s enemies expected that he would try to leave the city eventually and they hoped to catch him and kill him when he did. Alternate translation: “they were … watching the gates in the city wall … in order to kill him when he tried to leave the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 24 b0gv figs-metonymy τὰς πύλας 1 Luke is using **the gates** to mean the people going through the gates. Alternate translation: “to see who was going through the gates” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 9 24 aezc figs-merism ἡμέρας τε καὶ νυκτὸς 1 Luke is using the two parts of a full day, **day** and **night**, to mean all the time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “all the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||
ACT 9 25 lc8m figs-explicit οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ 1 his disciples These **disciples** were people who had believed Saul’s message and become committed followers of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the people who had believed Saul’s message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 26 e38m figs-hyperbole πάντες ἐφοβοῦντο αὐτόν 1 but they were all afraid of him Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were afraid of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 9 27 abca writing-pronouns Βαρναβᾶς & ἐπιλαβόμενος αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστόλους; καὶ διηγήσατο αὐτοῖς πῶς ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ εἶδεν τὸν Κύριον, καὶ ὅτι ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ & ἐπαρρησιάσατο 1 told them The pronoun **him** refers to Saul in every instance. The pronoun **he** refers to Saul in the first and third instances and to **the Lord** in the second instance. The pronoun **them** refers to **the apostles**. Alternate translation: “taking hold of Saul, Barnabas brought him to the apostles and told the apostles how Saul had seen the Lord on the road and that the Lord had spoken to Saul … Saul had spoken boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 9 27 n9f1 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 he had spoken boldly in the name of Jesus Here the **name** of Jesus represents his authority. Saul **had spoken boldly** with delegated authority, representing Jesus. Alternate translation: “as a representative of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 9 28 cgb1 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce what Saul was able to do after Barnabas reassured the apostles about him. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 9 28 m5rs writing-pronouns ἦν μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 he was with them The pronoun **he** refers to Saul. The pronoun **them** refers to the apostles and probably other disciples in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “Saul was with the apostles and other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 9 28 r6ok figs-idiom εἰσπορευόμενος καὶ ἐκπορευόμενος 1 This is a Hebrew idiom that refers to freedom of movement. Saul was completely accepted by the believers in Jerusalem and could go anywhere among them. Alternate translation: “moving about freely among them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 9 28 fbb7 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου 1 in the name of the Lord See how you translated the similar expression in [9:27](../09/27.md). Alternate translation: “as a representative of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 9 29 d7lm translate-names Ἑλληνιστάς 1 debated with the Hellenists **Hellenists** was the name for Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke the Greek language and followed Greek customs. See how you translated this name in [6:1](../06/01.md). (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
|
||
ACT 9 29 lgqe figs-explicit οἱ δὲ ἐπεχείρουν ἀνελεῖν αὐτόν 1 The implication is that the Hellenists were not able to refute what Saul was saying about Jesus, and so they saw him as a threat and wanted to get rid of him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and because they could not refute him, they were attempting to kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 30 uz9a figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “his fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 9 30 j4mt figs-idiom κατήγαγον αὐτὸν εἰς Καισάρειαν 1 they brought him down to Caesarea Luke uses the phrase **brought him down** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Caesarea is lower in elevation. Alternate translation: “made sure he got safely to Caesarea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 9 30 aqn6 figs-explicit ἐξαπέστειλαν αὐτὸν 1 sent him away to Tarsus Caesarea was a seaport, and the believers probably **sent** Saul **to Tarsus** by ship. Alternate translation: “sent him away by ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 31 fh2g figs-abstractnouns εἶχεν εἰρήνην 1 had peace If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “enjoyed peaceful conditions once more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 9 31 elq7 figs-activepassive οἰκοδομουμένη καὶ πορευομένη 1 being built up and going on If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could state “God” or “the Holy Spirit.” Alternate translation: “As God built it up and it journeyed” or “As the Holy Spirit built it up and it journeyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 9 31 vx51 figs-metaphor οἰκοδομουμένη 1 Luke is speaking of the church as if it were a building that God was constructing. Alternate translation: “growing stronger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 9 31 j8c9 figs-metaphor πορευομένη τῷ φόβῳ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 walking in the fear of the Lord Here, **journeying** means “living.” Alternate translation: “living in the fear of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 9 31 z59s πορευομένη τῷ φόβῳ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Here the word **fear** describes a deep respect for God. Alternate translation: “living with a deep respect for the Lord”
|
||
ACT 9 31 hl24 figs-possession τῇ παρακλήσει τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 in the comfort of the Holy Spirit Luke is using the possessive form to describe **the Holy Spirit** as the one who was giving the church **encouragement**. Alternate translation: “with the Holy Spirit encouraging them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 9 32 w68g writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 Now it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 9 32 m9sg figs-hyperbole διὰ πάντων 1 throughout the whole region Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many places in the region of Judea, Galilee, and Samaria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 9 32 ad7g figs-idiom κατελθεῖν 1 to come down Luke says **to come down** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, where Peter was living, since that city is up on a mountain. Lydda is lower in elevation. Alternate translation: “to travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 9 32 tckc figs-idiom τοὺς ἁγίους τοὺς κατοικοῦντας Λύδδα 1 Luke says **to come down** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, where Peter was living, since that city is up on a mountain. Lydda is lower in elevation. Alternate translation: “to travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 9 32 g5c4 translate-names Λύδδα 1 in Lydda **Lydda** is the name of a city in Israel. It is located where the foothills meet the coastal plain. This city was called Lod in the Old Testament and it has that name in modern Israel as well. Decide what name would be most helpful to your readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 9 33 hzd7 εὗρεν & ἐκεῖ ἄνθρωπόν τινα 1 he found there a certain man The word **found** does not mean that Peter was intentionally searching for a certain man; he happened to meet him. Alternate translation: “there Peter happened to meet a man”
|
||
ACT 9 33 jnc4 writing-participants ἄνθρωπόν τινα ὀνόματι Αἰνέαν 1 a certain man named Aeneas Luke uses this sentence to introduce **Aeneas** as a new character in the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 9 33 owf3 translate-names Αἰνέαν 1 **Aeneas** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 9 33 uj5f writing-background ἐξ ἐτῶν ὀκτὼ κατακείμενον ἐπὶ κραβάττου, ὃς ἦν παραλελυμένος 1 lying in a bed … who was paralyzed In this verse, Luke provides background information about Aeneas to help readers understand what happens next in the story. This information shows how remarkable it was that Jesus could heal a man who had been bedridden for that long. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural and meaningful in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 9 33 k7hw grammar-connect-logic-result ἐξ ἐτῶν ὀκτὼ κατακείμενον ἐπὶ κραβάττου, ὃς ἦν παραλελυμένος 1 paralyzed The reason why Aeneas had been **lying in a bed for eight years** was that he **was paralyzed**. It may be clearer in your language to describe this result after giving the reason for it. Alternate translation: “who was paralyzed and so had lain in a bed for eight years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 9 34 t13n ἀνάστηθι 1 **Arise** in this context is literal, not figurative. It means to get up from a position of lying down, rather than to take action or make preparations.
|
||
ACT 9 34 ff2a figs-rpronouns ἀνάστηθι, καὶ στρῶσον σεαυτῷ 1 make your bed Peter says **for yourself** to emphasize that Jesus has healed Aeneas so completely that he will now be able to do for himself what others previously had to do for him. Alternate translation: “Get up, you could make your own bed now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
|
||
ACT 9 34 khrm translate-symaction στρῶσον σεαυτῷ 1 Getting up and making his own bed was also a symbolic action by which Aeneas demonstrated that Jesus had healed him. Alternate translation: “Arise and make your bed to show everyone that Jesus has healed you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 9 35 wykn writing-pronouns εἶδαν αὐτὸν πάντες οἱ κατοικοῦντες Λύδδα καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα, οἵτινες ἐπέστρεψαν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Aeneas. The pronoun **who** refers to the people of Lydda and Sharon. Alternate translation: “when all the people living in Lydda and Sharon saw him, they turned to the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 9 35 z3fp figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ κατοικοῦντες Λύδδα καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα 1 all who were living in Lydda and in Sharon Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “those who lived in Lydda and in Sharon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 9 35 qkv4 translate-names καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα 1 in Lydda and in Sharon **Sharon** is the name of a plain, on which Lydda was located. Alternate translation: “and in the surrounding area of Sharon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 9 35 pf23 figs-explicit εἶδαν αὐτὸν 1 saw him The implication is that the people knew Aeneas was bedridden and now they saw that he was healed. Alternate translation: “saw that Aeneas was healed” or “saw Aeneas up and walking around” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 35 x9yw figs-metaphor οἵτινες ἐπέστρεψαν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον 1 and they turned to the Lord Here, **turned to the Lord** means that the people believed in Jesus and started to obey him. Alternate translation: “and they repented of their sins and started obeying Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 9 36 zgq5 writing-newevent δέ 1 Now there was Luke uses the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 9 36 gwr4 translate-names Ταβειθά, ἣ διερμηνευομένη λέγεται, Δορκάς 1 Tabitha, which is translated to say “Dorcas.” **Tabitha** was this woman’s name in Aramaic, and **Dorcas** was her name Greek. (Both names mean “gazelle.” Note how, later in the story, Luke, writing in Greek, calls her Dorcas, while Peter, speaking in Aramaic, calls her Tabitha.) It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Her name in Aramaic was Tabitha, and her name in Greek was Dorcas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 9 36 z8la figs-activepassive λέγεται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “means” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 9 36 q2rn figs-metaphor πλήρης ἔργων ἀγαθῶν 1 full of good works Luke speaks of **Dorcas** as if she were a container that was **full** of good works and almsgivings. Alternate translation: Alternate translation: “doing many good things and giving to others generously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 9 37 mg72 figs-explicit ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 And it happened that in those days The phrase **in those days** refers to the time when Peter was nearby in Lydda. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “while Peter was nearby” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 37 y8sx figs-explicit λούσαντες & αὐτὴν ἔθηκαν 1 having washed her This was washing to prepare for Dorcas’s body for burial. Customarily her family and friends would have done it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. “Once her family and friends had washed her body to prepare it for burial, they laid it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 37 znj4 figs-explicit ἔθηκαν ἐν ὑπερῴῳ 1 they laid her in an upper room This was a temporary display of the body during the funeral process. Alternate translation: “they laid her body in an upper room so that people could come there and pay their respects” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 37 lbrl translate-unknown ὑπερῴῳ 1 In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built above other rooms. If your community does not have houses like that, you could use another expression to describe a large, sheltered space that people could use for funeral visitation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 9 38 qlp8 figs-quotations ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Πέτρος ἐστὶν ἐν αὐτῇ, ἀπέστειλαν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Peter is in Lydda,’ sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 9 38 pukn figs-youdual παρακαλοῦντες 1 Since two men are speaking, if your language marks participles for number, **urging** would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise it would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
|
||
ACT 9 39 k1se figs-idiom ἀναστὰς & Πέτρος συνῆλθεν αὐτοῖς 1 to the upper room Here the word **arising** means that Peter took action in order to be able to make the trip with these men, not that he got up from a sitting or lying position. Alternate translation: “Peter quickly prepared and went with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 9 39 tdrr figs-youdual αὐτοῖς 1 This first instance of **them** in the verse would be dual if your language uses that form, since it applies to two men. The second instance of **them** would be plural, since it refers to the group of widows. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
|
||
ACT 9 39 me79 figs-hyperbole πᾶσαι αἱ χῆραι 1 all the widows Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “a large crowd of widows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 9 39 piu7 figs-explicit χιτῶνας καὶ ἱμάτια, ὅσα ἐποίει μετ’ αὐτῶν οὖσα ἡ Δορκάς 1 widows It may be helpful to say explicitly that Dorcas made these **coats and garments** to help these **widows** because they were poor and could not afford clothes. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “coats and garments. When she was alive, Dorcas used to make many of these to help the widows because they were poor and could not afford clothes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 39 y6q5 figs-euphemism μετ’ αὐτῶν οὖσα 1 while being with them This may be a delicate way of speaking about Dorcas’s death, rather than saying “before she died.” Alternate translation, as in UST: “while she was still alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
|
||
ACT 9 40 yp2u translate-symaction θεὶς τὰ γόνατα 1 put out all of them Kneeling down was a reverent posture of prayer. Alternate translation: “having knelt down reverently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 9 40 wr7h figs-imperative Ταβειθά, ἀνάστηθι 1 This was not a command that Tabitha was capable of obeying. Instead, it was a command that directly caused her to be restored to life. Alternate translation: “Jesus the Messiah restores you to life, so you can get up now” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative)
|
||
ACT 9 40 k28m translate-symaction Ταβειθά, ἀνάστηθι 1 Getting up was a symbolic action by which Tabitha could demonstrate that Jesus had restored her to life. Alternate translation: “Get up to show everyone that Jesus has restored you to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 9 41 r7n6 figs-explicit δοὺς & αὐτῇ χεῖρα, ἀνέστησεν αὐτήν 1 having given his hand to her, he raised her up The implication is that Peter extended his **hand** to Tabitha to help her stand up. Alternate translation: “he let her hold onto his hand for support as he helped her stand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 9 41 b73s figs-infostructure τοὺς ἁγίους καὶ τὰς χήρας 1 the saints and the widows These **saints** and **widows** were probably not two different groups. The widows were likely also believers, but Luke mentions them specifically because Tabitha was so important to them. To show this, it may be helpful to put the information about the widows before the information about the believers. Alternate translation: “the widows and the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 9 41 ex8e figs-metonymy τοὺς ἁγίους 1 Luke is using the term **saints** by association to mean believers in Jesus. See how you translated the term in [9:33](../09/33.md). Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 9 42 nda9 figs-activepassive γνωστὸν δὲ ἐγένετο καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰόππης 1 And this became known throughout all Joppa If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People throughout all Joppa heard about this matter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 9 43 k9ik writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 Now it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 9 43 qar2 translate-unknown βυρσεῖ 1 Simon, a tanner A **tanner** is someone who makes leather from animal skins. If this is not an occupation that your readers would recognize or understand, you could use the name of a similar occupation in your culture that they would recognize. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 10 intro ym7z 0 # Acts 10 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>- Verses 1-2 give background information about Cornelius. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence at the start of v. 2. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])<br><br>- In verse 9, the story shifts away from Cornelius and tells how God prepared Peter to preach the gospel to the Gentiles.<br>- In verse 24, the story brings Peter and Cornelius together.<br><br>- The long sentence in verses 36-38 can be broken up into several sentences, as in the UST.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Jews visiting with Gentiles<br><br>The Jews believed that they would become unclean in God’s sight if they visited or ate food with a Gentile. This was because the Pharisees had made a law against this, wanting to keep Jews from eating foods that the law of Moses said were unclean. The law of Moses did say that some foods were unclean, but it did not say that Jewish people could not visit or eat with Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])<br><br>### Baptism and the Holy Spirit<br><br>Those who were listening to Peter received the Holy Spirit even as he was speaking to them. This showed the Jewish believers that Gentiles could believe the word of God and receive the Holy Spirit just as the Jewish believers had. After that, the Gentiles were baptized.
|
||
ACT 10 1 wtb9 writing-participants ἀνὴρ δέ τις 1 Now there was a certain man Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 10 1 h6zu translate-names Κορνήλιος 1 **Cornelius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 10 1 x476 translate-unknown ἑκατοντάρχης 1 named Cornelius, a centurion from the regiment that was called ‘Italian.’ A **centurion** was an officer in the Roman army who was in charge of a group of 100 soldiers. Such a group was called a “century.” Alternate translation: “an army officer in charge of 100 soldiers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 10 1 abcd figs-activepassive Σπείρης τῆς καλουμένης Ἰταλικῆς 1 the regiment that was called ‘Italian.’ If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the regiment people called Italian” or “the regiment whose name was Italian” or “the Italian Regiment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 1 h2a4 translate-unknown Σπείρης 1 A **regiment** was a military unit consisting of six centuries or 600 soldiers. You may have a term in your language that you can use for a unit of about this size. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 10 1 e88y translate-names Ἰταλικῆς 1 **Italian** is the name of a military unit. The name indicates that although the soldiers in it were stationed in Syria, they came from Italy and thus were native Romans. This made them more reliable protection for the high-ranking Roman officials whose residence was in Caesarea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 10 2 s6rh figs-doublet εὐσεβὴς καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν 1 devout and fearing God The word **devout** and the phrase **fearing God** mean similar things. (In this context, the word **fearing** has the sense of deep respect and awe.) Luke may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “sincerely devoted to God” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 10 2 rz4h figs-idiom εὐσεβὴς καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν 1 Jews in the time of the New Testament used the expression **fearing God** to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel, attended the synagogue, prayed at regular times, and supported the needs of the Jewish community. Luke may be using the expression in this way and assuming that his readers will recognize it. Alternate translation: “a Gentile who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 2 abce figs-explicit τῷ λαῷ 1 to the people Luke assumes that his readers will know that **the people** refers to Jewish people who were in need. Alternate translation: “to Jewish people in need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 2 imrx figs-ellipsis διὰ παντός 1 The phrase **through all** is an ellipsis for “through all times.” See how you translated it in [2:25](../02/25.md). Alternate translation: “always” or “at all times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 10 2 w2kx figs-hyperbole δεόμενος τοῦ Θεοῦ διὰ παντός 1 praying to God through all The phrase **through all**, meaning “at all times,” is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “often” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 10 3 up3j figs-explicit ὥραν ἐνάτην 1 the ninth hour This was the normal afternoon prayer time for Jews. Cornelius, as a Gentile who worshiped the God of Israel, would have praying at this time. Alternate translation: “during his afternoon prayer time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 3 ttsl figs-idiom ὥραν ἐνάτην 1 In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 3 z5ty translate-ordinal ὥραν ἐνάτην 1 If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “around hour nine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||
ACT 10 4 abcf writing-pronouns ὁ δὲ, ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ 1 But he stared at him The pronoun **he** stands for Cornelius, and the pronoun **him** stands for the angel. Alternate translation: “But Cornelius, staring at the angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 10 4 bd2h writing-politeness τί ἐστιν, κύριε 1 Cornelius uses the respectful title **lord** because he recognizes that he is speaking to a messenger from God. See how you translated the similar term in [9:5](../09/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 10 4 abcg writing-pronouns εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ 1 And he said to him The pronoun **he** stands for the angel, and the pronoun **him** stands for Cornelius. Alternate translation: “And the angel said to Cornelius” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 10 4 p5ml figs-metaphor αἱ προσευχαί σου, καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου, ἀνέβησαν εἰς μνημόσυνον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Your prayers and your alms have gone up for a memorial offering before God A **memorial offering** was the portion of an offering brought to the priests for their support that was burned on the altar as a pleasing aroma for God, to give God an occasion to remember the worshiper. The angel is using this offering to tell Cornelius that God is aware of his devotion and generosity and that God is pleased with those things. You could translate this metaphor as a simile, or you could explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “Your prayers and your alms have gone up like a memorial offering before God” or “God is aware of your prayers and your alms, and he is pleased with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 10 4 xpa1 figs-idiom ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, **before** means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “into the presence of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 5 h33i figs-activepassive ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people call Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 6 hou9 figs-activepassive ξενίζεται παρά 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “is the guest of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 6 bw0q translate-unknown βυρσεῖ 1 See how you translated the term **tanner** in [9:43](../09/43.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 10 7 g6lq ὡς δὲ ἀπῆλθεν ὁ ἄγγελος ὁ λαλῶν αὐτῷ 1 And when the angel who spoke to him had left Alternate translation: “And when Cornelius’ vision of the angel had ended”
|
||
ACT 10 7 yg7g εὐσεβῆ 1 devout The adjective **devout** describes a person who worships God and serves him. Alternate translation: “sincerely religious”
|
||
ACT 10 8 pcg2 figs-hyperbole ἅπαντα 1 having told them everything By **everything**, Luke means the details of the vision that Cornelius had. Alternate translation: “how an angel had spoken to him in a vision and what the angel had said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 10 9 ey9n writing-pronouns ὁδοιπορούντων ἐκείνων 1 The demonstrative pronoun **those** refers to Cornelius’ two servants and the soldier under Cornelius’ command. Alternate translation: “as the men whom Cornelius had sent were traveling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 10 9 tu7n translate-unknown περὶ ὥραν ἕκτην 1 at about the sixth hour In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “at around noon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 10 9 r6l8 translate-ordinal περὶ ὥραν ἕκτην 1 went up to the housetop If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “at around hour six” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||
ACT 10 10 im7x figs-personification ἐγένετο ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἔκστασις 1 a vision came upon him Luke speaks of this **vision** as if it were a living thing that could come onto someone. Alternate translation: “he had a vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 10 11 n4hi θεωρεῖ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνεῳγμένον 1 he sees the sky having been opened To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “And he saw” or “And Peter saw”
|
||
ACT 10 11 u9u4 figs-activepassive τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνεῳγμένον 1 like a large sheet … by four corners If your language does not use the passive form **opened**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the sky break open” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 11 jh1m figs-activepassive καθιέμενον 1 being let down by four corners If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It appeared as if someone was letting it down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 12 fdt3 figs-hyperbole πάντα τὰ 1 The word **all** is likely a generalization for emphasis, although since this was a vision, it is possible that the container Peter saw did contain every kind of these creatures. Alternate translation: “various” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 10 12 ua3j figs-explicit καὶ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 all the four-footed animals and creeping things on the earth, and birds of the sky From Peter’s response in [10:14](../10/14.md), the implication is that the law of Moses commanded the Jews not to eat some of the creatures in the container. Alternate translation: “and birds of the sky, including some that the law of Moses commanded Jews not to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 13 a2z4 figs-personification ἐγένετο φωνὴ πρὸς αὐτόν 1 a voice came to him Luke speaks of this **voice** as if it were a living thing that could come to someone. Alternate translation: “he heard a voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 10 13 zmeg figs-idiom ἀναστάς 1 Here the term **arising** means that the voice wanted Peter to take action, not that the voice wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation, as in UST: “Go ahead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 14 z7r5 figs-exclamations μηδαμῶς 1 Not at all **Not at all** is an exclamation that communicates a strong refusal to do or even to consider something. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “No, never” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
|
||
ACT 10 14 ewlu figs-doublenegatives οὐδέποτε ἔφαγον πᾶν κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of word **never** and the negative terms **common** and **unclean**. Alternate translation: “I have only ever eaten things that are holy and clean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 10 14 p0bf figs-doublet κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον 1 The words **common** and **unclean** mean similar things. Peter may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “that our Jewish laws forbid us to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 10 14 a2jj figs-explicit οὐδέποτε ἔφαγον πᾶν κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον 1 I have never eaten anything defiled and unclean The implication is that some the animals in the container were forbidden for Jews to eat. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “common and unclean, like some of those animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 15 as42 figs-personification φωνὴ πάλιν & πρὸς αὐτόν 1 The implied verb here is **came**, and so Luke is speaking once again of this **voice** as if it were a living thing that could come to someone. Alternate translation: “he heard the voice speaking to him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 10 15 xs5s figs-123person ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν 1 What God has cleansed If God is the speaker, he is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “What I, God, have cleansed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||
ACT 10 15 st9c writing-pronouns σὺ μὴ κοίνου 1 The voice is adding the pronoun **you** for emphasis. If your language does not ordinarily use a pronoun with the imperative but can do so for emphasis, it would be appropriate to do that here. You could also express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you must not make common” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 10 16 rlr9 figs-explicit τοῦτο & ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς 1 this happened three times This could mean: (1) that the voice told Peter three times to kill and eat, Peter refused three times, and each time the voice told him not to call unclean what God had cleansed. Alternate translation: “Peter had this exchange with the voice three times” (2) that after Peter first refused, the voice said to him three times, “What God has cleansed, you must not make common.” Alternate translation: “the voice said this three times” You may find it simplest to say, “This happened three times,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 16 ej9h figs-activepassive ἀνελήμφθη τὸ σκεῦος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it appeared as if someone was pulling the container back up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 17 d4zi ἐν ἑαυτῷ διηπόρει ὁ Πέτρος, τί ἂν εἴη τὸ ὅραμα ὃ εἶδεν 1 Peter was very confused … about Alternate translation: “Peter was wondering how God could have given him a vision like that”
|
||
ACT 10 17 n6da figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, οἱ ἄνδρες 1 behold Luke is using the term **behold** to focus readers’ attention on how suddenly these **men** appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then the men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 10 17 cg9a figs-activepassive οἱ ἀπεσταλμένοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κορνηλίου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom Cornelius had sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 17 e62m figs-explicit ἐπέστησαν ἐπὶ τὸν πυλῶνα 1 stood before the gate The implication is that the house of Simon the tanner had a wall around it and that there was a **gate** in the wall that people could use to enter the property. Alternate translation: “stood before the gate to the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 18 qe9d figs-activepassive ὁ ἐπικαλούμενος Πέτρος 1 they called out If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people called Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 18 r91o figs-activepassive ξενίζεται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “was a guest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 19 iqx5 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, ἄνδρες τρεῖς 1 Behold The Spirit is using the term **behold** to focus Peter’s attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “Pay attention, this is important: Three men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 10 19 va39 translate-textvariants ἄνδρες τρεῖς 1 three men are looking for you Cornelius sent two of his servants and one soldier. Some ancient texts say “two men” or “some men.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the readings of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
|
||
ACT 10 20 ndju figs-idiom ἀναστὰς 1 Here the term **arising** means that the voice wanted Peter to take action, not that the voice wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “Go ahead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 20 ym1x figs-explicit κατάβηθι 1 go down The implication is that Peter is to **go down** from the roof of the house and greet the men. Alternate translation: “go down from the roof of the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 20 wx4n figs-explicit πορεύου σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 go with them. Do not hesitate It would be natural for Peter not to want to go with the men, because they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “go with them, even though they are Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 20 j3iy figs-explicit μηδὲν διακρινόμενος 1 This could mean: (1) that the Spirit did not want Peter to have any doubts or worries about going with the men, even though they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “without worrying about it” (2) that the Spirit did not want Peter to feel that he should not be in the company of these men, because they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “not making a distinction between these men and others you would associate with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 22 rva1 figs-quotesinquotes οἱ & εἶπαν, Κορνήλιος, ἑκατοντάρχης ἀνὴρ δίκαιος, καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν, μαρτυρούμενός τε ὑπὸ ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ἐχρηματίσθη ὑπὸ ἀγγέλου ἁγίου, μεταπέμψασθαί σε εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκοῦσαι ῥήματα παρὰ σοῦ. 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “they told Peter that Cornelius, a centurion, a man righteous and fearing God and attested by the whole nation of the Jews, was directed by a holy angel to summon him to his house and to hear words from him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 10 22 i4zh writing-pronouns οἱ & εἶπαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the two servants and the soldier whom Cornelius sent. Alternate translation: “The messengers from Cornelius replied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 10 22 ue5z figs-synecdoche οἱ & εἶπαν 1 One of the messengers probably spoke these words on behalf of all three of them. Alternate translation: “one of them said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 10 22 wvl1 figs-doublet φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν 1 fearing God The word **righteous** and the phrase **fearing God** mean similar things. (In this context, the word **fearing** has the sense of deep respect and awe.) Luke may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “a man sincerely devoted to God” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 10 22 hrta figs-explicit ἀνὴρ δίκαιος, καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν 1 Jews in the time of the New Testament used the expression **fearing God** to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel. Luke may be using the expression in this way. See how you translated it in [10:2](../10/02.md). Alternate translation: “a Gentile who sincerely worships the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 22 hihl figs-activepassive μαρτυρούμενός τε ὑπὸ ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ἐχρηματίσθη ὑπὸ ἀγγέλου ἁγίου 1 If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “about whom the whole nation of the Jews testifies, received instructions from a holy angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 22 gv91 figs-hyperbole ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 the whole nation of the Jews Luke says **whole** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 10 22 e15o figs-metonymy ῥήματα 1 The messengers are using the term **words** to mean what Peter would say to Cornelius by using words. Alternate translation: “a message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 10 23 shs5 figs-explicit εἰσκαλεσάμενος οὖν αὐτοὺς ἐξένισεν 1 he hosted them The implication is that the journey to Caesarea was too long for them to begin that afternoon. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But since the journey to Caesarea was too long for them to make that day, Peter invited the men into Simon’s house and hosted them there overnight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 23 ycoi figs-idiom ἀναστὰς 1 Here the word **arising** means that Peter took action to prepare, not that he stood up from a seated or lying position. Alternate translation: “after packing for a journey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 23 t7cz figs-metaphor τινες τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 some of the brothers who were from Joppa Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “some fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 10 24 c3s6 τῇ & ἐπαύριον 1 the following day The **next day** means the day after they left Joppa. The journey to Caesarea took longer than one day. Alternate translation: “on the following day”
|
||
ACT 10 25 b4pn translate-symaction πεσὼν ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας 1 and falling down at his feet Be sure that it is clear in your translation that Cornelius did not fall down accidentally. He knelt down at Peter’s feet as a gesture to honor him. Alternate translation: “kneeling down and putting his face close to Peter’s feet to honor him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 10 26 s7n5 figs-declarative ἀνάστηθι, καὶ ἐγὼ αὐτὸς ἄνθρωπός εἰμι 1 Get up! I too am a man myself Peter is using the statement form to give a mild rebuke or correction to Cornelius. It may be clearer for your readers if you translate this as an imperative. Alternate translation: “Stop doing that! I am only a man, as you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
|
||
ACT 10 27 f9x6 writing-pronouns συνομιλῶν αὐτῷ, εἰσῆλθεν 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Cornelius, and the pronoun **he** refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “talking with Cornelius, Peter went in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 10 27 kdva writing-pronouns εὑρίσκει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “found” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 10 27 twp9 figs-activepassive συνεληλυθότας πολλούς 1 many people gathered together If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “many people whom Cornelius had gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 28 iyx6 figs-explicit ὡς ἀθέμιτόν ἐστιν ἀνδρὶ Ἰουδαίῳ 1 how unlawful it is for a Jewish man This phrase refers to the requirements of the Jewish religious law. Alternate translation: “that the Jewish law forbids a Jewish man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 28 k3we figs-explicit ἀλλοφύλῳ 1 a foreigner Here, the term **foreigner** refers to people who are not Jews. It is not a reference to where they live. Alternate translation: “a Gentile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 28 ztt0 figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπον 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 10 28 tl2h figs-doublet κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον 1 The words **common** and **unclean** mean similar things. Peter may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “unacceptable to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 10 29 x0p4 figs-activepassive μεταπεμφθείς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when you summoned me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 29 x0v3 figs-yousingular μετεπέμψασθέ 1 The word **you** is plural. Peter is speaking to everyone who has gathered in the home of Cornelius. Use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
|
||
ACT 10 30 mqv8 translate-textvariants ἀπὸ τετάρτης ἡμέρας μέχρι ταύτης τῆς ὥρας, ἤμην τὴν ἐνάτην προσευχόμενος ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ μου 1 praying Some ancient texts say, “From the fourth day until this hour, I was fasting, and at the ninth hour I was praying in my house.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
|
||
ACT 10 30 na4u figs-idiom ἀπὸ τετάρτης ἡμέρας 1 Four days ago In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” yesterday was the “second day,” the day before yesterday was the “third day,” and the day before that was the “fourth day” or **Four days ago**. You may wish to express this in your translation in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation, as in UST: “Three days ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 30 pkhh figs-idiom ταύτης τῆς ὥρας 1 Cornelius is using the term **hour** to mean a particular time. Alternate translation: “this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 30 x4m7 figs-nominaladj τὴν ἐνάτην 1 Cornelius is using the adjective **ninth** as a noun. ULT adds **hour** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. See how you translated this expression in [10:3](../10/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 10 30 u1es figs-idiom τὴν ἐνάτην 1 In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. See how you translated this expression in [10:3](../10/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 30 p73u translate-ordinal τὴν ἐνάτην 1 If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour nine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||
ACT 10 30 yy6e figs-explicit τὴν ἐνάτην 1 at the ninth hour This was the normal afternoon prayer time for Jews. Cornelius, as a Gentile who worshiped the God of Israel, would have praying at this time. Alternate translation: “during my usual afternoon prayer time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 30 oicx figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, ἀνὴρ 1 Cornelius is using the term **behold** to focus Peter’s attention on how suddenly this **man** appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then a man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 10 30 g485 figs-explicit ἀνὴρ 1 Luke says in [10:3](../10/03.md) that Cornelius saw an angel. Cornelius calls him **a man** here because the angel appeared to him in human form. you could state that explicitly in your translation if your readers might be confused otherwise. Alternate translation: “an angel in human form” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 31 twnu figs-quotesinquotes φησί, Κορνήλιε, εἰσηκούσθη σου ἡ προσευχὴ καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “he told me that my prayer had been heard and that my alms had been remembered before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])Q
|
||
ACT 10 31 uep3 φησί 1 To call attention to a development in the story, here Cornelius uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said”
|
||
ACT 10 31 heh3 figs-activepassive εἰσηκούσθη σου ἡ προσευχὴ καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 your prayer has been heard If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has heard your prayer and has remembered your alms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 31 s6nz figs-idiom ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 have been remembered before God The word **remembered** does not imply that God had forgotten about these **alms**. Rather, it means that God is aware of Cornelius’s devotion and generosity and is pleased with them. See how you translated the similar expression in [10:4](../10/04.md). Alternate translation: “God is aware of your alms and is pleased with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 31 xd0x figs-idiom ἐνώπιον 1 Here the word **before** is being used. Alternate translation: “in the presence of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 32 jjnn figs-quotesinquotes πέμψον οὖν εἰς Ἰόππην καὶ μετακάλεσαι Σίμωνα, ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος; οὗτος ξενίζεται ἐν οἰκίᾳ Σίμωνος, βυρσέως παρὰ θάλασσαν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “He said I should therefore send to Joppa and summon Simon who is called Peter, who was being hosted in the house of Simon, a tanner, by the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 10 32 ci31 figs-activepassive ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος 1 summon Simon who is called Peter If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people call Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 32 u1t6 figs-activepassive οὗτος ξενίζεται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “He is a guest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 32 jhzt translate-textvariants μετακάλεσαι Σίμωνα & παρὰ θάλασσαν 1 Some ancient manuscripts add at the end of this verse, “When he comes, he will speak to you.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
|
||
ACT 10 33 p5ee figs-yousingular σέ & σύ & σοι 1 immediately The word **you** is singular in each of these instances. Even though Peter came with other believers, Cornelius is addressing Peter directly. So use the singular form of “you” in your translation if your language makes that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
|
||
ACT 10 33 ruf3 writing-politeness σύ τε καλῶς ἐποίησας παραγενόμενος 1 and you did well in coming This expression is a polite way of thanking Peter for coming. Alternate translation: “and we are grateful to you for coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 10 33 lzie figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 Cornelius is using the word **we** to refer to himself and to his guests, but not to Peter and the believers who came with him, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 10 33 ry21 figs-idiom ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 before God Cornelius is using the word **before**. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 33 xt4x figs-activepassive τὰ προστεταγμένα σοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 that you have been instructed by the Lord If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that the Lord has told you to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 33 jc88 translate-textvariants τὰ προστεταγμένα σοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Some ancient manuscripts read “instructed by the Lord.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “instructed by God to say.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
|
||
ACT 10 34 cyn8 figs-explicitinfo ἀνοίξας & Πέτρος τὸ στόμα εἶπεν 1 And Peter opened his mouth and said It might seem that the expression **opening his mouth … said** contains redundant information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “Peter replied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
|
||
ACT 10 34 iii7 προσωπολήμπτης 1 God is not one who shows partiality Alternate translation: “one who shows favoritism”
|
||
ACT 10 34 ha31 figs-explicit οὐκ ἔστιν προσωπολήμπτης ὁ Θεός 1 In truth As the next verse shows, Peter means implicitly that God does not favor Jewish people above people of other nations. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God does not favor Jewish people above people of other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 35 b5cr ὁ φοβούμενος αὐτὸν καὶ ἐργαζόμενος δικαιοσύνην 1 fears Here, **fearing** has the sense of deep respect and awe. Alternate translation: “anyone who sincerely worships him and works righteousness”
|
||
ACT 10 35 j78e figs-abstractnouns ὁ φοβούμενος αὐτὸν καὶ ἐργαζόμενος δικαιοσύνην 1 the one who fears him and works righteous deeds is acceptable to him If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “anyone who worships him and does righteous deeds” or “anyone who worships him and does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 10 36 aac8 figs-explicit τὸν λόγον 1 Here Peter is implicitly saying to Cornelius and his guests that they know about this **word**; he says that explicitly in the next verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state “You know the word” in this verse as well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 36 ht1z figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Peter is using the term **word** to mean what God said to the Israelites by using words. Alternate translation: “The message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 10 36 anlh figs-metaphor τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραὴλ 1 Peter is using the word **sons** to mean “descendants.” He is speaking of the Israelites, who were descendants of the patriarch Jacob, also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 10 36 ok9b figs-abstractnouns εὐαγγελιζόμενος εἰρήνην διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “proclaiming that Jesus Christ reconciles us to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 10 36 md1l πάντων 1 he is Lord of all The word **all** could mean: (1) all people groups, both Jewish and non-Jewish. Alternate translation: “of all people, whether or not they are Jews” (2) all created things. Alternate translation: “of everything in God’s creation”
|
||
ACT 10 37 wecw figs-metonymy ὑμεῖς οἴδατε τὸ & ῥῆμα 1 Peter is using the term **word** to mean the things that happened through the life and ministry of Jesus. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You know the things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 10 37 ch65 figs-hyperbole καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας 1 throughout all Judea Peter says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “in many places in Judea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 10 37 sq2i μετὰ τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐκήρυξεν Ἰωάννης 1 after the baptism that John proclaimed Alternate translation: “after John preached to the people that they should repent and then baptized them”
|
||
ACT 10 38 seli figs-infostructure Ἰησοῦν τὸν ἀπὸ Ναζαρέθ, ὡς ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς 1 It may be helpful to put the information about God anointing before the information that it was Jesus whom God anointed. Alternate translation: “how God anointed Jesus, the one from Nazareth,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 10 38 p2qi figs-explicit Ἰησοῦν τὸν ἀπὸ Ναζαρέθ, ὡς ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς 1 Peter is once again saying implicitly that Cornelius and his guests know about the things he is describing. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You know how God anointed Jesus, the one from Nazareth,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 38 ku82 figs-metaphor ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ καὶ δυνάμει 1 God anointed him with the Holy Spirit and with power Peter speaks of the Holy Spirit and of God’s power as if they could be poured over someone like oil. Alternate translation: “God enabled him to do powerful works through the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 10 38 vuwo figs-abstractnouns εὐεργετῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **good**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “doing good things” or “helping people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 10 38 y5ya figs-hyperbole πάντας τοὺς καταδυναστευομένους ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβόλου 1 all who were oppressed by the devil Peter says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “those who were oppressed by the devil” or “many people who were oppressed by the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 10 38 tj3u figs-idiom ὁ Θεὸς ἦν μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 God was with him The expression **was with him** is an idiom. See how you translated it in [7:9](../07/09.md). Alternate translation: “God was helping him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 39 kal7 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς μάρτυρες 1 Here, **we** refers to Peter and the apostles and believers who were with Jesus when he was on earth, not to Cornelius and his guests. So use the exclusive form of “we” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 10 39 sx3a writing-pronouns ὃν καὶ ἀνεῖλαν 1 in the country of the Jews The pronoun **whom** refers to Jesus, and the pronoun **they** refers to the enemies of Jesus, the Jewish leaders who conspired against him and the Romans who ordered and carried out his execution. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Also, the enemies of Jesus killed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 10 39 z4dt figs-metonymy κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου 1 by hanging him on a tree This expression refers to crucifixion. Peter says **tree** to mean a wooden cross. Alternate translation: “crucifying him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 10 40 zxuk writing-pronouns τοῦτον 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 10 40 cxj5 figs-idiom τοῦτον ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν 1 but God raised up this one Here, **raised … up** is an idiom that refers to causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “God caused Jesus to become alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 40 w8kv figs-idiom τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ 1 on the third day In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” tomorrow was the “second day,” and the day after tomorrow was the “third day.” You may wish to express this in your translation in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “two days after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 10 40 iz8l figs-activepassive ἔδωκεν αὐτὸν ἐμφανῆ γενέσθαι 1 caused him to be seen If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “permitted many people to see him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 41 nm81 figs-activepassive οὐ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ, ἀλλὰ μάρτυσι τοῖς προκεχειροτονημένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡμῖν, οἵτινες συνεφάγομεν καὶ συνεπίομεν αὐτῷ μετὰ τὸ ἀναστῆναι αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 If you used an active form instead of “caused him to be seen” in the previous verse, you could adjust the language here to fit. It may be helpful to make this two new sentences. Alternate translation: “All the people did not see him, but witnesses chosen beforehand by God saw him. We who ate and drank with him after he rose from the dead saw him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 41 jq89 figs-explicit παντὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 By **the people**, Peter means the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “by all the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 41 zpyj figs-activepassive τοῖς προκεχειροτονημένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom God chose beforehand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 41 xlbl figs-synecdoche οἵτινες συνεφάγομεν καὶ συνεπίομεν αὐτῷ 1 Peter is using one activity that he and the other apostles did with Jesus after he rose from the dead, eating and drinking (that is, sharing meals), to mean spending time with him personally. Alternate translation: “who spend time with him personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 10 41 q7d1 figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Peter is using the adjective **dead** as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 10 42 ik96 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here, **us** refers to Peter and the other apostles whom Jesus chose, not to Cornelius and his guests. So use the exclusive form of “us” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 10 42 zne5 figs-explicit τῷ λαῷ 1 Connecting Statement: By **the people**, Peter means the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “to the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 42 c1ak figs-activepassive ὁ ὡρισμένος ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 that he is the one who has been chosen by God If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom God has chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 42 ws4t figs-nominaladj ζώντων καὶ νεκρῶν 1 of the living and the dead Peter is using the adjectives **living** and **dead** as nouns. (The word **living** is actually a participle, but it functions here as an adjective.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “of those who are alive and of those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 10 43 ub5d writing-pronouns τούτῳ 1 To this one, all the prophets bear witness that The demonstrative pronoun **this** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “To Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 10 43 y6d1 figs-metonymy διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ 1 through his name Peter is speaking of the **name** of Jesus. It could mean: (1) his actions. Alternate translation: “through what Jesus has done for them” (2) his authority. Alternate translation: “by his authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 10 44 cz7x figs-metaphor ἐπέπεσε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας τὸν λόγον 1 the Holy Spirit fell Luke is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if it could fall on Cornelius and his guests. See how you translated the similar expression in [8:16](../08/16.md). Alternate translation: “all the ones listening to his word received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])Q
|
||
ACT 10 44 wf7u figs-hyperbole πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας 1 all of those who were listening While the believers who came with Peter from Joppa were also **listening** to his message, the word **all** refers to the Gentiles who were present. Alternate translation: “Cornelius and his guests, who were listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 10 44 o839 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean what Peter was saying by using words. Alternate translation: “his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 10 45 j6wt figs-nominaladj οἱ & πιστοὶ 1 the gift of the Holy Spirit Luke is using the adjective **faithful** as a noun, to mean people who have faith in Jesus. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the faithful men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 10 45 qlpu figs-metonymy ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 Luke is using the term **circumcision** by association to identify these **faithful** people as Jewish. Alternate translation: “who were Jewish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 10 45 g161 figs-activepassive ἡ δωρεὰ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος ἐκκέχυται 1 the gift of the Holy Spirit was poured out If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God was pouring out the gift of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 45 mqs8 figs-metaphor ἐκκέχυται 1 was poured out Luke is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if he were a liquid that could be poured on people. This image implies a generous amount. Alternate translation: “was generously given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 10 45 hfs9 figs-possession ἡ δωρεὰ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 Luke is using a possessive form to identify **the Holy Spirit** as a **gift** from God. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit as a gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 10 45 f33n figs-explicit καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ ἔθνη 1 also on the Gentiles Here, **also** refers to the fact that the Holy Spirit had already been given to the Jewish believers. Alternate translation: “on the Gentiles, as it had been on Jewish believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 46 p6pa figs-explicit λαλούντων γλώσσαις 1 speaking with tongues and praising God The implication is that at least some of these **languages** were ones that the Jews recognized and could understand, but which Cornelius and his guests had not learned. This caused the Jews to acknowledge that the Holy Spirit was giving them the ability to speak these languages. Alternate translation: “speaking in languages they had not learned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 47 zktm figs-doublenegatives μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς 1 The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding **is he**. Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Is anyone able to withhold water so that these are not baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 10 47 u5d5 figs-rquestion μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς? 1 No one is able to withhold water, is he, that these are not baptized, who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did? Peter is using the question form to convince the Jewish Christians that the Gentile believers should be baptized. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “No one should withhold water so that these are not baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 10 47 vuax figs-doublenegatives μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς? 1 Even if the negative question is turned into a positive statement, a double negative still remains, the negative verb **withhold** and the negative particle **not**. This double negative can also be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “We should make water available so that these can be baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 10 47 df24 figs-synecdoche τὸ ὕδωρ 1 Peter is using **water**, one thing necessary for baptism, to signify all the means and permission necessary for baptism. Alternate translation: “the means and permission” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 10 47 kwv5 figs-activepassive τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that these do not receive baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 48 l8ci figs-explicit προσέταξεν & αὐτοὺς & βαπτισθῆναι 1 The implication is that Peter and the believers who accompanied him from Joppa would be the ones to baptize the Gentile believers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter told the Gentile believers to allow the Jewish Christians to baptize them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 10 48 z4fh figs-activepassive προσέταξεν & αὐτοὺς & βαπτισθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he commanded them to receive baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 10 48 ax6x figs-idiom ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ βαπτισθῆναι 1 be baptized in the name of Jesus Christ Here, **in the name** is an idiomatic way of saying “on the basis of naming.” Peter commanded Cornelius and his guests to acknowledge Jesus as the Messiah as the basis of their baptism for the forgiveness of their sins, as described in [10:43](../10/43.md). See how you translated the similar expression in [2:48](../02/48.md). Alternate translation: “on the basis of naming Jesus as the Christ” or “upon acknowledging that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 11 intro hva5 0 # Acts 11 General Notes<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### “The Gentiles also had received the word of God”<br><br>Almost all of the first believers were Jewish. Luke writes in this chapter that many Gentiles started to believe in Jesus. They believed that the message about Jesus was true and so began to “receive the word of God.” Some of the believers in Jerusalem did not believe that Gentiles could truly follow Jesus, so Peter went to them and told them what had happened to him and how he had seen the Gentiles receive the Word of God and receive the Holy Spirit.<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### “the Lord”<br><br>In verse 16, Peter refers to Jesus by a respectful title, “the Lord.” Luke refers to Jesus the same way in the second instance of the phrase in verse 21 and in verses 23 and 24. In your translation, you may wish to clarify that this means “the Lord Jesus.” Or you could state “Jesus,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Peter’s summary of his visit to Cornelius<br><br>In Acts 11:5–17, Peter summarizes the events that are described in greater detail in 10:9–47. Very similar language is used throughout both passages. As you translate 11:5–17, in order to ensure that your translation is consistent, compare how you translated specific terms and phrases in 10:9–47.
|
||
ACT 11 1 ab75 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke uses the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 11 1 f1md figs-metaphor οἱ & ἀδελφοὶ 2 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 11 1 w3rx figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 had received the word of God Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Peter, by using words, shared with Cornelius and his guests. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 11 2 kb4m figs-idiom ἀνέβη & εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 came up to Jerusalem Luke says that Peter **came up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “returned to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 11 2 yar6 figs-metonymy οἱ ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those from the circumcision As in [10:45](../10/45.md), Luke is using the term **circumcision** by association to identify as Jewish these believers who disputed with Peter. They were likely to have been strictly observant Jews who followed the teaching of the Pharisees about Jews visiting with Gentiles. See the discussion of this in the General Notes to Chapter 10. Alternate translation: “some believers who were strictly observant Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 11 3 pcce figs-quotations λέγοντες, ὅτι εἰσῆλθεν πρὸς ἄνδρας, ἀκροβυστίαν ἔχοντας, καὶ συνέφαγεν αὐτοῖς. 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “saying, ‘You went in to men having foreskins and ate with them!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 11 3 zmou figs-explicit εἰσῆλθεν πρὸς 1 This expression implicitly means that Peter went in to the home of these **men**. Alternate translation: “he went into the home of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 11 3 ah7v figs-metonymy ἄνδρας, ἀκροβυστίαν ἔχοντας 1 uncircumcised men The phrase **men having foreskins** refers to men who are not Jewish. It is a crude and dismissive expression, and it shows that these Jewish believers still regarded Gentiles with disdain. Alternate translation: “uncircumcised men” or “Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 11 4 aakb figs-explicitinfo ἀρξάμενος & Πέτρος ἐξετίθετο αὐτοῖς 1 Luke is using the word **beginning** to indicate that Peter had been doing something else (listening to the complaints against him) but then began to do something new when he had the opportunity to speak. It might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “Peter explained to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
|
||
ACT 11 5 dtt5 figs-activepassive καθιεμένην 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It appeared as if someone was letting it down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 11 6 lbh4 figs-explicit καὶ τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 the four-legged animals of the earth, and the wild beasts, and the creeping animals, and the birds of the sky From Peter’s response in [11:8](../11/08.md), the implication is that the law of Moses commanded the Jews not to eat some of the creatures in the container. See how you translated this in [10:12](../10/12.md). Alternate translation: “… and the birds of the sky, including some that the law of Moses commanded Jews not to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 11 7 gm0m figs-personification φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι 1 Peter speaks of this **voice** as if it were a living thing that could speak on its own. Alternate translation: “someone saying to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 11 7 ag7l figs-idiom ἀναστάς 1 Here the term **arising** means that the voice wanted Peter to take action, not that the voice wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation, as in UST: “Go ahead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 11 7 t1mg figs-quotesinquotes λεγούσης μοι, ἀναστάς, Πέτρε, θῦσον καὶ φάγε 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “telling me to arise and kill and eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 11 8 p8vb figs-quotesinquotes εἶπον δέ, μηδαμῶς, Κύριε, ὅτι κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But I told the Lord that I would certainly not do that, since the common or unclean had never entered my mouth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 11 8 m4mu figs-exclamations μηδαμῶς 1 By no means **By no means** is an exclamation that communicates a strong refusal to do or even to consider something. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. See how you translated this in [10:14](../10/14.md). Alternate translation: “No, never” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
|
||
ACT 11 8 nbju figs-doublet κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον 1 The words **common** and **unclean** mean similar things. Peter may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “food that our Jewish laws forbid us to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 11 8 m5p5 figs-explicit κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου 1 the profane or unclean has never entered into my mouth The implication is that some the animals in the container were forbidden for Jews to eat. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the common or unclean, like some of those animals, has never entered into my mouth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 11 8 wwbw figs-doublenegatives κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the word **never** and the negative terms **common** and **unclean**. Alternate translation: “only what is holy and clean has ever entered into my mouth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 11 8 j0rv figs-synecdoche κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου 1 Peter is using one part of the eating process to represent the entire process. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “I have never eaten anything that is common or unclean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 11 9 at0t figs-quotesinquotes ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν, σὺ μὴ κοίνου 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “from heaven and told me that I must not make common what God had cleansed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 11 9 b24j figs-123person ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν 1 If God is the speaker, he is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “What I, God, have cleansed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||
ACT 11 9 txbl writing-pronouns σὺ μὴ κοίνου 1 The voice is adding the pronoun **you** for emphasis. If your language does not ordinarily use a pronoun with the imperative but can do so for emphasis, it would be appropriate to do that here. You could also express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you must not make common” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 11 10 xrq6 figs-explicit τοῦτο & ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς 1 this happened three times This could mean: (1) that the voice told Peter three times to kill and eat, Peter refused three times, and each time the voice told him not to call unclean what God had cleansed. Alternate translation: “Peter had this exchange with the voice three times” (2) that after Peter first refused, the voice said to him three times, “What God has cleansed, you must not make common.” Alternate translation: “the voice said this three times” See how you translated this in [10:16](../10/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 11 10 s2ik figs-activepassive ἀνεσπάσθη & ἅπαντα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it appeared as if someone was pulling everything up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 11 11 ias8 figs-exclusive ἦμεν 1 General Information: The term **we** refers to Peter and the others in the house in Joppa. It does not include his current audience in Jerusalem. So use the exclusive form of “we” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 11 11 b2qv figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, ἐξαυτῆς 1 behold Peter is using the term **behold** to focus his listeners’ attention on how soon after his vision ended these **three men** arrived. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “right then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 11 11 k44j ἐξαυτῆς 1 right away Alternate translation: “immediately” or “at that exact moment”
|
||
ACT 11 11 qwn5 figs-activepassive ἀπεσταλμένοι 1 having been sent If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Someone had sent them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 11 12 lf6m figs-explicit μηδὲν διακρίναντα 1 not making any distinction This could mean: (1) that the Spirit did not want Peter to have any doubts or worries about going with the men, even though they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “not worrying about it” (2) that the Spirit did not want Peter to feel that he should not be in the company of these men, because they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “not making a distinction between these men and others you would associate with” See how you translated this in [10:20](../10/20.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 11 12 xrc6 figs-metaphor οἱ ἓξ ἀδελφοὶ οὗτοι 1 these six brothers Peter is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “these six fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 11 12 w6ia figs-explicit τὸν οἶκον τοῦ ἀνδρός 1 into the house of the man Peter implicitly means the **house** of Cornelius. Alternate translation: “the house of the man who had sent the messengers to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 11 13 mwzd figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 The term **us** refers to Peter and the believers who came with him to Caesarea. It does not include his current audience in Jerusalem. So use the exclusive form of “us” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 11 13 few6 figs-activepassive Σίμωνα, τὸν ἐπικαλούμενον Πέτρον 1 Simon, who is called Peter If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the same phrase in [10:32](../10/32.md). Alternate translation: “whom people call Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 11 14 rwpw figs-metonymy ῥήματα 1 The angel is using the term **words** to mean what Peter would say to Cornelius by using words. Alternate translation: “a message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 11 14 fnjz figs-yousingular σὲ & σωθήσῃ σὺ & σου 1 All the instances of the words **you** and **your** in this verse are singular, since they refer to Cornelius. So use the singular forms of those word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
|
||
ACT 11 14 p3gk figs-activepassive σωθήσῃ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It is clear from the context that God will do the action. Alternate translation, as in UST: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 11 14 hpr2 figs-metonymy πᾶς ὁ οἶκός σου 1 all your household Here, **house** refers to an entire household living together. Alternate translation: “all the people living in your house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 11 15 a8jw figs-explicitinfo ἐν & τῷ ἄρξασθαί με λαλεῖν 1 as I began to speak, the Holy Spirit came on them Peter is using the word **began** to indicate that he had been doing something else (listening to Cornelius tell why he had summoned him) but then began to do something new when Cornelius finished speaking. It might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “as I was speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
|
||
ACT 11 15 ak2p figs-metaphor ἐπέπεσεν τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ὥσπερ καὶ ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ἐν ἀρχῇ 1 the Holy Spirit came on them, just as also on us in the beginning Peter is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if it **fell** on Cornelius and his guests. See how you translated the similar expressions in [8:16](../08/16.md) and [10:44](../10/44.md). Alternate translation: “they received the Holy Spirit, just as we did in the beginning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 11 15 qdon writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to Cornelius and his guests. Alternate translation: “the man who had sent for me and the others in his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 11 15 qy12 figs-exclusive ὥσπερ καὶ ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς 1 General Information: Here the word **us** refers to Peter himself and to the believers to whom he is speaking in Jerusalem, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 11 15 th4m figs-explicit ἐν ἀρχῇ 1 in the beginning By **in the beginning**, Peter means the day of Pentecost. Alternate translation: “on the day of Pentecost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 11 16 xd9t figs-metonymy τοῦ ῥήματος 1 Peter is using the term **word** to mean what Jesus said by using words. Alternate translation: “the statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 11 16 ett3 writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, Peter is referring to Jesus here by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 11 16 wwnl figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς & βαπτισθήσεσθε ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 After first describing how John baptized people literally, Jesus uses baptism in this second instance as a metaphor. See the discussion in the General Notes to Chapter 1, and see how you translated this in [1:5](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will come and empower you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 11 16 v116 figs-activepassive ὑμεῖς & βαπτισθήσεσθε 1 you will be baptized in the Holy Spirit You may wish to retain the metaphor of baptism in your translation. If you do, if it would be clearer in your language, you could state this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation, as in UST: “God will baptize you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 11 17 pe42 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here the word **us** refers to Peter himself and to the believers to whom he is speaking in Jerusalem, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 11 17 y7ag figs-explicit τὴν ἴσην δωρεὰν ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς, ὡς καὶ ἡμῖν πιστεύσασιν 1 the same gift Peter is referring to the **gift** of the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the gift of the Holy Spirit, just as he did to us when we believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 11 17 u3nu figs-rquestion ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην δυνατὸς κωλῦσαι τὸν Θεόν 1 If, therefore, God gave to them the same gift as also to us when we believed on the Lord Jesus Christ, who was I, able to oppose God? Peter is using the question form to convince his listeners that God wanted him to accept the Gentile believers. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I could not hinder God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 11 17 xpsl writing-pronouns ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην δυνατὸς κωλῦσαι τὸν Θεόν 1 For emphasis, Peter is adding the pronoun **I**, which is not required with the verb. If your language does not ordinarily use a pronoun with verbs but can do so for emphasis, it would be appropriate to do that here. You could also express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I certainly could not hinder God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 11 17 ot1z figs-explicit κωλῦσαι τὸν Θεόν 1 It may be helpful to indicate in what way Peter thought he might be able to **hinder** God. Alternate translation: “to hinder God by refusing to welcome and baptize people to whom he had given his own Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 11 18 xlpt writing-pronouns ἡσύχασαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the Jewish believers to whom Peter was speaking. Alternate translation: “the Jewish believers became quiet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 11 18 nr7g figs-idiom ἡσύχασαν 1 they became quiet This is an idiom that means they no longer argued. Alternate translation: “they no longer argued with Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 11 18 z3fy figs-abstractnouns καὶ τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ὁ Θεὸς τὴν μετάνοιαν εἰς ζωὴν ἔδωκεν 1 God has given repentance unto life to the Gentiles also If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **repentance** and **life**, you could express the same idea in other ways. Here the term **life** refers to everlasting life. Alternate translation: “God has allowed the Gentiles as well to repent and live forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 11 19 bwb8 writing-newevent οὖν 1 Then Luke uses the word translated **Then** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 11 19 whm6 figs-activepassive οἱ & διασπαρέντες ἀπὸ 1 those who had been scattered from the persecution that happened over Stephen If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. This is a reference to the **persecution** that Luke describes in [8:1](../08/01.md), which began after the trial and death of Stephen. See how you translated the similar expression in that verse. Alternate translation: “those who had scattered because of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 11 19 w3wq translate-names Φοινίκης 1 The word **Phoenicia** is the name of a region. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 11 19 ig50 translate-names Κύπρου 1 The word ** Cyprus** is the name of an island. See how you translated it in [4:36](../04/36.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 11 19 zbml figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that these scattered believers proclaimed by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 11 19 c8ha grammar-connect-exceptions μηδενὶ λαλοῦντες τὸν λόγον εἰ μὴ μόνον Ἰουδαίοις 1 only to Jews Since Luke says here that the scattered believers spoke about Jesus **only to Jews**, but he says in the next verse that some of them spoke to “Greeks” (that is, Gentiles), it might appear in your language that Luke was contradicting himself. If so, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Most of them believed they should speak the message about Jesus only to Jews, so that is what they did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
|
||
ACT 11 20 ogva figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Κύπριοι καὶ Κυρηναῖοι 1 Luke is describing these **men** in an idiomatic way. Alternate translation: “Cypriot and Cyrenian men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 11 20 k6si translate-names Κύπριοι 1 The word **Cypriots** is the name for people who come from the island of Cyprus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 11 20 tz12 translate-names Κυρηναῖοι 1 The word **Cyrenians** is the name for people who come from the city of Cyrene. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 11 20 mww9 figs-explicit τοὺς Ἑλληνιστάς 1 and spoke also to Greeks Luke assumes that his readers will know that these people he calls **Greeks** were not necessarily from Greece; rather, they were Greek-speaking people who were also Gentiles, not Jews. Alternate translation: “Gentiles who spoke Greek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 11 21 ebxq writing-politeness χεὶρ Κυρίου 1 In this instance, Luke seems to mean God the Father when he says **the Lord**. In [4:29–30](../04/29.md), the believers pray, “Lord … stretch out your hand to heal and for signs and wonders to happen through the name of your holy Servant Jesus.” Luke seems to be describing these events as part of the answer to that prayer. Alternate translation: “the hand of God the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 11 21 aj5g figs-metonymy χεὶρ 1 The hand of the Lord was with them Here, the **hand** represents power, since hands give people the capability to do things. Alternate translation: “the power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 11 21 bfm5 figs-idiom ἦν & μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 When Luke says that God **was with** the men from Cyprus and Cyrene who were proclaiming the gospel, this is an idiom that means God was working through them. Alternate translation: “was working through them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 11 21 n9pq figs-metaphor ἐπέστρεψεν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον 1 turned to the Lord Luke speaks of these Gentiles in Antioch as if they physically **turned to the Lord**. He means that they stopped living in one way and began to live in another way. They believed in Jesus and started to obey him. Alternate translation: “became disciples of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 11 21 qcn3 writing-politeness ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον 1 In this instance, Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title, as the General Notes to this chapter discuss. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 11 22 i7vs figs-explicitinfo ἠκούσθη & ὁ λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τῆς ἐκκλησίας τῆς οὔσης ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ περὶ αὐτῶν 1 the ears of the church In your language, the expression **was heard in the ears** might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. If so, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “the word about them was heard by the church being in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
|
||
ACT 11 22 kcb8 figs-activepassive ἠκούσθη δὲ ὁ λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τῆς ἐκκλησίας τῆς οὔσης ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ περὶ αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It is clear from the context that God will do the action. Alternate translation: “The church being in Jerusalem heard the word about them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 11 22 rdhr figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean a report about the Gentile believers in Antioch. Alternate translation: “a report” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 11 22 oa8h writing-pronouns αὐτῶν & ἐξαπέστειλαν 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the Gentile believers in Antioch, and the pronoun **they** refers to the leaders of the church in Jerusalem. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “these Gentile believers … its leaders sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 11 23 b7w7 figs-abstractnouns τὴν χάριν τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 saw the grace that is of God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how gracious God had been to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 11 23 bz6w figs-metonymy τῇ προθέσει τῆς καρδίας 1 with purpose of heart Here the **heart** represents the will and desires of a person. Alternate translation: “with firm determination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 11 24 b9a8 grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Luke is using the word **For** to introduce the reason why Barnabas encouraged the new believers in Antioch so well. Alternate translation: “He was able to do this because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 11 24 he5z figs-metaphor πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου καὶ πίστεως 1 full of the Holy Spirit Luke speaks of Barnabas as if he were a container that was **full** of the **Holy Spirit** and of **faith**. Alternate translation: “who was inspired by the Holy Spirit and who had strong faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 11 24 m7yy figs-abstractnouns καὶ πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου καὶ πίστεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who was inspired by the Holy Spirit and who believed firmly in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 11 24 e35e figs-activepassive προσετέθη ὄχλος ἱκανὸς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It is clear from the context that God did the action. Alternate translation: “God added a considerable crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 11 24 e57t figs-metonymy τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 a considerable crowd was added to the Lord Luke says **the Lord** (a title for Jesus) to mean the community of believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “to the community of believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 11 25 yhl6 writing-pronouns ἐξῆλθεν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Barnabas. Alternate translation: “Barnabas went out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 11 26 qzml writing-pronouns εὑρὼν ἤγαγεν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Barnabas, and the pronoun **him** refers to Saul. Alternate translation: “and having found Saul, Barnabas brought him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 11 26 z36c ἐγένετο δὲ αὐτοῖς καὶ ἐνιαυτὸν ὅλον συναχθῆναι ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 This wording suggests that Barnabas and Saul did not know initially how long they would be meeting with the church in Antioch, but in the end it amounted to a whole year. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express it that way. Alternate translation: “in the end they were gathered together with the church for an entire year”
|
||
ACT 11 26 w4dz figs-activepassive αὐτοῖς & συναχθῆναι ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 they were gathered together with the church If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they gathered together with the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 11 26 x8gx figs-activepassive χρηματίσαι & πρώτως & τοὺς μαθητὰς 1 And the disciples were called Christians first in Antioch If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people first called the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 11 26 w0sz translate-names Χριστιανούς 1 The word **Christians** is a name for people who believe that Jesus is the Christ, that is, the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 11 26 r6sl πρώτως ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ 1 first in Antioch Alternate translation: “for the first time in Antioch”
|
||
ACT 11 27 h6zw writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 11 27 kep8 figs-idiom ἐν ταύταις & ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 Luke is using the word **days** to describe a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 11 27 d8bb figs-idiom κατῆλθον 1 came down from Jerusalem to Antioch Luke says that these prophets **came down** from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 11 28 q3tl translate-symaction ἀναστὰς 1 and indicated by the Spirit that Here, **having arisen** means that Agabus stood up as a symbolic action to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “having stood up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 11 28 w18f figs-hyperbole ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 The term **whole** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “throughout the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 11 28 pd2t figs-explicit τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 over the whole world Luke assumes that his readers will know that by **world**, he means the part of the world that they were familiar with. Alternate translation: “the … Roman Empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 11 28 jmc5 figs-idiom ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου 1 in the days of Claudius The expression **upon Claudius** refers to the time during the reign of Claudius. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “during the reign of Claudius” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 11 28 fjyk translate-names Κλαυδίου 1 The word **Claudius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 11 29 rk9z figs-explicit τῶν & μαθητῶν καθὼς εὐπορεῖτό τις, ὥρισαν ἕκαστος αὐτῶν & πέμψαι 1 just as anyone prospered The implication is that while some of the disciples were **prospering** greatly but others were struggling financially, every one of them resolved to send something according to his own means. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “while some of the believers in Antioch were rich and others were poor, every one of them resolved to send what they could afford” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 11 29 up7a figs-metaphor τοῖς & ἀδελφοῖς 1 to the brothers living in Judea Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “to their fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 11 30 taw4 figs-explicit πρὸς τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to the **elders** who were the leaders of the church in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “to the elders in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 11 30 l8i8 figs-synecdoche διὰ χειρὸς Βαρναβᾶ καὶ Σαύλου 1 by the hand of Barnabas and Saul Here, the **hand**, one part of a person, represents the action of the whole person. Alternate translation: “by having Barnabas and Saul take it to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 11 30 rq2w διὰ χειρὸς Βαρναβᾶ καὶ Σαύλου 1 If you retain the figurative word **hand** in your translation, it may be more natural in your language to use the plural form of that word, if you would not ordinarily speak of two people having one hand. Alternate translation: “by the hands of Barnabas and Saul”
|
||
ACT 12 intro f66j 0 # Acts 12 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>Chapter 12 tells what happened to King Herod while Barnabas and Saul were delivering money from Antioch to Jerusalem, as described in 11:25-30. Herod killed one of the apostles, James, and he put Peter in prison. God helped Peter escape from the prison, so Herod executed the prison guards, but God then killed Herod.
|
||
ACT 12 1 ti1y writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 12 1 f2gr figs-explicit κατ’ ἐκεῖνον & τὸν καιρὸν 1 about that time The phrase **that time** implicitly refers to the time that Luke has just described, when the church in Antioch sent Barnabas and Saul to Jerusalem with money to help the believers there. Alternate translation: “at the time when the church in Antioch sent assistance to the believers in Jerusalem,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 12 1 zy6y figs-metonymy ἐπέβαλεν & τὰς χεῖρας κακῶσαί τινας τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 laid hands on The expression **laid on hands** means to arrest someone by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their **hands**. See how you translated it in [5:18](../05/18.md). Alternate translation: “arrested some from the church, intending to harm them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 12 1 og4q figs-synecdoche ἐπέβαλεν & τὰς χεῖρας κακῶσαί τινας τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 Herod most likely did not do this himself, Rather, as a ruler, he ordered his soldiers to arrest **some from the church**. Luke is speaking of Herod, one person who was involved in this action, to mean everyone who was involved. Alternate translation: “had his soldiers arrest some from the church, intending to harm them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 12 2 r1zv figs-synecdoche ἀνεῖλεν & Ἰάκωβον 1 he killed James It was probably not Herod himself who **killed James**. Rather, he most likely ordered his soldiers to do this. Alternate translation: “he ordered his soldiers to execute James” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 12 3 v4ag figs-synecdoche τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 And when he saw that this is pleasing to the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “to the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 12 3 ly66 translate-names ἡμέραι τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 the days of unleavened bread The phrase **Unleavened Bread** is the name of a Jewish religious observance that took place over several **days**. If your readers would not be familiar with the food known as “bread” or the substance known as “leaven,” you could translate this with a general expression. Alternate translation: “the days of Special Food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 12 4 tza2 writing-pronouns ὃν καὶ πιάσας, ἔθετο εἰς φυλακήν 1 The pronouns **whom** refers to Peter, and the pronoun **he** refers to Herod. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “After Herod had arrested Peter, he put him in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 12 4 pps1 translate-unknown τέσσαρσιν τετραδίοις στρατιωτῶν 1 to four squads of soldiers These **quaternions** were groups of four **soldiers** each. They would have taken turns guarding Peter in six-hour shifts throughout the day and night. Two soldiers would have been at Peter’s side and the other two soldiers by the entrance. Your language and culture may have a term for a group of four soldiers that you can use in your translation. You could also explain the meaning of the term “quaternion,” as UST does. Alternate translation: “to four teams of soldiers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 12 4 i23a figs-idiom βουλόμενος & ἀναγαγεῖν αὐτὸν τῷ λαῷ 1 he was intending to bring him out to the people The phrase **to bring him out** means to put Peter on trial publicly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Herod planned to judge Peter in a public trial in the presence of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 12 5 xpcx figs-activepassive ὁ & Πέτρος ἐτηρεῖτο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to specify who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the soldiers. Alternate translation: “the soldiers were guarding Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 12 5 f8qc figs-activepassive προσευχὴ & ἦν ἐκτενῶς γινομένη ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 prayer was being made earnestly to God for him by the church If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the church was earnestly praying to God for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 12 6 km83 figs-explicit προαγαγεῖν αὐτὸν 1 Herod was going to bring him out for trial, that night Here, the word translated **to bring him out** is slightly different from the word translated that same way in [12:4](../12/04.md). It means to put someone on trial, and the implications, based on the fact that Herod saw that it pleased the Jewish leaders when he executed James, are that Herod planned to execute Peter after this trial. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to put Peter on trial and then execute him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 12 6 g2bh figs-activepassive δεδεμένος ἁλύσεσιν δυσίν 1 bound with two chains If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “with two chains binding him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 12 7 i7g3 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, ἄγγελος 1 behold Luke is using the term **behold** to focus readers’ attention on how suddenly this **angel** appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “suddenly an angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 12 9 wqct figs-quotations οὐκ ᾔδει ὅτι ἀληθές ἐστιν τὸ γινόμενον διὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου; ἐδόκει δὲ 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here and to add a sentence break. Alternate translation: “he did not realize, ‘What is being done by the angel is real!’ He was thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 12 9 p9ty figs-activepassive τὸ γινόμενον διὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου 1 what is done by the angel is real If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what the angel was doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 12 9 s9j0 figs-quotations ἐδόκει & ὅραμα βλέπειν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he was thinking, ‘I am seeing a vision’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 12 10 r7gy figs-explicit διελθόντες & πρώτην φυλακὴν καὶ δευτέραν 1 But when they had passed by the first guard and the second The implication is that the guards were not able to see Peter and the angel as they walked by. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having passed by the first guard and the second without being noticed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 12 10 e36s figs-ellipsis καὶ δευτέραν 1 and the second The word **guard** can be supplied from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “and the second guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 12 11 wlb6 figs-idiom ὁ Πέτρος ἐν ἑαυτῷ γενόμενος εἶπεν 1 And when Peter had come to himself The phrase **having come to himself** means that Peter became fully awake and realized he was not just seeing a vision. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when Peter became fully awake and alert, he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 12 11 ue4k figs-metonymy χειρὸς 1 delivered me from the hand of Herod Here, **hand** represents the capability of a person. Alternate translation: “the power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 12 11 p739 figs-abstractnouns πάσης τῆς προσδοκίας τοῦ λαοῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 from all the expectations of the Jewish people If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **expectation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “all that the Jewish people expected that Herod would do to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 12 11 sl07 figs-synecdoche τοῦ λαοῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 Luke is likely using the phrase **the Jewish people** to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “of the leaders of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 12 12 ux4v figs-activepassive τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Μάρκου 1 of John, who was called Mark If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people called Mark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 12 12 c1ur figs-nominaladj ἱκανοὶ 1 Luke is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 12 13 pfn7 translate-unknown κρούσαντος & αὐτοῦ 1 when he knocked To “knock” at a door means to tap or hit it a few times to let a person inside the house know you are standing outside. You could translate this expression with the way people in your culture show that they have arrived at a house, such as “call out” or “cough” or “clap.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 12 13 c634 translate-unknown τὴν θύραν τοῦ πυλῶνος 1 at the door of the gate Here, the word **gate** probably describes an entrance from the street to a courtyard in front of the house. If houses in your culture have a similar entrance, in your translation you could use the name for it in your language. If not, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the door of the entrance from the street to the courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 12 13 vbjj translate-names Ῥόδη 1 The word **Rhoda** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 12 14 y2ff figs-abstractnouns ἀπὸ τῆς χαρᾶς 1 from joy If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because she was so joyful,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 12 15 j2kx writing-pronouns οἱ & εἶπαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the people who were inside the house praying. Alternate translation: “the people who were inside the house praying said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 12 15 qa8m figs-explicit ὁ ἄγγελός ἐστιν αὐτοῦ 1 It is his angel Some Jews believed in guardian angels, and the people inside thehouse may have thought that Peter’s **angel** had come to them. Alternate translation: “What you saw was Peter’s guardian angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 12 16 wwg1 figs-synecdoche ἀνοίξαντες δὲ εἶδαν αὐτὸν 1 While the word **they** refers to the people in the house as in the previous verse, it is likely that only some of them came to the door. Alternate translation: “so some of the people in the house came and opened the door, and they saw him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 12 17 fr3y figs-explicit Ἰακώβῳ 1 Peter assumes that his listeners will know that by **James**, he means the brother of Jesus who was the leader of the church in Jerusalem. UST models one way to express this implicit information. However, since this is something that Peter assumes his listeners will know, you may find it preferable to explain this in a footnote rather than add information to the text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 12 17 jf16 figs-metaphor τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 12 18 ail9 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new development. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 12 18 zl7i figs-litotes τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος 1 there was no small disturbance among the soldiers over what therefore had happened to Peter Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “a great disturbance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 12 18 bt2b figs-quotations ἐν τοῖς στρατιώταις, τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “among the soldiers: ‘What then had Peter become?’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 12 18 plyg τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο 1 The word translated **become** can be used to indicate that a person has entered a new condition, and in this context it indicates that Peter has changed his location. Alternate translation: “where then Peter had gone”
|
||
ACT 12 19 blx5 writing-pronouns αὐτὸν 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 12 19 pz6v figs-synecdoche ἐπιζητήσας αὐτὸν 1 And Herod, having searched for him It was probably not Herod himself who **searched for** Peter. Rather, he most likely ordered his soldiers to do this. Alternate translation: “having ordered a search for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 12 19 br16 figs-idiom κατελθὼν 1 And having gone down Luke speaks of Herod **having gone down** to Caesarea because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 12 20 aip7 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 12 20 l5gl writing-pronouns ἦν & θυμομαχῶν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Herod. Alternate translation: “Herod was quarreling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 12 20 osyv translate-names Τυρίοις & Σιδωνίοις 1 **Tyrians** is the name for people from the city of Tyre, and **Sidonians** is the name for people from the city of Sidon. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 12 20 mpgk figs-go ὁμοθυμαδὸν & παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went to him unanimously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
|
||
ACT 12 20 gxs4 figs-synecdoche ὁμοθυμαδὸν & παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν 1 they went to him together It is unlikely that all the people of Tyre and Sidon came to Herod. Instead, they sent representatives. Luke is using the names of their groups to refer to one part of those groups, these representatives. Alternate translation: “they sent representatives to him unanimously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 12 20 oln5 ὁμοθυμαδὸν & παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν 1 The word **unanimously** indicates that the Tyrians and Sidonians recognized that they had a common interest and that they agreed to act together to pursue that interest. See how you translated the same word in [1:14](../01/14.md). Alternate translation: “they agreed together to send representatives to him”
|
||
ACT 12 20 qsg4 translate-names Βλάστον 1 Blastus The word **Blastus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 12 20 qqj9 translate-unknown τὸν ἐπὶ τοῦ κοιτῶνος τοῦ βασιλέως 1 This phrase indicates that **Blastus** was an official whom the king trusted with important responsibilities for his personal affairs. In your translation, use the word or phrase for the most comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “the king’s chamberlain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 12 20 l5r1 figs-abstractnouns ᾐτοῦντο εἰρήνην 1 they asked for peace If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they were asking the king to restore peaceful relations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 12 20 j253 figs-activepassive τὸ τρέφεσθαι αὐτῶν τὴν χώραν ἀπὸ τῆς βασιλικῆς 1 their food for their country was from the king’s country If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “their country depended on the king’s country for its food supply” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 12 20 dy51 figs-explicit τὸ τρέφεσθαι αὐτῶν τὴν χώραν ἀπὸ τῆς βασιλικῆς 1 their food The implication is that Herod had stopped supplying food to the people of Tyre and Sidon because he was angry with them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “their country depended on the king’s country for its food supply, and Herod had cut off that supply because he was angry with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 12 21 e3w9 figs-explicit τακτῇ & ἡμέρᾳ 1 on a set day The implication is that this was the **day** on which Herod had agreed to meet with the representatives of the Tyrians and Sidonians. Alternate translation: “on the day when Herod had agreed to meet with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 12 21 kv7g translate-symaction ἐνδυσάμενος ἐσθῆτα βασιλικὴν, καὶ καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος 1 in royal clothing Putting on this **royal clothing**, which was visibly expensive, and sitting on the **throne** were symbolic actions by which Herod demonstrated that he was a wealthy and powerful king. He did these things to impress and intimidate the Tyrians and Sidonians as they negotiated. Alternate translation: “having put on royal clothing and having sat on the throne to show what a wealthy and powerful king he was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 12 21 g6ir καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος 1 sitting on the throne The **throne** was where Herod formally addressed people who came to see him.
|
||
ACT 12 22 feyy figs-synecdoche Θεοῦ φωνὴ, καὶ οὐκ ἀνθρώπου 1 The people are using one part of Herod, his **voice**, to represent all of him in the act of speaking. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “This person who is speaking to us is a god, not a man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 12 23 iw57 grammar-connect-logic-result ἀνθ’ ὧν οὐκ ἔδωκεν τὴν δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ 1 he did not give the glory to God If it would be clearer in your language, you could put this reason before the result it led to (the angel striking Herod), as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 12 23 d419 figs-activepassive γενόμενος σκωληκόβρωτος, ἐξέψυξεν 1 becoming worm-eaten, he died The word translated **worm-eaten** is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be clearer for your readers if you use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. The word **worm-eaten** expresses the result of action by a different agent, so you can use an active form with that agent as the subject. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 12 23 pjbw figs-explicit γενόμενος σκωληκόβρωτος, ἐξέψυξεν 1 It is not clear exactly what this means, and you might choose to say nothing further in your translation. However, this could mean: (1) that when the angel **struck** Herod, this caused a deep wound, and by the time Herod died of this wound, it was already infested with maggots. Alternate translation: “he died after his wound became so infected that it was infested with maggots” (2) that the word **struck** is figurative and it refers to an illness, a severe case of intestinal worms. Alternate translation: “he got such a severe case of intestinal worms that he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 12 24 sv8l figs-hendiadys ὁ & λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐπληθύνετο 1 Luke is expressing a single idea by using two verbs connected with **and.** The verb **being multiplied** tells in what way the word of God was **increasing**, that is, very rapidly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this same idea with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the word of God was increasing very rapidly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 12 24 m1sw figs-personification ὁ & λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐπληθύνετο 1 the word of God increased and was multiplied Luke is speaking of the way the message about Jesus was becoming more widespread as if the word of God itself were **increasing** and **being multiplied**. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing and believing the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 12 24 wn8m figs-metonymy ὁ & λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that God told the believers to spread by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 12 24 iwr1 figs-activepassive ἐπληθύνετο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God was multiplying it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 12 25 j2un writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Luke uses the word translated **Then** to introduce information about what happened after Herod died. This is the end of the part of the story about him. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a significant part of a larger story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||
ACT 12 25 rt9o figs-explicit Βαρναβᾶς δὲ καὶ Σαῦλος ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ, πληρώσαντες τὴν διακονίαν 1 This can also be translated, “Then Barnabas and Saul returned, having completed their service in Jerusalem.” If that is the correct translation, then Luke is saying implicitly that they **returned** to Antioch. Alternate translation: “Then Barnabas and Saul returned to Antioch, having completed their service in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 12 25 t7d8 translate-textvariants Βαρναβᾶς δὲ καὶ Σαῦλος ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ 1 And Barnabas and Saul returned to Jerusalem Some ancient copies say that Barnabas and Saul returned “from” Jerusalem, which makes sense, since in the next verse, Barnabas and Saul are back in Antioch. If the reading **to** is correct, this verse may be indicating that they went somewhere else in Judea and then returned to Jerusalem before going back to Antioch. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the readings of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
|
||
ACT 12 25 pv6a figs-explicit πληρώσαντες τὴν διακονίαν 1 having completed their service This refers implicitly to the trip that Barnabas and Saul made to Jerusalem to deliver money from the believers in Antioch, which Luke describes in [11:29-30](../11/29.md). Alternate translation: “having delivered to the church leaders in Jerusalem the money that the believers in Antioch had collected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 12 25 zhsc figs-activepassive Ἰωάννην, τὸν ἐπικληθέντα Μᾶρκον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you translated it in [12:12](../12/12.md). Alternate translation: “John, whom people called Mark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 intro rlh6 0 # Acts 13 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>Verses 1–4 describe how the Holy Spirit called Barnabas and Paul to go on a special mission to share the gospel of Jesus.<br>Verses 5–12 describe how they shared the gospel on the island of Cyprus.<br>Verses 13–52 describe how they shared the gospel in the city of Antioch in the province of Pamphylia.<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the three quotations from Psalms in 13:33–35.<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 13:41.<br><br>The chapter is where the second half of the Book of Acts begins. Luke writes more about Paul than about Peter, and he describes how the believers told the message about Jesus to Gentiles. Luke begins to tell about the mission trips on which the church at Antioch sent Barnabas and Saul.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### A light for the Gentiles<br><br>The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if light were what enables sinful people to understand that what they are doing is wrong and begin to obey God. The Jews considered all Gentiles to be walking in darkness, but Paul and Barnabas spoke of telling the Gentiles about Jesus as if they were going to bring them physical light. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### “the Lord”<br><br>In verses 2, 12, 48, and 49, Luke refers to Jesus by a respectful title, “the Lord.” Paul refers to Jesus the same way in verses 10 and 11. In your translation, you may wish to clarify that this means “the Lord Jesus.” Or you could state “Jesus,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “our” in Paul’s sermon in Antioch of Pisidia<br><br>In verses 17, 32, and 33, Paul uses the term **our** to refer to himself and the other Jews who are present in the synagogue; the term does not include the Gentiles who are also present. If your language marks the distinction between inclusive and exclusive “our,” use the form that would be natural in such a situation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 13 1 fij7 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 13 1 srw6 translate-names Συμεὼν ὁ καλούμενος Νίγερ 1 Simeon … Niger … Lucius … Manaen The word **Simeon** is the name of a man. The word **Niger** is another name by which he was known. This is not a racial epithet; it is the Latin word for “black,” and it probably indicates that he was African. Alternate translation: “Simeon the African” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 13 1 nqp1 figs-activepassive Συμεὼν ὁ καλούμενος Νίγερ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Simeon, whom people called Niger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 1 ccel translate-names Μαναήν 1 The word **Manaen** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 13 1 o8jb translate-names Λούκιος ὁ Κυρηναῖος 1 The word **Lucius** is the name of a man. The word **Cyrenian** is the name for someone who comes from the city of Cyrene. See how you translated it in [11:20](../11/20.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 13 1 u48c translate-unknown σύντροφος 1 one brought up with Herod the tetrarch In this culture, rulers would sometimes bring the children of other parents into their homes to be raised and educated with their own children. This gave their children playmates and friends, and it was also a way of honoring or thanking the parents of the other children. A boy who was raised with the son of a ruler would be considered the **foster brother** of that son. There may be a similar role in your culture, and your language may have a term for it that you can use in your translation. You could also explain the meaning of the term “foster brother,” as UST does. Alternate translation: “the childhood playmate” or “the boyhood friend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 13 1 hxh6 translate-unknown Ἡρῴδου τοῦ τετράρχου 1 In the Roman Empire, a **tetrarch** was the governor of one of four divisions of a country or province. **Herod the tetrarch** ruled over Galilee, one of four areas that the kingdom of his father, Herod the Great, was divided into after his death. (The Herod described in Chapter 12 was a different man, the grandson of Herod the Great and the nephew of Herod the tetrarch.) If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a general term instead of “tetrarch.” Alternate translation: “the ruler Herod” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 13 2 m70r figs-idiom λειτουργούντων & αὐτῶν τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 The expression **ministering to** means that the believers in Antioch were worshiping God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “while they were worshiping the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 2 kox1 writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, Peter is referring to Jesus here by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 13 2 ifb9 ἀφορίσατε 1 Set apart Alternate translation: “Set apart”
|
||
ACT 13 2 j6ym figs-extrainfo εἰς τὸ ἔργον ὃ προσκέκλημαι αὐτούς. 1 The Holy Spirit is referring implicitly to the **work** of proclaiming the gospel of Jesus in new areas, Cyprus and Asia Minor. Since Luke describes Barnabas and Paul doing this work in the rest of this chapter and in Chapter 14, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
|
||
ACT 13 3 l0cj writing-pronouns νηστεύσαντες, καὶ προσευξάμενοι, καὶ ἐπιθέντες τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῖς, ἀπέλυσαν 1 The pronouns **their** and **they** refer to the believers in Antioch, and the pronoun **them** refers to Barnabas and Saul. The phrase **having fasted and prayed** refers to all of them. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “after they had all fasted and prayed together, the believers in Antioch laid their hands on Barnabas and Saul, and then the believers released them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 3 ku45 translate-symaction ἐπιθέντες τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῖς 1 laid their hands on them The believers in Antioch **laid their hands** on Barnabas and Saul as a symbolic action to show that they were sending them on their mission with the blessing and support of the whole church and that they were entrusting them to God’s care. Alternate translation: “placed their hands on them as a sign of blessing and support and as a way of entrusting them to God’s care” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 13 3 p1us figs-explicit ἀπέλυσαν 1 they sent them off While in this context the term **released** basically means “sent off,” the implication is that the believers in Antioch were freeing Barnabas and Saul of all of their responsibilities in the church so that they could go on the mission on which the Holy Spirit was sending them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they gave them the freedom to go on their new mission” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 4 abcj writing-pronouns αὐτοὶ & ἐκπεμφθέντες 1 they, having been sent out The pronoun **they** refers to Barnabas and Saul. Alternate translation: “Barnabas and Saul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 4 pisj figs-activepassive ἐκπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “because the Holy Spirit had sent them out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 4 iyh8 figs-idiom κατῆλθον 1 went down Luke says that Barnabas and Saul **went down** to Caesarea because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 4 d1q5 translate-names Σελεύκιαν 1 Seleucia The word **Seleucia** is the name of a city that is on the seacoast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 13 5 at85 translate-names Σαλαμῖνι 1 Salamis The word **Salamis** is the name of a city on the island of Cyprus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 13 5 ct8b figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 they were proclaiming the word of God Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that the Holy Spirit wanted Barnabas and Saul to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 6 cl2z translate-names Πάφου 1 Paphos The word **Paphos** is the name of a major city on the island of Cyprus. It was where the Roman proconsul lived. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 13 6 zf3b figs-idiom εὗρον 1 they found The word **found** does not mean that Barnabas, Saul, and Mark were intentionally searching for a certain man. They happened to meet him. Alternate translation: “they happened to meet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 6 xe7h translate-unknown ἄνδρα, τινὰ μάγον 1 a certain man, a magician The word **magician** here does not mean someone who entertains others with tricks based on slight of hand and optical illusions. It means someone who practices witchcraft or supernatural magic arts. Your language and culture may have a term for such a person that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 13 6 ak38 translate-names ᾧ ὄνομα Βαριησοῦς 1 whose name was Bar Jesus The words **Bar Jesus** are a name that means “Son of Jesus.” However, there was no relation between this man and Jesus Christ. **Jesus** was a common name at that time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 13 7 s1su translate-unknown τῷ ἀνθυπάτῳ 1 proconsul A **proconsul** was a governor in charge of a Roman province. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the governor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 13 7 pf5d translate-names Σεργίῳ Παύλῳ 1 The words **Sergius** and **Paulus** are the names of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 13 7 h5xx writing-background ἀνδρὶ συνετῷ 1 an intelligent man Luke provides this background information about Sergius Paulus to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 13 8 lp2u translate-transliterate Ἐλύμας ὁ μάγος 1 Elymas “the magician” The word **Elymas** is an Arabic word that Bar-Jesus was using as another name. Luke spells it out using Greek letters so his readers will know how it sounds, and then he says what it means, **the Magician**. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
|
||
ACT 13 8 qw4j figs-activepassive οὕτως γὰρ μεθερμηνεύεται τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 for that is how his name is translated If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for that is how one translates his name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 8 w2xt figs-metaphor ζητῶν διαστρέψαι τὸν ἀνθύπατον ἀπὸ τῆς πίστεως 1 he sought to turn the proconsul away from the faith Here, **to turn** someone **away from** something is a metaphor for convincing someone to not do something. Alternate translation: “he attempted to persuade the governor not to believe the gospel message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 9 fy7t figs-metaphor πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Luke is speaking of Paul as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit **filled**. Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 9 w3lh figs-activepassive πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom the Holy Spirit was inspiring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 10 un00 figs-nominaladj ὦ πλήρης παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας 1 Paul is using the adjective **full** as a noun to identify Elymas as a person who is full of the negative qualities he describes. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “O you who are full of all deceit and all trickery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 13 10 u8n3 figs-abstractnouns ὦ πλήρης παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **deceit** and **trickery**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “O you who are always deceiving and tricking other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 10 r8x2 figs-metaphor ὦ πλήρης παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας 1 O one full of all deceit and all wickedness Paul is speaking of Elymas as if he were a container that was **full** of negative qualities. Alternate translation: “O you who practice all deceit and all trickery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 10 wq5i figs-doublet παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας 1 The terms **deceit** and **wickedness** mean similar things. Paul may be using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “of all evil treachery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 13 10 kdwj figs-hyperbole παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας 1 Paul says **all** in these two instances as a generalization for emphasis. (But when he calls Elymas the **enemy of all righteousness**, that may be understood more literally.) Alternate translation: “of great deceit and great trickery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 13 10 d2pk figs-idiom υἱὲ διαβόλου 1 son of the devil The expression **son of** describes a person who shares the qualities of something or someone else. Paul is saying that Elymas is acting like the devil in trying to keep Sergius Paulus from believing in Jesus. Alternate translation: “you who are acting like the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 10 jgq8 figs-explicit υἱὲ διαβόλου 1 Paul is drawing an implicit contrast between Elymas’ claim to be the “son of Jesus” (Bar Jesus) and his actual character as a **son of the devil**. If you retain the “son of” idiom in your translation, you could bring out this contrast explicitly. If you do, it may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You are not the son of Jesus—you are the son of the devil!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 10 hlq9 figs-personification ἐχθρὲ πάσης δικαιοσύνης 1 Paul is speaking of **righteousness** as if it were a person who could have an **enemy**. If your language would not use this figure of speech, you could express the meaning in another way. Alternate translation: “opposed to all righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 13 10 wa8t figs-abstractnouns ἐχθρὲ πάσης δικαιοσύνης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “enemy of everything that is right” or “opposed to everything that is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 10 bc9p figs-rquestion οὐ παύσῃ διαστρέφων τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας? 1 will you not stop perverting the straight paths of the Lord? Paul is using the question form to rebuke Elymas for opposing God. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you must stop turning aside the straight paths of the Lord!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 13 10 p8sa figs-metaphor διαστρέφων τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας 1 the straight paths of the Lord Paul is speaking of Elymas as if he were physically redirecting **paths** that God wanted people to follow so that these paths no longer went **straight**. He means that if people believe in God and obey him, they live in the right way, and that Elymas is trying to keep people, especially Sergius Paulus, from doing that. Alternate translation: “preventing people from believing in God, obeying him, and living right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 11 q0w8 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Paul is using the term **behold** to focus Elymas’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 11 xul9 figs-metonymy χεὶρ Κυρίου ἐπὶ σέ 1 the hand of the Lord upon you Here the word **hand** represents the power of God, and the phrase **upon you** indicates punishment. Alternate translation: “the Lord is going to punish you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 11 w3gh figs-hendiadys τυφλὸς, μὴ βλέπων τὸν ἥλιον 1 not seeing the sun Paul is using a word and a phrase together to express a single idea. The phrase **not seeing the sun** tells to what degree Elymas will be **blind**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “so blind that you will not be able to tell whether it is day or night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 13 11 t7j1 figs-metaphor ἔπεσεν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἀχλὺς καὶ σκότος 1 a mist and darkness fell on Elymas Paul is speaking of this **mist** and **darkness** as if they were going to **fall** on Elymas. Alternate translation: “what Elymas could see became blurry and then dark” or see the next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 11 x7rt figs-hendiadys ἔπεσεν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἀχλὺς καὶ σκότος 1 Luke may be using the two words **mist** and **darkness** together to express a single idea. The word **mist** may tell what kind of **darkness** was all that Elymas could see. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “a misty darkness was all that Elymas could see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 13 12 x9fl ὁ ἀνθύπατος 1 proconsul A **proconsul** was a governor in charge of a Roman province. Alternate translation: “the governor”
|
||
ACT 13 12 twa8 figs-activepassive ἐκπλησσόμενος ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 being astonished at the teaching of the Lord If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The teaching of the Lord astonished him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 12 ob5x figs-metonymy τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is using the word **teaching** to mean the truth and power associated with the teaching about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the truth and power that accompanied the teaching of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 12 efle figs-possession τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 In this possessive form, **the Lord** is the object rather than the subject of **teaching**. That is, this does not mean “what the Lord taught,” it means “what Barnabas and Paul taught about the Lord.” you could state that as an alternate translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 13 13 r9hi writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 13 13 i65t writing-background οἱ περὶ, Παῦλον 1 The phrase **those around Paul** refers to Barnabas and John (who is also called John Mark). This phrase provides some background to the rest of the story by indicating that Paul had become the leader of the group. It is important to communicate this by keeping Paul’s name first when he is mentioned with others, for example, in [13:46](../13/46.md), [13:50](../13/50.md), etc. The order of names is important. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 13 13 abcl οἱ περὶ, Παῦλον 1 those around Paul Alternate translation: “Paul and his traveling companions”
|
||
ACT 13 13 mmj6 translate-names Πέργην τῆς Παμφυλίας 1 The word **Perga** is the name of a city, and the word **Pamphylia** is the name of the province in which that city was located. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 13 14 et2e writing-pronouns αὐτοὶ 1 The pronoun **they** refers to Paul and Barnabas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 14 c21u translate-symaction ἐκάθισαν 1 Paul and Barnabas may have **sat down** in the place where rabbis would sit, or in the way that rabbis would sit, as a way of asking permission to speak to the congregation. The fact that they were invited to speak ([13:15](../13/15.md)) suggests that this is the case. Alternate translation: “sat down as rabbis would, to ask permission to speak to the congregation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 13 15 dnb4 translate-names τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 And after the reading of the law and of the prophets The word **Law** is the name for one part of the Hebrew Scriptures, and the word **Prophets** is the name for another part of the Hebrew Scriptures. Even though these are common nouns, Luke is using them to mean specific things. Show this in your translation in the way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 13 15 kno1 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “Our brothers” or “You brothers of ours” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 15 td4h figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers The synagogue leaders are using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “Our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 15 jru8 figs-metonymy εἴ τίς ἐστιν ἐν ὑμῖν λόγος παρακλήσεως πρὸς τὸν λαόν 1 if there is among you any word of exhortation for the people The synagogue leaders are using the term **word** to mean what Barnabas or Paul would want to say using words. Alternate translation: “if you want to say anything to encourage our people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 15 kj1h figs-imperative λέγετε 1 speak it This is an imperative, but it communicates an invitation rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates an invitation. Alternate translation: “we invite you to speak it now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
|
||
ACT 13 16 keqb translate-symaction ἀναστὰς 1 Here the term **arising** means that Paul stood up to show that he indeed wanted to speak, as he had been invited to do. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:14](../02/14.md). Alternate translation: “standing up to show that he wanted to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 13 16 i8pz translate-symaction κατασείσας τῇ χειρὶ 1 motioned with his hand This likely means that Paul waved his hand to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. He wanted everyone in the synagogue to hear what he had to say from the very first word, so he did this to quiet them. Alternate translation: “waving his hand to signal that he was about to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 13 16 m0yu figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται, καὶ οἱ φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You Israelites and you who fear God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 16 rh93 figs-idiom οἱ φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν 1 ones who fear God Jews in the time of the New Testament used the expression **fearing God** to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel and attended the synagogue. That is what Paul means here. See how you translated the similar expression in [10:2](../10/02.md). Alternate translation: “you Gentiles who sincerely worship the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 16 ah55 figs-imperative ἀκούσατε 1 God, listen This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please listen to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
|
||
ACT 13 17 se2b ὁ Θεὸς τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου Ἰσραὴλ 1 The God of this people Israel Alternate translation: “The God whom the people of Israel worship”
|
||
ACT 13 17 tbc4 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to use an inclusive or exclusive form of the word **our** here and in verses 32 and 33. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 13 17 l9cn figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας 1 our fathers Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 17 aaj5 figs-metonymy τὸν λαὸν ὕψωσεν 1 exalted the people When Paul says that God **exalted the people** of Israel when they were in Egypt, he is referring to the way God made them great in number and strength even while they were still slaves. Alternate translation: “greatly enlarged their population” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 17 vw4z figs-metonymy μετὰ βραχίονος ὑψηλοῦ 1 with an uplifted arm Here, **an uplifted arm** describes God’s mighty power. Alternate translation: “with great power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 18 zv9e translate-textvariants ἐτροποφόρησεν αὐτοὺς 1 he put up with them This means “he put up with their disobedience.” Some ancient copies have a different word that means “he took care of them,” which makes sense, since in this part of his speech, Paul is listing all of the good things that God did for the Israelites. Paul would be quoting Deuteronomy 1:13 from a well-known Greek translation. If the reading **put up with them** is correct, Paul may be foreshadowing the warning he gives at the end of his speech in [13:40–41](../13/40.md). If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the readings of ULT and UST. Alternate translation: “he took care of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
|
||
ACT 13 19 nvp7 writing-pronouns κατεκληρονόμησεν τὴν γῆν αὐτῶν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to God, the pronoun **them** refers to the Israelites, and the pronoun **their** refers to the seven nations that God destroyed. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “God gave the Israelites for an inheritance the land that these seven nations had previously occupied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 20 xyg6 figs-ellipsis ὡς ἔτεσι τετρακοσίοις καὶ πεντήκοντα 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “All these events took place over a period of about 450 years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 13 20 qmc8 figs-metonymy ἔδωκεν κριτὰς ἕως Σαμουὴλ προφήτου 1 until Samuel the prophet This could mean: (1) that God gave the Israelites a series of judges and Samuel was the last of them. Alternate translation: “he gave them a series of judges ending with Samuel, who was also a prophet” (2) that the phrase ** Samuel the prophet** represents the time period associated with Samuel. Alternate translation: “until the time of Samuel the prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 21 yxi8 figs-ellipsis ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα 1 for 40 years Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “to be their king for 40 years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 13 22 bsp6 figs-idiom ἤγειρεν τὸν Δαυεὶδ αὐτοῖς εἰς βασιλέα 1 he raised up David for them as their king Here, the expression **raised up** describes God giving someone an important position. See how you translated it in [3:22](../03/22.md). Alternate translation: “made David their king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 22 akg6 figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν μαρτυρήσας, εὗρον Δαυεὶδ τὸν τοῦ Ἰεσσαί, ἄνδρα κατὰ τὴν καρδίαν μου, ὃς ποιήσει πάντα τὰ θελήματά μου 1 In order to avoid having a second-level quotation, you could turn Paul’s quotation into an indirect quotation. (Paul is quoting from 1 Samuel [13:14](../1sa/13/14.md) and Psalm [89:20](../psa/089/020.md).) Alternate translation: “he said, testifying, that he had found David, son of Jesse, a man according to his heart, who would do all his will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 13 22 dbu5 figs-idiom εὗρον 1 I have found While God was indeed searching for someone to replace Saul, here the word **found** does not refer to the results of that search, but rather to God’s estimation of David. Alternate translation: “I have recognized that David, son of Jesse, is a man according to my heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 22 mp53 figs-idiom ἄνδρα κατὰ τὴν καρδίαν μου 1 a man according to my heart This is an idiomatic expression. Alternate translation: “the kind of person who does what pleases me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 23 xj5a figs-infostructure τούτου & ἀπὸ τοῦ σπέρματος 1 From the descendants of this one This information is placed at the beginning of the sentence to emphasize that the Savior had to be one of David’s descendants. It would be appropriate to retain this order in your translation rather than say, for example, “According to promise, God brought to Israel a Savior, Jesus, from the seed of this one.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 13 23 vnz7 figs-metaphor τοῦ σπέρματος 1 The term **seed** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “the descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 23 l50d writing-pronouns τούτου 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this one** refers to David. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 23 kc76 figs-metonymy τῷ Ἰσραὴλ 1 brought to Israel Here, **Israel** refers to the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 24 wbpf figs-explicit Ἰωάννου 1 By **John**, Paul is referring implicitly to John the Baptist. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 24 xzf2 figs-explicitinfo πρὸ προσώπου τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ 1 In your language, the expression **before the face of his entrance**, meaning “before the appearance of his entry into ministry” (see next two notes), might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. If so, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “before he appeared” or “before he entered into his ministry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
|
||
ACT 13 24 abcn figs-metaphor πρὸ προσώπου τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ 1 before the face of his coming Here the term **face** means “appearance.” Alternate translation: “appearance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 24 igpi figs-metaphor τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ 1 By **entrance**, Paul is referring to Jesus beginning his ministry. Alternate translation: “of the start of his ministry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 24 gqs9 writing-pronouns τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ 1 The pronoun **his** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “of Jesus’ entrance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 24 x892 figs-abstractnouns βάπτισμα μετανοίας παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραήλ 1 a baptism of repentance If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **repentance**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to all the people of Israel a baptism that people received to show that they were repenting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 25 ntrj figs-metaphor τὸν δρόμον 1 Paul is speaking of John as if he had been running a race or **course**. Alternate translation: “his work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 25 judg figs-quotemarks ἔλεγεν, τί ἐμὲ ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι? οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ, ἀλλ’ ἰδοὺ, ἔρχεται μετ’ ἐμὲ, οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν λῦσαι 1 Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it might be good to present this quotation from John the Baptist as a direct quotation if possible, since it uses several figures of speech that might not sound natural in an indirect quotation. (As an indirect quotation, this would read something like this: “he asked the people who they thought him to be, and he told them he was not he and that behold, one was coming after him, the sandals of whose feet he was not worthy to untie.”) You may be able to indicate the beginning of Paul’s quotation from John with some punctuation or convention that your language uses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 13 25 vww3 figs-rquestion τί ἐμὲ ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι? 1 Who do you think I am? John is using the question form to challenge his listeners’ idea of who he is. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I am not who you think I am!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 13 25 rp32 writing-pronouns οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ 1 I am not him The pronoun **he** refers to the Messiah. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “I am not the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 25 nnl5 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 But behold John is using the term **behold** to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 25 gys2 translate-symaction οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν λῦσαι 1 of whom the sandals of his feet I am not worthy to untie John is using the action of untying sandals symbolically to signify humble service. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate this with a general expression. Alternate translation: “to whom I am not even worthy to offer humble service” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 13 25 gj98 figs-explicitinfo τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν 1 In your language, the expression **the sandals of his feet** might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. If so, you could abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “his sandals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
|
||
ACT 13 26 bwet figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί, υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ οἱ ἐν ὑμῖν φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν 1 Paul is using an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers—my fellow sons of the family of Abraham—and you others who fear God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 26 kci9 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί, υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ οἱ ἐν ὑμῖν φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν 1 brothers, sons of the family of Abraham, and those among you who fear God Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 26 c9pw figs-metaphor υἱοὶ 1 Paul is using the term **sons** to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 26 jdp6 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here the word **us** includes Paul and his entire audience in the synagogue, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks this distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 13 26 u6zn figs-activepassive ὁ λόγος τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης ἐξαπεστάλη 1 the word about this salvation has been sent If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is clear from the context that this was God. Alternate translation: “God has sent the word about this salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 26 zx08 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος 1 Paul is using the term **word** to mean the message that God sent about Jesus by using words. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 26 v6r3 figs-abstractnouns τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης 1 about this salvation If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how God is saving people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 27 s64d writing-pronouns τοῦτον ἀγνοήσαντες 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this one** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “not recognizing Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 27 psk5 figs-explicit τοῦτον ἀγνοήσαντες 1 did not recognize this one Paul means implicitly that the people of Jerusalem and their leaders did not recognize that God had sent Jesus to be the Messiah. Alternate translation: “not recognizing that God had sent Jesus to be the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 27 ri1f figs-metonymy τὰς φωνὰς τῶν προφητῶν 1 the voices of the prophets Paul is using the word **voices** to mean the prophecies that the prophets spoke with their voices. Alternate translation: “the prophecies of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 27 m4tz figs-activepassive τὰς & ἀναγινωσκομένας 2 that are read If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that someone reads” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 27 i6jo figs-explicit τὰς & ἀναγινωσκομένας 2 Paul is referring implicitly to the way that someone reads from the writings of **the prophets** on each **Sabbath** in the synagogues. Alternate translation: “that someone reads aloud in each synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 28 v3hw writing-pronouns ᾐτήσαντο Πειλᾶτον ἀναιρεθῆναι αὐτόν 1 General Information: Here the word **they** refers to the Jewish people and their religious leaders in Jerusalem, and the pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders asked Pilate for Jesus to be killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 28 iect figs-activepassive ἀναιρεθῆναι αὐτόν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to execute him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 29 sq1j figs-activepassive πάντα τὰ περὶ αὐτοῦ γεγραμμένα 1 And when they had completed all that had been written about him If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all that the prophets had written about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 29 m5f1 figs-explicit καθελόντες ἀπὸ τοῦ ξύλου 1 taking him down from the tree It may be helpful to say explicitly that Jesus had died before this happened. Alternate translation: “taking him down from the tree after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 29 vwt4 figs-metonymy τοῦ ξύλου 1 from the tree The word translated **tree** can mean either an actual tree or something made of wood. Paul is using the word to refer to the cross, which was made out of wood. Alternate translation: “from the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 30 h5jw grammar-connect-logic-contrast ὁ δὲ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν 1 But God raised him Paul uses the word **But** to indicate a strong contrast between what the people did and what God did. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
|
||
ACT 13 30 zsx4 figs-idiom ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν 1 raised him Here, **raised** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “caused him to live again after he had died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 30 mqx8 figs-nominaladj ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 raised him from the dead Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun to mean people who have died. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who were dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 13 31 zesg writing-pronouns ὃς ὤφθη ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους τοῖς συναναβᾶσιν αὐτῷ ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 The pronoun **who** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Jesus was seen for many days by the ones having come up with him from Galilee to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 31 ig7w figs-activepassive ὃς ὤφθη ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους τοῖς συναναβᾶσιν αὐτῷ ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 He was seen for many days by those who had come up with him from Galilee to Jerusalem If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The ones having come up with him from Galilee to Jerusalem saw him for many days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 31 g4vl figs-explicit ἡμέρας πλείους 1 many days We know from the Gospels that this period was 40 days. Translate **many days** with a term that would be appropriate for that length of time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 31 rw9e figs-idiom τοῖς συναναβᾶσιν 1 Paul says **having come up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “by the ones who traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 32 h6ch figs-explicit τὴν πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ἐπαγγελίαν γενομένην 1 Paul assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to a **promise** that God made. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the promise that God made to our fathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 32 hr2g figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας 1 our fathers Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 33 b1uh translate-versebridge ὅτι ταύτην ὁ Θεὸς ἐκπεπλήρωκεν τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν 1 God has fulfilled this for our children It may be helpful to create a verse bridge that combines verse 32 with the first part of verse 33. you could state something like this: “And we are proclaiming to you that by raising Jesus, God has completely fulfilled for our children the promise he made to our fathers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
|
||
ACT 13 33 t0wt figs-explicit ταύτην 1 Paul assumes that his listeners will know that by **this** he means the promise he described in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “this promise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 33 dy6w translate-textvariants τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν 1 for our children Some ancient copies read, “for us, their children” which makes sense, since Paul is saying that this promise was fulfilled in his own generation, not in the next generation. If the reading **for our children** is correct, Paul may mean “for the children of us Israelites.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the readings of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
|
||
ACT 13 33 t176 figs-metaphor τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν 1 If this is the correct reading, then Paul may be using the term **children** to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “for our descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 33 d95n figs-idiom ἀναστήσας Ἰησοῦν 1 by raising up Jesus Here, **raising up** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “causing Jesus to live again after he had died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 33 y3tz figs-activepassive ὡς καὶ ἐν τῷ ψαλμῷ γέγραπται τῷ δευτέρῳ 1 As it is also written in the second Psalm If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “As we can also read in the second Psalm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 33 h9ir translate-ordinal τῷ ψαλμῷ & τῷ δευτέρῳ 1 the second Psalm If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “Psalm 2” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||
ACT 13 33 ljnl figs-quotemarks Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε 1 Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Psalm 2 as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Messiah directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 13 33 c1pn figs-parallelism Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word that shows that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “You are my Son, yes, today I have fathered you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||
ACT 13 33 tla1 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱός & γεγέννηκά σε 1 Son … I have fathered you **Son** is an important title that describes the relationship between Jesus and God. Be sure to retain this title in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
|
||
ACT 13 34 zhjq writing-pronouns ἀνέστησεν αὐτὸν & εἴρηκεν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to God, and the pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “God raised Jesus … God has spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 34 je9s figs-idiom ἀνέστησεν αὐτὸν 1 As in [2:24](../02/24.md), the idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “he brought him back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 34 h3nj figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun to mean people who have died. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who were dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 13 34 ipb9 figs-quotemarks δώσω ὑμῖν τὰ ὅσια Δαυεὶδ τὰ πιστά 1 This quotation is from the prophet Isaiah. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Isaiah as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites and ultimately the Messiah directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 13 34 q3kq figs-nominaladj τὰ ὅσια Δαυεὶδ τὰ πιστά 1 the holy and sure blessings Paul is using the adjectives **holy** and **trustworthy** as nouns. ULT adds the word **things** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the trustworthy promises that God made to David as the ancestor of the Holy One” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 13 35 r1ev figs-explicit ἐν ἑτέρῳ 1 On account of this he also says in another place Paul assumes that his listeners will know that by **another place**, he means another place in the Scriptures. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in another place in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 35 gl8s writing-pronouns καὶ & λέγει 1 he also says Even though David is the author of Psalm 16, from which this quotation is taken, the pronoun **he** refers to God, as in [13:34](../13/34.md). It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “God also says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 35 d4px figs-explicit τὸν Ὅσιόν σου 1 The expression **Holy One** is a title for the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your Messiah” or “your holy Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 35 jvpy figs-123person τὸν Ὅσιόν σου 1 This is a Messianic prophecy, and the Messiah is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “me, your Holy One” or “me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||
ACT 13 35 hvt8 figs-idiom ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 You will not allow your Holy One to see decay Paul is using the word **see** to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “to experience decay” or “to undergo decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 35 bhos figs-explicit ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 The term **decay** refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to experience the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 36 rpb4 figs-euphemism ἐκοιμήθη 1 fell asleep Paul is referring to death in a polite way by using the phrase **fell asleep**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a polite way of referring to this in your language or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “passed away” or “died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
|
||
ACT 13 36 nwy9 figs-activepassive προσετέθη πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας αὐτοῦ, καὶ εἶδεν 1 was laid with his fathers If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people buried him with his fathers and he saw” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 36 f5s2 figs-metaphor πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας αὐτοῦ 1 Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with his ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 36 la5s figs-idiom εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 saw decay Paul is using the word **saw** to mean “experienced.” Alternate translation: “experienced decay” or “underwent decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 36 okfp figs-explicit διαφθοράν 1 Here, the term **decay** refers to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 37 bmw3 writing-pronouns ὃν & ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν 1 But he whom The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Jesus, whom God raised up,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 37 n9pl figs-idiom ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν 1 God raised up The idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God brought back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 37 j52x figs-idiom οὐκ εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 did not see decay Paul is using the word **see** to mean “experience.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “experience decay” or “undergo decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 37 g3ie figs-explicit διαφθοράν 1 The term **decay** refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. Alternate translation: “the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 38 yg35 figs-imperative3p γνωστὸν & ἔστω ὑμῖν 1 let it be known to you If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may it be known to you” or “you should know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
|
||
ACT 13 38 f917 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “my brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 38 qy18 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. He is addressing the people in the synagogue who are his fellow-Jews and followers of Judaism. They are not Christian believers at this point. He may also be using the word **brothers** as a term of friendship for the Gentiles who are present. Alternate translation, as in UST: “my fellow Israelites and other friends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 38 an8q writing-pronouns τούτου 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this one** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 38 t3i5 figs-activepassive ὑμῖν ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν καταγγέλλεται, καὶ 1 that because of this, forgiveness of sins is being proclaimed to you, and freedom If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we are proclaiming forgiveness of sins to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 38 w7y1 figs-ellipsis ὑμῖν ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν καταγγέλλεται, καὶ ἀπὸ πάντων 1 forgiveness of sins Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “release of sins is proclaimed to you, and release is also proclaimed to you from the guilt of everything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 13 38 xjzi figs-activepassive πάντων ὧν οὐκ ἠδυνήθητε ἐν νόμῳ Μωϋσέως δικαιωθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “everything that you were not able to do in obedience to the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 39 g5h9 figs-activepassive ἐν τούτῳ πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων δικαιοῦται 1 In this one every one who believes is justified If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God justifies everyone who believes in this one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 39 ki8q writing-pronouns τούτῳ 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this one** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 40 y2kg figs-metonymy βλέπετε 1 be careful that Paul is using the term **Look** to mean “Be careful,” since looking around alertly is associated with being careful. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be careful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 40 tt1x figs-activepassive τὸ εἰρημένον ἐν τοῖς προφήταις 1 the thing spoken about in the prophets If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the thing that the prophets spoke about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 40 osou figs-personification μὴ ἐπέλθῃ 1 Paul is speaking of what the prophets spoke as if it were a living thing that could **come upon** his listeners. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that … may not happen to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 13 41 kk1j figs-quotemarks ἴδετε, οἱ καταφρονηταί, καὶ θαυμάσατε καὶ ἀφανίσθητε, ὅτι ἔργον ἐργάζομαι ἐγὼ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν, ἔργον ὃ οὐ μὴ πιστεύσητε, ἐάν τις ἐκδιηγῆται ὑμῖν 1 This quotation is from the prophet Habakkuk. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Habakkuk as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 13 41 jveu figs-metonymy ἴδετε 1 Paul is using the term **Look** to mean “Be careful,” since looking around altertly is associated with being careful. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be careful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 41 xcdg figs-activepassive ἀφανίσθητε 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “perish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 41 dvn1 figs-metonymy ἔργον ἐργάζομαι & ἔργον 1 am doing a work God is using the word **work** to mean a judgment that he will work to bring about. Alternate translation: “I am carrying out a judgment … a judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 41 nm2q figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν 1 in your days God is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “during your lifetime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 42 ax8v writing-pronouns ἐξιόντων δὲ, αὐτῶν 1 And as they were leaving Here the pronoun **they** refers to Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “as Paul and Barnabas were leaving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 42 f3sw writing-pronouns παρεκάλουν 1 they begged them Here the pronoun **they** refers to the people who were in the synagogue. Alternate translation: “the people in the synagogue begged them for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 42 w9h6 figs-activepassive λαληθῆναι αὐτοῖς τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “them to speak these words to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 42 y4p9 figs-metonymy τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα 1 these same words Here, **words** refers to the message that Paul had spoken using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 43 a58z figs-activepassive λυθείσης & τῆς συναγωγῆς 1 And when the synagogue meeting had ended If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the synagogue meeting ended” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 43 sws7 translate-unknown προσηλύτων 1 proselytes These **proselytes** were non-Jewish people who had converted to Judaism. Alternate translation: “converts to Judaism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 13 43 mygk figs-idiom ἠκολούθησαν & τῷ Παύλῳ καὶ τῷ Βαρναβᾷ 1 In this context, to **follow** someone means to become that person’s disciple or accept that person as a teacher. Alternate translation: “accepted Paul and Barnabas as their teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 43 fv15 figs-abstractnouns προσμένειν τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to continue in the grace of God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to remain faithful to God, who had graciously saved them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 44 vq3y figs-metonymy σχεδὸν πᾶσα ἡ πόλις 1 almost the whole city was gathered together The **city** represents the people in the city. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “almost all the people of the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 44 h40t figs-activepassive συνήχθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 44 yga7 figs-explicit ἀκοῦσαι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 to hear the word of the Lord The implication is that Paul and Barnabas were going to speak **the word of the Lord**. Alternate translation: “to hear Paul and Barnabas speak the word of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 44 evox figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas were going to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 45 j4zq figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 13 45 qrh2 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου 1 they were filled with jealousy For emphasis, Luke is speaking of the Jewish leaders as if they were a container that jealousy **filled**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the emphasis another way. Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 45 m1an figs-activepassive τοῖς ὑπὸ Παύλου λαλουμένοις 1 the things that were said by Paul If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 46 d08v figs-activepassive λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for us to speak the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 46 jn55 figs-metonymy ὑμῖν & ἀναγκαῖον πρῶτον λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 necessary for the word of God first to be spoken to you Paul and Barnabas are using the term **word** to mean the message that God commanded them to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 46 as6q figs-explicit ὑμῖν & πρῶτον 1 It was necessary for Paul means implicitly that it was necessary to speak to the Jews first because they were God’s chosen people, and God had sent the Messiah initially to them. Alternate translation: “to you Jews first because you are God’s chosen people, and God sent the Messiah initially to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 46 lly5 figs-metaphor ἐπειδὴ ἀπωθεῖσθε αὐτὸν 1 Since you reject it Their rejection of the word of God is spoken of as if it were something they pushed away. Alternate translation: “Since you reject the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 46 ms36 figs-irony οὐκ ἀξίους κρίνετε ἑαυτοὺς τῆς αἰωνίου ζωῆς 1 judge yourselves unworthy of eternal life Paul does not seriously believe that the Jewish leaders do not consider themselves worthy of eternal life. Paul actually means to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of his words. Alternate translation: “are acting as if you judge yourselves not worthy of eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
|
||
ACT 13 46 kzm1 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Paul and Barnabas are using the term **behold** to focus the attention of the Jewish leaders on what they are about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 46 rf9k figs-explicit στρεφόμεθα εἰς τὰ ἔθνη 1 we will turn to the Gentiles Paul and Barnabas are speaking as if they are going to be physically **turning** toward **the Gentiles**. They mean that they are going to stop preaching in the Jewish synagogue and begin preaching to gatherings of Gentiles. Alternate translation: “we will leave you and start preaching to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 46 zvt5 figs-exclusive στρεφόμεθα 1 By **we**, Paul and Barnabas mean themselves, but not the Jewish leaders to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 13 47 tx94 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 By **us**, Paul and Barnabas mean themselves, but not the Jewish leaders to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 13 47 xbiw figs-quotemarks τέθεικά σε εἰς φῶς ἐθνῶν, τοῦ εἶναί σε εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 This quotation is from the prophet Isaiah. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Isaiah as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Messiah directly in it. (Paul and Barnabas are saying that since they are disciples of the Messiah, the quotation also refers to their ministry.) You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 13 47 v8au figs-simile τέθεικά σε εἰς φῶς 1 as a light Through this quotation from Isaiah, Paul and Barnabas are saying that the truth they are preaching about Jesus is like a **light** that allows people to see. You could use the same simile in your translation, or you could use a different comparison, to something else your readers would recognize that helps people to understand. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
|
||
ACT 13 47 za1q figs-yousingular σε 1 The word **you** is singular here because it refers to the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
|
||
ACT 13 47 t5sp figs-abstractnouns εἶναί & εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 should be for salvation as far as the end of the earth If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “should go and help people to be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 47 ismw figs-idiom ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 This phrase is an idiom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everywhere on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 13 48 e9ag figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 glorified the word of the Lord Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas had shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 48 jct2 figs-activepassive τεταγμένοι 1 as many as were appointed to eternal life If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God had appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 49 qh9z figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord was being spread throughout the whole region Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas had shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 49 fpkr figs-activepassive διεφέρετο & ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was those who believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: “those who believed in Jesus spread the word of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 13 50 u8rm figs-synecdoche οἱ & Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 13 50 ef21 figs-metaphor παρώτρυναν 1 Luke says that the Jewish leaders **stirred up** these women and men, as if calm waters were being disturbed. This figurative expression means that the leaders said things to make them very upset with Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “agitated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 50 f5yd τὰς σεβομένας γυναῖκας τὰς εὐσχήμονας 1 Alternate translation: “the influential women among the Gentile women who worshiped in the synagogue”
|
||
ACT 13 50 wmm5 figs-nominaladj τοὺς πρώτους 1 the leading men Luke is using the adjective **principal** as a noun, to mean people who are important. (ULT adds the word **ones** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the most important men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 13 50 uc54 writing-pronouns ἐξέβαλον αὐτοὺς 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the influential women and important men, not to the Jewish leaders. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the influential women and important men threw them out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 50 cq9h figs-metaphor ἐξέβαλον αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν 1 threw them out from their boundaries Luke is probably not speaking literally when he says that they **threw** them out. It is unlikely that they actually picked up Paul and Barnabas and heaved them through the air. Alternate translation: “they forced Paul and Barnabas to leave their boundaries” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 13 50 kzzk figs-metonymy τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν 1 Luke is describing the city of Antioch in Pisidia by association with the way that it had **boundaries** and its leading citizens could determine who could be within those boundaries. Alternate translation: “their city” or “the territory they controlled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 13 51 abco writing-pronouns οἱ 1 But when they had shaken off The pronoun **they** refers to Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 13 51 xi1z translate-symaction ἐκτιναξάμενοι τὸν κονιορτὸν τῶν ποδῶν ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς 1 when they had shaken off the dust from their feet against them This symbolic action was an expression of strong rejection in this culture. It showed that someone did not want even the dust of a town to remain on them. If there is a similar gesture in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 13 52 dp5k figs-explicit οἵ & μαθηταὶ 1 the disciples Here, **the disciples** implicitly means the new believers that Paul and Barnabas were leaving behind in Antioch of Pisidia. Alternate translation: “the new believers in Antioch of Pisidia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 13 52 hhgj figs-metaphor ἐπληροῦντο χαρᾶς καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Luke is speaking of these disciples as if they were a container that **joy** and **the Holy Spirit** had **filled**. Alternate translation: “experienced great joy and a strong sense of the Holy Spirit’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 14 intro rsg2 0 # Acts 14 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>- Verses 1–4 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel in Iconium.<br>- Verses 5–19 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel in Lystra.<br>- Verses 20–28 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel and strengthened the believers in several cities on their way back to Antioch.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### “the word of his grace”<br><br>The expression “the word of his grace” refers to the message that God will graciously forgive and accept those who believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])<br><br>### Zeus and Hermes<br><br>In this chapter, Barnabas and Paul are mistaken for the pagan gods Zeus and Hermes. The Gentiles in the Roman Empire worshiped many different false gods that did not really exist. Paul and Barnabas told them to believe in the “living God,” that is, the one and only true God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “We must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings.”<br><br>Jesus told his followers before he died that everyone who followed him would suffer persecution. Paul and Barnabas were saying the same thing using different words as they encouraged the new believers in the cities that they had visited.
|
||
ACT 14 1 hk1z writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Iconium Luke is using this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 14 1 f4sq figs-explicit λαλῆσαι 1 spoke in such a way It may be helpful to say explicitly that they spoke about Jesus. Alternate translation: “spoke about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 14 2 wc4x οἱ & ἀπειθήσαντες Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews who were disobedient Alternate translation: “those Jews who did not believe the message about Jesus”
|
||
ACT 14 2 n2pp figs-metaphor ἐπήγειραν 1 stirred up the souls of the Gentiles Luke says that these Jews**stirred up** the Gentiles, as if calm waters were being disturbed. This expression means that the Jews said things to make the Gentiles very upset with Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “agitated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 14 2 k8mv figs-synecdoche τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 the souls Luke is using one part of the Gentiles, their **souls**, to mean all of them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 14 2 fu13 figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 14 3 a3gp grammar-connect-logic-contrast οὖν 1 So they stayed there Luke uses the word **But** here to indicate a contrast between what the unfaithful Jews did and what Paul and Barnabas did in response. In your translation, indicate this contrast in a way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
|
||
ACT 14 3 fifi writing-politeness ἐπὶ τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 14 3 f2xh figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ 1 who is testifying to the word of his grace Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that the Holy Spirit wanted Paul and Barnabas to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in support of the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 14 3 wcn5 figs-abstractnouns τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ 1 to the word of his grace If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “about how God graciously saves us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 14 3 c2cv figs-doublet σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα 1 by granting signs and wonders to be done by their hands The terms **signs** and **wonders** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated this expression in [4:30](../04/30.md). Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 14 3 p9iq figs-metonymy διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν 1 by their hands Here, **hands** represents the capability of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly.Alternate translation: “through them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 14 4 btu3 figs-activepassive ἐσχίσθη & τὸ πλῆθος τῆς πόλεως 1 the population of the city was divided If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the people of the city disagreed with each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 14 4 q1xc figs-ellipsis σὺν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις 1 with the apostles Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “were with the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 14 5 q6g2 figs-hendiadys ὑβρίσαι καὶ λιθοβολῆσαι αὐτούς 1 to mistreat and stone them Luke is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **stone** tells how their opponents in Iconium wanted to **mistreat** Paul and Barnabas. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “to put them to death by stoning them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 14 6 tpl1 translate-names τῆς Λυκαονίας 1 of Lycaonia The word **Lycaonia** is the name of a district in Asia Minor (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 14 6 tl4q translate-names Δέρβην 1 Derbe The word**Derbe** is the name of a city in Asia Minor. It is south of Iconium and Lystra. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 14 8 wb5k writing-participants τις ἀνὴρ & ἐκάθητο 1 a certain man sat Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 14 8 kz7d figs-metonymy ἀδύνατος & τοῖς ποσὶν 1 powerless in his feet Luke is referring to the strength of this man’s legs by association with the way people are able to stand on their **feet** when their legs are strong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whose legs could not support him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 14 8 tca1 figs-metonymy χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 lame from the womb of his mother Luke is referring to the time of this man’s birth by association with the way he came out of the **womb of his mother** when he was born. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “lame from the time he was born” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 14 9 di49 figs-pronouns οὗτος ἤκουσεν τοῦ Παύλου λαλοῦντος, ὃς ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ καὶ ἰδὼν ὅτι ἔχει πίστιν 1 He looked intently at him The pronouns **he** and **him** refer to the lame man, and the pronoun **who** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “This man heard Paul speaking. Paul looked intently at the man and saw that he had faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 14 9 xak4 figs-abstractnouns ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι 1 he has faith to be saved If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he could trust in Jesus to heal him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 14 9 uwov figs-activepassive ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be Jesus. (Here Luke is using the word that is often translated “saved” in one of its specific senses to mean **healed**.) Alternate translation: “he could trust Jesus to heal him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 14 10 i2kz writing-pronouns εἶπεν & ἥλατο 1 The first instance of the pronoun **He** refers to Paul, and the second instance refers to the man who was lame. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul said … the man jumped up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 14 10 tect figs-imperative ἀνάστηθι ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας σου ὀρθός 1 This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, it was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Alternate translation: “Jesus the Messiah gives you the ability to walk” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative)
|
||
ACT 14 10 sagd figs-explicitinfo ἀνάστηθι ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας σου ὀρθός! 1 It might seem that the expression **Arise upon your feet** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “Get up!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
|
||
ACT 14 10 v1kz figs-explicit ἥλατο 1 he jumped up The implication is that the man’s legs were completely healed. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “the man was completely healed and he jumped up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 14 11 isyz ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν 1 Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **voice**. Alternate translation: “they raised their voices”
|
||
ACT 14 11 lvs9 figs-idiom ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν 1 they raised their voice The phrase **raised up their voice** is an idiom that means that the crowds spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “they said loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 14 11 dw4w figs-quotesinquotes Λυκαονιστὶ λέγοντες, οἱ θεοὶ ὁμοιωθέντες ἀνθρώποις, κατέβησαν πρὸς ἡμᾶς 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “saying in Lycaonian that the gods, having been made like men, had come down to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 14 11 x3bi translate-names Λυκαονιστὶ 1 The word **Lycaonian** is the name of the language that was spoken in district District of Lycaonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 14 11 rm85 figs-activepassive ὁμοιωθέντες ἀνθρώποις 1 being made like men If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having become like men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 14 12 t7uu translate-names Δία 1 Zeus The word **Zeus** is the name of a pagan god who was considered to be the ruler of all the other pagan gods. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 14 12 hh25 translate-names Ἑρμῆν 1 Hermes The word **Hermes** is the name of the pagan god who was thought to bring messages to people from Zeus and the other gods. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 14 12 i1fa figs-ellipsis τὸν δὲ Παῦλον, Ἑρμῆν, 1 Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and they were calling Paul ‘Hermes,’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 14 12 d9lu figs-metonymy ὁ ἡγούμενος τοῦ λόγου 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Paul and Barnabas were sharing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the leader of the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 14 12 l63q figs-personification ὁ ἡγούμενος τοῦ λόγου 1 Luke is speaking of the message about Jesus as if it were a living thing that Paul could lead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the main speaker” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 14 13 iz6r figs-metonymy τοῦ Διὸς, τοῦ ὄντος πρὸ τῆς πόλεως 1 And the priest of the temple of Zeus, which was in front of the city, brought Luke is using the name **Zeus** to mean the temple that was associated with the worship of Zeus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the temple of Zeus, which was before the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 14 13 sh4o figs-explicit τοῦ Διὸς, τοῦ ὄντος πρὸ τῆς πόλεως 1 Here, **before** means “in front of”. Luke is referring to the temple of Zeus that was located right outside the entrance to the city of Iconium. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “of the Temple of Zeus that was located right outside the entrance to the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 14 13 v2a9 figs-explicit ταύρους καὶ στέμματα 1 oxen and wreaths The implication is that the priest had put these **wreaths** on the **oxen** because they were going to be offered as a sacrifice. That was the custom in this culture. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “oxen that were wearing wreaths as sacrificial animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 14 13 ud37 figs-explicit σὺν τοῖς ὄχλοις ἤθελεν θύειν 1 wanting to sacrifice Luke means implicitly that the priest of Zeus wanted to offer the oxen as sacrifices to Paul and Barnabas, whom the people thought were the gods Zeus and Hermes. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “was wanting to offer sacrifice with the crowds to Paul and Barnabas as the gods Zeus and Hermes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 14 14 kx43 translate-symaction διαρρήξαντες τὰ ἱμάτια ἑαυτῶν 1 they tore their clothing Barnabas and Paul tore their clothes as a symbolic action to show that they were deeply distressed and upset that the crowd wanted to sacrifice to them. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “tearing their clothing to show how distressed they were that the crowd wanted to sacrifice to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 14 14 wa4h figs-hendiadys κράζοντες 1 Together with the word “saying” in the next verse, the phrase “crying out” expresses a single idea. The phrase **crying out** tells how Barnabas and Paul were **saying** what they said. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “saying loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 14 15 ee13 figs-gendernotations ἄνδρες 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul and Barnabas are likely using the term in a generic sense that includes both men and women, since both men and women of Lystra were probably in the crowd that wanted to sacrifice to them. To make this clear to your readers, you could use a term in your language that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “You people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 14 15 w4fd figs-rquestion ἄνδρες, τί ταῦτα ποιεῖτε? 1 Men, why are you doing these things? Barnabas and Paul are rebuking the people for trying to sacrifice to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you would express this question as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “People, you must not do these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 14 15 u9pq figs-explicit καὶ ἡμεῖς ὁμοιοπαθεῖς ἐσμεν ὑμῖν ἄνθρωποι 1 We also are men with the same feelings as you People in this culture believed that the gods did not have passions as humans do. So the implication of this statement is that Paul and Barnabas are human beings and not gods. You can include this information in your translation if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “We are human beings just like you. We are not gods!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 14 15 n98g figs-metaphor ἀπὸ τούτων τῶν ματαίων ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ Θεὸν ζῶντα 1 turn from these useless things to a living God Paul and Barnabas are speaking as if they want the people in Lystra physically to **turn** from idol worship and believe in the one true God. They mean that the people should stop living in one way and should start living in another way. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to get you to stop worshiping these false gods and lead you to worship the living God instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 14 15 blhg figs-nominaladj τούτων τῶν ματαίων 1 Paul and Barnabas are using the adjective **useless** as a noun to mean the false gods that the people of Lystra had been worshiping. ULT adds the word **things** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this expression with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “these false gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 14 15 qr5b figs-idiom Θεὸν ζῶντα 1 a living God This expression is an idiom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one God who truly exists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 14 15 lw9o figs-merism ὃς ἐποίησεν τὸν οὐρανὸν, καὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 Paul and Barnabas are referring to all of creation by naming its components. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all of creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||
ACT 14 16 vpt5 figs-metaphor πορεύεσθαι ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν 1 to go their own ways This is a metaphor that refers to how people live their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to live their lives the way they wanted to” or “to do what they wanted to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 14 17 kig8 figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἀμάρτυρον αὑτὸν ἀφῆκεν 1 he did not leave himself without witness If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative preposition **without**. Alternate translation: “he left himself a witness” or “he showed you what he was like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 14 17 c1se figs-explicitinfo οὐρανόθεν ὑμῖν ὑετοὺς διδοὺς 1 It might seem that the expression **rains from the sky** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “providing rain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
|
||
ACT 14 17 ps9z figs-synecdoche ἐμπιπλῶν & τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν 1 filling your hearts with food and gladness Paul and Barnabas are using one part of these people, their **hearts**, meaning their desires, to mean their entire beings. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “satisfying you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 14 17 en5y figs-hendiadys τροφῆς καὶ εὐφροσύνης 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **gladness** tells how the food that God provided made these people feel. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “enjoyable food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 14 19 wmc2 figs-explicit πείσαντες τοὺς ὄχλους 1 persuaded the crowds It may be helpful to state explicitly what they **persuaded the crowds** to do. Alternate translation: “persuaded the crowds not to believe Paul and Barnabas and to turn violently against them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 14 20 aqx3 writing-pronouns αὐτὸν & εἰσῆλθεν & ἐξῆλθεν 1 he entered into the city The pronouns **him** and **he** refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … he entered … Paul went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 14 21 lint figs-nominaladj μαθητεύσαντες ἱκανοὺς 1 Luke is using the adjective **many** as a noun to mean the people who became disciples. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “having helped many people to become disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 14 22 ek9l figs-synecdoche ἐπιστηρίζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν μαθητῶν 1 They were strengthening the souls of the disciples Luke is using one part of the disciples, their **souls**, to represent their entire beings as believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “They were strengthening the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 14 22 zkd2 figs-abstractnouns παρακαλοῦντες ἐμμένειν τῇ πίστει 1 and encouraging them to continue in the faith If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “encouraging them to keep believing in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 14 22 d9ic figs-quotations καὶ ὅτι διὰ πολλῶν θλίψεων, δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 and saying, “It is necessary for us to enter into the kingdom of God through many afflictions.” You may want to have an indirect quotation here, if that would be more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and saying that it was necessary for all of them to enter into the kingdom of God through many afflictions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 14 22 ci6q figs-abstractnouns δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 See the discussion of the concept of the **kingdom of God** in Part 2 of the General Introduction to Acts. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a noun such as “king.” Alternate translation: “It is necessary for us to endure many afflictions in order to live in allegiance to God as our true king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 14 22 wu1c figs-exclusive δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν 1 It is necessary for us to enter By **us**, Paul and Barnabas mean both themselves and the believers to whom they were speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 14 23 pk5l writing-pronouns χειροτονήσαντες & παρέθεντο & πεπιστεύκεισαν 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the new believers in the cities of Lystra, Iconium, and Antioch, and the pronoun **they** refer to Paul and Barnabas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “for the new believers in these cities … Paul and Barnabas entrusted these believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 14 23 mqp9 κατ’ ἐκκλησίαν 1 And when they had appointed for them elders in every church Alternate translation: “in each new group of believers”
|
||
ACT 14 23 n81l writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 14 25 t513 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 And when they had spoken the word in Perga Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that the Holy Spirit wanted Paul and Barnabas to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 14 25 h8sh figs-idiom κατέβησαν εἰς Ἀττάλιαν 1 they went down to Attalia Luke says that Paul and Barnabas **went down** to Attalia because that city is lower in elevation than Perga. Alternate translation: “traveled to Attalia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 14 26 f2cg figs-activepassive ὅθεν ἦσαν παραδεδομένοι τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 where they had been commended to the grace of God If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “where the believers had commended them to the grace of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 14 26 p2gd figs-abstractnouns ὅθεν ἦσαν παραδεδομένοι τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “where the believers had asked God to care for them graciously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 14 27 vcd3 writing-pronouns ἀνήγγελλον & αὐτῶν & ἤνοιξεν 1 The pronouns **they** and **them** refer to Paul and Barnabas, and the pronoun **he** refers to God. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas were reporting … them … God had opened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 14 27 qcl8 figs-idiom ὅσα ἐποίησεν ὁ Θεὸς μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 In many languages it would be an idiom to say that God **had done** something with Paul and Barnabas. It would mean that they had been the objects of God’s action. But the expression is not an idiom here. It means that Paul and Barnabas had been able to work in partnership **with** God. Alternate translation: “how much they had been able to do by working together with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 14 27 vymy figs-possession ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως 1 Here, the possessive form describes not a **door** consisting of **faith** but a door that leads to faith. Alternate translation: “a door leading to faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 14 27 b4id figs-metaphor ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως 1 he had opened a door of faith for the Gentiles Here the expression **opened a door** means that God created an opportunity, as if a door that gave access to this opportunity had previously been closed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he had given the Gentiles an opportunity for faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 14 27 xgvb figs-abstractnouns ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he had given the Gentiles the opportunity to believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 14 28 abcq figs-litotes χρόνον οὐκ ὀλίγον 1 for not a little time Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could take the meaning plainly. Alternate translation, as in UST: “for a long time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 15 intro h917 0 # Acts 15 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>Verses 1–35 tell how the church resolved the question of whether Gentiles who believed in Jesus needed to keep the whole law of Moses.<br>Verses 36–41 tell how Paul began a new journey to proclaim the gospel, bringing Silas with him.<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 15:16–18.<br><br>Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present the quotation from the prophet Amos in verses 16–18 as a direct quotation if possible, since in it God is speaking directly the people of Israel. Since Amos acknowledges in verse 17 that God is speaking by saying “says the Lord,” a third-level quotation actually starts in verse 16. ULT uses second-level and third-level quotation marks within the first-level quotation from James to identify the various speakers. But it may not be necessary to do this in your translation. You could just use second-level quotation marks or some other punctuation or convention available in your language to indicate the beginning and ending of the second-level quotation from Amos. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Did Gentiles have to obey the law of Moses?<br><br>Some believers wanted the Gentiles to be circumcised because God had told Abraham and Moses that everyone who wanted to belong to him had to be circumcised, so this was a law that would always exist. But Paul and Barnabas had seen God give uncircumcised Gentiles the gift of the Holy Spirit, so they did not believe that the Gentiles needed to be circumcised. Both groups went to Jerusalem to have the church leaders decide what they should do. The meeting that the apostles and elders held to decide about this issue is commonly called the “Jerusalem Council.”
|
||
ACT 15 1 su66 figs-explicit τινες 1 certain ones Luke assumes that his readers will recognize that these were Jews who believed in Jesus. You can include this information if your readers will need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “certain Jews who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 15 1 p3k9 figs-idiom κατελθόντες ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰουδαίας 1 coming down from Judea Luke speaks of these Jews ** coming down** to Antioch because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “who had traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 15 1 zi1n figs-metaphor ἐδίδασκον τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 taught the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were teaching the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 1 pm8h figs-activepassive ἐὰν μὴ περιτμηθῆτε 1 Unless you are circumcised in the custom of Moses, you are not able to be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Unless someone circumcises you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 1 lwbi figs-activepassive οὐ δύνασθε σωθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be God. Alternate translation, as in UST: “God will not save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 2 abcr figs-litotes στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως οὐκ ὀλίγης 1 not a little dispute and debate Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word, **not**, together with a word, **little**, that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could states the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great dispute and debate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 15 2 f9nd figs-doublet στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως 1 not a little dispute and debate The terms **dispute** and **debate** mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single word or phrase. Alternate translation: “controversy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 15 2 w6tc writing-pronouns πρὸς αὐτοὺς & ἔταξαν & ἐξ αὐτῶν 1 The first instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the Jewish believers from Judea, and the pronoun **they** and the second instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the believers in the church in Antioch. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “with the Jewish believers from Judea … the believers in Antioch appointed … from the church there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 15 2 ek6a figs-idiom ἀναβαίνειν & εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ 1 to go up … in Jerusalem Luke says **to go up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain.. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 15 3 av5y figs-activepassive οἱ & προπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 Therefore, the ones who had been sent by the church If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones the church had sent out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 3 aia5 figs-metonymy τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 who had been sent by the church Luke is using the phrase **the church** to mean the people who were associated with the church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 3 rk37 figs-abstractnouns ἐκδιηγούμενοι τὴν ἐπιστροφὴν τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 announcing the conversion of the Gentiles If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **conversion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “describing how some of the Gentiles had stopped worshiping false gods and were now worshiping the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 15 3 nje7 figs-abstractnouns ἐποίουν χαρὰν μεγάλην πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 they brought great joy to all the brothers If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “making all the brothers very happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 15 3 bbd4 figs-metaphor πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 to all the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in all the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 3 c03o figs-hyperbole πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 The word **all** here may be a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, use a different way to convey this general statement. Alternate translation: “in the believers in those places” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 15 4 ej1r figs-activepassive παρεδέχθησαν ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας, καὶ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 they were welcomed by the church, and the apostles, and the elders If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the church the apostles and the elders welcome them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 4 jblr figs-metonymy τῆς ἐκκλησίας, καὶ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 Luke is using the phrase **the church** to mean the people who were associated with the church. Since he mentions the **apostles** and **elders** separately, here means the ordinary members of the church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the members of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 4 a2x1 figs-idiom ὅσα ὁ Θεὸς ἐποίησεν μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 with them See how you translated this same expression in [14:27](../14/27.md). Alternate translation: “how much they had been able to do working together with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 15 5 zcv0 πεπιστευκότες 1 Alternate translation: “who had believed in Jesus”
|
||
ACT 15 5 crr7 translate-symaction ἐξανέστησαν 1 These believers **stood up** to indicate that they had something important to say. Alternate translation: “stood up to show that they had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 15 5 efe5 writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς & παραγγέλλειν 1 Both instances of the pronoun **them** refer to the Gentiles who had converted to belief in the true God, as described in [15:3](../15/03.md). It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these Gentiles who have converted … command them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 15 6 gqt1 figs-activepassive συνήχθησάν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 6 ugu6 figs-idiom ἰδεῖν περὶ 1 to see about this matter Here the phrase **to see about** is an idiom that means “to consider.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to consider” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 15 6 vcsc figs-metonymy τοῦ λόγου τούτου 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the claim that the Jewish believers who were Pharisees had made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the claim that the Jewish believers who were Pharisees had made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 7 zhco translate-symaction ἀναστὰς Πέτρος 1 Peter stood up to indicate that he had something important to say. If your readers might not understand the significance of this action, you could explain it in your translation. Alternate translation: “Peter, standing up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 15 7 c2q7 writing-pronouns αὐτούς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the apostles and elders. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the apostles and elders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 15 7 s6ap figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 15 7 a6q9 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Peter is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation, as in UST: “fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 7 wct8 figs-yousingular ὑμεῖς & ὑμῖν 1 Both occurrences of **you** are plural since they refer to the apostles and elders. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
|
||
ACT 15 7 hk4g writing-pronouns ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε 1 For emphasis, Peter is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **know**. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “you know very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 15 7 ftl9 figs-idiom ἀφ’ ἡμερῶν ἀρχαίων 1 Peter is using an idiom that refers to the time when something began or had its origin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “at the time when the Gentiles would first begin to believe in Jesus,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 15 7 s3wb figs-synecdoche διὰ τοῦ στόματός μου 1 by my mouth Peter is using one part of himself, his **mouth**, to represent all of himself in the act of speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “From me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 15 7 b5s8 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word of the gospel Peter is using the term **word** to mean the message that he shared by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 8 m1xc figs-metonymy καρδιογνώστης 1 who knows the heart Here, the word **heart** refers to a person’s character and intentions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who understands each person’s character and intentions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 8 p6d2 figs-explicit ἐμαρτύρησεν αὐτοῖς 1 testified to them The implication is not that God testified to the Gentiles about Jesus, but that by giving the Gentiles the Holy Spirit, God testified to Peter and his companions that they could have genuine faith. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “testified to their genuine faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 15 8 abcs figs-ellipsis καθὼς καὶ ἡμῖν 1 just as also to us Peter is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “just as he also gave the Holy Spirit to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 15 8 wlzx figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Peter is using the word **us** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 15 9 zs2g figs-doublenegatives οὐδὲν διέκρινεν μεταξὺ ἡμῶν τε καὶ αὐτῶν 1 he did not distinguish If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **distinguish**, which in this context means “discriminate.” Alternate translation: “he regarded them in the same way he regarded us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 15 9 jr3b figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Peter is using the word **us** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 15 9 ase1 figs-metaphor τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 having made their hearts clean by faith Peter speaks of God forgiving the Gentile believers’ sins as though God literally **cleansed** their hearts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having made them innocent because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 9 yi8r figs-metonymy τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 Here, the word **hearts** represents the inner beings of the Gentiles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having forgiven them because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 10 rfr4 νῦν οὖν τί 1 Now **Now** in this context does not mean “at this moment.” Peter is using the word to draw attention to the important point that follows. Alternate translation: “So tell me, therefore: Why”
|
||
ACT 15 10 zaz6 figs-rquestion τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν, ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν, ὃν οὔτε οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν οὔτε ἡμεῖς ἰσχύσαμεν βαστάσαι? 1 why are you testing God, to put a yoke upon the neck of the disciples which neither our fathers nor we were able to bear? Peter is using the question form to challenge the believers who are Pharisees about what they want the Gentiles to do. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement, ending the verse with a period or exclamation point. Alternate translation: “you must not test God to put a yoke upon the neck of the disciples which neither our fathers nor we were able to bear!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 15 10 ha45 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν & ἡμεῖς 1 Peter is using the words **our** and **we** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 15 10 n2bv τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν 1 Here the word **testing** means **challenging**. Peter is saying that God has accepted the Gentiles without requiring them to be circumcised or keep the law, but the believers who are Pharisees are challenging God’s judgment that the Gentiles should be accepted on that basis. See how you translated the similar expression in [5:9](../05/09.md). Alternate translation: “why are you challenging God”
|
||
ACT 15 10 qpyd figs-metaphor ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν, ὃν οὔτε οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν οὔτε ἡμεῖς ἰσχύσαμεν βαστάσαι 1 Peter is speaking as if the believers who are Pharisees literally want to put a **yoke** on the necks of the Gentile believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “requiring the disciples to meet an onerous obligation that neither our fathers nor we have been able to fulfill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 10 bdfu τὸν τράχηλον 1 Since Peter is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **neck**. Alternate translation: “the necks”
|
||
ACT 15 10 bfd5 figs-metaphor οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Peter is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 11 e1m4 figs-rpronouns πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι 1 Peter is using a construction in which the object is implied. Since the object is the same as the subject of the verb, the construction calls for the relative pronoun **ourselves**. Your language may have its own way of expressing the same meaning. Alternate translation: “we believe that we will be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
|
||
ACT 15 11 q28c figs-activepassive πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι 1 But we believe to be saved through the grace of the Lord Jesus, and they according to that same manner If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who will do the action, it is clear from the context that it will be God. Alternate translation: “we believe that God will save us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 11 nhq8 figs-exclusive πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι 1 Peter is using the pronoun **we** and the implied pronoun **ourselves** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 15 11 d3z7 figs-abstractnouns διὰ τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “through what God has graciously done for us through the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 15 11 ln38 figs-explicit διὰ τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 Peter means implicitly that we are saved through the grace of the Lord Jesus and not by obeying the law of Moses. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “through the grace of the Lord Jesus and not by obeying the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 15 11 e96c figs-ellipsis καθ’ ὃν τρόπον κἀκεῖνοι 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “according to the way they also will be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 15 11 c8mw figs-explicit κἀκεῖνοι 1 Peter assumes that his listeners will know that he is using the pronoun **they** to refer to the Gentiles. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles also will be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 15 12 kxjq figs-doublet σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα 1 The terms **signs** and **wonders** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:43](../02/43.md). Alternate translation, as in UST: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 15 13 odjm figs-hendiadys ἀπεκρίθη Ἰάκωβος λέγων 1 Together the words **answered** and **saying** mean that James responded to what everyone in the meeting had said to that point. Alternate translation: “James responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 15 13 pl6m figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 brothers, listen This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 15 14 jjyc translate-names Συμεὼν 1 The word **Simeon** is the name of a man. It is the Hebrew form of the name whose Greek form is Simon. James is referring to Peter by his Hebrew name. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use either the name Simon or the name Peter here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 15 14 abct figs-metonymy ὁ Θεὸς ἐπεσκέψατο 1 concerned himself to take from the Gentiles James is speaking of the way God showed concern for the Gentiles by association with the way someone would look carefully at a situation he was concerned about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God concerned himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 14 pnr9 figs-metonymy λαὸν τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ 1 for his name This could mean: (1) that God chose the Gentiles for himself. James would be using the term **name** to refer to a person, God, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “a people who would belong to him” (2) that God chose the Gentiles to worship him. James would be using the term **name** to refer to worship by association with the way that worshipers call upon the name of God. Alternate translation: “a people who would worship him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 15 am6y figs-metonymy οἱ λόγοι τῶν προφητῶν 1 this agrees with the words of the prophets James is using the term **words** to mean the message that God spoke through the prophets. (This is a quotation from the prophet Amos.) If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 15 j4f5 figs-activepassive καθὼς γέγραπται 1 just as it is written If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as one of the prophets wrote” or “as the prophet Amos wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 16 m3lq figs-quotemarks μετὰ ταῦτα ἀναστρέψω 1 See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter about whether to represent this as the beginning of a third-level quotation or a second-level quotation, or whether to use some other punctuation or convention that is available in your language to indicate who the various speakers are in verses 16–18. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 15 16 h9um writing-pronouns ἀναστρέψω & ἀνοικοδομήσω & ἀνοικοδομήσω 1 The pronoun **I** refers to God, who is speaking through the prophet Amos. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “I, God, will return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 15 16 wqi6 figs-metaphor ἀναστρέψω 1 God is speaking of showing favor to the Israelites once again as if he had gone somewhere else but will now **return**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will show favor to the Israelites once again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 16 fhdr figs-parallelism ἀνοικοδομήσω τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν, καὶ τὰ κατεστραμμένα αὐτῆς, ἀνοικοδομήσω καὶ ἀνορθώσω αὐτήν 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “I will rebuild the fallen tent of David, yes, I will rebuild its ruins and restore it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||
ACT 15 16 f5wf figs-metaphor ἀνοικοδομήσω τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν, καὶ τὰ κατεστραμμένα αὐτῆς, ἀνοικοδομήσω καὶ ἀνορθώσω αὐτήν 1 I will build again the tent of David, which has fallen down; and I will rebuild its ruins and will restore it God is speaking of the royal dynasty of David as if it were a **tent** that had **fallen** down. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will restore the dynasty of David, which is no longer ruling over the people of Israel, yes, I will make one of David’s descendants king again and restore his dynasty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 16 u0r6 figs-activepassive τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the tent of David that has fallen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 17 hkw1 figs-gendernotations κατάλοιποι τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 remnant of men Although the term **men** is masculine, God is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. You may wish to indicate this in your translation. Alternate translation: “the remnant of humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 15 17 pe4l figs-123person ἐκζητήσωσιν & τὸν Κύριον 1 may seek the Lord God is speaking about himself in the third person. Alternate translation: “may seek me, the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||
ACT 15 17 sm79 figs-metaphor ἐκζητήσωσιν & τὸν Κύριον 1 the remnant of men may seek the Lord God is speaking as if the Gentiles would literally **seek** or look for him. The expression means that the Gentiles will begin to worship God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “may begin to worship the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 17 s6de figs-explicitinfo ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 It might seem that this phrase contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “upon whom my name has been called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
|
||
ACT 15 17 tu21 figs-activepassive ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 including all the Gentiles upon whom my name has been called upon them If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom I have called by my name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 17 c8gm figs-metonymy ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 my name See how you translated the similar expression in [15:14](../15/14.md). (1) Alternate translation: “who will belong to me” (2) Alternate translation: “who will worship me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 18 tr27 figs-activepassive γνωστὰ 1 known If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that people have known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 19 pyb9 figs-explicit μὴ παρενοχλεῖν τοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν ἐθνῶν, ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 not to trouble those from the Gentiles who are turning to God In your translation, you could make explicit in what way James does not want to **trouble** these **Gentiles**. Alternate translation: “that we should not require the Gentiles who are believing in God to be circumcised and obey the laws of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 15 19 vr6u figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 who are turning to God James is speaking of these Gentiles as if they are physically **turning** to God. He means that they are believing in the true God and starting to live in a way that pleases him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning of this expression plainly. Alternate translation: “believing in God and obeying him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 20 vcm4 translate-versebridge 0 James lists four regulations in this verse and he gives the reason for them in the next verse. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 19–21. It might say something like this: “Therefore, I judge that we should not trouble the Gentiles who are turning to God. However, since Moses has had those proclaiming him in every city from ancient generations—he is read in the synagogues on every Sabbath—we should write to the Gentiles to abstain from the pollution of idols and sexual immorality and strangled things and blood.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
|
||
ACT 15 20 wx8f figs-abstractnouns τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων 1 to keep away from the pollution of idols, and sexual immorality, and things that are strangled, and blood If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **pollution**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from things that idols have polluted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 15 20 qun9 figs-possession τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων 1 If your language would not use a possessive form here, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from things that idols have polluted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 15 20 n6f2 figs-explicit τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων 1 pollution of idols James is likely talking about food that has been offered to **idols**, and he is speaking as if being offered to idols has polluted this food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating food that has been offered to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 15 20 j2rl figs-explicit τοῦ πνικτοῦ, καὶ τοῦ αἵματος 1 things that are strangled, and blood God did not allow the Jews to consume blood in any form. Therefore, for one thing, they could not eat the meat from an animal that had been **strangled**, because the blood would not have been properly drained from the body of the animal. For another thing, while James is not saying that the Gentiles should have no contact at all with blood, he is saying implicitly that they should not consume blood. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation, because this meat still contains blood, and from consuming blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 15 20 brc2 figs-nominaladj καὶ τοῦ πνικτοῦ 1 James is using the adjective **strangled** as a noun to mean animals that have been killed by strangulation. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 15 20 h27f figs-metonymy τοῦ πνικτοῦ 1 James is referring by association to meat from animals that have been killed by strangulation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 21 si1h figs-explicit Μωϋσῆς γὰρ ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς κατὰ πᾶν Σάββατον ἀναγινωσκόμενος 1 For Moses has in every city, from ancient generations, those proclaiming him, being read in the synagogues every Sabbath James is saying implicitly that Gentile believers should observe at least the four regulations he has listed because they embody essential aspects of the law of Moses (not worshiping idols, not practicing sexual immorality, and respecting the blood of sacrifices), and the law of Moses is well known because it is read aloud regularly in the Jewish synagogues. If the Gentiles did not observe even these regulations, that would upset Jewish believers and make Jews who were not yet believers more hostile to Christianity. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand what James is saying. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 15 21 zd7t figs-metonymy Μωϋσῆς & ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει & ἀναγινωσκόμενος 1 Moses James is using the name **Moses** to mean the law associated with Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people have been proclaiming the law of Moses by city from ancient generations; it is read” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 21 wp1s figs-activepassive ἀναγινωσκόμενος 1 Moses has in every city, from ancient generations, those proclaiming him If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “People read him” or “People read from the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 21 xg5n figs-explicit κατὰ πόλιν 1 in every city The expression **by city** means “in every city,” and James implicitly means every city in which there are Jews. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “in every city in which there are Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 15 22 hp6j figs-metonymy ὅλῃ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 the whole church Here the word **church** describes the people who were part of the church. Alternate translation: “all the people of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 22 g6e8 figs-explicit ὅλῃ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to the **church** in Jerusalem. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “the church in Jerusalem” or “all the people of the church in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 15 22 c711 translate-names Ἰούδαν τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν 1 Judas called Barsabbas The words **Judas** and **Barsabbas** are the names of men. **Barsabbas** was another name by which **Judas** was known. **Barsabbas** is probably a patronymic, that is, an indication of who his father was. If your language and culture identify people by patronymics, it may be helpful to translate this name as “the son of Sabbas,” as UST does. See how you translated this same name for another man in [1:23](../01/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 15 22 s6lv figs-activepassive Ἰούδαν τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Judas, whom people called Barsabbas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 22 s6d8 figs-metaphor τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the members of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 23 k6cq figs-metonymy γράψαντες διὰ χειρὸς αὐτῶν 1 Luke does not mean that the apostles and elders ask Judas and Silas to write out this letter for them. Rather, Luke is using the word **hand** to mean that Judas and Silas carried the letter and delivered it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sending the following letter with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 23 xz3f figs-youdual χειρὸς αὐτῶν 1 Since Luke is referring to two people, it might be more natural in your language to use the dual or plural form here, as your language may require. Alternate translation: “their hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
|
||
ACT 15 23 e4g2 οἱ ἀπόστολοι καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι, ἀδελφοὶ, τοῖς κατὰ τὴν Ἀντιόχειαν, καὶ Συρίαν, καὶ Κιλικίαν, ἀδελφοῖς τοῖς ἐξ ἐθνῶν, χαίρειν 1 The apostles and the elders, brothers, to those throughout Antioch and Syria and Cilicia, who are brothers from among the Gentiles. Greetings This is the introduction of the letter. In the culture of this time, letter writers would give their own names first. Your language and culture may have its own way of introducing the author of a letter and saying to whom it is written. Alternate translation: “This letter is from your brothers, the apostles and elders. We are writing to you Gentile believers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings to you” or “To our Gentile brothers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings from the apostles and elders, your brothers”
|
||
ACT 15 23 kp51 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοὶ & ἀδελφοῖς 1 brothers … brothers The apostles and elders are using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. By doing this, they are assuring the Gentile believers that they accept them as fellow believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 24 g8m9 figs-exclusive ἠκούσαμεν & ἡμῶν & οὐ διεστειλάμεθα 1 Here and in the rest of the letter, by **we** and **us** (and “our”), the apostles and elders mean themselves and probably the rest of the church in Jerusalem, but not the Gentiles to whom they are writing, so use the exclusive forms of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 15 24 p1tl figs-explicit ἐξ ἡμῶν 1 that certain ones The apostles and elders seem to mean implicitly that these people have gone out from their community, but not from among themselves. That is, the word **some** refers to people who were part of the church in Jerusalem, but who were not apostles or elders. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “from our community” or “from here in Judea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 15 24 hbw5 figs-metonymy λόγοις 1 The apostles and elders are using the term **words** to mean what the people who have gone out from them have been teaching by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by what they have been teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 24 bxq8 figs-synecdoche ἀνασκευάζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν 1 to disturb you with teachings that are upsetting your souls The apostles and elders are using one part of the people to whom they are writing, their **souls**, to mean the people themselves. Alternate translation: “upsetting you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 15 26 gldi figs-explicit ἀνθρώποις παραδεδωκόσι 1 By **men**, the letter implicitly means Paul and Barnabas. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Those two men have handed over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 15 26 dhj8 figs-metonymy παραδεδωκόσι τὰς ψυχὰς αὐτῶν 1 The letter is using the term **souls** to mean the lives of Paul and Barnabas, by association with the way a living person has a soul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having handed over their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 26 dinn figs-metaphor παραδεδωκόσι τὰς ψυχὰς αὐτῶν 1 The letter is speaking as if Paul and Barnabas have literally **handed over** their lives. This means that they have been willing to risk their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having put their lives at risk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 26 t7vw figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 for the name of our Lord Jesus Christ This is a figurative expression. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. This could mean: (1) that the **name** of Jesus represents his person. Alternate translation: “out of loyalty to our Lord Jesus Christ” (2) that the **name** of Jesus represents his cause in the world. Alternate translation: “for the cause of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 27 y972 figs-nominaladj ἀπαγγέλλοντας τὰ αὐτά 1 The letter is using the adjective **same** as a noun to mean the details of the decision that the apostles and elders have reached. ULT adds **thing** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “confirming that this is our decision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 15 27 xw8l figs-explicit διὰ λόγου 1 they are reporting to you the same thing in words The letter is using the term **word** to mean “by word of mouth,” that is, “in person.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 15 28 l9z6 figs-metaphor μηδὲν πλέον & βάρος 1 to be laid upon you no greater burden than these necessary things The letter is speaking of the restrictions it describes as if they were a physical **burden** that the Gentiles would need to carry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no greater obligation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 28 bx90 figs-activepassive μηδὲν πλέον ἐπιτίθεσθαι ὑμῖν βάρος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to lay no greater burden upon you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 29 nt7s figs-nominaladj εἰδωλοθύτων 1 things sacrificed to idols The letter is using the adjective **sacrificed**, with the qualifier **to idols**, as a noun to mean the meat of animals that have been sacrificed to idols. (ULT adds **things** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the meat of animals that have been sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 15 29 vcc6 figs-explicit αἵματος 1 blood See how you translated **blood** in [15:20](../15/20.md). Alternate translation: “consuming blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 15 29 rt55 figs-nominaladj πνικτῶν 1 things strangled See how you translated **the strangled** in [15:20](../15/20.md). Alternate translation: “the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 15 29 buy9 figs-imperative ἔρρωσθε 1 Farewell This is an imperative, but it communicates a friendly wish rather than a command. This was the customary way of ending a letter in this culture. Your language may have its own way of ending a letter that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
|
||
ACT 15 30 usz6 figs-activepassive οἱ & ἀπολυθέντες, κατῆλθον 1 when they were dismissed If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “once the apostles and elders had dismissed them, they came down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 30 c3uk figs-pronouns οἱ 1 So when they were dismissed, they came down to Antioch The pronoun **they** refers to Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 15 30 t55a figs-idiom κατῆλθον 1 they came down to Antioch Luke says that these four men **came down** to Antioch because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 15 30 oh4g figs-go κατῆλθον 1 You may wish to retain the idiom for travel to a lower elevation, and if so, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “went down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
|
||
ACT 15 30 yl8v figs-explicit τὸ πλῆθος 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that by **the crowd**, he means the people of the church in Antioch. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “the people of the church in Antioch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 15 31 k1mr writing-pronouns ἐχάρησαν 1 they rejoiced The pronoun **they** refers to the believers in Antioch. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the believers in Antioch rejoiced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 15 31 e4gf figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ παρακλήσει 1 because of the encouragement If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **encouragement**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because they were so encouraged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 15 32 r65l figs-explicit καὶ αὐτοὶ προφῆται ὄντες 1 also being prophets themselves When Luke says **also**, he means implicitly that Judas and Silas were prophets as Paul and Barnabas were [13:1](../13/01.md). You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “who were prophets as Paul and Barnabas were prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 15 32 e2en figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 32 frea figs-metonymy διὰ λόγου πολλοῦ & καὶ ἐπεστήριξαν 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean a message of encouragement that Judas and Silas spoke to the believers in Antioch by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by speaking to them at length to strengthen them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 32 j99g figs-metaphor ἐπεστήριξαν 1 strengthened them Luke does not mean that Judas and Silas strengthened the believers physically but that they strengthened them spiritually. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthened them in their faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 33 v6im figs-activepassive ἀπελύθησαν μετ’ εἰρήνης ἀπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 they were sent away with peace from the brothers If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the brothers sent them away with peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 33 wzw4 figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 33 xv3h figs-explicit πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστείλαντας αὐτούς 1 to those who had sent them Luke is referring implicitly to the apostles and elders in Jerusalem, who had sent Judas and Silas to Antioch. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “back to the apostles and elders in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 15 34 hkh0 translate-textvariants 0 As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this verse is found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but it is not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting the verse in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
|
||
ACT 15 35 anfc writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Luke uses the word **But** to introduce information about what happened once the church resolved the question about whether the Gentiles needed to obey all the laws of Moses. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||
ACT 15 35 e7s4 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 35 hnnb writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 15 36 jjoa figs-idiom ἡμέρας 1 Luke is using the term **days** to mean “time.” Alternate translation: “time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 15 36 ib2j figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 let us visit the brothers Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 15 36 ua1f figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Paul is using the term **word** to mean the message that he and Barnabas shared by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 36 k08n writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 15 36 y9i9 figs-ellipsis πῶς ἔχουσιν 1 how they are Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation, with no comma preceding: “to see how they are doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 15 38 a5nn figs-litotes Παῦλος & ἠξίου & μὴ συνπαραλαμβάνειν τοῦτον 1 Paul thought it wise not to take along him Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “Paul was thinking it would be foolish to take him with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 15 39 u97a figs-activepassive ὥστε ἀποχωρισθῆναι αὐτοὺς ἀπ’ ἀλλήλων; τόν τε Βαρναβᾶν παραλαβόντα τὸν Μᾶρκον, ἐκπλεῦσαι εἰς Κύπρον 1 And there arose a sharp disagreement, so as to separate them from each other If your language does not use the passive form **to be separated**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that they separated from each other and Barnabas, taking Mark with him, sailed away to Cyprus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 40 l2uq figs-activepassive παραδοθεὶς & ὑπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 after he had been entrusted by the brothers to the grace of the Lord If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “after the brothers had commended him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 15 40 tt2w figs-abstractnouns τῇ χάριτι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to the gracious care” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 15 40 xkjo writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 15 41 cbat writing-pronouns διήρχετο 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul was going through” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 15 41 e3ym figs-synecdoche διήρχετο 1 he went through Luke says **he**, meaning Paul, to refer both to Paul and to Silas, who was traveling with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they went through” or “Paul and Silas went through” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 15 41 s7yf figs-metonymy ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 Luke is using the term **churches** to refer to the people associated with the churches. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 15 41 tbv3 figs-metaphor ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 strengthening the churches Luke does not mean that Paul and Silas strengthened the people of the churches physically but that they strengthened them spiritually. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches in their faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 16 intro e7z2 0 # Acts 16 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>- Verses 1–5 describe how Paul began his second missionary journey and met Timothy and brought him along with him.<br>- Verses 6–12 describe how the Holy Spirit led Paul and his companions to share the gospel in the city of Philippi<br>- Verses 13–40 describe how Paul and Silas made disciples in Philippi, delivered a young woman from an evil spirit, and were imprisoned but miraculously released. Acts [16:5](../16/05.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the fourth major part of the book.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Timothy’s circumcision<br><br>Paul circumcised Timothy because he and Silas were telling the message of Jesus to Jews as well as to Gentiles. Many Jews would have been so offended that Timothy was not circumcised, even though his mother was Jewish, that they would not have listened to the message. Paul felt that he could have Timothy circumcised as a discretionary matter to remove an offense to hearing the gospel, even though the church leaders in Jerusalem had decided that Gentile believers did not have to be circumcised.
|
||
ACT 16 1 m5tb figs-synecdoche κατήντησεν & καὶ 1 Luke says **he**, meaning Paul, to refer both to Paul and to Silas, who was traveling with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas also came down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 16 1 rhut figs-idiom κατήντησεν & καὶ 1 Luke says that Paul **came down** to Derbe and Lystra because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Paul likely travel by sea from Syria to Cilicia, and Luke is saying that he then also went to Derbe and to Lystra. Alternate translation: “he also traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 16 1 km5q figs-go κατήντησεν & καὶ 1 Paul also came down If you retain the idiom, it may be more natural in your language to say “went” rather than **came**. Alternate translation: “he also went down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
|
||
ACT 16 1 u3vr figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 behold Luke is using the term **behold** to focus readers’ attention on the new character he is about to introduce. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 16 1 f49m writing-participants μαθητής τις ἦν ἐκεῖ ὀνόματι Τιμόθεος, υἱὸς γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς, πατρὸς δὲ Ἕλληνος 1 Luke is using the phrase **a certain disciple** to introduce **Timothy** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a disciple there named Timothy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 16 1 mc9i figs-explicit ἐκεῖ 1 By **there**, Luke means the city of Lystra. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “in Lystra” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 16 1 wxl8 figs-explicit γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς 1 a believing Jewish woman By **believing**, Luke means believing in Jesus. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “a Jewish woman who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 16 1 vh73 figs-idiom πατρὸς δὲ Ἕλληνος 1 Luke is describing Timothy’s father in an idiomatic way. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular kind of person. Alternate translation: “but whose father was Greek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 16 2 t1lu figs-activepassive ὃς ἐμαρτυρεῖτο ὑπὸ τῶν ἐν Λύστροις καὶ Ἰκονίῳ ἀδελφῶν. 1 He was well spoken of by the brothers If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The brothers in Lystra and Iconium spoke well of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 2 rez2 figs-metaphor ὑπὸ τῶν & ἀδελφῶν 1 by the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 16 3 p6z8 figs-explicit περιέτεμεν αὐτὸν 1 he circumcised him It is possible that Paul himself **circumcised** Timothy, but it is more likely that he had someone else circumcise him.You can include that information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “he had him circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 16 3 bdd6 writing-pronouns τοῦτον 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this one** refers to Timothy. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Timothy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 16 3 za93 figs-explicit διὰ τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς ὄντας ἐν τοῖς τόποις ἐκείνοις 1 because of the Jews who were in those places By **those places**, Luke means the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “in the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 16 3 hk2l figs-explicit ᾔδεισαν γὰρ ἅπαντες, ὅτι Ἕλλην ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ ὑπῆρχεν 1 for they all knew that his father was a Greek Luke assumes that his readers will know that **Greek** men did not have their sons circumcised, and so the Jews would have known that Timothy had not been circumcised. As a result, they would have rejected Paul and Timothy before hearing their message about Christ. See the discussion of this in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “for they all knew that his father was a Greek and that he therefore had not been circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 16 3 pybf figs-hyperbole ᾔδεισαν & ἅπαντες 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “they knew very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 16 4 n46i writing-pronouns διεπορεύοντο & παρεδίδοσαν αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **they** refers to Paul, Silas, and Timothy, and the pronoun **them** refers to the believers in the cities they were visiting. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul, Silas, and Timothy were going … they were delivering to the believers in those cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 16 4 bu6r figs-ellipsis αὐτοῖς φυλάσσειν 1 for them to keep Luke is writing in a compact way. You can explain his meaning more fully if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to the believers the decrees that had been decided by the apostles and elders in Jerusalem, and they were instructing the believers to keep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 16 4 gpi3 figs-activepassive τὰ κεκριμένα ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων καὶ πρεσβυτέρων τῶν ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις 1 that had been decided by the apostles and elders who were in Jerusalem If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the apostles and elders in Jerusalem had decided” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 5 q8v9 figs-activepassive αἱ & ἐκκλησίαι ἐστερεοῦντο τῇ πίστει 1 the churches were being strengthened in the faith and were increasing in number each day If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Paul, Silas, and Timothy. Alternate translation: “Paul, Silas, and Timothy were strengthening the churches in the faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 6 dhmn grammar-connect-logic-result διῆλθον & τὴν Φρυγίαν καὶ Γαλατικὴν χώραν, κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος λαλῆσαι τὸν λόγον ἐν τῇ Ἀσίᾳ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “having been forbidden by the Holy Spirit to speak the word in Asia, they went through Phrygia and the Galatian region” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 16 6 g97e translate-names τὴν Φρυγίαν & Γαλατικὴν χώραν & τῇ Ἀσίᾳ 1 Phrygia The word **Phrygia** is the name of a region in northwestern Asia Minor. See how you translated this name in [2:10](../02/10.md). The word **Galatian** describes the region of Galatia in central Asia Minor. The word **Asia** is the name of a Roman province in western Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 16 6 qk0k figs-infostructure τὴν Φρυγίαν καὶ Γαλατικὴν χώραν 1 Paul, Silas, and Timothy actually had to go through Galatia in order to reach Phrygia, so it might be more natural to put the information about Galatia first. Alternate translation: “the Galatian region and Phrygia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 16 6 ue3k figs-activepassive κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 having been forbidden by the Holy Spirit If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “because the Holy Spirit had forbidden them” or “because the Holy Spirit did not permit them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 6 d56g figs-extrainfo κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 Since Luke explains shortly after this that the Holy Spirit actually wanted Paul, Silas, and Timothy to share the good news about Jesus in two other regions, you do not need to explain here why the Holy Spirit forbade them to share the good news at this time in the province of Asia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
|
||
ACT 16 6 h4u4 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 16 7 b1xq translate-names Μυσίαν & Βιθυνίαν 1 Mysia … Bithynia The words **Mysia** and **Bithynia** are the names of two more regions in Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 16 7 b539 figs-explicit τὸ Πνεῦμα Ἰησοῦ 1 the Spirit of Jesus Luke assumes that his readers will know that by **the Spirit of Jesus**, he means the Holy Spirit. You can use that name instead if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 16 8 s6l1 figs-idiom κατέβησαν 1 they came down to the city of Troas Luke says that Paul, Silas, and Timothy **came down** to Troas because that city is lower in elevation than Mysia. Alternate translation: “they traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 16 8 xq6n figs-go κατέβησαν 1 they came down In a context such as this, if you retain the idiom, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “they went down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
|
||
ACT 16 9 cm2u figs-idiom διαβὰς 1 Coming over into Macedonia The man in the vision uses the phrase **coming over** because **Macedonia** is across the sea from Troas. Alternate translation: “across the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 16 9 tzxh figs-idiom ἀνὴρ Μακεδών τις 1 Luke is describing this man in an idiomatic way. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular kind of person. Alternate translation: “A certain man of Macedonia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 16 10 q0c7 writing-pronouns εἶδεν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul had seen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 16 10 fg5h figs-explicit ἐζητήσαμεν & προσκέκληται ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς 1 we sought to go out to Macedonia, reasoning together that God had called us to proclaim the gospel to them Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he says **we** and **us** because he joined Paul and his other companions at this point in the story. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand what is happening. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 16 10 e884 figs-exclusive ἐζητήσαμεν & προσκέκληται ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς 1 Luke is using the pronouns **we** and **us** to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 16 10 iu0e writing-pronouns αὐτούς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the people of Macedonia. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “to the people of Macedonia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 16 11 q2pr translate-names Σαμοθρᾴκην & Νέαν Πόλιν 1 Samothrace … Neapolis The word **Samothrace** is the name of an island, and the word **Neapolis** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 16 11 ojte figs-ellipsis τῇ δὲ ἐπιούσῃ εἰς Νέαν Πόλιν 1 Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and the next day we sailed to Neapolis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 16 12 c8ox figs-ellipsis κἀκεῖθεν εἰς Φιλίππους 1 Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and from there we traveled overland to Philippi” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 16 12 thk7 figs-explicit κολωνία 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that by **colony** he means a Roman colony. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Philippi is a Roman colony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 16 12 tl9f figs-explicit κολωνία 1 a colony In the Roman empire, a **colony** was a city outside of Italy where many people who came from Rome lived. The people there had the same rights and freedoms as people who lived in cities in Italy. They could govern themselves and they did not have to pay taxes. This information will become important later in the story. Alternate translation: “a Roman colony, where Roman citizens had special rights” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 16 14 n952 writing-participants τις γυνὴ ὀνόματι Λυδία & ἤκουεν 1 a certain woman named Lydia Luke is using the phrase **a certain woman** to introduce **Lydia** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a woman named Lydia … who was listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 16 14 se6e translate-names Λυδία 1 The word **Lydia** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 16 14 qj86 figs-metonymy πορφυρόπωλις 1 a seller of purple Luke is using the color of **purple** cloth to mean the cloth itself by association. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a seller of purple cloth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 16 14 c6n8 translate-names Θυατείρων 1 of Thyatira The word **Thyatira** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 16 14 cyk3 figs-idiom σεβομένη τὸν Θεόν 1 worshiping God Here the expression **worshiping God** means the same thing as the expression “fearing God,” which Jews in the time of the New Testament used to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel and attended the synagogue. See how you translated “fearing God” in [10:2](../10/02.md). Alternate translation: “a Gentile who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 16 14 rd4r figs-metaphor ἧς ὁ Κύριος διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν 1 of whom the Lord opened the heart to pay attention to Luke is speaking as if the Lord physically **opened** Lydia’s heart to receive the message that Paul was sharing. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord made disposed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 16 14 s9ju figs-metonymy ἧς ὁ Κύριος διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν 1 opened the heart Here, the **heart** represents a person’s will and disposition. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord made disposed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 16 14 a74y figs-activepassive τοῖς λαλουμένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου 1 what was being said by Paul If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 15 f38e figs-explicit ὡς & ἐβαπτίσθη 1 The implication is that Lydia believed in Jesus and then was baptized. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “when she believed in Jesus and was baptized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 16 15 g7e9 figs-activepassive ὡς δὲ ἐβαπτίσθη 1 And when she was baptized, and her household If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is likely from the context that it was Paul. Alternate translation: “when Paul baptized her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 15 lv50 figs-ellipsis καὶ ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς 1 Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and her household was also baptized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 16 15 s799 figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς 1 her household Here, **her household** refers to all the people who lived in Lydia’s house. Alternate translation: “the members of her household” or “her family and household servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 16 15 igcw figs-yousingular κεκρίκατέ 1 The word **you** is plural here. Lydia is addressing Paul and his companions. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
|
||
ACT 16 15 g8ul writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Lydia is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 16 15 xnkk figs-imperative εἰσελθόντες εἰς τὸν οἶκόν μου, μένετε 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please come to my house and stay with me as my guests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
|
||
ACT 16 15 hkh3 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 Luke is using the pronoun **us** to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 16 16 ufy4 writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke is using this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 16 16 y1gc writing-participants παιδίσκην τινὰ ἔχουσαν πνεῦμα Πύθωνα, ὑπαντῆσαι ἡμῖν 1 a certain young female slave Luke is using the phrase **a certain young female slave** to introduce this woman as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a certain young female slave who had a Python spirit and who met us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 16 16 ymt9 figs-metonymy πνεῦμα Πύθωνα 1 a spirit of divination Luke is describing the **spirit** that enabled this woman to tell fortunes by association with the Pythian serpent that the ancient Greeks believed to have guarded the oracle at Delphi. This was not an actual god named Python; it was a demonic spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a spirit of divination” or “a demonic spirit that enabled her to tell fortunes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 16 16 h2c5 translate-names Πύθωνα 1 The word **Python** is the name of a pagan god. However, Luke is using the name here by association to mean a demonic spirit of divination. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 16 17 tni9 figs-metaphor ὁδὸν σωτηρίας 1 the way of salvation This woman is speaking as if **salvation** were a **way** or path that people walked on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “how you can receive salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 16 17 gsbj figs-abstractnouns ὁδὸν σωτηρίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation, as in UST: “how God can save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 16 18 lj79 figs-activepassive διαπονηθεὶς δὲ Παῦλος, καὶ ἐπιστρέψας & εἶπεν 1 But Paul, being greatly annoyed and turning If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “she greatly annoyed Paul, so he turned and said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 18 qi1k figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in the name of Jesus Christ Here the **name** of Jesus represents his authority. Alternate translation: “by the authority of Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 16 18 u4z8 figs-idiom ἐξῆλθεν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 it came out that same hour In the ancient world, an **hour** was the shortest time span that people envisioned. In this context, the term does not mean a literal hour of 60 minutes; it means the shortest time imaginable. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it came out that instant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 16 19 r1a1 figs-explicit ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς ἐργασίας αὐτῶν 1 when her masters saw that their hope of profit was gone The implication is that the **masters** could no longer **profit** from the woman because she could no longer tell fortunes. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “their hope of profit had gone because their young female slave could no longer tell fortunes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 16 19 bws7 translate-unknown εἰς τὴν ἀγορὰν 1 into the marketplace The **marketplace** was a public area for business where the buying and selling of goods and services took place. If you have a term in your language for such an area, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “into the public square” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 16 19 hf82 figs-explicit ἐπὶ τοὺς ἄρχοντας 1 before the authorities The implication is that the masters of the young female slave brought Paul and Silas **to the rulers** in order to charge them with a crime and have them punished. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to the rulers so that they would judge and punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 16 20 wn77 figs-metonymy ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν 1 The masters of the slave girl are referring to the people of the city by association with the city itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of our city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 16 20 dkz2 figs-exclusive οὗτοι οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐκταράσσουσιν ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν 1 These men are stirring up our city The masters of the slave girl are using the pronoun **our** to refer to themselves and to their listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 16 21 gna6 figs-doublet παραδέχεσθαι οὐδὲ ποιεῖν 1 to accept nor to practice The terms **accept** and **practice** mean similar things. The crowd in Philippi is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “practice at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 16 22 f03y figs-metaphor συνεπέστη ὁ ὄχλος 1 Luke is speaking as if the crowd in Philippi literally **rose up** against Paul and Silas. He means that the people in the crowd became hostile to them and began shouting their own accusations against them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the crowd became hostile and shouted further accusations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 16 22 r1gr writing-pronouns αὐτῶν & αὐτῶν & ἐκέλευον 1 The pronouns **them** and **their** refer to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas … their … commanded Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 16 22 at6i figs-activepassive ἐκέλευον ῥαβδίζειν 1 commanding them to be beaten with rods If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanded soldiers to beat them with rods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 23 dsr3 figs-idiom πολλάς & ἐπιθέντες αὐτοῖς πληγὰς 1 when they had laid many blows upon them This is an idiomatic expression. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having hit them many times with the rods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 16 23 la4h figs-metaphor ἔβαλον εἰς φυλακήν 1 Luke is speaking when he says that the rulers **threw them into prison**. They did not pick up Paul and Silas and heave them through the air. Alternate translation: “they confined Paul and Silas in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 16 24 jug6 translate-unknown ξύλον 1 stocks The word **stocks** describes a wooden frame with holes to hold a person’s feet and prevent them from moving. UST models a good way of describing **stocks** for readers who are not familiar with them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 16 24 z12w figs-metaphor ἔβαλεν αὐτοὺς εἰς τὴν ἐσωτέραν φυλακὴν 1 Luke is speaking when he says that the jailer **threw them into the inner prison**. He did not pick up Paul and Silas and heave them through the air. Alternate translation: “confined Paul and Silas to the inner prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 16 26 q7z1 figs-activepassive σεισμὸς ἐγένετο μέγας, ὥστε σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου 1 a great earthquake happened, so that the foundations of the prison were shaken If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a severe earthquake shook the foundations of the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 26 m4ye figs-synecdoche σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου 1 the foundations of the prison Luke is using one part of the prison, its **foundations**, to refer to the entire prison in the state of being **shaken**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a shaking that began in the prison’s foundations shook the entire prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 16 26 s6mu figs-activepassive ἠνεῴχθησαν & αἱ θύραι πᾶσαι 1 all the doors were opened If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all the doors opened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 26 p393 figs-activepassive πάντων τὰ δεσμὰ ἀνέθη 1 the chains of everyone were unfastened If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the chains of all came loose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 26 b540 figs-explicit πάντων 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that by **all** he means all the prisoners. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “all the prisoners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 16 27 cwt5 figs-explicit ἤμελλεν ἑαυτὸν ἀναιρεῖν, νομίζων ἐκπεφευγέναι τοὺς δεσμίους 1 he was about to kill himself Luke assumes that his readers will know that death was the punishment in the Roman Empire for allowing prisoners to escape. The jailer thought his prisoners had escaped, and he preferred to commit suicide rather than face trial and execution. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “he was about to kill himself, because he thought that his prisoners had escaped and he knew that he would be tried and executed for allowing them to escape” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 16 27 viov figs-activepassive ἀνεῳγμένας τὰς θύρας τῆς φυλακῆς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the prison doors were open” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 28 ljy6 figs-exclusive ἐσμεν 1 By **we**, Paul means himself and the other prisoners but not the jailer, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 16 28 s2s2 figs-imperative μηδὲν πράξῃς σεαυτῷ κακόν 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates an urgent request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates such a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please do not hurt yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
|
||
ACT 16 29 pe66 figs-explicit αἰτήσας & φῶτα 1 having called for lights Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the jailer **called for lights** because it was midnight and dark, and he wanted to be sure that his prisoners were still in the prison. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 16 29 bb6t translate-symaction προσέπεσεν τῷ Παύλῳ καὶ Σιλᾷ 1 fell down before Paul and Silas Be sure that it is clear in your translation that the jailer did not fall down accidentally. He knelt down at the feet of Paul and Silas as a gesture to honor them. Alternate translation: “he knelt down respectfully in front of Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 16 30 u132 figs-activepassive ἵνα σωθῶ 1 what must I do in order to be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order for God to save me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 31 m801 writing-pronouns οἱ 1 The pronoun **they** refers to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 16 31 f104 figs-imperative πίστευσον ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν καὶ σωθήσῃ 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates an encouraging invitation rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates such an invitation. Alternate translation: “If you believe in the Lord Jesus, you will be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
|
||
ACT 16 31 br4k figs-activepassive σωθήσῃ 1 you will be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 31 w8ed figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκός σου 1 your household Here, **your household** refers to all the people who lived in the jailer’s house. Alternate translation: “all the members of your household” or “your family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 16 32 pq5w figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 they spoke the word of the Lord to him Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul and Silas had come to Philippi to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 16 32 ftg1 writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 16 33 gied figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ τῆς νυκτὸς 1 Luke is using the term **hour** to mean a particular time. Alternate translation: “at that time in the night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 16 33 r3la figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθη 1 he was baptized immediately—he and all those who were his If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was Paul and Silas who baptized the jailer and his family. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas baptized him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 16 34 v5fy figs-metonymy παρέθηκεν τράπεζαν 1 Luke is referring to a meal by association with the way, in this culture, a meal was served at a **table**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he set a meal before them” or “he served them a meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 16 35 lb4z writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a significant development in this story. Here Luke tells the last part of the story that started in [16:16](../16/16.md). Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new development in a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 16 36 qrw0 figs-metonymy τοὺς λόγους 1 Luke is using the term **words** to mean the message that the officers whom the magistrates sent communicated by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 16 36 f76u figs-imperative ἐξελθόντες, πορεύεσθε ἐν εἰρήνῃ 1 The word **go** is an imperative, but it communicates permission rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates permission. Alternate translation: “you may come out of the jail and go in peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
|
||
ACT 16 36 noc2 figs-abstractnouns πορεύεσθε ἐν εἰρήνῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “go peacefully” or “go without being concerned that the authorities will trouble you any further” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 16 37 b4jm figs-explicit πρὸς αὐτούς 1 said to them The implication is that the officers whom the magistrates sent had come into the prison with the jailer. That is why Luke says **them** and not just **him**, meaning the jailer. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to the officers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 16 37 xmqz writing-pronouns αὐτούς & ἔβαλαν & ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν & ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν 1 The first instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the officers whom the magistrates sent to the prison, and the pronoun **they** and the second instance of the pronoun **them** refer to the magistrates. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the officers … the magistrates threw us … they cast us out … let the magistrates lead us out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 16 37 v4yk figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς & ἔβαλαν & ἡμᾶς & ἡμᾶς 1 By **us**, Paul means himself and Silas but not the officers to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 16 37 qq1u figs-rquestion δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ, ἀκατακρίτους ἀνθρώπους Ῥωμαίους ὑπάρχοντας, ἔβαλαν εἰς φυλακήν καὶ νῦν λάθρᾳ ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν? 1 they cast us out secretly? No indeed! Paul is using the question form to protest that what the magistrates want to do is not just or fair. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “The magistrates beat us in public without trial, men being Romans, and then they threw us into prison; I will not allow them, after doing that, to cast us out secretly!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 16 37 b7cc figs-metonymy δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ 1 They have beaten us in public The magistrates did not do this themselves. They ordered soldiers to do it. Paul is speaking of the magistrates, some of the people who were involved in this action, to mean everyone who was involved. Alternate translation: “having ordered their soldiers to beat us in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 16 37 b5a3 figs-ellipsis οὔ γάρ 1 Paul is using an expression that leaves out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “No, for they will not do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 16 37 jr2j figs-rpronouns ἐλθόντες αὐτοὶ, ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν 1 Instead, coming themselves Paul is using the reflexive pronoun **themselves** for emphasis. It may be more natural in your language to express this emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “let them come in person and lead us out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
|
||
ACT 16 37 sw3a figs-imperative3p ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may they lead us out” or “they should lead us out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
|
||
ACT 16 37 x82d figs-extrainfo ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν 1 It is likely that Paul wanted the magistrates to bring him and Silas out of prison, which would effectively be an apology for mistreatment, so that the believers in Philippi would have the protection of the law even after Paul and his companions left the city. However, this is more a matter of interpretation than of implied information, so it would probably be best not to put an explanation of it in your translation. You can leave it to teachers and preachers of the Bible to explain. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
|
||
ACT 16 38 ldfi figs-metonymy τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα 1 Luke is using the term **words** to mean what Paul said to the officers by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what Paul had said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 16 38 ym2u figs-explicit ἐφοβήθησαν & ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν 1 they were terrified when they heard that they are Romans Roman citizenship provided freedom from torture and the right to a fair trial. So the implication is that the magistrates were **terrified** that more important Roman authorities might learn how they had mistreated Paul and Silas. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they were terrified when they heard that they were Roman citizens, because as magistrates they were supposed to make sure that citizens were not tortured and received fair trials, and they were concerned that more important authorities would punish them for the way they had treated Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 16 38 lqs5 figs-quotations ἐφοβήθησαν & ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “they were terrified when they heard, ‘They are Romans!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 16 39 q59h writing-pronouns παρεκάλεσαν αὐτούς & ἐξαγαγόντες, ἠρώτων 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the magistrates, and the pronoun **them** refers to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the magistrates entreated Paul and Silas … bringing them out, the magistrates were asking Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 16 39 a7yq figs-explicit παρεκάλεσαν αὐτούς 1 Luke means implicitly that the magistrates **entreated** or begged Paul and Silas not to make any protest about how they had been treated. In effect, they apologized to them and asked them to overlook the offense. Alternate translation: “they apologized to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 16 40 y14i writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Luke uses the word **So** to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of the imprisonment of Paul and Silas. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||
ACT 16 40 ylk9 figs-metonymy τὴν Λυδίαν 1 the house of Lydia Luke is referring to the house of **Lydia** by association with the name of the woman who lived there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they came to the house of Lydia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 16 40 t1pf figs-go εἰσῆλθον 1 they came to the house of Lydia In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
|
||
ACT 16 40 ntc9 figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 when they had seen the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 16 40 qs0x figs-synecdoche καὶ ἐξῆλθαν 1 Luke says that **they … went out**, meaning Paul and Silas, to refer to those two men and to Timothy, who was still traveling with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and then Paul and Silas and Timothy left Philippi” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 16 40 gld6 figs-explicit καὶ ἐξῆλθαν 1 Since Luke says **they … went out**, not “we went out,” the implication is that Luke remained in Philippi for a time, likely to strengthen and encourage the new believers there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 17 intro gj4c 0 # Acts 17 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>- Verses 1–9 describe how Paul, Silas, and Timothy proclaimed the gospel in the city of Thessalonica.<br>- Verses 10–14 describe how Paul, Silas, and Timothy proclaimed the gospel in the city of Berea.<br>Verses 15–34 describe how Paul proclaimed the gospel in the city of Athens.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### The religion of Athens<br><br>Paul said that the people in the city of Athens were “religious,” but this did not mean that they worshiped the true God. They worshiped many different false gods. In the past they had conquered other peoples, and they had begun to worship the gods of the peoples they had conquered. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])<br><br>As Paul spoke to the philosophers in Athens, he told the message of Christ for the first time to people who knew nothing of the Old Testament.
|
||
ACT 17 1 e4w5 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 17 1 kll1 translate-names τὴν Ἀμφίπολιν καὶ τὴν Ἀπολλωνίαν 1 Amphipolis and Apollonia The words **Amphipolis** and **Apollonia** are the names of coastal cities in the Roman province of Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 17 1 o19x figs-explicitinfo συναγωγὴ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 It might seem that the expression **a synagogue of the Jews** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “a synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
|
||
ACT 17 2 mkn6 writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς & αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** refers the Jews who attended the synagogue in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jews in the synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 17 3 lt8q figs-hendiadys διανοίγων καὶ παρατιθέμενος 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two expressions connected with **and**. The phrase **fully opening them** tells how Paul was **demonstrating** from the Scriptures that Jesus is the Messiah. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “by opening the Scriptures fully, demonstrating” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 17 3 ir9q figs-metaphor διανοίγων 1 He is fully opening Luke is speaking as if Paul had been literally **opening** the Scriptures **fully**, as by unrolling a scroll, so that the Jews in the synagogue could understand them. Luke means that Paul was explaining the Scriptures thoroughly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “explaining them thoroughly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 17 3 ipb2 figs-idiom ἀναστῆναι 1 to rise Luke is using the word **rise** to mean that Jesus came back to life again after he died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 17 3 b9qi figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Luke is using the adjective **dead** as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 17 4 es2u figs-activepassive τινες ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐπείσθησαν 1 some from them were persuaded If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews believed” or “some of the Jews understood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 17 4 t21z figs-idiom τῶν & σεβομένων Ἑλλήνων 1 of worshiping Greeks Here the expression **worshiping God** describes Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel and attended the synagogue. See how you translated the expression in [16:14](../16/14.md). Alternate translation: “Greeks who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 17 4 ye8v figs-litotes οὐκ ὀλίγαι 1 not a few of the leading women Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “many” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 17 5 clcz figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 17 5 ie1f translate-unknown τῶν ἀγοραίων 1 of the marketplace The **marketplace** was a public area for business where the buying and selling of goods and services took place. See how you translated this term in [16:20](../16/20.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 17 5 t3bc figs-metonymy τὴν πόλιν 1 they set the city in an uproar The word **city** represents the people of the city. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 17 5 w94p figs-explicit Ἰάσονος 1 Luke does not tell us anything further about this **Jason**, but the implication is that the Jewish leaders believed that Paul and Silas were staying in his home. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of Jason, where they believed Paul and Silas were staying,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 17 5 ks2l translate-names Ἰάσονος 1 of Jason The word **Jason** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 17 5 abcu writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 to lead them The pronoun **them** refers to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 17 6 i79p figs-metaphor τινας ἀδελφοὺς 1 certain brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “some other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 17 6 x90b figs-hyperbole οἱ τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες 1 The Jewish leaders are exaggerating the influence of Paul and Silas and their teaching. Alternate translation: “These men who have caused trouble wherever they have gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 17 8 ixmb writing-pronouns ἐτάραξαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the Jewish leaders in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 17 9 ya44 translate-unknown τὸ ἱκανὸν 1 after they had received a bond from Jason and the rest of them A **bond** was an amount of money that the city officials required Jason and the rest of the believers to pay as a guarantee of good behavior. The city officials would return the money if those men did not cause any further trouble. Your language and culture may have a term that you can use in your translation for this kind of monetary guarantee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 17 9 eq4y writing-pronouns ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the city officials, and the pronoun **them** refers to Jason and the other believers. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the city officials released them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 17 10 qy5c figs-metaphor οἱ & ἀδελφοὶ 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 17 10 m75m figs-explicitinfo τὴν συναγωγὴν τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 It might seem that the expression **the synagogue of the Jews** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “the synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
|
||
ACT 17 11 k2st writing-background δὲ 1 Now Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information about the Jews in Berea to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 17 11 alq1 writing-pronouns οὗτοι & τῶν ἐν Θεσσαλονίκῃ 1 Luke is using the demonstrative pronoun **these** to refer to the Jews in Berea and the demonstrative pronoun **those** to refer to the Jews in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jews in Berea … the Jews in Thessalonica” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 17 11 gu6s figs-metonymy εὐγενέστεροι 1 these were more open-minded than Luke is using the word **noble**, which literally describes a person of a certain lineage, to mean the gracious behavior that should characterize people of that lineage. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “more gracious” or “more considerate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 17 11 hle3 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 received the word Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Paul was sharing by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 17 11 uh8a figs-hyperbole μετὰ πάσης προθυμίας 1 with all readiness Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “with great readiness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 17 11 qrnm figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that Paul was showing the Bereans from the Scriptures that Jesus was the Messiah, just as Paul did for the Thessalonians. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was teaching about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 17 11 g8an figs-ellipsis εἰ ἔχοι ταῦτα οὕτως 1 these things were so Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “to find out whether these things might be so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 17 12 abcv figs-litotes ἀνδρῶν οὐκ ὀλίγοι 1 not a few men Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “many men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 17 13 ybos figs-activepassive καὶ & κατηγγέλη ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul was also proclaiming the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 17 13 dijk figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul was sharing by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 17 13 wjq3 figs-doublet σαλεύοντες καὶ ταράσσοντες τοὺς ὄχλους 1 troubled the crowds The terms **exciting** and **troubling** mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “greatly upsetting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 17 14 ael8 figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 17 14 zw1c figs-explicitinfo ἕως ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν 1 to go as far as to the sea It might seem that the expression **as far as to the sea** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “to the seacoast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
|
||
ACT 17 15 gs1p figs-quotations πρὸς τὸν Σιλᾶν καὶ τὸν Τιμόθεον, ἵνα ὡς τάχιστα ἔλθωσιν πρὸς αὐτὸν, ἐξῄεσαν 1 after receiving a command to Silas and Timothy It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “to Silas and Timothy, ‘Come to me as quickly as possible!’ they departed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 17 16 y9cr writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 17 16 wk63 writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to Silas and Timothy. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Silas and Timothy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 17 16 u2th grammar-connect-logic-result παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ, θεωροῦντος κατείδωλον οὖσαν τὴν πόλιν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “when he saw that the city was full of idols, his spirit was provoked within him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 17 16 s011 figs-activepassive παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this provoked his spirit within him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 17 16 we78 figs-metonymy παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 his spirit was being provoked within him, seeing the city being full of idols Here the **spirit** represents a person’s feelings and sensitivities, particularly of a spiritual nature. Alternate translation: “this offended his spiritual sensitivities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 17 17 jkj8 figs-idiom τοῖς σεβομένοις 1 those who were worshiping See how you translated the similar expression in [16:14](../16/14.md). Alternate translation: “the Greeks who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 17 17 ec14 translate-unknown ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ 1 in the marketplace See how you translated the similar expression in [16:19](../16/19.md). Alternate translation: “in the public square” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 17 18 ru6a writing-pronouns αὐτῷ & δοκεῖ & εὐηγγελίζετο 1 The pronouns **him**, **He**, and **he** all refer to Paul.It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “with Paul … He seems … Paul was proclaiming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 17 18 l7le translate-names τῶν Ἐπικουρίων 1 of the Epicurean and Stoic philosophers The word **Epicurean** is the name of a certain kind of philosopher. Epicureans believed that all things were formed by chance and that the gods were too busy being happy to be bothered with governing the universe. They rejected the resurrection and wanted only simple pleasures. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 17 18 f976 translate-names Στοϊκῶν 1 Stoic philosophers The word **Stoic** is the name of another kind of philosopher. Stoics believed that freedom comes from resigning oneself to fate. They rejected a personal, loving God and the resurrection. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 17 18 g4bv figs-idiom ὁ σπερμολόγος 1 What is this babbler wanting to say? These Athenian philosophers are using a common expression in their culture that refers negatively to a person who only knows little bits of information. The expression depicts a person picking up words or ideas the way a bird picks up seeds. The philosophers are saying that Paul has only a few bits of information that are not worth listening to. Alternate translation: “uneducated person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 17 18 sx9t figs-explicit ξένων δαιμονίων 1 of foreign gods Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the Athenian philosphers misunderstood Paul and thought that he was introducing two new **gods** that the Greeks and Romans had not known about before, Jesus and Anastasis (the Greek word for resurrection). You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of two new gods, Jesus and Anastasis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 17 19 unc8 translate-transliterate Ἄρειον Πάγον 1 Areopagus The word **Areopagus** means “Hill of Ares” in Greek. It was named after the pagan god whose name was Ares in Greek and Mars in Latin. Luke does not explain the meaning of this word, since his readers already understand Greek. ULT spells this name the way it sounds in English. In your translation, you could spell it the way it sounds in your language. You could also translate the meaning of the word and use the name “Mars Hill,” as UST does. Or you could spell the word the way it sounds and then explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “Mars Hill” or “the Areopagus, that is, Mars Hill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
|
||
ACT 17 19 b56g figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον 1 to the Areopagus Luke most likely means that the philosophers from the marketplace brought Paul to meet the main group of philosophers on the Areopagus, not that they just brought Paul to the hill itself. Luke would be using the word **Areopagus** by association to mean the philosophers who gathered there. Alternate translation: “to the philosophers who met on the Areopagus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 17 19 aciu figs-rquestion δυνάμεθα γνῶναι τίς ἡ καινὴ αὕτη, ἡ ὑπὸ σοῦ λαλουμένη, διδαχή? 1 This is not actually a rhetorical question, since the philosophers really do want to know whether Paul is willing to explain himself more fully to the group at the Areopagus. However, if in your language it might seem to be a rhetorical question, you could translate it as a statement instead. Alternate translation: “We would like to know what this new teaching is that is being spoken by you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 17 19 g9gb figs-exclusive δυνάμεθα 1 By **we**, the philosophers mean themselves but not Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 17 19 n250 figs-activepassive ἡ ὑπὸ σοῦ λαλουμένη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that you are speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 17 20 lay8 figs-metaphor ξενίζοντα & τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν 1 For you are bringing some strange things to our ears The philosophers are speaking of Paul’s teachings about Jesus and the resurrection as if they were objects that one person could bring to another person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you are saying some startling things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 17 20 us7g figs-metonymy ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν 1 The philosophers are referring to hearing by association with the **ears**, which people use to hear. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we are hearing you say some startling things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 17 20 fs5g figs-exclusive ἡμῶν & βουλόμεθα 1 By **our** and **we**, the philosophers mean themselves but not Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 17 20 fe4p figs-idiom τίνα θέλει ταῦτα εἶναι 1 The philosophers are using an idiom. Your language may have a similar idiom that you could use in your translation. Or, if it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what these things mean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 17 21 ujgi writing-background δὲ 1 Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce background information about the people of Athens that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 17 21 dn1t figs-hyperbole Ἀθηναῖοι & πάντες καὶ οἱ ἐπιδημοῦντες ξένοι & ηὐκαίρουν 1 And all the Athenians and the foreigners living there Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Athenians and the sojourning foreigners loved to devote their leisure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 17 21 d8yb translate-names Ἀθηναῖοι 1 the Athenians The word ** Athenians** is the name for people who live in or come from the city of Athens. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 17 21 ij4e figs-hyperbole εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον ηὐκαίρουν 1 spent their time in nothing other than Here, Luke says **nothing other** as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “made it their favorite leisure activity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 17 21 wr1r figs-explicit τι καινότερον 1 to tell something or to listen to something new This could mean: (1) that the implication is that the Athenians were looking for something **newer** than the last new thing they had said or heard. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “something newer than the last new thing they had said or heard” (2) that Luke may be using the comparative form **newer** with simple positive meaning. Alternate translation: “something new” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 17 22 k5dy figs-activepassive σταθεὶς δὲ Παῦλος ἐν μέσῳ τοῦ Ἀρείου Πάγου ἔφη 1 If your language does not use the passive form **having been stood**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Once the philosophers had stood Paul in the middle of the Areopagus, he was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 17 22 zq3y figs-metonymy ἐν μέσῳ τοῦ Ἀρείου Πάγου 1 As in [17:19](../17/19.md), Luke uses the word **Areopagus** by association to mean the philosophers who gathered there. He does not mean that the philosophers placed Paul in the middle of the hill known as the Areopagus. Alternate translation: “in the middle of the group of philosophers who met on the Areopagus” or “in the middle of the group of philosophers who met on Mars Hill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 17 22 h5et figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἀθηναῖοι 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You Athenians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 17 22 kcag δεισιδαιμονεστέρους 1 Paul is using the comparative form **more religious** for emphasis. Your language may use comparative forms in the same way. If not, you could convey the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “very religious”
|
||
ACT 17 22 ja1k figs-hyperbole κατὰ πάντα 1 very religious in every way Paul says **everything** here as a generalization for emphasis. He is referring to the Athenians’ public display of honoring the gods through prayers, building altars, and offering sacrifices. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in many different ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 17 23 cem7 figs-quotesinquotes βωμὸν ἐν ᾧ ἐπεγέγραπτο, ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ 1 To an Unknown God While it would be preferable to present this as a direct quotation (see next note), you could translate this as an indirect quotation so that there is not one direct quotation within another. Alternate translation: “an altar whose inscription dedicated it to an unknown god” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 17 23 nmwv figs-quotemarks βωμὸν ἐν ᾧ ἐπεγέγραπτο, ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ 1 Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this as a direct quotation if possible, since it is the inscription on the altar that Paul is describing. You may be able to enclose this quotation in second-level quotation marks or use some other punctuation or convention that is available in your language to indicate a second-level quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 17 23 t3mu figs-activepassive ἐν ᾧ ἐπεγέγραπτο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “on which someone had inscribed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 17 24 f2mz figs-merism οὐρανοῦ καὶ γῆς 1 of heaven and earth Paul is referring to all of creation by naming its two major components. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of everything that exists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||
ACT 17 24 ju4h figs-synecdoche χειροποιήτοις ναοῖς 1 built with hands Paul is using one part of a person, the **hand**, to represent all of a person in the act of building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “temples that humans have made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 17 25 e3dg figs-activepassive ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων θεραπεύεται 1 Neither is he served by hands of men If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “do hands of men care for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 17 25 cqri προσδεόμενός τινος 1 Alternate translation: “as if he needed anything”
|
||
ACT 17 25 yq68 figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων 1 by hands of men Paul is using one part of a person, the **hands**, to represent all of a person in the act of supposedly caring for God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 17 25 sj89 figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς διδοὺς 1 himself giving Paul is using the word **himself** for emphasis. Alternate translation: “because he himself gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
|
||
ACT 17 25 zv8x figs-doublet ζωὴν, καὶ πνοὴν 1 The terms **life** and **breath** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “existence itself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 17 25 sw8d figs-explicit πᾶσι 1 By **all**, Paul implicitly means “all people.” You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 17 26 p1e4 figs-explicit ἑνὸς 1 one man By **one**, Paul implicitly means “one man.” He means Adam, the first person God created. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “one man” or “Adam” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 17 26 cnbu figs-gendernotations πᾶν ἔθνος ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “every nation of humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 17 27 s2xs figs-explicit ζητεῖν τὸν Θεὸν 1 Paul means implicitly that God did the things he described in the previous verse, giving the nations of humanity particular times to live in particular places, so that they would **seek** him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “God did this so that people would seek him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 17 27 jae5 figs-metaphor ψηλαφήσειαν αὐτὸν καὶ εὕροιεν 1 to seek God and perhaps they might feel around for him and find him Paul is speaking as if people could **feel around for** God and **find him** that way. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might sincerely try to know God and come to know him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 17 27 p8hk figs-litotes οὐ μακρὰν ἀπὸ 1 Yet he is not far from each one of us Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “close to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 17 27 onm4 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Paul is using the pronoun **us** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 17 28 tkd3 writing-pronouns αὐτῷ & γένος 1 General Information: The pronouns **him** and **his** refer to God. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “in God … God’s offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 17 28 o4vy figs-exclusive ζῶμεν & ἐσμέν 1 Paul is using the pronoun **we** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 17 28 jxph figs-quotesinquotes ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν; ὡς καί τινες τῶν καθ’ ὑμᾶς ποιητῶν εἰρήκασιν, τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν. 1 Here Paul is quoting from the Greek philosopher-poet Epimenides and from the Greek poets Aratus and Cleanthes. While it would be preferable to present these two quotations as direct quotations (see next note), you could translate them as indirect quotations so that there are not direct quotations within a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “For some of your own poets have said that in him we live and are moved and are and that we too are his offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 17 28 rpaz figs-quotemarks ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν; ὡς καί τινες τῶν καθ’ ὑμᾶς ποιητῶν εἰρήκασιν, τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν 1 Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present these two quotations as direct quotations if possible, since that would show that Paul is quoting Greek poets as he speaks to the philosophers in Athens. You may be able to enclose these quotations within second-level quotation marks or use some other punctuation or convention that is available in your language to indicate second-level quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 17 28 ii2n figs-doublet ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν 1 The expressions **live** and **are moved** and **are** mean similar things. Epimenides is using the three terms together for poetic effect. It would be good to preserve that effect if possible, but it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the same idea with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “For he is the source of our entire existence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 17 28 cbd9 figs-activepassive ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν 1 For in him If your language does not use the passive form **are moved**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “For ‘he is the one in whom we live and who moves us and in whom we exist’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 17 28 lil5 figs-metaphor τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν. 1 Aratus and Cleanthes do not mean that people are literally God’s **offspring** or children. They are speaking and poetically. It would be good to preserve the poetic effect if possible, but it would be clearer for your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “For it is as if we too are his offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 17 29 k9ws figs-metaphor γένος & ὑπάρχοντες τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 are God’s offspring Paul is speaking as if people were literally God’s **offspring** or children. He means that God created people, and they are his creatures. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “being like God’s children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 17 29 czi9 figs-nominaladj τὸ θεῖον 1 the divine being Paul is using the adjective **Divine** as a noun to mean God, who is divine. ULT capitalizes the word to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 17 29 xfp9 figs-metonymy χρυσῷ, ἢ ἀργύρῳ, ἢ λίθῳ 1 Paul is referring to idols by association with the materials out of which people made idols. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to idols made of gold or silver or stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 17 29 q4q2 figs-possession χαράγματι τέχνης καὶ ἐνθυμήσεως ἀνθρώπου 1 images of the skill and imagination of man Paul is using the possessive form not to mean images that resemble human **skill** and **imagination** but to describe the qualities that people use to create **images** or idols. Alternate translation: “images that people create by using their skill and imagination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 17 29 gnk6 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπου 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “of humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 17 30 h8uy figs-possession χρόνους τῆς ἀγνοίας 1 times of ignorance Paul is using the possessive form here not to describe **times** that were themselves ignorant but **times** when people were characterized by spiritual **ignorance**. Paul is referring to the times before God fully revealed himself through Jesus Christ and before people truly knew how to obey God. Alternate translation: “the times when people were ignorant of the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 17 30 qim5 figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 all men Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 17 31 jt3a figs-metonymy τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 he is about to judge the world Here the term **world** refers to the people who live in the world. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 17 31 htp7 figs-abstractnouns ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ 1 in which he is about to judge the world in righteousness by the man whom he has appointed If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by his own righteous standards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 17 31 ebve figs-explicit ἐν ἀνδρὶ ᾧ ὥρισεν 1 By **the man**, Paul implicitly means Jesus. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “by Jesus, the man whom he has appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 17 31 l61p figs-abstractnouns πίστιν παρασχὼν πᾶσιν 1 He has provided signs If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **assurance**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “having given everyone reason to believe surely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 17 31 ulr4 figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 17 32 j44o figs-nominaladj νεκρῶν 1 Luke is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 17 32 tc8t figs-exclusive ἀκουσόμεθά 1 By **We**, these philosophers mean themselves but not Paul, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 17 32 txre figs-explicitinfo καὶ πάλιν 1 It might seem that the expression **also again** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “again” or “another time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
|
||
ACT 17 32 c4sm writing-endofstory 0 This is the end of the part of the story about Paul in Athens. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||
ACT 17 32 jlm5 ἀκούσαντες 1 when they heard of These are the people who were present at the Areopagus, listening to Paul.
|
||
ACT 17 32 sn6j οἱ μὲν ἐχλεύαζον 1 some mocked him These did not believe it was possible for someone to die and then return to life. Alternate translation: “some ridiculed Paul” or “some laughed at Paul”
|
||
ACT 17 34 nb26 writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Now Luke uses the word **But** to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of what Paul did in Athens. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||
ACT 17 34 nysg figs-gendernotations τινὲς & ἄνδρες 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women, as the mention of **Damaris** shows. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “certain people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 17 34 hlgu figs-infostructure κολληθέντες αὐτῷ, ἐπίστευσαν 1 The people Luke describes here **believed** before they were **joined** to Paul, so it might be more natural to put the information about them believing first. Alternate translation: “believed and were joined to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 17 34 vcx3 figs-activepassive κολληθέντες αὐτῷ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “joining him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 17 34 psh8 translate-names Διονύσιος ὁ Ἀρεοπαγίτης 1 Dionysius the Areopagite The word **Dionysius** is the name of a man. The word **Areopagite** is the name for someone who was a member of a council of rulers and judges that met on the Areopagus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 17 34 hsz3 translate-names Δάμαρις 1 Damaris The word **Damaris** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 18 intro rky6 0 # Acts 18 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>- Verses 1–17 describe how Paul proclaimed the gospel in the city of Corinth.<br>- Verses 18–23 describe how Paul returned to Antioch and then started out on another missionary journey.<br>- Verses 24–28 describe how a man named Apollos became an effective preacher of the gospel.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### The baptism of John<br><br>Some Jews who lived far away from Jerusalem and Judea had heard of John the Baptist and followed his teachings. They had not yet heard about Jesus. One of these Jews was Apollos. He followed John the Baptist, but he did not know that the Messiah had come. John had baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins, but that kind of baptism was different from Christian baptism. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
|
||
ACT 18 1 fky7 writing-newevent μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things Luke is using the phrase **After these things** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 18 1 abcw writing-pronouns ἦλθεν 1 having departed The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 18 2 d9zx figs-idiom καὶ εὑρών 1 And when he found The word **found** does not mean that Paul was intentionally searching for a certain man; he happened to meet him. Alternate translation: “And when Paul happened to meet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 18 2 hm16 writing-participants τινα Ἰουδαῖον 1 a certain Jew named Aquila Luke is using the phrase **a certain Jew** to introduce **Aquila** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “that there was a certain Jew there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 18 2 y97p translate-names Ποντικὸν 1 a native of Pontus The word **Pontian** was the name for someone who came from the province of Pontus on the southern coast of the Black Sea. See how you translated the name “Pontus” in [2:9](../02/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 18 2 q11b figs-infostructure προσφάτως ἐληλυθότα ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰταλίας, καὶ Πρίσκιλλαν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ, διὰ τὸ διατεταχέναι Κλαύδιον χωρίζεσθαι πάντας τοὺς Ἰουδαίους ἀπὸ τῆς Ῥώμης 1 It might be more natural to keep all of the information about Aquila leaving Italy together and mention afterwards that Paul also met his wife Priscilla. Alternate translation: “having recently come from Italy because Claudius had ordered all the Jews to depart from Rome, and Priscilla, his wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 18 2 n95f translate-names Κλαύδιον 1 Claudius had ordered The word **Claudius** is the name of the man who was the Roman emperor at this time. See how you translated his name in [11:28](../11/28.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 18 5 r56h 0 General Information: Silas and Timothy rejoin Paul.
|
||
ACT 18 5 btkg figs-idiom κατῆλθον 1 Luke says that Silas and Timothy **came down** to Corinth because that city is lower in elevation than Macedonia. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 18 5 rjl6 figs-activepassive συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul felt urgently that he needed to devote himself to the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 18 5 vwj1 figs-personification συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος 1 Luke speaks of **the word** as if it were a living thing that could constrain Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul felt urgently that he needed to devote himself to the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 18 5 bsgm figs-metonymy συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean preaching the message about Jesus by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul felt urgently that he needed to devote himself to preaching the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 18 6 ncx8 translate-symaction ἐκτιναξάμενος τὰ ἱμάτια 1 shaking out his garment This symbolic action was an expression of strong rejection in this culture. It showed that someone did not want even the dust of a place, in this case the synagogue, to remain on them. If there is a similar gesture in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. See what you did with the similar gesture in [13:51](../13/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 18 6 z12a figs-metonymy τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Your blood be upon your head Here, **blood** represents punishment, specifically for rejecting Jesus. Paul is telling the Jews that they are solely responsible for the divine judgment they will face for their stubbornness if they refuse to repent. Alternate translation: “You alone must bear the responsibility when God punishes you for rejecting Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 18 6 pacx figs-synecdoche τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Paul is using one part of a person, the **head**, to represent all of a person in the act of deciding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Your punishment is your responsibility” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 18 6 ezpo figs-yousingular τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 The word **your** is plural. Paul is speaking to all the Jews in the synagogue, so use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
|
||
ACT 18 6 vwpg τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Since Paul is speaking to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **head**. Alternate translation: “your heads”
|
||
ACT 18 6 aq99 figs-metaphor καθαρὸς ἐγώ 1 Paul is speaking as if he were physically **clean**. He means that he is satisfied in his conscience that he has fulfilled his duty to proclaim the gospel to these Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I have fulfilled my duty in proclaiming the gospel to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 18 7 v8xg figs-idiom τινὸς & σεβομένου τὸν Θεόν 1 who worships God See how you translated the similar expression in [16:14](../16/14.md). Alternate translation: “a Gentile man who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 18 7 vs6y translate-names Τιτίου Ἰούστου 1 Titius Justus The words **Titius Justus** are the names of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 18 8 lj2t translate-names Κρίσπος 1 Crispus The word **Crispus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 18 8 zc89 writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “in the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 18 8 uaq5 figs-metonymy ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ 1 all those in his house Here, **house** refers to an entire household living together. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his entire household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 18 8 t3np figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίζοντο 1 were being baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “were receiving baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 18 9 ws7p figs-explicit μὴ φοβοῦ 1 Jesus means implicitly that Paul should not **fear** what people might do to him if he continues proclaiming the gospel. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “Do not fear what people might do to you if you continue proclaiming the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 18 9 l4yy writing-politeness ὁ Κύριος 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 18 9 zg8a figs-doublet λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 continue speaking and do not be silent The expressions **speak** and **do not be silent** mean similar things. Jesus is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “you must certainly continue speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 18 9 a529 figs-explicit μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 do not be silent Jesus means implicitly that Paul should not **be silent** about the gospel. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “do not be silent about the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 18 10 isn8 writing-pronouns ἐγώ εἰμι μετὰ σοῦ 1 Jesus is stating the pronoun **I**, which is already implied in the verb **am**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I am certainly with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 18 10 a8lq figs-possession λαός ἐστί μοι πολὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ 1 I have many people in this city This means “many people in this city are mine.” Jesus is using the possessive form to indicate that these people are loyal to him. Alternate translation: “there are many people in this city who are loyal to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 18 11 a18w figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted Paul to teach by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 18 12 se8m translate-names Γαλλίωνος 1 Gallio The word **Gallio** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 18 12 f41k translate-names τῆς Ἀχαΐας 1 The word **Achaia** was the name of the Roman province in which Corinth was located. Corinth was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 18 12 j762 figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 18 12 lp79 figs-idiom κατεπέστησαν 1 rose up together against Here the expression **rose up** means that the Jewish leaders took action, specifically to oppose Paul. It does not mean that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “took action against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 18 12 rc85 ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 The word **unanimously** indicates that the Jews in Corinth recognized that they had a common interest and that they agreed to act together to pursue that interest. See how you translated the same word in [1:14](../01/14.md). Alternate translation: “all together”
|
||
ACT 18 12 u36c figs-explicit ἤγαγον αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τὸ βῆμα 1 brought him before the judgment seat The term **judgment seat** refers to the place where Gallio the governor sat when he made legal decisions in court. The implication is that the Jewish leaders wanted Gallio to judge and punish Paul. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “brought him before the judgment seat so that the governor would judge and punish him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 18 13 xpnq writing-pronouns οὗτος 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “This man Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 18 13 x23b figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀνθρώπους 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, the Jewish leaders is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 18 13 il8i figs-explicit παρὰ τὸν νόμον 1 By **the law**, the Jewish leaders implicitly mean “Roman law.” You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “contrary to Roman law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 18 14 uhyp figs-metonymy ἀνοίγειν τὸ στόμα 1 Luke is referring to “speaking” by association with a person would **open his mouth** in order to speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 18 14 cesw figs-synecdoche τοὺς Ἰουδαίους 1 Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 18 14 argm figs-ellipsis εἰ μὲν ἦν ἀδίκημά τι ἢ ῥᾳδιούργημα πονηρόν 1 Gallio is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if it would be helpful in your language. Alternate translation: “if indeed it was some crime or evil wrongdoing on Paul’s part that brought you here today” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 18 14 psxf figs-doublet ἀδίκημά τι ἢ ῥᾳδιούργημα πονηρόν 1 The terms **crime** and **wrongdoing** mean similar things. Gallio using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “some serious crime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 18 15 reg7 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Gallio is speaking as if what follows was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if the speaker knows that it is certain or true, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
|
||
ACT 18 15 aaql figs-metonymy λόγου 1 By **word**, Gallio likely means speech, expressed in words, as opposed to action. He is saying that what Paul has been saying is not a matter of great importance if he has not actually committed any crime. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 18 15 p0kk figs-explicit ὀνομάτων 1 By **names**, Gallio likely means the question of whether Jesus can be called the Messiah. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. UST models one way to do that. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 18 15 ywpd figs-declarative ὄψεσθε αὐτοί 1 Gallio is using a future statement to give an command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for giving a command. Alternate translation: “you must see yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
|
||
ACT 18 15 royp figs-idiom ὄψεσθε αὐτοί 1 By **see**, Gallio means investigate the matter and resolve it. Your language may have a similar idiom that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “you must see to it yourselves” or “you must look into it yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 18 16 d6nh figs-metonymy ἀπήλασεν αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ βήματος 1 he sent them away from the judgment seat Here, **judgment seat** refers to the place where Gallio sits to make legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: “Gallio made them leave his presence in the court” or “Gallio made them leave the court” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 18 17 x9w5 translate-names Σωσθένην 1 Sosthenes, the ruler of the synagogue The word **Sosthenes** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 18 17 ju3w figs-explicit τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον 1 Since Luke says in [18:8](../18/08.md) that Crispus was the synagogue leader in Corinth, the implication is that during the year and a half that had passed since then, another man, Sosthenes, had become the leader. Since the Jewish leaders who were hostile to Paul were also hostile to him, a further implication is that, like Crispus, Sosthenes had become a believer in Jesus. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. (However, see next note for another possibility that some interpreters favor.) Alternate translation: “the new synagogue leader, who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 18 17 mj77 figs-explicit ἐπιλαβόμενοι δὲ πάντες Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον, ἔτυπτον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος 1 But they all, having seized Sosthenes, the ruler of the synagogue, were beating him in front of the judgment seat This could mean: (1) that the Jewish leaders were beating Sosthenes because he was a believer in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders were all beating him” (2) that the Gentiles who were present in the court beat Sosthenes because the Jews had caused trouble by bothering Gallio with an insignificant matter and Sosthenes was the synagogue leader. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles who were in the court were all beating him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 18 17 cyk6 figs-hyperbole πάντες & ἔτυπτον 1 they all, having seized Luke likely says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were angrily beating him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 18 18 j0we grammar-connect-logic-contrast ὁ δὲ Παῦλος ἔτι προσμείνας ἡμέρας ἱκανὰς 1 Luke is using the word **But** here to introduce a contrast between what Paul might have been expected to do—leave the city because he was in danger and to protect the believers from danger themselves, as he did in Thessalonica and Berea—and what Paul actually did—remain in the city. In your translation, indicate this contrast in a way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless, Paul stayed yet many days, then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
|
||
ACT 18 18 et8c figs-metaphor τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 left the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 18 18 x25w translate-names Κενχρεαῖς 1 The word **Cenchreae** is the name of a city. This city was the seaport for the larger inland city of Corinth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 18 18 kq6f translate-symaction κειράμενος ἐν Κενχρεαῖς τὴν κεφαλήν, εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 He had cut the hair of his head … because he had a vow Paul cut the hair off **his head** to show that he had fulfilled a vow that he had made to God. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Paul cut off his hair in Cenchrea to show that he had fulfilled a vow that he had made to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 18 18 ceor figs-infostructure εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 Luke seems to offer the information that Paul had made a **vow** as the explanation for why he **stayed yet many days** in Corinth despite the danger he was in. It may be more natural in your translation to put this information right after the phrase it seems to explain, **having stayed many days**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 18 18 cf3c figs-extrainfo εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 Luke tells us nothing further about why Paul made this vow or what he did to carry it out, so it would not be appropriate to add any information in your translation about why Paul made it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
|
||
ACT 18 18 c8z0 translate-unknown εὐχήν 1 This **vow** was a promise that a person in this culture made to God that he would not drink alcohol or cut his hair until the end of a set period of time. A person might do this to express his sincerity about something he was praying for, to acknowledge something that God had done for him, or to consecrate himself to deeper devotion to God for a time. In your translation, you may be able to use the word for a comparable practice in your culture. Alternate translation: “made a special promise to God not to cut his hair for a time in order to be more devoted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 18 19 abcx writing-pronouns κατήντησαν δὲ εἰς Ἔφεσον, κἀκείνους κατέλιπεν αὐτοῦ 1 he left them The pronoun **they** refers to Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila, the pronoun **them** refers to Priscilla and Aquila, and the pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “And the three of them came down to Ephesus and Paul left Priscilla and Aquila there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 18 19 eqi4 figs-idiom κατήντησαν & εἰς Ἔφεσον 1 Luke says that Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila **came down** to Ephesus because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Alternate translation: “they sailed to Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 18 20 u44s writing-pronouns ἐρωτώντων & αὐτῶν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the Jews in the synagogue in Ephesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the Jews in the synagogue asked him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 18 22 gyy4 figs-idiom κατελθὼν εἰς Καισάρειαν 1 having landed at Caesarea Luke says that Paul had **come down** to Caesarea because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “having landed in Caesarea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 18 22 bvw4 figs-explicit ἀναβὰς 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by **having gone up**. he means that Paul traveled to Jerusalem. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “having gone up to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 18 22 r26z figs-idiom ἀναβὰς 1 having gone up Luke says that Paul had **gone up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. Alternate translation: “having traveled to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 18 22 q9j6 figs-metonymy τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 greeted the church Luke is saying **the church** to mean the people who were associated with the church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the members of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 18 22 n3rh figs-idiom κατέβη 1 he went down Luke says that Paul **went down** to Antioch because that city is lower in elevation than Jerusalem. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 18 23 plys figs-metonymy διερχόμενος καθεξῆς τὴν Γαλατικὴν χώραν καὶ Φρυγίαν 1 Luke means that Paul visited **in succession** the churches in **the region of Galatia and Phrygia**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “going through the region of Galatia and Phrygia and visiting the churches there in succession” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 18 23 s2hd figs-hyperbole στηρίζων πάντας τοὺς μαθητάς 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “greatly strengthening the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 18 24 xqy7 writing-background δέ 1 Now Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information about **Apollos** that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 18 24 n2b4 writing-participants Ἰουδαῖος & τις 1 a certain Jew named Apollos Luke is using the phrase **a certain Jewish man** to introduce **Apollos** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a Jewish man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 18 24 gsal figs-nominaladj Ἰουδαῖος 1 Luke is using the adjective **Jewish** as a noun to mean a person who is a Jew. ULT adds **man** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this expression with an equivalent word or phrase. Alternate translation: “Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 18 24 di14 translate-names Ἀλεξανδρεὺς 1 an Alexandrian by birth The word **Alexandrian** is the name for people who live in or come from the city of Alexandria in Egypt. See how you translated this name in [6:9](../06/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 18 24 qn7z figs-idiom κατήντησεν εἰς Ἔφεσον 1 Luke does not say where Apollos traveled from when he came to Ephesus. However, he probably says that Apollos **came down** to Ephesus because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “arrived in the port of Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 18 24 bh25 figs-metaphor δυνατὸς ὢν ἐν ταῖς Γραφαῖς 1 He was mighty in the scriptures Luke is speaking of **Apollos** as if he had physical strength with regard to the Scriptures. Luke means that he knew the Scriptures very well. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having great knowledge about the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 18 25 ym5i figs-hendiadys ἐλάλει καὶ ἐδίδασκεν 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **speaking** tells how Apollos was **teaching** about Jesus. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “as he spoke, he taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 18 25 z7a8 figs-activepassive οὗτος ἦν κατηχημένος 1 He had been instructed in the way of the Lord If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Other believers had taught him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 18 25 jj3b figs-metaphor τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is speaking as if the salvation that God has provided through Jesus is a way or path that people walk on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “about the salvation that God has provided through Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 18 25 jwol writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 18 25 ift8 figs-metonymy ζέων τῷ πνεύματι 1 and being fervent in spirit Here the **spirit** represents a person’s feelings and motivation. Alternate translation: “being very enthusiastic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 18 25 lr1h figs-possession τὸ βάπτισμα Ἰωάννου 1 the baptism of John Luke is using the possessive form here not to describe a **baptism** that **John** received but the baptism that John performed. Alternate translation: “the baptism that John performed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 18 26 ga6v figs-metaphor τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the way of God Luke is speaking as if the salvation that God has provided through Jesus is a way or path that people walk on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “about the salvation that God has provided through Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 18 27 c2sq writing-pronouns βουλομένου & αὐτοῦ 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Apollos. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when Apollos desired” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 18 27 ll36 figs-idiom διελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Ἀχαΐαν 1 to pass over into Achaia Luke uses the expression **pass over** here because Apollos had to cross the Aegean Sea to get to Achaia from Ephesus. Your language may have its own way of describing travel across a body of water. Alternate translation: “to go across the sea to Achaia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 18 27 v2i6 figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 18 27 f99p figs-abstractnouns τοῖς πεπιστευκόσιν διὰ τῆς χάριτος 1 those who had believed by grace If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “those whom God had graciously led to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 18 28 mw2n figs-abstractnouns δημοσίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **public**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “publicly” or “where anyone could listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 19 intro g38y 0 # Acts 19 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>- Verses 1–10 tell how Paul came to the city of Ephesus and proclaimed the gospel there.<br>- Verses 11–20 describe remarkable things that God did in Ephesus as a result of the gospel proclamation there.<br>- Verses 21–41 describe how the artisans in Ephesus created an uproar because people were no longer buying the idols they made.<br><br>Acts [19:20](../19/20.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the sixth major part of the book.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Temple of Artemis<br><br>The temple of Artemis was an important place in the city of Ephesus. Many people came to Ephesus to see this temple, and they bought statues of the goddess Artemis while they were there. The people who sold statues of Artemis were afraid that if people did not believe Artemis was a real goddess, they would stop giving the sellers money for statues.
|
||
ACT 19 1 lp23 writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke is using the phrase **And it happened that** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 19 1 rhv1 figs-explicit διελθόντα τὰ ἀνωτερικὰ μέρη 1 Luke says that Paul traveled through **the upper parts** of the province of Asia to indicate that he followed a more direct route to Ephesus that went over higher ground than did the main route. The implication is that Paul wanted to go directly to Ephesus after visiting the churches in Galatia and Phrygia ([18:23](../18/23.md)), as he had promised he would do if that was God’s will ([18:21](../18/21.md)). You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “taking the most direct route” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 19 1 munb figs-idiom κατελθεῖν εἰς 1 Luke says that Paul **came down** to Ephesus because he was coming down to the coast from a route that traveled over high ground. Alternate translation: “arrived in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 19 1 iosy writing-participants τινας μαθητάς 1 Luke is using the phrase **certain disciples** to introduce these believers as new participants in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “that there were already some believers in the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 19 2 wqi4 figs-quotations εἶπέν τε πρὸς αὐτούς, εἰ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον ἐλάβετε, πιστεύσαντες? 1 Did you receive the Holy Spirit Luke is recording how Paul used the typical form in his language for asking questions. It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “And he asked them if they had received the Holy Spirit when they believed.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 19 3 mrm6 figs-activepassive εἰς τί οὖν ἐβαπτίσθητε 1 Into what then were you baptized? If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Then what kind of baptism did you receive?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 19 3 jzp7 figs-ellipsis εἰς τὸ Ἰωάννου βάπτισμα 1 Into the baptism of John The believers in Ephesus are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “We received the kind of baptism that John performed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 19 3 w76v figs-explicit Ἰωάννου 1 By **John**, the believers implicitly mean John the Baptist. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 19 4 g8iw Ἰωάννης ἐβάπτισεν βάπτισμα 1 Paul is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. Your language may be able to do the same. But if that would sound unnatural in your language, you could express the meaning another way. Alternate translation: “John performed a baptism”
|
||
ACT 19 4 r46y figs-abstractnouns βάπτισμα μετανοίας 1 a baptism of repentance If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **repentance**, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “a baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 19 5 k9st writing-pronouns ἐβαπτίσθησαν 1 they were baptized The pronoun **they** refers to the believers in Ephesus who were speaking with Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “those believers were baptized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 19 5 ueh1 figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθησαν 1 they were baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they received baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 19 5 g2dm figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 in the name of the Lord Jesus Here the **name** of Jesus represents his authority. By being baptized, these believers were acknowledging Jesus’ authority over their lives as their Lord and Savior. Alternate translation: “to express their allegiance to Jesus as their Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 19 6 gk8l translate-symaction ἐπιθέντος αὐτοῖς τοῦ Παύλου χεῖρας 1 when Paul had laid his hands on them Paul **laid** his **hands** on these believers as a symbolic action to show that he wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to them. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. See how you translated the similar expression in [8:17](../08/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 19 6 udyf figs-metaphor ἦλθε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 Luke is speaking as if the Holy Spirit physically **came upon** these believers. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 19 6 j4n8 figs-explicit ἐλάλουν & γλώσσαις 1 and they began to speak in tongues and prophesy The implication is that these believers were speaking languages that they did not know. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they were speaking in languages that they did not know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 19 7 e7kj writing-endofstory δὲ 1 And they were about 12 men in all Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information to conclude this part of the story of what Paul did in Ephesus. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||
ACT 19 8 qv8z writing-pronouns ἐπαρρησιάζετο 1 having gone into the synagogue, he was speaking boldly for three months The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul was speaking boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 19 8 yky2 figs-hendiadys διαλεγόμενος καὶ πείθων 1 reasoning and persuading them This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The phrase **reasoning** tells how Paul was **persuading** people in the synagogue in Ephesus. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “reasonably persuading” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 19 8 v8et figs-abstractnouns περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 about the kingdom of God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **kingdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “about how God had begun to rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 19 8 v5d5 figs-explicit περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that Paul was teaching that the **kingdom of God** had begun on earth when Jesus came as the Messiah. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “about how, when Jesus came as the Messiah, God had begun to rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 19 9 mq1g figs-hendiadys ἐσκληρύνοντο καὶ ἠπείθουν 1 some were hardened and being disobedient This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The phrase **being hardened** tells how **some** in the Ephesus synagogue were **disobeying** what God wanted them to do, according to Paul’s teaching. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “stubbornly disobeying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 19 9 yss2 figs-activepassive ἐσκληρύνοντο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “were hardening themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 19 9 n6ir translate-names τὴν ὁδὸν 1 speaking evil of the Way before the crowd As the General Notes to Chapter 9 explain, **the Way** was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. See what you did in [9:2](../09/02.md). Alternate translation: “who belonged to the Way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 19 9 den4 translate-names Τυράννου 1 of Tyrannus The word **Tyrannus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 19 10 cw5g figs-hyperbole πάντας τοὺς κατοικοῦντας τὴν Ἀσίαν ἀκοῦσαι 1 all those who lived in Asia heard the word of the Lord Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “people living throughout the province of Asia heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 19 10 t0ak figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul was proclaiming by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 19 10 n45g writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 19 10 kj12 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Here, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 19 11 abcy figs-litotes οὐ τὰς τυχούσας 1 not ordinary Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “extraordinary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 19 11 fa6h figs-synecdoche τῶν χειρῶν Παύλου 1 And God was doing not ordinary miracles by the hands of Paul Luke is using one part of Paul, his **hands**, to represent all of Paul in the act of doing miracles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 19 12 m3kl figs-activepassive καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας ἀποφέρεσθαι ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια 1 even handkerchiefs and aprons from his body were taken to the sick and If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people even took handkerchiefs or aprons from Paul’s skin to the sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 19 12 vc1v figs-explicit ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια 1 even handkerchiefs and aprons from his body This could mean implicitly: (1) that these were cloth items that others had placed on Paul’s **skin**. Alternate translation: “handkerchiefs or aprons that had touched Paul’s skin” (2) that these were cloth items that Paul had worn or used. Alternate translation: “handkerchiefs or aprons that Paul had worn or used” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 19 12 aks4 translate-unknown σουδάρια 1 handkerchiefs These **handkerchiefs** were small pieces of cloth used to wipe one’s face. Your language and culture may have a term for a similar item that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 19 12 xs31 translate-unknown σιμικίνθια 1 aprons These **aprons** were clothing worn on the front of the body to protect the clothes of those who wore the aprons. Your language and culture may have a term for a similar item that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 19 12 kw9z figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας 1 the sick Luke is using the adjective **sick** as a noun to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who were sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 19 12 nl3a figs-personification ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι ἀπ’ αὐτῶν τὰς νόσους 1 their illnesses departed from them Luke is speaking of these **illnesses** as if they were living thing that could depart from a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God cured them of their illnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 19 13 he2x writing-newevent δέ 1 General Information: Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. This is the beginning of another event that happened while Paul was in Ephesus. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 19 13 fgq4 translate-unknown ἐξορκιστῶν 1 exorcists These **exorcists** were people who sent evil spirits away from people or places.Your language and culture may have a term for this kind of person that you can use in your translation. You could also explain the meaning of the term “exorcists,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 19 13 s12u figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα 1 the name of the Lord Jesus Here, **name** refers to Jesus’ power and authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 19 13 vqt1 figs-metonymy τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 by the Jesus The exorcists are referring to Jesus himself to mean his authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by the authority of the Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 19 14 cwzb writing-background δέ 1 Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information about these **seven sons of Sceva** that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 19 14 emgz writing-participants ἦσαν & τινος Σκευᾶ Ἰουδαίου ἀρχιερέως, ἑπτὰ υἱοὶ τοῦτο ποιοῦντες 1 Luke is using the phrase **a certain Jewish high priest** to introduce his **seven sons** as new participants in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a Jewish chief priest whose seven sons were doing this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 19 14 cb8p translate-names Σκευᾶ 1 of Sceva The word **Sceva** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 19 15 fhzn figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθὲν & τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν εἶπεν 1 Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that the evil spirit responded to the sons of Sceva. Alternate translation: “the evil spirit responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 19 15 lrky figs-explicit τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he is continuing the story he began in verse 13 after providing background material in verse 14. By **the evil spirit**, he means one to which some of the sons of Sceva were saying on a specific occasion, “I adjure you by the Jesus whom Paul proclaims.” Luke indicates in verse 16 that two of the sons were involved on this occasion. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. UST models one way to do that. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 19 15 nsl1 figs-rquestion ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνες ἐστέ? 1 but who are you? The evil spirit is using the question form to emphasize that it does not know or respect these sons of Sceva the way he knows and respects Jesus and Paul, the representative of Jesus. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “but I do not know or respect you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 19 15 vqwh writing-pronouns ὑμεῖς & τίνες ἐστέ? 1 The evil spirit is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **are**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I certainly do not know you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 19 16 lu7u figs-explicit ἀμφοτέρων 1 them Luke assumes that his readers will understand that only two of the seven sons of Sceva were involved on this particular occasion. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the two sons of Sceva who were trying to cast out the evil spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 19 17 mx62 writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of the seven sons of Sceva. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||
ACT 19 17 jodu figs-activepassive τοῦτο & ἐγένετο γνωστὸν πᾶσιν & τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν τὴν Ἔφεσον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all living in Ephesus came to know about this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 19 17 fd5m figs-hyperbole τοῦτο & ἐγένετο γνωστὸν πᾶσιν & τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν τὴν Ἔφεσον 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “this became widely known among those who lived in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 19 17 h0lq figs-metaphor ἐπέπεσεν φόβος ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 Luke is speaking of **fear** as if it could physically fall on the people of Ephesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they all became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 19 17 w1su figs-hyperbole ἐπέπεσεν φόβος ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “all who heard about it became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 19 17 j85h figs-activepassive ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the name of the Lord Jesus was magnified If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they magnified the name of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 19 17 j2hh figs-metonymy ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the name Here the word **name** stands for the reputation of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus received a great reputation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 19 18 v9ib figs-hendiadys ἐξομολογούμενοι καὶ ἀναγγέλλοντες 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The phrase **declaring** tells how these believers were **confessing** the wrong things that they had done. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “publicly confessing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 19 19 i31a figs-nominaladj τὰ περίεργα 1 Luke is using the adjective **magical** as a noun to describe certain practices. ULT adds the word **arts** to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “practices that involved magic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 19 19 z9rj figs-explicit τὰς βίβλους 1 having brought their books together Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the word **books** refers to scrolls on which magical incantations and formulas were recorded. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “their scrolls of magical incantations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 19 19 u9pi translate-bmoney ἀργυρίου μυριάδας πέντε 1 50000 Each of these **pieces of silver** was the approximate daily wage of a common laborer. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead, you might say something more general or give the equivalent in wages. Alternate translation: “an amount equivalent to well over a hundred years’ wages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
|
||
ACT 19 19 bcv2 translate-bmoney ἀργυρίου 1 pieces of silver Each of the **pieces of silver** was the approximate daily wage of a common laborer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
|
||
ACT 19 20 es71 figs-personification τοῦ Κυρίου ὁ λόγος ηὔξανεν καὶ ἴσχυεν 1 So the word of the Lord was spreading and prevailing according to power Luke is speaking of the way that the **word of the Lord** was becoming more widely known and accepted as if it were a living thing that was **increasing** and **prevailing**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing and believing the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 19 20 lbg9 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul was proclaiming by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 19 20 t49m writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 19 21 de4f writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 19 21 q18b figs-idiom ὡς & ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα, ἔθετο ὁ Παῦλος ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι & πορεύεσθαι 1 this was completed, Paul The word **fulfilled** conveys the sense that Paul had completed the work that God had for him to do in Ephesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “once all these things had happened, the Spirit showed Paul that he had completed his work in Ephesus and that he should travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 19 21 rdz4 figs-idiom δεῖ με καὶ Ῥώμην ἰδεῖν 1 it is necessary for me also to see Rome In this context, the word **see** means to visit a place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I must also visit Rome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 19 22 cy6f translate-names Ἔραστον 1 Erastus The word **Erastus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 19 23 nb3p figs-litotes τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος 1 there was no small disturbance Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great disturbance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 19 23 rwf2 translate-names τῆς ὁδοῦ 1 the Way As the General Notes to Chapter 9 explain, **the Way** was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. See what you did in [19:9](../19/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 19 24 cg16 writing-participants τις & ἀργυροκόπος & παρείχετο 1 a certain silversmith named Demetrius Luke is using the phrase **a certain silversmith** to introduce **Demetrius** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a silversmith … who was bringing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 19 24 opb9 translate-names Δημήτριος 1 The word **Demetrius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 19 24 y5ae writing-background τις & ἀργυροκόπος, ποιῶν ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος 1 Luke provides this background information about **Demetrius** to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 19 24 wg95 figs-extrainfo ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that Ephesus had a large temple dedicated to the goddess **Artemis**. (She was known as Diana in Latin; she was a false goddess of fertility.) Since Demetrius describes this temple in verse 27, you do not need to provide information about it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
|
||
ACT 19 24 nwt7 translate-unknown ἀργυροκόπος 1 a silversmith A **silversmith** is a craftsman who works with silver metal to make statues and jewelry. Your language and culture may have a term for this kind of worker that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 19 24 p58m figs-litotes οὐκ ὀλίγην ἐργασίαν 1 brought in not a little business Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great deal of business” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 19 25 f8rm οὓς συναθροίσας καὶ τοὺς περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐργάτας, εἶπεν 1 It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He gathered together the craftsmen, along with workers in similar occupations, and said”
|
||
ACT 19 25 w1xd figs-nominaladj περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα 1 Luke is using the adjective **such** as a noun to mean a certain kind of work. ULT adds the word **things** to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this expression with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “in similar occupations” or “who did similar crafts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 19 26 rm6w figs-merism θεωρεῖτε καὶ ἀκούετε 1 you see and hear that Demetrius is referring to perception by naming the two major means of perception. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you perceive clearly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||
ACT 19 26 rx32 figs-metaphor μετέστησεν ἱκανὸν ὄχλον 1 and turned away a considerable crowd Demetrius is speaking as if Paul had physically **removed** a crowd that had been patronizing the artisans in Ephesus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “has caused a considerable crowd to stop buying our shrines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 19 26 z7e7 figs-synecdoche οἱ διὰ χειρῶν γινόμενοι 1 He is saying that the things that are being made with hands are not gods Demetrius is using one part of the artisans, their **hands**, to represent all of them in the act of making idols. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “things which people make” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 19 27 j3bb figs-activepassive τὸ τῆς μεγάλης θεᾶς Ἀρτέμιδος ἱερὸν, εἰς οὐθὲν λογισθῆναι 1 the temple of the great goddess Artemis may be considered as nothing If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that people will consider the temple of the great goddess Artemis to be nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 19 27 hz7l figs-hyperbole ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται 1 whom all Asia and the world worships This was an exaggeration to show how popular the goddess Artemis was. Alternate translation: “whom people from all over the province of Asia and the world worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 19 27 aq5c figs-metonymy ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται 1 Here the words **Asia** and **the world** refer to the people in Asia and in the known world. Alternate translation: “whom many people in Asia and in other parts of the world worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 19 28 t4lm writing-pronouns ἔκραζον 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the craftsmen who were making the idols. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the craftsmen were shouting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 19 28 uc5c figs-metaphor γενόμενοι πλήρεις θυμοῦ 1 having become filled with anger Luke is speaking of the craftsmen as if they were containers that **anger** filled. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “becoming very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 19 29 t7xs figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως 1 the whole city was filled with confusion If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “confusion filled the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]);
|
||
ACT 19 29 u42d figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως 1 Luke is speaking of **the city** as if they was a container that **confusion** filled. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “there was confusion throughout the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 19 29 u51d figs-abstractnouns ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **confusion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “people throughout the city were confused” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 19 29 ej3q translate-unknown τὸ θέατρον 1 into the theater The **theater** in Ephesus was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people. It was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. If the word “theater” would communicate the wrong idea in your language, you could use a term that would be clearer for your readers. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the stadium” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 19 29 d6r9 translate-names Γάϊον & Ἀρίσταρχον 1 Gaius … Aristarchus The words **Gaius** and **Aristarchus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 19 31 o6qt translate-names τῶν Ἀσιαρχῶν 1 The word **Asiarchs** is the name for the provincial officers who governed the Roman province of Asia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 19 31 we87 writing-pronouns αὐτῷ & αὐτὸν & παρεκάλουν & ἑαυτὸν 1 The pronouns **him** and **himself** refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “of Paul’s … him … were urging Paul … himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 19 31 r183 figs-idiom δοῦναι ἑαυτὸν εἰς τὸ θέατρον 1 The expression **to give himself** means “to go,” but it suggests risk and danger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to risk going into the theater” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 19 33 ukaw figs-explicit συνεβίβασαν Ἀλέξανδρον 1 The implication is that some people **instructed Alexander** about how he could speak to everyone in the theater. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “instructed Alexander about how he could speak to everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 19 33 jr85 translate-names Ἀλέξανδρον 1 Alexander The word **Alexander** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 19 33 j1mi translate-symaction κατασείσας τὴν χεῖρα 1 motioned with his hand This likely means that Alexander was **waving his hand** to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this specifically in your translation. Alternate translation: “waving his hand to signal that he was about to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 19 33 tlq7 figs-explicit ἀπολογεῖσθαι τῷ δήμῳ 1 to give a defense The implication is that Alexander wanted to explain that although he and his fellow Jews did not worship idols themselves, they were not opposing the business of making silver shrines of Artemis. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to explain to the people that he and his fellow Jews were not responsible for the artisans losing business” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 19 34 tyx6 figs-quotations ἐπιγνόντες & ὅτι Ἰουδαῖός ἐστιν, 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “recognizing, ‘He is a Jew!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 19 34 u1hp figs-metaphor φωνὴ ἐγένετο μία ἐκ πάντων, ὡς & κραζόντων 1 there was one voice from all of them Luke is speaking as if the people in the theater collectively had only **one voice**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they all shouted together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 19 35 sy9m translate-unknown ὁ γραμματεὺς 1 the town clerk This **city clerk** was a high official in the government of Ephesus. He was not merely someone who kept records. In your translation, you could use a term for someone in a comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “an alderman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 19 35 n4qz φησίν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said”
|
||
ACT 19 35 gox9 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἐφέσιοι 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “Citizens of Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 19 35 mtsc figs-ellipsis τίς γάρ ἐστιν 1 The city clerk is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “you should stop this uproar because, after all, who is there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 19 35 sd3s figs-rquestion τίς & ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος καὶ τοῦ διοπετοῦς? 1 what man indeed is there who does not know that the city of Ephesus is temple keeper of the great Artemis and of that which is fallen down from heaven? The city clerk is using the question form to emphasize that the people of Ephesus do not need to be concerned that the worship of Artemis is in peril. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “there is no one of men who does not know that the city of Ephesus is the temple warden of the great Artemis and of the Zeus-fallen image!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 19 35 k8dy figs-doublenegatives τίς & ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει 1 who does not know The city clerk’s question becomes a double negative when it takes the form of a statement or exclamation. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression instead. Alternate translation: “all men know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 19 35 gqr7 figs-hyperbole τίς & ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει 1 A generalization for emphasis is implicit in the city clerk’s question, and this generalization becomes explicit when the question takes the form of a statement or exclamation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “men know very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 19 35 zzmv figs-gendernotations τίς & ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, the city clerk is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “what person is there” or, as a statement or exclamation, “all people know” or “people know very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 19 35 hiw3 writing-politeness τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος 1 temple keeper The term **temple keeper** was an honorary title that cities assumed when they built and maintained temples to the gods that the Greeks and Romans worshiped or to the emperor. In your translation, use an expression that shows that the city clerk is using honorific language. Alternate translation: “the city of Ephesus has the honor of hosting the temple of the great Artemis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 19 35 afd1 figs-nominaladj τοῦ διοπετοῦς 1 of that which is fallen down from heaven The city clerk is using the adjective **Zeus-fallen** as a noun to mean a specific kind of object. ULT adds the word **image** to show that. (Within the temple of Artemis was an image of the goddess. It had been fashioned from a meteorite that had fallen from the sky. The people of Ephesus thought that this rock had come directly from Zeus, whom they considered the ruler of their pagan gods.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the image that fell from the sky from Zeus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 19 35 fdfk translate-names τοῦ διοπετοῦς 1 The word **Zeus** is the name of a pagan god. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 19 36 o0ul figs-activepassive κατεσταλμένους ὑπάρχειν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to calm down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 19 36 xj2n figs-explicit μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν 1 to do nothing rash The city clerk means implicitly that it would be **rash** for the people to do anything to harm Gaius and Aristarchus, as he says in the next verse. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “not to act impulsively and hurt the two men you have brought here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 19 36 s67q figs-doublenegatives μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν 1 rash If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative word **nothing** and the negative adjective **rash**. Alternate translation: “to be careful about what you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 19 37 cuhh translate-versebridge 0 In this verse, the city clerk is giving the reason why the people of Ephesus should not harm Gaius and Aristarchus impulsively. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 36–37. It might say something like this: “You brought these two men here even though they are neither temple-robbers nor blasphemers of our goddess. Therefore it is necessary for you to be calmed and to do nothing rash, since it is undeniable that people from throughout the world come to Ephesus to worship Artemis.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
|
||
ACT 19 37 s8a9 writing-pronouns τοὺς ἄνδρας τούτους 1 these men The pronoun **these** refers to refers to Gaius and Aristarchus, Paul’s traveling companions ([Acts 19:29](../19/29.md)). While the city clerk does not refer to them by name, you could find a way to identify them for your readers. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 19 38 zkx5 figs-metonymy ἔχουσιν πρός τινα λόγον 1 have a word against anyone The city clerk is using the term **word** to mean an accusation that Demetrius might make against Gaius and Aristarchus by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “wish to make an accusation against anyone” or “wish to bring a charge against anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 19 38 i14r figs-activepassive ἀγοραῖοι ἄγονται καὶ ἀνθύπατοί εἰσιν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the proconsuls are holding court sessions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 19 38 szf7 translate-unknown ἀνθύπατοί 1 proconsuls The **proconsuls** were the Roman governor’s representatives who made legal decisions in court. In your translation, you could use a term for someone in a comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “judges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 19 38 o1vf figs-imperative3p ἐγκαλείτωσαν ἀλλήλοις 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they may accuse one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
|
||
ACT 19 38 g8tp writing-pronouns ἐγκαλείτωσαν ἀλλήλοις 1 Let them accuse one another The pronoun **them** refers both to Demetrius and his colleagues and to Gaius and Aristarchus. The city clerk does not mean that Demetrius and his colleagues will accuse each other. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “let Demetrius and the craftsmen bring a charge against these men, and let these men respond” or “Demetrius and the craftsmen may bring a charge against these men, and these men may respond” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 19 39 hxh3 figs-idiom εἰ δέ τι περὶ ἑτέρων ἐπιζητεῖτε 1 But if you seek anything about other matters The word **seek** does not mean that Demetrius and his colleagues would be searching for something. The city clerk is speaking. Alternate translation: “But if you have other matters to discuss” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 19 39 wga5 figs-activepassive ἐν τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἐπιλυθήσεται 1 it will be settled in the regular assembly If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the regular assembly will settle it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 19 39 dsmg figs-declarative ἐν τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἐπιλυθήσεται 1 The city clerk may be using a future statement to give an command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for giving a command. Alternate translation: “you must settle it in the regular assembly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
|
||
ACT 19 39 et5j translate-unknown τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 the regular assembly This **regular assembly** refers to a public gathering of citizens over which the county clerk presided. In your translation, you could use a term for a comparable deliberative body in your culture. Alternate translation: “the town meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 19 40 sds7 figs-activepassive κινδυνεύομεν ἐνκαλεῖσθαι 1 we are in danger of being accused of rioting concerning this day If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, the context suggests that it would be the Roman authorities. Alternate translation: “we are in danger of the Roman authorities accusing us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 19 40 efat figs-ellipsis τῆς σήμερον 1 The city clerk is leaving out a word that a sentence would ordinarily need in Greek in order to be complete. The clerk is abbreviating the expression “the today day,” which means “this day.” You can say that in your translation if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “this day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 19 40 up3g figs-metonymy τῆς σήμερον 1 The city clerk is referring to the events that were nearly a riot, by association with the day on which they took place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the events of this day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 19 40 jtdu figs-doublenegatives μηδενὸς αἰτίου ὑπάρχοντος, περὶ οὗ οὐ δυνησόμεθα ἀποδοῦναι λόγον 1 In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “there being no cause about which we will not be able to give an account.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “because we would have to have a reason in order to give an account” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 20 intro u91c 0 # Acts 20 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>In this chapter Luke describes Paul’s last visits to believers in the provinces of Macedonia and Asia before he went to Jerusalem.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Race<br><br>Paul spoke of living for Jesus as if he were running in a race. By this he meant that he needed to keep working hard even when things were difficult and he wanted to quit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/discipline]])<br><br>### “Compelled by the Spirit”<br><br>Paul thought that the Holy Spirit wanted him to go to Jerusalem even if Paul did not want to go there. The same Holy Spirit told other people that when Paul arrived in Jerusalem, people would try to harm him.
|
||
ACT 20 2 edb8 writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 had exhorted them with many words The pronoun **them** refers to the believers in the **regions** of Macedonia. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the believers there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 20 3 ah5w figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 by the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by certain Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 20 3 bdq6 figs-idiom γνώμης τοῦ ὑποστρέφειν διὰ Μακεδονίας. 1 The expression **of a resolution** means that Paul resolved to do something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he resolved to return through Macedonia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 20 3 jypq αὐτῷ & μέλλοντι ἀνάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν Συρίαν 1 Alternate translation: “as he was ready to sail to Syria”
|
||
ACT 20 4 dw6j translate-names Σώπατρος Πύρρου & Σεκοῦνδος, & Τυχικὸς & Τρόφιμος 1 were Sopater of Pyrrhus … Secundus … Tychicus … Trophimus These words are the names of five men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 20 4 dpyn figs-possession Σώπατρος Πύρρου 1 Here, the possessive form indicates that **Sopater** is the son of **Pyrrhus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that specifically. Alternate translation: “Sopater, whose father was named Pyrrhus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 20 4 w4n1 translate-names Βεροιαῖος & Θεσσαλονικέων & Δερβαῖος & Ἀσιανοὶ 1 from Berea … from Derbe The word **Berean** is the name for someone from the city of Berea. The word **Thessalonians** describes people from the city of Thessalonica. The word **Derbean** is the name for someone from the city of Derbe. The word **Asians** describes people from the province of Asia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 20 4 w8j6 translate-names Ἀρίσταρχος & Γάϊος 1 Aristarchus … Gaius The words **Aristarchus** and **Gaius** are the names of men. See how you translated these names in [19:29](../19/29.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 20 5 y35x figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, here Luke begins to use the pronouns **us** and **we** to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers. So use the exclusive form of those words throughout this chapter if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 20 5 gb5f writing-pronouns οὗτοι 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the seven men who were traveling with Paul, whom Luke lists in the previous verse. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “those seven men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 20 5 o1bl figs-explicit ἡμᾶς 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he says **us** because he joined Paul and his other companions at this point in the story. You can include this information if it will help your readers understand what is happening. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 20 6 l5dr translate-names τὰς ἡμέρας τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 the days of unleavened bread The words **Unleavened Bread** are the name of a Jewish religious observance that took place over several **days**. See how you translated this in [12:3](../12/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 20 7 xsyv figs-nominaladj τῇ μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων 1 Luke is using the adjective **first** as a noun to mean a particular day of the **week**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the first day of the week” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 20 7 wpfh figs-explicit τῇ μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the believers met on **the first of the week** because that was the day Jesus rose from the dead. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the first day of the week, when Jesus rose from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 20 7 tgsb figs-activepassive συνηγμένων ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we having gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 20 7 ls6u writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the believers in Troas with whom Paul and his traveling companions were meeting. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the believers in Troas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 20 7 zff8 figs-synecdoche κλάσαι ἄρτον 1 to break bread Luke could be using the word **break** to mean “eat,” and he could be using the word **bread** to mean “food.” In each case he would be using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking bread is one thing people do when they eat it, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing a meal together. Alternate translation: “to share a meal” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 20 7 ckiy figs-explicit κλάσαι ἄρτον 1 By **to break bread**, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it (and also sharing a cup of wine). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to observe the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 20 7 j888 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 and so he continued his message Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul was sharing by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 20 8 t6on figs-explicit ἦσαν & λαμπάδες ἱκαναὶ ἐν τῷ ὑπερῴῳ, οὗ ἦμεν συνηγμένοι 1 The implication seems to be that it became warm in this **upper room** because there were **many lamps** lit in it, and this helps account for why Eutychus fell asleep, as Luke describes in the next verse. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “it was warm in the upper room where we were gathered together because many lamps were in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 20 8 ak8z translate-unknown ὑπερῴῳ 1 upper room In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built above other rooms. According to the next verse, this room was actually built above a room that was built above another room. If your community does not have houses like that, you could use another expression to describe a large indoor space where people could meet. See how you translated this in [9:37](../09/37.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 20 8 cshh figs-activepassive ἦμεν συνηγμένοι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we had gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 20 9 ju64 translate-names Εὔτυχος 1 Eutychus The word **Eutychus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 20 9 v5q7 translate-unknown ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος 1 on the window This **window** was an opening in the wall with a ledge that was wide enough for a person to sit on. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could describe this more fully. Alternate translation: “on the ledge of a window opening in the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 20 9 tsp4 figs-activepassive καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ & κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου 1 was falling into a deep sleep If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a deep sleep overcoming him … sleep having overcome him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 20 9 abcz figs-personification καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ & κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου 1 having been overcome by sleep Luke is speaking of **sleep** as if it were a living thing that could **overcome** Eutychus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “starting to sleep deeply … becoming completely asleep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 20 9 kh3h τριστέγου 1 third story In this culture, the **third story** meant a level two floors above the ground floor. Some languages and cultures consider the “first story” to be one level above the ground floor, and so they would consider this level, two stories above the ground floor, to be the “second story.” You can say that in your translation if it would be helpful to your readers.
|
||
ACT 20 9 jp89 figs-activepassive ἤρθη νεκρός 1 and was picked up dead If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was the believers who were meeting with Paul. Alternate translation: “the believers picked him up dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 20 9 z1wf figs-explicit ἤρθη νεκρός 1 The implication is that some of the believers rushed down to help Eutychus but discovered that he had died from the fall. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they lifted him from the ground, but he had died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 20 10 uban figs-activepassive μὴ θορυβεῖσθε 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Do not let this trouble you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 20 10 gfol figs-metaphor ἡ & ψυχὴ αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐστιν 1 Paul is speaking as if the life of Eutychus were contained within him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he is alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 20 11 w5w8 figs-synecdoche κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον καὶ γευσάμενος 1 had broken bread Luke could be using the words **broken** and **tasted** to mean “eaten,” and he could be using the word **bread** to mean “food.” In each case he would be using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking and tasting bread are things people do when they eat bread, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing a meal together. Alternate translation: “having shared a meal with the believers” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 20 11 upkb figs-explicit κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον καὶ γευσάμενος 1 By ** having broken bread and having tasted **, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it (and also sharing a cup of wine). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having observe the Lord’s Supper with the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 20 11 av7m writing-pronouns ἐξῆλθεν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul left” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 20 12 lih8 writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Luke uses the word **But** to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of Eutychus. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||
ACT 20 12 jkj5 figs-explicit τὸν παῖδα 1 the boy Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by **the boy**, he means Eutychus. You can use his name if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “Eutychus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 20 12 pk6c figs-activepassive παρεκλήθησαν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this comforted them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 20 12 abx0 figs-litotes οὐ μετρίως 1 not moderately Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 20 13 w4ew grammar-connect-logic-result ἡμεῖς δὲ, προελθόντες ἐπὶ τὸ πλοῖον, ἀνήχθημεν ἐπὶ τὴν Ἆσσον, ἐκεῖθεν μέλλοντες ἀναλαμβάνειν τὸν Παῦλον; οὕτως γὰρ διατεταγμένος, ἦν μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν 1 we, having gone ahead If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Paul intended to go on foot to Assos and he arranged for us to take him on board there, so we went ahead to the ship and sailed away to Assos” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
|
||
ACT 20 13 q4yz translate-names τὴν Ἆσσον 1 Assos The word **Assos** is the name of a town on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 20 13 nq2q figs-explicit μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν 1 ἦν μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν In light of what Paul says in [20:23](../20/23.md), that the Holy Spirit was showing him that he would soon suffer and be imprisoned, the implication seems to be that Paul wanted to **go on foot himself** so that he could be alone for a while and reflect and pray. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “intending to go on foot himself because he wanted to have some time alone to reflect and pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 20 14 ju8f translate-names Μιτυλήνην 1 Mitylene The word **Mitylene** is the name of a town on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 20 15 bbeq figs-idiom κατηντήσαμεν 1 Luke says that he and his traveling companions **came down** to a point on the mainland **opposite Chios** because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “we landed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 20 15 ulk6 translate-names Χίου 1 Chios The word **Chios** is the name of an island in the Aegean Sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 20 15 b6c6 translate-names Σάμον 1 Samos The word **Samos** is the name of an island south of Chios in the Aegean Sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 20 15 s7g2 translate-names Μίλητον 1 Miletus The word **Miletus** is the name of a port city that was located in western Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 20 16 p61e figs-metaphor ὅπως μὴ γένηται αὐτῷ χρονοτριβῆσαι 1 so that he would not spend time Luke is speaking about **time** as if it were a commodity that a person could **lose**. Alternate translation: “so that he would not have to remain for a time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 20 17 nw52 writing-pronouns μετεκαλέσατο 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 20 18 xsa6 figs-infostructure ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε ἀπὸ πρώτης ἡμέρας ἀφ’ ἧς ἐπέβην εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν, πῶς μεθ’ ὑμῶν τὸν πάντα χρόνον ἐγενόμην 1 It may be more natural in your language to reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “You yourselves know how I was with you the whole time from the first day from which I set foot in Asia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
|
||
ACT 20 18 b6li writing-pronouns ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε 1 You yourselves know Paul is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **know**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “You certainly know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 20 18 vw6n figs-synecdoche ἐπέβην εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν 1 I set foot in Asia Paul is using one part of himself, his **foot**, to represent all of himself in the act of arriving in Asia. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I entered Asia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 20 19 uidc writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Paul is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 20 19 llqj figs-hyperbole μετὰ πάσης ταπεινοφροσύνης 1 Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “with great humility” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 20 19 pg86 figs-abstractnouns μετὰ πάσης ταπεινοφροσύνης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **humility**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “very humbly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 20 19 wh5m figs-metonymy δακρύων 1 tears Paul is referring to strong emotion by association with the way a person who feels things deeply sheds **tears** of sadness or joy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “deep emotion” or “genuine feeling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 20 19 e6k7 figs-ellipsis καὶ πειρασμῶν, τῶν συμβάντων μοι 1 trials that happened to me Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and how I endured the trials that happened to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 20 19 y5iw figs-synecdoche τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 of the Jews Paul is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of certain Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 20 20 sscz figs-hyperbole ὡς οὐδὲν ὑπεστειλάμην τῶν συμφερόντων τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι ὑμῖν 1 Paul says **nothing** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “how I did not withhold things that would be useful and not declare them to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 20 20 nu7h figs-doublenegatives ὡς οὐδὲν ὑπεστειλάμην τῶν συμφερόντων τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι ὑμῖν 1 how I kept back nothing that was useful which I did not declare to you If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative word **nothing** and the negative particle **not**. Alternate translation: “how I eagerly brought forth everything that would be useful so that I could declare it to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 20 21 sqf9 figs-ellipsis διαμαρτυρόμενος & τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν εἰς τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “testifying about the need for … repentance toward God and faith in our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 20 21 w7mv figs-abstractnouns τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν εἰς τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν 1 about repentance toward God and faith in our Lord Jesus If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **repentance** and **faith**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “about the need to repent towards God and believe in our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 20 21 x552 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Paul is using the pronoun **our** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 20 22 hcs0 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Paul is using the term **behold** to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 20 22 vam4 figs-activepassive δεδεμένος & τῷ Πνεύματι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “with the Spirit binding me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 20 22 n99n figs-metaphor δεδεμένος & τῷ Πνεύματι 1 Paul is speaking as if **the Spirit** had **bound** him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the Spirit constraining me” or “with the Spirit leading me in a way that I cannot refuse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 20 22 um41 grammar-connect-exceptions τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ συναντήσοντά μοι, μὴ εἰδώς 1 Since Paul says in the next verse that he does know one thing that will happen to him in Jerusalem, it might appear in your language he is contradicting himself. If so, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. You could begin a new sentence here that continues into the next verse, leaving out the word “except” at the start of the next verse. Alternate translation: “The one thing I do know that will happen to me in her is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
|
||
ACT 20 22 a9j1 writing-pronouns ἐν αὐτῇ 1 not knowing what will happen to me in it The pronoun **her** refers to the city of Jerusalem. Conventionally, Greek referred to cities with feminine pronouns. Your language may use a different gender. You could also use a noun. Alternate translation: “in it” or “in that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 20 23 u26j figs-personification δεσμὰ καὶ θλίψεις με μένουσιν 1 Luke is speaking as if these **chains** and **sufferings** were living things that were waiting for Paul in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will experience chains and afflictions when I get there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 20 23 q3ie figs-synecdoche δεσμὰ 1 chains and sufferings await me Paul is using one aspect of imprisonment, the **chains** that bound prisoners at this time, to mean the entire experience of being imprisoned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “imprisonment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 20 24 cvw3 figs-metonymy οὐδενὸς λόγου ποιοῦμαι τὴν ψυχὴν τιμίαν ἐμαυτῷ 1 Paul is using the term **word** to mean what he might say by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I do not consider my life to have any value for myself worth speaking of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 20 24 ga6d figs-doublet τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 The terms **race** and **ministry** mean the same thing; **race** is figurative and **ministry** is literal. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could show how the second term is the literal equivalent of the first. Alternate translation: “to finish my race, that is, the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 20 24 m5gc figs-metaphor τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 to finish my race Paul is speaking as if the **ministry** that Jesus gave him were a **race** he was running. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to complete my assignment, that is, the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 20 24 ljgc figs-doublet τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 If you decide to use a plain expression rather than the figurative expression **race**, you could also use another way to express the emphasis that Paul is conveying by using two similar terms together. Alternate translation: “to complete the entire ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 20 24 w8d2 figs-metaphor τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 so as to finish my race and the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus Paul is speaking about this **race** and **ministry** as if they were objects that Jesus gave him and he **received**. He means that Jesus commanded him to do this ministry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that plainly. Alternate translation: “to complete the entire ministry that the Lord Jesus commanded me to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 20 24 hg3l figs-abstractnouns τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to solemnly testify to the gospel of the grace of God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the good news that God graciously saves those who believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 20 25 kj9c figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 And now, behold, I know Paul is using the term **behold** to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 20 25 l59w figs-explicit τὴν βασιλείαν 1 Paul assumes that his listeners will understand that by **kingdom** he means the kingdom of God. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 20 25 aur9 figs-abstractnouns τὴν βασιλείαν 1 among whom I went about proclaiming the kingdom If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **kingdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how God has begun to rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 20 25 cq45 figs-synecdoche οὐκέτι ὄψεσθε τὸ πρόσωπόν μου 1 will see my face no more Paul is using one part of himself, his **face**, to represent all of himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will see me no more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 20 26 rab4 figs-idiom ἐν τῇ σήμερον ἡμέρᾳ 1 This is an idiomatic expression. Your language may have its own way of expressing the same meaning. Alternate translation: “this very day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 20 26 e546 figs-metonymy καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων 1 I am innocent from the blood of all Paul is referring to death as a punishment by association with the way a person’s blood is often shed when they are executed. In this case the death is not physical but spiritual. It is the punishment of spiritual death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for the punishment of spiritual death that any of you might receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 20 26 rs87 figs-explicit καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων 1 Paul assumes that his readers will understand that they would receive a punishment of spiritual death for rejecting Jesus as their Savior from the guilt of sin. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for the punishment of spiritual death that any of you might receive for rejecting Jesus as your Savior from the guilt of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 20 27 g1vx translate-versebridge 0 In this verse, Paul is giving the reason why he is not responsible for any spiritual punishment the people in Ephesus might receive. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 26–27. It might say something like this: “I did not hold back from declaring all the counsel of God to you. Therefore I testify to you this very day that I am innocent of the blood of all of you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
|
||
ACT 20 27 qa9y figs-doublenegatives οὐ γὰρ ὑπεστειλάμην τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι & ὑμῖν 1 For I did not hold back from declaring to you If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **hold back**. Alternate translation: “For I forthrightly declared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 20 27 jl2w figs-hyperbole πᾶσαν τὴν βουλὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὑμῖν 1 Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everything that you needed to know in order to be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 20 28 u52d figs-metaphor τῷ ποιμνίῳ, ἐν ᾧ ὑμᾶς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔθετο ἐπισκόπους, ποιμαίνειν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the flock among which the Holy Spirit has made you overseers to shepherd the church of God Paul is speaking as if the believers were a **flock** of sheep and the elders to whom he is speaking were their shepherds. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers whose leaders the Holy Spirit has made you, to care for the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 20 28 hjh6 figs-metonymy τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου 1 his own blood Paul is referring to death by association with the way people may shed their **blood** when they die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the church of God, which he obtained through his own death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 20 28 cx69 figs-pronouns τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου 1 the church of God, which he purchased with his own blood The word translated **obtained** means to make something one’s own. The pronoun **he** may refer to Jesus, and this would mean that Jesus made the people of the church his own by dying for them. Alternate translation: “the people of the church of God, whom Jesus made his own by dying for them” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 20 28 r66x figs-nominaladj τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου 1 This could also mean that God made the people of the church his own by sending his Son to die for them. In that case the translation would be “through the blood of his Own” and Paul would be using the adjective **own** as a noun to mean God’s own Son. Alternate translation: “the people of the church, whom God made his own through the death of his own Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 20 28 ybzd figs-metonymy τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here the term **church** refers to the people who belong to the church. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 20 29 ka6u figs-metaphor εἰσελεύσονται & λύκοι βαρεῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς, μὴ φειδόμενοι τοῦ ποιμνίου 1 vicious wolves will come in among you, not sparing the flock Paul is continuing to speak as if the believers were a **flock** of sheep and as if the false teachers he describes in the next verse are **vicious wolves**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “false teachers will come to your group of believers and they will harm many of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 20 30 cbq1 figs-rpronouns καὶ ἐξ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν 1 Paul is adding the word **yourselves** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “From within your very own group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
|
||
ACT 20 30 esme figs-metaphor ἀναστήσονται ἄνδρες λαλοῦντες διεστραμμένα 1 In this context, **arise** means to take action to get an enterprise under way, not to get up from a sitting or lying position. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “men will begin to speak perverted things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 20 30 yn8u figs-activepassive διεστραμμένα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “distortions of the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 20 30 ftf4 figs-metaphor τοῦ ἀποσπᾶν τοὺς μαθητὰς ὀπίσω ἑαυτῶν 1 to draw away the disciples after them Paul is speaking as if these false teachers would physically **draw away** people **after them** as they themselves left the fellowship of true believers in Jesus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in order to influence disciples to follow their teaching instead of Jesus’ teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 20 31 hs1m figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην & νουθετῶν 1 I did not stop admonishing If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative word **stop**. Alternate translation: “I continued to warn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 20 31 rvh6 figs-metonymy μετὰ δακρύων 1 with tears Paul is referring to strong emotion by association with the way a person who feels things deeply sheds **tears** of sadness or joy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with deep emotion” or “with genuine feeling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 20 31 rt1h figs-merism νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν 1 for three years I did not stop admonishing … night and day Paul is using the two parts of a full day, **night** and **day**, to mean all the time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “all the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||
ACT 20 31 fc3b figs-hyperbole νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν 1 Paul says **night and day** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “without ever giving up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 20 32 zvz8 figs-personification τῷ Θεῷ, καὶ τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ, τῷ δυναμένῳ 1 to give you the inheritance Paul is speaking of the **word** of God’s **grace** as if it were a living thing that was **able** to do the things he describes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to God who, through the word of his grace, is able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 20 32 ylm3 figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ 1 I am entrusting you to God and to the word of his grace Paul is using the term **word** to mean the message about God’s **grace** that Jesus and his apostles shared by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the message about his grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 20 32 tbeo figs-abstractnouns τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to the message about how God has graciously saved us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 20 32 s7rf figs-metaphor τῷ δυναμένῳ οἰκοδομῆσαι 1 which is able to build you up Paul is speaking as if these believers were a wall or building or other structure and the **word** of God’s **grace** was making them higher and stronger. Alternate translation: “which is able to make you more confident and mature in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 20 32 x5jy figs-metaphor τὴν κληρονομίαν 1 the inheritance Paul is speaking as if the blessings that God gives believers were money or property that a child inherits from a father. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s blessings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 20 32 sdlc figs-activepassive τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “the ones whom God has sanctified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 20 33 yw8a figs-explicit ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ, οὐδενὸς ἐπεθύμησα 1 I coveted no one’s silver The implication is that Paul did not desire any of these things and did not try to get them by charging for his ministry to the Ephesians. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I did not insist on being paid for my work” or “I did not try to become wealthy by teaching you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 20 33 o5jp figs-doublenegatives ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ, οὐδενὸς ἐπεθύμησα 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative phrase **no one** and the negative word **coveted**. Alternate translation: “I served you freely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 20 33 yl6k figs-metonymy ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου 1 Paul is referring to money by association with the way, in this culture, people used **silver** and **gold** as money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 20 33 ipq5 figs-merism ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ 1 no one’s silver, gold, or clothing In this culture, owning expensive **clothing** was a way of storing and displaying wealth. Paul is referring to wealth by naming two of its major components. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the wealth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||
ACT 20 34 f5a3 figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ γινώσκετε 1 You yourselves know Paul is adding the word **yourselves** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “You know very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
|
||
ACT 20 34 ja5v figs-personification ταῖς χρείαις μου & ὑπηρέτησαν αἱ χεῖρες αὗται 1 these hands ministered to my needs and to those who Paul is speaking of his **hands** as if they were a living thing that **ministered** to his **needs**, that is, worked to pay his expenses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I worked with my hands to pay my own expenses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 20 34 izuu figs-ellipsis καὶ τοῖς οὖσι μετ’ ἐμοῦ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and to the needs of those who were with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 20 35 zibu figs-ellipsis πάντα ὑπέδειξα ὑμῖν, ὅτι & δεῖ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I showed you all things in order to demonstrate that it is necessary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 20 35 pvrm figs-hyperbole πάντα & ὅτι & δεῖ 1 Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “consistently, that it is necessary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 20 35 b6o1 figs-nominaladj πάντα 1 Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun. ULT adds the word **things** to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “all kinds of things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 20 35 d1bh figs-metonymy ἀντιλαμβάνεσθαι τῶν ἀσθενούντων 1 Paul is referring to helping people by association with the way that someone might **take hold** of a person who was **weak** to keep him from falling. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to help those who are weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 20 35 tr1d figs-rpronouns τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ, ὅτι αὐτὸς εἶπεν 1 Paul is adding the word **himself** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “the words that none other than our Lord Jesus spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
|
||
ACT 20 35 ps2i figs-metonymy τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the words of the Lord Jesus Paul is using the term **words** to mean a statement that Jesus made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the statement of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 20 35 mj5s figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν, μακάριόν ἐστιν μᾶλλον, διδόναι ἢ λαμβάνειν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “said that it is more blessed to give than to receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 20 36 u3uc translate-symaction θεὶς τὰ γόνατα αὐτοῦ 1 having bowed his knees, he prayed Paul knelt down as a symbolic action to show that he was approaching God humbly in prayer. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “humbly kneeling down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 20 37 pb4r figs-idiom ἐπιπεσόντες ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τοῦ Παύλου 1 having fallen upon Paul’s neck The expression **falling upon** means that the Ephesian elders put their arms around Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “embracing Paul” or “putting their arms around Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 20 37 sze4 translate-symaction κατεφίλουν αὐτόν 1 they were kissing him To kiss someone on the cheek was an expression of brotherly or friendly love in this culture. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “they were kissing him on the cheek to express their brotherly love for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 20 38 npay figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ ᾧ εἰρήκει 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the statement that Paul made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the statement that he had made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 20 38 bs3s figs-synecdoche οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν 1 they were never going to see his face again In his statement, Paul was using one part of himself, his **face**, to represent all of himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that they were never going to see him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 20 38 m0wr figs-quotations εἰρήκει, ὅτι οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he had spoken, ‘You are going to see my face no more’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 21 intro gh1j 0 # Acts 21 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>Acts 21:1-19 describes Paul’s journey to Jerusalem. After he arrived in Jerusalem, the believers there told him that the Jews wanted to harm him and advised what he should do so they would not harm him (verses 20-26). Even though Paul did what the believers told him to do, the Jews tried to kill him. The Romans rescued him and gave him a chance to speak to the Jews.<br><br>The last verse of the chapter ends with an incomplete sentence. Most translations leave the sentence incomplete, as the ULT does.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### “They are all determined to keep the law”<br><br>The Jews in Jerusalem were following the law of Moses. Even those who were following Jesus still kept the law. Both groups thought that Paul had been telling Jews in Greece not to keep the law. But it was only the Gentiles to whom Paul was saying that.<br><br>### Nazarite vow<br><br>The vow that Paul and his three friends made was probably a Nazarite vow, because they shaved their heads ([Acts 21:23](../21/23.md)).<br><br>### Gentiles in the temple<br><br>The Jews accused Paul of bringing a Gentile man into a part of the temple into which God only allowed Jews to go. They thought that God wanted them to punish Paul by killing him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])<br><br>### Roman citizenship<br><br>The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens.
|
||
ACT 21 1 s3h3 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς & ἤλθομεν 1 we … we came As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, throughout this chapter Luke uses the pronoun **we** (as well as the pronouns “us” and “our”) to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers. So use the exclusive form of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 21 1 a428 figs-activepassive ἀποσπασθέντας ἀπ’ αὐτῶν 1 having been parted from them If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having parted from them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 1 e5y6 translate-names Κῶ 1 Cos The word **Cos** is the name of an island in the South Aegean Sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 21 1 p6ss translate-names Ῥόδον 1 Rhodes The word **Rhodes** is the name of an island in the South Aegean Sea south of Cos. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 21 1 x7kg translate-names Πάταρα 1 Patara The word **Patara** is the name of a city on the southwest coast of Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 21 2 nz9k figs-personification πλοῖον διαπερῶν εἰς Φοινίκην 1 a ship crossing over to Phoenicia Luke is speaking of this **ship** as if it were a living thing that was **crossing over** the Mediterranean Sea to Phoenicia on its own. Luke means that the crew of this ship was sailing it to Phoenicia. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a ship whose crew would be sailing it over to Phoenicia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 21 3 vkr2 figs-idiom καταλιπόντες αὐτὴν εὐώνυμον 1 having left it behind on the port side The expression **leaving it behind on the port side** means on the left side of the ship. Since the ship was sailing east, this means that it sailed to the south of the island of Cyprus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express that meaning plainly. However, if the people of your culture are familiar with sea travel, you could use the corresponding expression that is most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having sailed to the south of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 21 3 a429 figs-idiom κατήλθομεν εἰς Τύρον 1 came down to Tyre Luke says that he and his companions **came down** to Tyre because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “landed at Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 21 3 a430 figs-synecdoche ἐκεῖσε & τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον 1 there the ship was unloading its cargo Luke is using the last part of a process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ship was going there to unload its cargo” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 21 3 hwx8 figs-personification τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον 1 the ship was unloading its cargo Luke is speaking of this **ship** as if it were a living thing that was **unloading** its own **cargo**. Luke means that the crew of this ship was doing the unloading. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ship’s crew was to unload its cargo” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 21 4 y35m writing-pronouns οἵτινες τῷ Παύλῳ ἔλεγον 1 who were saying to Paul The pronoun **who** refers to the **disciples** in Tyre. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and you may want to begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “Those disciples kept saying to Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 21 4 a431 figs-synecdoche ἐπιβαίνειν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 to set foot in Jerusalem The disciples were using one part of Paul, his **foot**, to represent all of him in the potential act of going to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to go to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 21 5 a432 figs-idiom ὅτε & ἐγένετο ἡμᾶς ἐξαρτίσαι τὰς ἡμέρας 1 when it happened that we had completed the days Luke is speaking of the seven days when he and his traveling companions were in Tyre as if those days were something they **finished**. Alternate translation: “at the end of those seven days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 21 5 a433 figs-hyperbole πάντων 1 everyone Luke says **everyone** here as a generalization. He means all of the believers with whom he and his companions were meeting in Tyre. Alternate translation: “the believers from Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 21 5 q8xl translate-symaction θέντες τὰ γόνατα ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν προσευξάμενοι 1 having knelt down on the shore and having prayed The travelers and their hosts knelt down as a symbolic action to show that they were approaching God humbly in prayer. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having humbly knelt down on the shore to pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 21 6 a434 writing-pronouns ἐκεῖνοι 1 those The pronoun **those** refers to the believers from Tyre. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the believers from Tyre” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 21 7 hy6e figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς & ἐμείναμεν 1 we … we stayed Here the word **we** refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 21 7 z4nt translate-names Πτολεμαΐδα 1 Ptolemais The word **Ptolemais** is the name of a city that was south of Tyre. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 21 7 ff1s figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 21 8 ay52 figs-explicit ἐκ τῶν ἑπτὰ 1 from the seven Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by **the Seven**, he means the seven men who were chosen in [6:5](../06/05.md) to distribute food and other assistance to the widows among the believers. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “one of the seven men who had been chosen to oversee the assistance that the believers were providing to widows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 8 vi48 grammar-honorifics τοῦ εὐαγγελιστοῦ 1 the Evangelist Luke is using the title **evangelist** to acknowledge the special work that Philip did in proclaiming the gospel. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a descriptive phrase preceded by a comma in your translation rather than a title. Alternate translation: “, a man known for proclaiming the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-honorifics]])
|
||
ACT 21 9 cv8b writing-background δὲ 1 Now Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information about the **daughters** of Philip that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 21 9 rcf4 writing-pronouns τούτῳ & ἦσαν θυγατέρες τέσσαρες 1 to this one were four daughters The pronoun **this** refers to Philip. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Philip had four daughters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 21 10 n3i8 writing-participants κατῆλθέν τις & προφήτης ὀνόματι Ἅγαβος 1 a certain prophet, Agabus by name Luke is using the phrase **a certain prophet** to introduce **Agabus** as a returning participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing returning participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a prophet named Agabus who came down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 21 10 f9cb translate-names Ἅγαβος 1 Agabus The word **Agabus** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [11:28](../11/28.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 21 10 a435 figs-idiom κατῆλθέν τις ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰουδαίας 1 came down from Judea Luke says that Agabus **came down** from Judea because that province is higher in elevation than Caesarea. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation. Alternate translation: “arrived from up in Judea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 21 11 a436 translate-symaction ἄρας τὴν ζώνην τοῦ Παύλου, δήσας ἑαυτοῦ τοὺς πόδας καὶ τὰς χεῖρας 1 having taken the belt of Paul, having bound his own feet and hands Agabus bound his own feet and hands with Paul’s belt as a symbolic action to illustrate the prophecy he was delivering. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having taken the belt of Paul and bound his own feet and hands to illustrate the prophecy he was delivering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 21 11 nq2y figs-quotesinquotes τάδε λέγει τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, τὸν ἄνδρα οὗ ἐστιν ἡ ζώνη αὕτη, οὕτως δήσουσιν ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι, καὶ παραδώσουσιν εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν 1 The Holy Spirit says these things: ‘Thus will the Jews in Jerusalem bind the man of whom is this belt, and they will deliver him into the hands of the Gentiles.’ If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit says that in this way the Jews in Jerusalem will bind the man who owns this belt and that they will deliver him into the hands of the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 21 11 i8u7 figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Agabus is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that plainly. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 21 11 s92d figs-metonymy εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν 1 into the hands of the Gentiles Here, **hands** represents the power of someone, in this case the power of an authority to hold an accused person in custody. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “into the custody of the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 21 11 b59g figs-synecdoche ἐθνῶν 1 of the Gentiles Agabus is using the name of a whole group, **the Gentiles**, to refer to one part of that group, its members who are in authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that plainly. Alternate translation: “of the Gentile authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 21 12 a437 figs-nominaladj οἱ ἐντόπιοι 1 the locals Luke is using the adjective **locals** as a noun to mean the believers who lived in that local area, that is, Caesarea. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the believers who lived in Caesarea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 21 12 a438 figs-explicit παρεκαλοῦμεν ἡμεῖς 1 were urging him Luke means implicitly that this **urging** included weeping over what would happen to Paul if he went to Jerusalem, as the next verse indicates. You can include this information here if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “were weeping and urging” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 12 a439 figs-idiom τοῦ μὴ ἀναβαίνειν & εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 not to go up to Jerusalem Luke says **to go up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Caesarea is lower in elevation. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 21 13 uwt2 figs-rquestion τί ποιεῖτε, κλαίοντες καὶ συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν? 1 What are you doing, weeping and breaking my heart? Paul is using the question form to insist that the believers in Caesarea do not need to weep over what will happen to him if he goes to Jerusalem. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Please do not weep like that, breaking my heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 21 13 bj76 figs-metaphor συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν 1 breaking my heart Paul is speaking as if the believers in Caesarea were literally **breaking** his **heart**. He means that they are making him very sad. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “making me so sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 21 13 k34w figs-metonymy συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν 1 breaking my heart In this context, the **heart** represents the emotions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “making me so sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 21 13 p5e5 figs-activepassive οὐ μόνον δεθῆναι 1 not only to be bound If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “not only for them to bind me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 13 q35x figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 for the name of the Lord Jesus This could mean: (1) that the **name** of Jesus represents his person. Alternate translation: “out of loyalty to the Lord Jesus” (2) that the **name** of Jesus represents his cause in the world. Alternate translation: “for the cause of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 21 14 hwc5 figs-activepassive μὴ πειθομένου & αὐτοῦ 1 he was not being persuaded If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we were not persuading him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 14 zl98 figs-explicit μὴ πειθομένου 1 he was not being persuaded Luke assumes that his readers will understand what he and the others were not persuading Paul about. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “he was not being persuaded not to go to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 14 as1i figs-imperative3p τοῦ Κυρίου τὸ θέλημα γινέσθω 1 Let the will of the Lord happen If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May the will of the Lord happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
|
||
ACT 21 15 a440 figs-idiom ἀνεβαίνομεν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 we went up to Jerusalem Luke says that he and his traveling companions **went up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way of referring in your language to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 21 16 k9kr writing-participants τινι Κυπρίῳ ἀρχαίῳ μαθητῇ 1 a certain Cypriot, an early disciple Luke is using the phrase **a certain early disciple** to introduce **Mnason** as a new participant in the story. The phrase **early disciple** introduces him as one of the first people to believe in Jesus. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “a Cypriot who was one of the first believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 21 16 zd9i translate-names Μνάσωνί & Κυπρίῳ 1 Mnason … Cypriot The word **Mnason** is the name of a man. The word **Cypriot** is the name for someone who lives on or comes from the island of Cyprus. See how you translated it in [11:20](../11/20.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 21 16 a441 figs-activepassive παρ’ ᾧ ξενισθῶμεν 1 with whom we would be hosted If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “who would be hosting us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 17 d3gj figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοί 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 21 20 a1hk writing-pronouns οἱ & ἐδόξαζον & εἶπόν & αὐτῷ 1 they were glorifying … they said to him The pronoun **they** refers in these instances to James and the elders, and the pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “James and the elders were glorifying … they said to Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 21 20 a442 figs-metaphor θεωρεῖς 1 you see Paul does not physically **see** these tens of thousands of Jewish believers. James and the elders mean that he knows about them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 21 20 xki4 figs-metaphor ἀδελφέ 1 brother James and the elders using the term **brother** to mean someone who shares the same faith. Since this expression occurs in direct discourse, you may want to preserve it in your translation to show how these believers addressed one another. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 21 20 c5pu writing-pronouns ὑπάρχουσιν 1 they are In this instance the pronoun **they** refers to the believing Jews whom James and the elders are describing. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these believing Jews are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 21 20 a443 figs-hyperbole πάντες ζηλωταὶ τοῦ νόμου ὑπάρχουσιν 1 they are all zealous for the law James and the elders say **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “they are very zealous for the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 21 21 pyg8 figs-explicit κατηχήθησαν & περὶ σοῦ 1 they have been told about you James and the elders mean implicitly that people **have been told** this about Paul even though it is not true. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “even though it is not true, they have been told about you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 21 e5s4 figs-activepassive κατηχήθησαν 1 they have been told If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “people have told them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 21 sdl3 figs-metonymy ἀποστασίαν & ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως 1 apostasy from Moses James and the elders are referring to the Jewish law by association with **Moses**, through whom God gave the law. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “apostasy from the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 21 21 a444 figs-abstractnouns ἀποστασίαν & ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως 1 apostasy from Moses If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **apostasy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “not to obey the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 21 21 knt4 figs-metaphor μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν 1 not to walk in the customs James and the elders are speaking as if the Jewish **customs** were a path that people walked on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “nor to observe the customs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 21 21 u56t figs-explicit μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν 1 not to walk in the customs By **the customs**, James and the elders implicitly mean the customs that Jews ordinarily observe. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “nor to observe our Jewish customs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 22 a445 figs-ellipsis τί οὖν ἐστιν 1 What therefore is it James and the elders are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “What therefore is it that you should do” or “So what should you do about this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 21 22 a446 figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐστιν 1 What therefore is it James and the elders are using the question form to introduce what they think Paul should do in response to the situation they have described. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You need to do something about this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 21 23 b28b figs-exclusive λέγομεν 1 we say As the General Notes to this chapter indicate, by **we**, James and the elders mean themselves but Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 21 23 b22r translate-unknown εὐχὴν ἔχοντες 1 having a vow See how you translated the term **vow** in [18:18](../18/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 21 23 a447 translate-textvariants ἀφ’ ἑαυτῶν 1 from themselves Some ancient manuscripts read **from themselves.** That would be indicating that these men made the vow on their own initiative. ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “upon themselves.” That would be indicating that the men still needed to fulfill the commitment implicit in the vow to make an offering in the temple at the end of the time during which the conditions of the vow were in effect. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
|
||
ACT 21 24 km4w figs-explicit ἁγνίσθητι σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 be purified with them James and the elders assume that Paul will know that in order to make an offering at the end of the time of their vows, these men will need to be made ceremonially clean so that they can go into the temple area. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “be purified with them so that you can all go to the temple area together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 24 a448 figs-activepassive ἁγνίσθητι 1 be purified If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “participate in a purification ceremony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 24 c3ap figs-explicit δαπάνησον ἐπ’ αὐτοῖς 1 pay the expenses for them James and the elders assume that Paul will know that the **expenses** at the end of a vow included buying a male and female lamb, a ram, grain, and wine for offerings. They also assume that Paul will know that the Jews considered paying such expenses for those who could not afford them to be an act of great piety. Alternate translation: “piously help them buy the animals and foods they will need for offerings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 24 abq6 translate-symaction ἵνα ξυρήσονται τὴν κεφαλήν 1 so that they will shear their heads The men would cut the hair off **their heads** to show that he had fulfilled the vows that they had made to God. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. See how you translated it in [18:18](../18/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 21 24 a449 grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα ξυρήσονται τὴν κεφαλήν 1 so that they will shear their heads Even though James and the elders are using the future tense, they are actually stating the purpose for which Paul would be purified with these four men and pay their expenses. Use a natural way in your language for expressing a purpose. Alternate translation: “so that they may shear their heads” or “so that they will be able to shear their heads to show that they have fulfilled their vows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
|
||
ACT 21 24 a450 figs-idiom ὧν κατήχηνται περὶ σοῦ οὐδέν ἐστιν 1 there is nothing in the things they have been told about you The expression **there is nothing in** these things means that they are not true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the things they have been told about you are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 21 24 nu9v figs-activepassive κατήχηνται περὶ σοῦ 1 they have been told about you If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people have told them about you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 24 a451 figs-rpronouns καὶ αὐτὸς, φυλάσσων τὸν νόμον 1 also keeping the law yourself James and the elders are using the word **yourself** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You too observe the law very carefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
|
||
ACT 21 25 a452 figs-ellipsis ἡμεῖς ἀπεστείλαμεν & φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς 1 we sent that they should guard James and the elders are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “we sent them a letter telling them that they should guard themselves from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 21 25 bpb5 figs-nominaladj τό & εἰδωλόθυτον & πνικτὸν 1 the idol-sacrificed … the strangled James and the elders are using the adjectives **idol-sacrificed** and **strangled** as nouns to mean specific kinds of animals. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “animals that have been offered to idols … animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 21 25 wjd2 figs-metonymy τό & εἰδωλόθυτον & πνικτὸν 1 the idol-sacrificed … the strangled James and the elders are referring by association to meat from animals that have been offered to idols or killed by strangulation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been offered to idols … from what is killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 21 25 nu0i figs-explicit πνικτὸν 1 the strangled God did not allow the Jews to consume blood in any form. Therefore, they could not eat the meat from an animal that had been strangled, because the blood would not have been properly drained from the body of the animal. James and the elders wanted Gentiles who believed in Jesus not to consume blood either. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation, because this meat still contains blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 26 cr14 figs-explicit τοὺς ἄνδρας 1 the men Luke implicitly means the four **men** who had made a vow. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the men who had each made a vow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 26 a453 figs-explicit ἁγνισθεὶς 1 having been purified Luke is referring implicitly to the purification ceremony that allowed Paul and these men to enter the temple area. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “having been purified in order to enter the temple area” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 26 s8z9 figs-activepassive ἁγνισθεὶς 1 having been purified If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having participated in a purification ceremony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 26 xu9r figs-metonymy τὸ ἱερόν 1 the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 21 26 a454 figs-possession διαγγέλλων τὴν ἐκπλήρωσιν τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ ἁγνισμοῦ 1 declaring the fulfillment of the days of purification Luke is using the possessive form **the days of purification** to mean the days during which the men’s vows were in effect, at the end of which there needed to be a **purification** ceremony. Alternate translation: “declaring that the men had kept their vows for the number of days that they had promised and that they could now be purified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 21 26 a455 figs-abstractnouns διαγγέλλων τὴν ἐκπλήρωσιν τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ ἁγνισμοῦ 1 announcing the fulfillment of the days of purification If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **purification**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “declaring that the men had kept their vows for the number of days that they had promised and that they could now be purified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 21 26 pvy3 figs-explicit τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ ἁγνισμοῦ 1 of the days of purification In this case Luke is referring implicitly to a separate **purification** process from the one the men fulfilled in order to enter the temple area. He means the purification process that came at the end of a vow. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of the days of purification at the end of their vows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 26 gc23 figs-activepassive ἕως οὗ προσηνέχθη ὑπὲρ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου αὐτῶν ἡ προσφορά 1 until the offering was offered for each one of them If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “until each one of them offered an offering for himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 27 j9zm figs-explicit αἱ ἑπτὰ ἡμέραι 1 the seven days Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he means the **seven days** that were customarily required for the offerings and purification ceremony at the end of a vow. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the seven days that it took to purify these men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 27 a456 figs-explicit οἱ ἀπὸ τῆς Ἀσίας Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews from Asia Luke implicitly means some **Jews from Asia** who had come to Jerusalem for the Pentecost festival, as described in [20:16](../20/16.md). You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “some Jews from Asia who had come to Jerusalem for the Pentecost festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 27 k4l1 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 21 27 a457 figs-hyperbole συνέχεον πάντα τὸν ὄχλον 1 were agitating the whole crowd Luke says **whole** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “were making many people in the crowd very agitated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 21 27 a458 figs-explicit τὸν ὄχλον 1 the whole crowd By the **crowd**, Luke implicitly means the crowd of people who had come to Jerusalem from all over the Roman Empire for the Pentecost festival. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the whole crowd of people who had come to Jerusalem for the Pentecost festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 27 mks6 figs-metonymy ἐπέβαλον ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας 1 laid their hands on him The expression **laid hands on** means to arrest or detain someone, by association with the way that arresting officers or concerned citizens might physically take hold of a person with their **hands**. Alternate translation: “they held onto him” or “they detained him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 21 28 a459 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται 1 Men, Israelites This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 21 28 a460 figs-hyperbole πάντας πανταχῇ 1 all everywhere The Jews from Asia are saying **all** and **everywhere** as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “people throughout the empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 21 28 sfg3 figs-explicit τοῦ λαοῦ, καὶ τοῦ νόμου, καὶ τοῦ τόπου τούτου 1 the people and the law and this place The Jews from Asia assume that their listeners will understand that they are referring to the special status of the people of Israel as God’s chosen people, the law of Moses, and the temple in Jerusalem. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel and the law of Moses and this temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 28 jc9q figs-explicit εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν 1 into the temple The Jews from Asia assume that their listeners will understand that only Jewish males were allowed in certain areas of the courtyard of the Jerusalem **temple** and that they are accusing Paul of bringing **Greeks** into those areas. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “into areas of the temple courtyard where they are not allowed to go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 28 a461 figs-metonymy τὸ ἱερὸν 1 the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 21 29 t2z7 translate-versebridge 0 In this verse, Luke is giving the reason why the Jews from the province of Asia thought that Paul had “defiled” the temple area by bringing “Greeks” into it. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 28–29. It might say something like this: “Now some Jews from Asia had seen Trophimus the Ephesian with Paul in the city. When they saw Paul in the temple when the seven days were about to be finished, they were thinking that Paul had brought Trophimus into the temple. So they were agitating the whole crowd, and they laid their hands on him, shouting, ‘Men, Israelites, help! This is the man teaching all everywhere against the people and the law and this place. And he has even both brought Greeks into the temple and has defiled this holy place.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
|
||
ACT 21 29 h1uu translate-names Τρόφιμον 1 Trophimus The word **Trophimus** is the name of a man. See how you translated this name in [20:4](../20/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 21 30 st3f figs-metonymy ἐκινήθη & ἡ πόλις ὅλη 1 the whole city was excited Here, the word **city** means the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all the people of the city became excited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 21 30 upl8 figs-hyperbole ἐκινήθη & ἡ πόλις ὅλη 1 the whole city was excited Luke says **the whole** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the people of the city were very excited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 21 30 a462 figs-activepassive ἐκινήθη & ἡ πόλις ὅλη 1 the whole city was excited If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the people of the city were very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 30 a463 figs-metonymy ἔξω τοῦ ἱεροῦ 1 outside of the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “of the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 21 30 mmaa figs-activepassive ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι 1 the doors were shut If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it would have been the temple gatekeepers. Alternate translation: “the gatekeepers shut the doors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 30 xd6r figs-explicit ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι 1 the doors were shut The implication is that the gatekeepers **shut** the **doors** to the temple courtyard once the mob dragged Paul outside so that the mob would not defile the temple precincts by killing Paul within them. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the gatekeepers shut the doors so that the mob would not defile the temple courtyard by killing Paul there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 31 a464 writing-pronouns ζητούντων τε αὐτὸν ἀποκτεῖναι 1 And as they were seeking to kill him The pronoun **they** refers to the mob, and the pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “And as the mob was seeking to kill Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 21 31 d6vt figs-personification ἀνέβη φάσις τῷ χιλιάρχῳ τῆς σπείρης 1 a report came up to the commander of the guard Luke is speaking of this **report** as if they were a living thing that **came up to the commander** on its own. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a messenger brought a report to the commander of the guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 21 31 hu5r figs-idiom ἀνέβη φάσις τῷ χιλιάρχῳ τῆς σπείρης 1 a report came up to the commander of the guard Luke uses the phrase **came up ** because the commander was in a fortress connected to the temple that was higher in elevation than the temple courtyard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a messenger brought a report to the commander of the guard up in the temple fortress” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 21 31 p85a translate-unknown τῷ χιλιάρχῳ τῆς σπείρης 1 to the chiliarch of the cohort A **chiliarch** was an officer in the Roman army who was in charge of a group of 1,000 soldiers. A **cohort** was a large military guard unit. Alternate translation: “to the commander of the military guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 21 31 u65r figs-metonymy ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 all Jerusalem was agitated Here, the word **Jerusalem** means the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem were agitated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 21 31 zgas figs-hyperbole ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 all Jerusalem was agitated Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem were very agitated” or “the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem were rioting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 21 31 a465 figs-activepassive ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 all Jerusalem was agitated If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “something was greatly agitating the people who lived in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 32 j81t writing-pronouns ὃς ἐξαυτῆς παραλαβὼν στρατιώτας καὶ ἑκατοντάρχας, κατέδραμεν ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 who, immediately taking soldiers and centurions, ran down to them The pronoun **who** refers to the chiliarch (the Roman commander), and the pronoun **them** refer to the people who were rioting. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The commander immediately took soldiers and centurions and ran down to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 21 32 e4rj translate-unknown ἑκατοντάρχας 1 centurions A **centurion** was an officer in the Roman army who was in charge of a group of 100 soldiers. See how you translated it in [10:1](../10/01.md). Alternate translation: “their commanding officers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 21 33 xd9w figs-explicit ἐκέλευσε δεθῆναι ἁλύσεσι δυσί 1 commanded him to be bound with two chains These means implicitly that the commander ordered his soldiers to chain Paul to one soldier on each side of him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “commanded him to be chained to one soldier on each side of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 33 zi4l figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσε δεθῆναι 1 commanded him to be bound If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanded his soldiers to bind him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 33 y6zw figs-quotations ἐπυνθάνετο τίς εἴη καὶ τί ἐστιν πεποιηκώς 1 he was asking who he might be and what he had done It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he was asking, ‘Who is this? What has he done?’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 21 33 fi22 figs-explicit ἐπυνθάνετο 1 he was asking Luke means implicitly that the commander **was asking** the people in the crowd these questions, not that he was asking them of Paul. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “he was asking the people in the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 21 34 k35e writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ & αὐτὸν 1 he … him The pronoun **he** refers to the commander, and the pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the commander … Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 21 34 a466 figs-nominaladj τὸ ἀσφαλὲς 1 the certain Luke is using the adjective **certain** as a noun to mean what was reliable or true about Paul. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the truth about Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 21 34 qcc6 figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσεν ἄγεσθαι αὐτὸν 1 ordered him to be brought If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “ordered his soldiers to bring Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 35 h9n7 figs-activepassive βαστάζεσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπὸ τῶν στρατιωτῶν 1 he was carried by the soldiers If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the soldiers carried him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 35 a467 figs-abstractnouns διὰ τὴν βίαν τοῦ ὄχλου 1 because of the violence of the crowd If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **violence**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because the crowd was so violent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 21 36 kax6 figs-euphemism αἶρε αὐτόν 1 Take him away The crowd is using somewhat milder and less exact language to ask for Paul’s death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a mild way of referring to this in your language or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Put him to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
|
||
ACT 21 37 j9xk figs-activepassive μέλλων & εἰσάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν παρεμβολὴν, ὁ Παῦλος 1 as Paul was about to be brought into the fortress If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as the soldiers were about to bring Paul inside the fortress, Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 21 37 a468 ὁ Παῦλος λέγει 1 Paul says To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Paul said”
|
||
ACT 21 37 a469 figs-quotations ὁ Παῦλος λέγει τῷ χιλιάρχῳ, εἰ ἔξεστίν μοι εἰπεῖν τι πρὸς σέ? 1 Paul says to the chiliarch, “If it is permitted for me to say something to you?” Luke is recording how Paul used the typical form in his language for asking questions. It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “Paul asked the chiliarch if it was permitted for him to say something to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 21 37 p5cd figs-rquestion Ἑλληνιστὶ γινώσκεις? 1 Do you know Greek? The commander is using the question form to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You know Greek!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 21 38 xx2w figs-rquestion οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος, ὁ πρὸ τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν, ἀναστατώσας καὶ ἐξαγαγὼν εἰς τὴν ἔρημον τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους ἄνδρας τῶν σικαρίων? 1 Are you not then the Egyptian & ? The commander is using the question form to emphasize the conclusion he has drawn about Paul. Jews who spoke Greek typically came from somewhere outside of Palestine, and since Paul seems to be someone whom the Jews in Jerusalem consider to be very dangerous, the commander concludes that he must be **the Egyptian** he knows about. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Then you must not be the Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the 4,000 men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 21 38 p2ym translate-transliterate τῶν σικαρίων 1 of the Sicarii The term **Sicarii** is a Latin word. Luke spells it out using Greek letters so his readers will know how it sounds. The term means an assassin and it comes from the Latin word for a dagger. In this context, it refers to a group of Jewish rebels who carried daggers under their robes and killed Romans and people who supported the Romans. In your translation, you could spell this the way it sounds in your language, or you could use a term with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “of the Assassins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
|
||
ACT 21 39 a470 translate-names Ταρσεὺς 1 a Tarsian The word **Tarsian** is the name for someone who comes from the city of Tarsus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 21 39 a471 figs-litotes οὐκ ἀσήμου πόλεως πολίτης 1 a not undistinguished city Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a very distinguished city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 21 39 a139 figs-imperative ἐπίτρεψόν μοι 1 allow me This is an imperative, but as Paul’s phrase **I ask of you** shows, it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please allow me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
|
||
ACT 21 40 qp2q writing-pronouns ἐπιτρέψαντος & αὐτοῦ 1 when he had allowed The pronoun **he** refers to the Roman commander. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the commander allowed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 21 40 rk1y translate-symaction κατέσεισε τῇ χειρὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 motioned with his hand to the people This likely means that Paul waved his hand to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. He did this to quiet them. Alternate translation: “waved his hand to the people to signal that he was about to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 22 intro gq5g 0 # Acts 22 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>This is the second account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: [Acts 9](../09/01.md) and [Acts 26](../26/01.md))<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### “In the Hebrew language”<br><br>Most Jews at this time spoke Aramaic and Greek. Most of the people who spoke Hebrew were educated Jewish scholars. This is why the people paid attention when Paul started speaking in Hebrew.<br><br>### “The Way”<br><br>No one knows for sure who first started calling believers “followers of the Way.” This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God.<br><br>### Roman citizenship<br><br>The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a noncitizen.
|
||
ACT 22 1 lrs0 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 Men, brothers and fathers This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You brothers and fathers of mine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 22 1 xe46 figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 Men, brothers and fathers Paul is using the word **brothers** to refer to his fellow Israelites. He is using the word **fathers** to refer either to Jewish leaders who may be present or to Jewish men who are older than he is. In both cases he is speaking respectfully. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites and you leaders of Israel” or “My fellow Israelites young and old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 22 1 pe8t figs-imperative ἀκούσατέ μου τῆς πρὸς ὑμᾶς νυνὶ 1 hear to my defense to you now This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please listen as I explain myself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
|
||
ACT 22 2 a472 figs-abstractnouns μᾶλλον παρέσχον ἡσυχίαν 1 they granted more quietness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **quietness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they became even more quiet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 22 3 a473 figs-activepassive γεγεννημένος ἐν Ταρσῷ τῆς Κιλικίας 1 born in Tarsus of Cilicia If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a native of Tarsus of Cilicia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 22 3 d4dx figs-metonymy ἀνατεθραμμένος δὲ ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ, παρὰ τοὺς πόδας Γαμαλιήλ, πεπαιδευμένος 1 but educated in this city at the feet of Gamaliel, instructed Paul is using the phrase **at the feet** to refer to Gamaliel himself by association with the way a student in this culture would sit at the feet of a teacher (that is, on the ground in front of a teacher) while learning from him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “but educated in this city by Gamaliel, instructed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 22 3 g311 figs-activepassive ἀνατεθραμμένος δὲ ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ, παρὰ τοὺς πόδας Γαμαλιήλ, πεπαιδευμένος 1 but educated in this city at the feet of Gamaliel, instructed If your language does not use these passive forms, you could state this using active forms. It may be helpful to begin new sentences here. Alternate translation: “However, Gamaliel educated me in this city. He instructed me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 22 3 b1dq translate-names Γαμαλιήλ 1 of Gamaliel The word **Gamaliel** is the name of the man who was one of the most prominent teachers of the Jewish law at this time. See how you translated his name in [5:34](../05/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 22 3 iz4g figs-abstractnouns κατὰ ἀκρίβειαν 1 according to the strictness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **strictness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to the most strict interpretation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 22 3 lqk7 figs-metaphor πατρῴου 1 of our fathers Peter is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 22 3 dbl4 καθὼς πάντες ὑμεῖς ἐστε σήμερον 1 just as all of you are today Paul compares himself with the crowd. Alternate translation: “in the same way that all of you are today”
|
||
ACT 22 4 dr8c figs-abstractnouns ὃς ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν ἐδίωξα ἄχρι θανάτου 1 who persecuted this Way unto death If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who persecuted this Way to the point of killing those who belonged to it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 22 4 a474 writing-pronouns ὃς & ἐδίωξα 1 who persecuted Paul is using the pronoun **who** to refer to himself. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “I persecuted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 22 4 jy3z figs-metonymy ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν 1 this Way Here, **this Way** represents the people who belonged to the group called the Way. Alternate translation: “I persecuted the people who belonged to the group called the Way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 22 4 bk4c translate-names ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν 1 this Way As the General Notes to chapter 9 explain, **the Way** was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it in your translation. See what you did in [9:2](../09/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 22 5 v2km writing-politeness μαρτυρεῖ μοι 1 testifies for me Paul is speaking politely of the high priest as if it may be assumed that he will willingly testify to what he knows to be true. Use a form in your language that implicitly suggests good will on the part of someone. Alternate translation: “will tell you about me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 22 5 a475 figs-metonymy τὸ πρεσβυτέριον 1 the elderhood Paul is referring to the Sanhedrin by association with the way it was composed of the elders of the Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 22 5 in72 figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 the brothers Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 22 5 y82b figs-activepassive ἄξων & τοὺς ἐκεῖσε ὄντας, δεδεμένους εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ 1 going to bring back bound to Jerusalem those who were there If your language does not use the passive form **bound**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to bind those who were there and bring them back to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 22 5 ht9f figs-activepassive ἵνα τιμωρηθῶσιν 1 in order that they might be punished If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order that they might receive punishment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 22 6 w4l7 writing-newevent ἐγένετο δέ μοι 1 It happened to me that Paul is using this phrase to introduce a significant development in his story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 22 7 a476 figs-quotesinquotes φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι, Σαοὺλ, Σαούλ, τί με διώκεις? 1 a voice saying to me, ‘Saul, Saul, why are you persecuting me?’ If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “someone addressing me by name and asking me why I was persecuting him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 22 7 d6nd figs-synecdoche φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι 1 a voice saying to me Paul is using one part of this speaker, his **voice**, to represent all of him in the act of speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “someone saying to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 22 7 a477 figs-rquestion τί με διώκεις? 1 why are you persecuting me? The voice is using the question form to rebuke Saul. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate its words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the rebuke in another way. Alternate translation: “you should not be persecuting me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 22 8 a478 figs-quotesinquotes ἐγὼ δὲ ἀπεκρίθην, τίς εἶ, κύριε? εἶπέν τε πρὸς ἐμέ, ἐγώ εἰμι Ἰησοῦς ὁ Ναζωραῖος, ὃν σὺ διώκεις 1 And I answered, ‘Who are you, Lord?’ And he said to me, ‘I am Jesus the Nazarene, whom you are persecuting’ If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And in response I asked this divine figure who he was, and he told me that he was Jesus the Nazarene, whom I was persecuting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 22 8 a479 writing-politeness τίς εἶ, κύριε 1 Who are you, Lord Paul was not yet acknowledging that Jesus was **Lord**. He used that respectful title because he recognized that he was speaking to someone of divine power. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use a similar term of respect. Alternate translation: “Who are you, Sir” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 22 9 h95h figs-idiom τὴν & φωνὴν οὐκ ἤκουσαν 1 they did not hear the voice In this context the word **hear** likely means “understand,” since Luke says in [9:7](../09/07.md) that the men traveling with Paul did actually hear the voice. You may wish to make this clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “they did not understand the voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 22 10 a480 figs-quotesinquotes εἶπον δέ, τί ποιήσω, Κύριε? ὁ δὲ Κύριος εἶπεν πρός με, ἀναστὰς πορεύου εἰς Δαμασκόν, κἀκεῖ σοι λαληθήσεται περὶ πάντων ὧν τέτακταί σοι ποιῆσαι 1 But I said, ‘What should I do, Lord?’ And the Lord said to me, ‘Arising, go into Damascus, and there it will be told to you about all that has been appointed to you to do.’ If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But I asked the Lord what I should do, and the Lord told me to get up and go into Damascus, because there it would be told to me about all that had been appointed to me to do’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 22 10 a91a figs-activepassive σοι λαληθήσεται 1 it will be told to you If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone will tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 22 10 a481 figs-activepassive πάντων ὧν τέτακταί 1 all that has been appointed If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “all that God has appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 22 11 n1kb figs-abstractnouns ἀπὸ τῆς δόξης τοῦ φωτὸς ἐκείνου 1 because of the glory of that light If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because that light was so bright” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 22 11 qyf0 figs-activepassive χειραγωγούμενος ὑπὸ τῶν συνόντων μοι 1 being led by the hand by the ones being with me If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “with the ones being with me leading me by the hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 22 11 a482 figs-go ἦλθον 1 I came In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “I went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
|
||
ACT 22 12 a17q writing-participants τις ἀνὴρ εὐλαβὴς 1 a certain devout man Paul is using the phrase **a certain devout man** to introduce **Ananias** as a new participant in his story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 22 12 e7uw figs-activepassive μαρτυρούμενος ὑπὸ πάντων τῶν κατοικούντων Ἰουδαίων 1 being attested by all the Jews living there If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom all the Jews there attested” or “of whom all the Jews there spoke well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 22 13 a483 figs-quotesinquotes εἶπέν μοι, Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφέ, ἀνάβλεψον 1 said to me, ‘Saul, brother, look up.’ If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “addressed me as a brother and told me to look up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 22 13 un4g figs-metaphor Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφέ 1 Saul, brother Ananias was using the word **brother** as a title for **Saul**. The two men were not actual brothers. This could mean: (1) that Ananias was already addressing Saul as someone who shared the same faith. Alternate translation: “Saul, my fellow believer” (2) that Ananias is addressing Saul as a fellow Israelite, as the word “brother” is used in [3:17](../03/17.md) and many other places in this book. Alternate translation: “Saul, my fellow Israelite” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 22 13 a484 figs-imperative ἀνάβλεψον 1 look up In one sense, this was not a command that Paul was capable of obeying, since he could not see. Instead, it was a command that directly caused him to be healed, if he would **look up** as if he could see. Alternate translation: “if you look up, you will be able to see” or see next note for another possibility. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative)
|
||
ACT 22 13 x3kc figs-idiom ἀνάβλεψον 1 look up The expression **look up** can also mean “see again,” that is, to have one’s sight restored. If this is the meaning, then Ananias was telling Paul what Jesus was going to do for him. Alternate translation: “Jesus is restoring your sight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 22 13 se47 figs-idiom αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 in the same hour In the ancient world, an **hour** was the shortest time span that people envisioned. In this context, the term does not mean a literal hour of 60 minutes, but it means the shortest time imaginable. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “right at that instant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 22 13 x4s0 figs-explicit κἀγὼ & ἀνέβλεψα εἰς αὐτόν 1 And … I looked up to him Paul means implicitly that when he **looked up** at Ananias, he was able to see him clearly. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “And … when I looked up at him, I could see him” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 22 14 a485 figs-quotesinquotes ὁ δὲ εἶπεν, ὁ Θεὸς τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν προεχειρίσατό σε γνῶναι τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ καὶ ἰδεῖν τὸν Δίκαιον, καὶ ἀκοῦσαι φωνὴν ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 And he said, ‘The God of our fathers appointed you to know his will and to see the Righteous One and to hear the voice from his mouth If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And he told me that the God of our fathers had appointed me to know his will and to see the Righteous One and to hear the voice from his mouth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 22 14 a486 figs-metaphor τῶν πατέρων 1 fathers Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 22 14 a487 figs-nominaladj τὸν Δίκαιον 1 the Righteous One Ananias is using the adjective **Righteous** as a noun to mean a particular person who is righteous. ULT adds the word **one** to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the One who is righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 22 14 a488 figs-metonymy τὸν Δίκαιον 1 the Righteous One Ananias is referring to the Messiah by association with the way the Messiah was **Righteous**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 22 14 dg8q figs-explicitinfo φωνὴν ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 the voice from his own mouth It might seem that the expression **the voice from his own mouth** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “his own voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
|
||
ACT 22 15 a489 figs-quotesinquotes ὅτι ἔσῃ μάρτυς αὐτῷ πρὸς πάντας ἀνθρώπους, ὧν ἑώρακας καὶ ἤκουσας 1 for you will be a witness for him to all men of what you have seen and heard If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation, continuing from the previous verse: “because I would be a witness for him to all men of what I had seen and heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 22 15 i5q8 figs-gendernotations πρὸς πάντας ἀνθρώπους 1 to all men Although the term **men** is masculine, Ananias was using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 22 16 a490 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ νῦν τί μέλλεις? ἀναστὰς, βάπτισαι καὶ ἀπόλουσαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας σου, ἐπικαλεσάμενος τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 And now, why are you delaying? Arising, be baptized and wash away your sins, calling on his name.’ If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He asked me why I was delaying, and he told me to arise and be baptized and wash away my sins, calling on the name of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 22 16 bhg9 καὶ νῦν 1 And now Here, **now** does not mean “at this moment”; Ananias is using the term to draw attention to the important point that follows. Alternate translation: “So listen”
|
||
ACT 22 16 a491 figs-idiom ἀναστὰς 1 Arising Here the term **arising** means that Ananias wanted Paul to take action, not that he wanted him to stand up from a sitting or lying position. Alternate translation: “Come on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 22 16 lt2i figs-activepassive βάπτισαι 1 be baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “receive baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 22 16 zr5p figs-metaphor καὶ ἀπόλουσαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας σου 1 and wash away your sins Ananias is speaking as if Paul could literally **wash away** his **sins**. He is using a word picture to convey his meaning. He means that just as washing one’s body removes dirt, if Paul repents and asks Jesus for forgiveness, Jesus releases him from the guilt and power sin. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to show that you are asking Jesus to free you from sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 22 16 g5dq figs-metonymy ἐπικαλεσάμενος τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 calling on his name Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “calling on him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 22 16 a492 figs-explicit τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 his name By **his name**, Ananias implicitly means the name of Jesus. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the name of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 22 17 its2 writing-newevent ἐγένετο δέ μοι 1 And it happened to me that Paul is using this phrase to introduce a significant development in his story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new development. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 22 18 a493 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ ἰδεῖν αὐτὸν λέγοντά μοι, σπεῦσον καὶ ἔξελθε ἐν τάχει ἐξ Ἰερουσαλήμ, διότι οὐ παραδέξονταί σου μαρτυρίαν περὶ ἐμοῦ 1 And I saw him saying to me, ‘Hurry and go away in haste from Jerusalem, because they will not accept your testimony about me’ If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And I saw him telling me to hurry and go away in haste from Jerusalem because they would not accept my testimony about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 22 18 jy2c writing-pronouns αὐτὸν 1 him The pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 22 18 a494 figs-doublet σπεῦσον καὶ ἔξελθε ἐν τάχει 1 Hurry and go away in haste The expressions **Hurry** and **in haste** mean similar things. Jesus was using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Go away as fast as you can” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 22 19 a495 figs-quotesinquotes κἀγὼ εἶπον, Κύριε, αὐτοὶ ἐπίστανται ὅτι ἐγὼ ἤμην φυλακίζων καὶ δέρων κατὰ τὰς συναγωγὰς, τοὺς πιστεύοντας ἐπὶ σέ 1 And I said, ‘Lord, they themselves know that I was imprisoning and beating by synagogues those who believed in you If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And I told the Lord that they themselves knew that I was imprisoning and beating by synagogues those who believed in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 22 19 q5cl writing-pronouns αὐτοὶ ἐπίστανται 1 they themselves know The pronouns **they themselves** refers to the non-believing Jews in Jerusalem. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jews here in Jerusalem who do not believe in you know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 22 19 im4n figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ ἐπίστανται 1 they themselves know Paul is adding the word **themselves** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “they know very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
|
||
ACT 22 20 a496 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ ὅτε ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου, καὶ αὐτὸς ἤμην ἐφεστὼς, καὶ συνευδοκῶν, καὶ φυλάσσων τὰ ἱμάτια τῶν ἀναιρούντων αὐτόν 1 And when the blood of Stephen your witness was spilled, I myself was also standing by and agreeing and guarding the outer garments of the ones killing him’ If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “I told him that when the blood of Stephen his witness was spilled, I myself was also standing by and agreeing and guarding the outer garments of the ones killing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 22 20 udrd figs-activepassive ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου 1 the blood of Stephen your witness was spilled If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, recall from chapter 7 that it was the enemies of Stephen. Alternate translation: “the enemies of Stephen your witness spilled his blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 22 20 y7t1 figs-metonymy ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου 1 the blood of Stephen your witness was spilled Paul is referring to Stephen’s death by association with the way his **blood** was **spilled** when his enemies killed him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the enemies of Stephen your witness killed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 22 21 a497 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ εἶπεν πρός με, πορεύου, ὅτι ἐγὼ εἰς ἔθνη μακρὰν ἐξαποστελῶ σε 1 But he said to me, ‘Go, because I will send you far away to the Gentiles’” If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But he told me to go because he would send me far away to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 22 22 a498 figs-metonymy τούτου τοῦ λόγου 1 this word This could mean: (1) that the crowd became upset when they heard the specific **word** “Gentiles.” Alternate translation: “they heard the word ‘Gentiles’” (2) that the term **word** means what Paul said by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul says this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 22 22 a499 figs-metaphor ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν λέγοντες 1 they lifted up their voice, saying Luke is speaking as if the crowd in Jerusalem literally **lifted up** its **voice**. He means that they spoke loudly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they shouted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 22 22 a500 τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν 1 their voice If you would like to retain the metaphor in your translation of “lifting up a voice” but it would be unusual in your language to speak as if a whole group of people had one **voice**, you could make this plural. Alternate translation: “their voices”
|
||
ACT 22 22 ta8z figs-metonymy αἶρε ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς τὸν τοιοῦτον 1 Remove such a one from the earth The crowd is referring to Paul’s death by association with the way they would **remove** him **from the earth** if they killed him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Kill such a one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 22 22 a501 figs-explicit οὐ & καθῆκεν αὐτὸν ζῆν 1 it was not right for him to live The crowd meant implicitly that it was **not right** for Paul to **live** even long enough to offer the explanation he was giving. You can indicate this in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “we should have killed him even before he spoke to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 22 23 b6a7 translate-symaction ῥιπτούντων τὰ ἱμάτια 1 casting off their outer garments When the people in the crowd removed their outer garments, this was at least a symbolic action indicating that they felt they should stone Paul to death. They took off their long robes as they would have done in order to throw stones at Paul more easily. But some of the people may actually have intended to try to stone Paul even though he was in the custody of the Roman soldiers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this in your translation. Alternate translation: “casting off their outer garments as if they were going to throw stones at Paul to kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 22 23 a502 translate-symaction κονιορτὸν βαλλόντων εἰς τὸν ἀέρα 1 throwing dust into the air This could mean: (1) that the people in the crowd were **throwing dust into the air** to symbolize how they wanted to throw stones at Paul, who was on the steps above them. Alternate translation: “throwing dust into the air as if they were throwing stones at Paul” (2) that the people in the crowd were doing this to demonstrate how angry they were. Alternate translation: “angrily throwing dust into the air” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 22 24 h6gp figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσεν & εἰσάγεσθαι αὐτὸν 1 ordered him to be brought If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “ordered his soldiers to bring him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 22 24 sth6 τὴν παρεμβολήν 1 the fortress This **fortress** was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in [21:34](../21/34.md).
|
||
ACT 22 24 og3n figs-activepassive εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν 1 commanding him to be examined by scourges If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to examine him by scourges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 22 24 pz47 figs-metonymy εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν 1 commanding him to be examined by scourges The commander did not want **scourges** to conduct this examination. Luke is referring to the act of whipping someone by association with the instruments, **scourges**, that the commander ordered his soldiers to use for whipping. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to examine him by scourging him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 22 24 a503 translate-unknown μάστιξιν 1 by scourges The term **scourges** describes leathern thongs that had small pieces of metal attached to them to inflict more damage. Your language may have a term for a similar item that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “by whips” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 22 25 ar63 writing-pronouns προέτειναν 1 they stretched … out The pronoun **they** refers to the soldiers who were going to whip Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the soldiers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 22 25 a504 figs-quotations εἶπεν πρὸς τὸν ἑστῶτα ἑκατόνταρχον ὁ Παῦλος, εἰ ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον, ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν μαστίζειν? 1 Paul said to the centurion standing by, “If it is lawful for you to scourge a man Roman and uncondemned?” Luke is recording how Paul used the typical form in his language for asking questions. It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “Paul asked the centurion who was standing by whether it was lawful for him and his soliders to scourge a man who was a Roman and had not been condemned.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 22 25 yjw3 figs-rquestion εἰ ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον, ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν μαστίζειν? 1 If it is lawful for you to whip a man Roman and uncondemned? Paul is using the question form to challenge the right of the centurion and his soldiers to whip him. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is not lawful for you to whip a man who is a Roman citizen and who is uncondemned!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 22 25 a505 figs-explicit ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον 1 a man Roman and uncondemned In this context, the term **Roman** implicitly indicates Roman citizenship. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “a man who is a Roman citizen and who has not been condemned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 22 26 pca7 figs-rquestion τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν? 1 What are you about to do? The centurion is using the question form to warn the commander that he should not have Paul whipped. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not be doing this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 22 26 a506 figs-synecdoche τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν? 1 What are you about to do? The centurion is speaking of the commander, one person who was involved in having Paul whipped, to mean everyone who was involved. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “We should not be doing this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 22 26 a507 figs-explicit Ῥωμαῖός 1 a Roman As in the previous verse, here the term **Roman** implicitly indicates Roman citizenship. Alternate translation: “a Roman citizen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 22 27 pe31 writing-pronouns αὐτῷ & ὁ 1 to him … he The pronouns **them**, **him**, and **he** refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … he” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 22 28 dr2w figs-explicit ἐγὼ πολλοῦ κεφαλαίου τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην 1 I bought this citizenship with a large amount of money The commander is saying implicitly that he does not believe that Paul is a Roman citizen, because Paul does not appear to be wealthy enough to have purchased citizenship. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “It requires a large sum of money to purchase citizenship, and you do not seem to be wealthy, so I do not believe that you are a citizen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 22 28 r79c figs-abstractnouns ἐγὼ πολλοῦ κεφαλαίου τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην 1 I bought this citizenship with a large sum of money If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **citizenship**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I became a citizen by paying a large sum of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 22 28 a508 figs-ellipsis ἐγὼ & καὶ γεγέννημαι 1 I indeed was born Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I indeed was born a citizen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 22 28 rly1 figs-activepassive ἐγὼ & καὶ γεγέννημαι 1 I indeed was born If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I indeed have been a citizen since birth” or “I indeed inherited citizenship from my father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 22 29 a509 figs-explicit ἐφοβήθη 1 was afraid The implication is that the commander **was afraid** that the higher Roman authorities would punish him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “was afraid that the higher Roman authorities would punish him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 22 30 a510 figs-nominaladj τὸ ἀσφαλὲς 1 the certain Luke is using the adjective **certain** as a noun to mean what was reliable or true about Paul. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 22 30 kx58 figs-explicit ἔλυσεν αὐτόν 1 he released him This means implicitly not that the commander **released** Paul from custody but that he freed Paul from the chains that were binding him to one solider on each side of him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “he ordered his soldiers to unchain Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 23 intro gbw5 0 # Acts 23 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 23:5.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Resurrection of the dead<br><br>The Pharisees believed that after people died, they would become alive again and God would either reward them or punish them. The Sadducees believed that once people died, they stayed dead and would never become alive again. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/raise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])<br><br>### “Called a curse”<br><br>Some Jews promised God that they would not eat or drink until they killed Paul, and they asked God to punish them if they did not do what they had promised to do.<br><br>### Roman citizenship<br><br>The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen.<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Whitewash<br><br>This is a common metaphor in Scripture for appearing to be good or clean or righteous when one is evil or unclean or unrighteous. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 23 1 lrs1 figs-idiom ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “brothers of mine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 23 1 lrs5 figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers Paul is using the word **brothers** to refer respectfully to his fellow Israelites. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 23 1 nn2q figs-hyperbole πάσῃ συνειδήσει ἀγαθῇ 1 in all good conscience Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in careful obedience to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 23 2 yz4n translate-names Ἁνανίας 1 Ananias **Ananias** is the name of a man. See how you translated the same name for two other men in [5:1](../05/01.md) and [9:10](../09/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 23 2 a565 translate-symaction τύπτειν αὐτοῦ τὸ στόμα 1 to strike his mouth Ananias ordered this as a symbolic action to show that he believed Paul had said something with his **mouth** that he should not have said. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “to strike his mouth because he believed Paul had said something he should not have said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 23 3 igq4 figs-metaphor τοῖχε κεκονιαμένε 1 you whitewashed wall Paul is referring to the way a **wall** can be painted white to make it look clean. Paul was suggesting that, in the same way, Ananias appeared to look morally innocent, but he was really full of evil intent. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you who pretend to be good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 23 3 un7g figs-rquestion καὶ σὺ κάθῃ κρίνων με κατὰ τὸν νόμον, καὶ παρανομῶν κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι? 1 And do you sit judging me by the law and, acting contrary to the law, command me to be struck? Paul is using the question form to challenge Ananias for what he has done. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should certainly not sit judging me by the law while acting contrary to the law by commanding me to be struck!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 23 3 m6nb figs-activepassive κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι 1 command me to be struck If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “command someone to strike me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 23 4 lkh8 figs-rquestion τὸν ἀρχιερέα τοῦ Θεοῦ λοιδορεῖς? 1 Are you insulting the high priest of God? The men standing by Paul are using the question form to rebuke him for saying what he said. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not insult the high priest of God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 23 5 a511 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean his fellow Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 23 5 a512 figs-quotesinquotes γέγραπται γὰρ, ὅτι ἄρχοντα τοῦ λαοῦ σου, οὐκ ἐρεῖς κακῶς 1 For it is written, ‘You shall not speak evil of a ruler of your people.’” If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “For it is written that we should not speak evil of a ruler of our people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 23 5 e8lg figs-activepassive γέγραπται γὰρ 1 For it is written If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “For Moses wrote in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 23 5 a513 figs-declarative ἄρχοντα τοῦ λαοῦ σου, οὐκ ἐρεῖς κακῶς 1 You shall not speak evil of a ruler of your people Moses is using a future statement to give a command. Alternate translation: “You must not speak evil of a ruler of your people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
|
||
ACT 23 6 a514 figs-ellipsis τὸ ἓν μέρος 1 one part Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “one part of the council” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 23 6 a515 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 23 6 pbe1 figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean his fellow Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “My kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 23 6 as3f figs-metaphor υἱὸς Φαρισαίων 1 a son of Pharisees By **son**, Paul means both that he is the literal son of a Pharisee and that he is the descendant of a line of Pharisees. Alternate translation: “and my father and forefathers were Pharisees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 23 6 a516 figs-hendiadys ἐλπίδος καὶ ἀναστάσεως 1 the hope and resurrection This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **resurrection** describes what the Pharisees had **hope** for. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “the hope of the resurrection” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 23 6 iz18 figs-abstractnouns ἐλπίδος καὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν 1 the hope and resurrection of the dead If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **resurrection**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the hope that God will make the dead alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 23 6 dchr figs-nominaladj νεκρῶν 1 of the dead Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun to mean people who have died. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 23 6 ys5k figs-activepassive ἐγὼ κρίνομαι 1 I am being judged If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you are judging me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 23 8 gl1s writing-background γὰρ 1 For Luke uses the word **For** to introduce background information about the **Sadducees** and **Pharisees** that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 23 8 a517 figs-ellipsis μὴ εἶναι ἀνάστασιν, μήτε ἄγγελον, μήτε πνεῦμα 1 there is no resurrection, nor angels or spirits Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “there is no resurrection and that there are no angels and no spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 23 8 lrs2 figs-explicit τὰ ἀμφότερα 1 both By **both**, Luke means implicitly that Pharisees believe in (1) the resurrection and (2) angels and spirits. You could indicate this explicitly if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “both that there is a resurrection and that there are angels and spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 23 9 a519 translate-symaction ἀναστάντες 1 arising By **arising** (that is, standing up), these Pharisees were indicating that they had something important to say. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “standing up to show that they had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 23 9 ayr8 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ δὲ πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος 1 And if a spirit spoke to him, or an angel These Pharisees are speaking as if what they are saying is a hypothetical possibility, but they believe that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if the speaker believes that it is true, then you can translate these words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “And since a spirit must have spoken to him, or an angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
|
||
ACT 23 9 a520 figs-explicit εἰ δὲ πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος 1 And if a spirit spoke to him, or an angel These Pharisees assume that the Sadducees will understand that they mean this spirit or angel **spoke** to Paul when he had the vision in the Jerusalem temple that he described in [22:17–21](../22/17.md). You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “And since a spirit must have spoken to him, or an angel, when he had his vision in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 23 9 a521 figs-ellipsis εἰ δὲ πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος? 1 And if a spirit spoke to him, or an angel? These Pharisees are making the first part of a conditional statement and leaving the second part for the Sadduccees to realize on their own. If this would be unclear to your readers, you could supply the second part of this conditional statement in your translation. Alternate translation: “And if a spirit spoke to him, or an angel, then you should find no evil in this man either.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 23 10 f568 figs-activepassive διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν 1 Paul be torn apart by them If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they tear Paul apart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 23 10 tqhu figs-hyperbole μὴ διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν 1 lest Paul be torn apart by them Luke is making an overstatement here to emphasize the danger that Paul was in. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “lest they cause Paul great physical harm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 23 11 i9w5 figs-idiom τῇ & ἐπιούσῃ νυκτὶ 1 on the following night This expression indicates the **night** after the day Paul went before the council. In your translation, express this in the way your culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “during the night that followed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 23 11 a522 writing-politeness ὁ Κύριος 1 the Lord Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 23 11 r4q4 figs-explicit εἰς Ῥώμην μαρτυρῆσαι 1 to testify in Rome Jesus assumes that Paul will know that he means Paul will **testify** about him in Rome. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to testify about me in Rome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 23 12 a523 figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “certain Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 23 12 g3sj figs-explicit ἀνεθεμάτισαν ἑαυτοὺς 1 cursed themselves The implication is that the curse was, “May God do so to us if we eat or drink until we have killed Paul,” that is, “May God kill us.” You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “asked God to kill them if they did not do what they swore to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 23 12 a524 figs-quotations λέγοντες μήτε φαγεῖν μήτε πιεῖν, ἕως οὗ ἀποκτείνωσιν τὸν Παῦλον 1 saying neither to eat nor to drink until they had killed Paul It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “saying, ‘We will neither eat or drink until we have killed Paul’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 23 14 a525 figs-explicitinfo ἀναθέματι ἀνεθεματίσαμεν ἑαυτοὺς 1 We have cursed ourselves with a curse It might seem that the expression **cursed ourselves with a curse** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “cursed ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
|
||
ACT 23 14 a526 figs-synecdoche μηδενὸς γεύσασθαι 1 to eat nothing Since the men actually swore that they would **eat** or drink nothing, they are using one part of their oath to represent all of it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to eat and drink nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 23 15 u8xm figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 we By **we**, the conspirators mean themselves but not chief priests and leaders to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 23 15 a527 figs-imperative ἐμφανίσατε 1 make it appear This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. Alternate translation: “we would like you to make it appear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
|
||
ACT 23 16 a531 figs-metonymy ἀκούσας & τὴν ἐνέδραν 1 hearing the ambush Luke means that the son of Paul’s sister heard some of the conspirators talking about the **ambush**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “hearing people talk about the ambush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 23 16 w6fe translate-kinship ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀδελφῆς Παύλου 1 the son of the sister of Paul Luke does not tell us whether this **sister** was older or younger than Paul, but describe this relationship in the way that would be most natural for your language and cuture. Alternate translation: “Paul’s nephew” or “the nephew of Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
|
||
ACT 23 17 a528 figs-imperative ἄπαγε 1 take This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please take” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
|
||
ACT 23 18 abd0 writing-pronouns ὁ & παραλαβὼν αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν 1 taking him, he brought him The pronoun **him** refers to Paul’s nephew, and the pronoun **he** refers to the centurion. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “taking Paul’s nephew, the centurion brought him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 23 18 lrs3 φησίν 1 says To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said”
|
||
ACT 23 19 a530 translate-symaction ἐπιλαβόμενος δὲ τῆς χειρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 taking hold of his hand The chiliarch **taking hold** of the **hand** of Paul’s nephew was more than was needed simply to lead the nephew to a **private** location. This was a symbolic action that assured the nephew that the chiliarch would protect him and that he could therefore speak safely and confidentially. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “taking hold of his hand to reassure him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 23 20 uv6r figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 The Jews Paul’s nephew is using the name of a whole group, **The Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Certain Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 23 21 a532 figs-activepassive σὺ & μὴ πεισθῇς αὐτοῖς 1 may you not be persuaded by them If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may they not persuade you” or “do not let them persuade you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 23 21 a533 figs-metonymy τὴν ἀπὸ σοῦ ἐπαγγελίαν 1 the promise from you By the word **promise**, Paul’s nephew is referring to the commander agreeing to bring Paul to the Sanhedrin the next day and actually bringing him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “you to bring Paul to the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 23 22 a534 figs-quotations παραγγείλας, μηδενὶ ἐκλαλῆσαι ὅτι ταῦτα ἐνεφάνισας πρὸς ἐμέ 1 commanding him to tell no one that “you have reported these things to me” Here Luke begins an indirect quotation but finishes it as a direct quotation. It may be more natural in your language for the entire quotation to be either indirect or direct. Alternate translation: “commanding him to tell no one that he had reported these things to him” or “commanding him, ‘Tell no one that you have reported these things to me’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 23 23 mgi9 translate-numbers δεξιολάβους διακοσίους 1 200 spearmen Alternate translation: “200 soldiers who are armed with spears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
|
||
ACT 23 23 kg8s figs-idiom τρίτης ὥρας τῆς νυκτός 1 third hour of the night In your translation, you may wish to express this in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “nine o’clock this evening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 23 24 a535 figs-quotations κτήνη τε παραστῆσαι, ἵνα ἐπιβιβάσαντες τὸν Παῦλον, διασώσωσι πρὸς Φήλικα τὸν ἡγεμόνα, 1 and to provide animals so that, having set Paul on them, they may bring him safely to Felix the governor Here Luke finishes as an indirect quotation the direct quotation that began in the previous verse. It may be more natural in your language to continue and finish the quotation as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “and provide animals so that, having set Paul on them, they may bring him safely to Felix the governor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 23 24 a536 writing-pronouns διασώσωσι 1 they may bring him safely The pronoun **they** refers to the soldiers, horsemen, and spearmen described in the previous verse. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these troops may bring him safely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 23 24 av3h translate-names Φήλικα 1 Felix The word **Felix** is the name of the man who was the Roman **governor** of Judea at this time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 23 25 a537 figs-explicit γράψας ἐπιστολὴν 1 writing a letter Luke means implicitly that the commander gave the instructions described in the previous two verses by “summoning” two centurions and **writing** the letter quoted in verses 26–30. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He also wrote a letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 23 26 zf93 figs-123person Κλαύδιος Λυσίας, τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι 1 Claudius Lysias to the most excellent Governor Felix The commander begins this letter by speaking about himself and about the person to whom he is writing in the third person. That was the convention in this culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first and second persons to translate this. Alternate translation: “I, Claudius Lysias, to you, the most excellent Governor Felix” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
|
||
ACT 23 26 yk79 figs-ellipsis Κλαύδιος Λυσίας, τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι, χαίρειν 1 Claudius Lysias to the most excellent Governor Felix As was also the convention in this culture, the letter-writer leaves it unstated but understood that he is writing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply those words. Alternate translation: “I, Claudius Lysias, am writing to you, the most excellent Governor Felix” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 23 26 vg8y translate-names Κλαύδιος Λυσίας 1 Claudius Lysias The words **Claudius Lysias** are the name of the commander. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 23 26 u2ih writing-politeness τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι 1 to the most excellent Governor Felix The expression **most excellent** was a formal title by which people addressed Roman officials. Your language and culture may have a comparable title that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “to the Honorable Governor Felix” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 23 27 yy0e figs-activepassive τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον συνλημφθέντα ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων, καὶ μέλλοντα ἀναιρεῖσθαι ὑπ’ αὐτῶν & ἐξειλάμην 1 This man, having been seized by the Jews and about to be killed by them … I rescued If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express these ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Learning that the Jews had seized this man and that they were about to kill him … I rescued him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 23 27 zr7l figs-synecdoche τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 the Jews The commander is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “certain Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 23 27 a538 figs-explicit Ῥωμαῖός 1 a Roman Here the term **Roman** implicitly indicates Roman citizenship. Alternate translation: “a Roman citizen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 23 28 a539 figs-extrainfo κατήγαγον 1 I took him down The commander says that he took Paul ** down** to the Sanhedrin because he brought him down the steps from the Roman fortress to the temple courtyard. It may not be necessary to reproduce this detail in your translation. Alternate translation: “I brought him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
|
||
ACT 23 29 zt4f figs-activepassive ὃν εὗρον ἐνκαλούμενον περὶ ζητημάτων τοῦ νόμου αὐτῶν; μηδὲν δὲ ἄξιον θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἔχοντα ἔγκλημα 1 whom I found being accused about questions of their law but having no accusation worthy of death or chains If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “I found that the Jews were accusing him about questions of their law, but they were not accusing him of anything worthy of death or chains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 23 29 wsh2 figs-metonymy θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν 1 death or chains The commander is using the word **death** to mean a penalty of death. He is referring to imprisonment by association with the way that the Romans used **chains** to secure prisoners. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “execution or imprisonment” or “of being put to death or being put in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 23 30 i2ji figs-activepassive μηνυθείσης & μοι ἐπιβουλῆς εἰς τὸν ἄνδρα ἔσεσθαι 1 when a plot that was to be against the man was revealed to me If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when someone revealed to me that there was going to be a plot against the man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 23 31 ny4k figs-activepassive κατὰ τὸ διατεταγμένον αὐτοῖς 1 according to what had been commanded to them If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “according to what the chiliarch had commanded them to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 23 31 ifs1 translate-names τὴν Ἀντιπατρίδα 1 Antipatris The word **Antipatris** is the name of a city. It was located about halfway between Jerusalem and Caesarea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 23 32 abd1 writing-pronouns αὐτῷ, ὑπέστρεψαν 1 they returned … him The pronoun **they** refers to the soldiers, and the pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul, the soldiers returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 23 33 abx1 writing-pronouns οἵτινες εἰσελθόντες εἰς τὴν Καισάρειαν, καὶ ἀναδόντες τὴν ἐπιστολὴν τῷ ἡγεμόνι, παρέστησαν καὶ τὸν Παῦλον αὐτῷ 1 who, entering into Caesarea and delivering the letter to the governor, also presented Paul to him The pronoun **who** refers to the horsemen who accompanied Paul all the way to Caesarea. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “When the horsemen reached Caesarea, they delivered the letter to the governor and also presented Paul to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 23 34 dtx1 figs-quotations ἐπερωτήσας ἐκ ποίας ἐπαρχείας ἐστὶν 1 having asked what province he was from It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having asked Paul, ‘What province are you from?’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 23 35 mga2 figs-activepassive κελεύσας & φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτόν 1 commanding him to be guarded If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to guard him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 24 intro j74u 0 # Acts 24 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>Paul told the governor that he had not done what the Jews were accusing him of doing and that the governor should not punish him for what he did do.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Respect<br><br>Both the Jewish leaders ([Acts 24:2-4](./02.md)) and Paul ([Acts 24:10](../act/24/10.md)) began their speeches with words that show respect to the governor.<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Governmental leaders<br><br>The words “governor,” “commander,” and “centurion” may be difficult to translate into some languages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 24 1 a540 writing-participants ῥήτορος Τερτύλλου τινός 1 a certain orator, Tertullus Luke is using the phrase **a certain orator** to introduce **Tertullus** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 24 1 f3vx translate-unknown ῥήτορος 1 an orator In this context, the term **orator** means a person who spoke well and who was well acquainted with Roman law. Either an accuser or a defendant might employ such a person to argue a case for them in court. In your translation, you could use a term for someone in a comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “a courtroom lawyer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 24 1 xm6c translate-names Τερτύλλου τινός 1 Tertullus The word **Tertullus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 24 1 a541 figs-idiom κατέβη 1 came down Luke says that these men **came down** to Caesarea because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way of referring to traveling downward in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 24 2 a542 figs-activepassive κληθέντος & αὐτοῦ 1 when he had been summoned If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the governor summoned Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 24 2 a543 writing-pronouns κατηγορεῖν 1 to accuse him The pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “to accuse Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 24 2 e6zg figs-exclusive τυγχάνοντες 1 we are obtaining By **we**, Tertullus means himself and his fellow Jews but not Governor Felix, to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 24 2 qw1r writing-pronouns σοῦ & σῆς 1 you … your Here the words **you** and **your** refer to Felix, the governor. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “you, Governor Felix … your” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 24 2 a544 figs-explicit τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ 1 for this people Tertullus assumes that Governor Felix will understand that by **this people** he means the Jewish people. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “for the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 24 3 a545 figs-hyperbole πάντῃ & πανταχοῦ & πάσης 1 every way … everywhere … all Tertullus says these things as overstatements for emphasis. Since Luke is quoting directly from his speech, it would be appropriate to retain these overstatements in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 24 3 q3fj writing-politeness κράτιστε Φῆλιξ 1 most excellent Felix The expression **most excellent** was a formal title by which people addressed Roman officials. Your language and culture may have a comparable title that you can use in your translation. See how you translated the similar expression in [Acts 23:26](../23/26.md). Alternate translation: “Your Excellency, Governor Felix” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 24 3 r5jl figs-abstractnouns μετὰ πάσης εὐχαριστίας 1 with all thankfulness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **thankfulness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “very gratefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 24 4 tyq8 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 to us By **us**, Tertullus means himself and the Jewish leaders on whose behalf he is speaking. He does not mean Governor Felix, to whom he is speaking. So use the exclusive form of “us” in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 24 4 a546 figs-abstractnouns συντόμως, τῇ σῇ ἐπιεικείᾳ 1 briefly, in your fairness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **fairness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “briefly, knowing that you will judge our case fairly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 24 5 i1qs figs-metaphor λοιμὸν 1 a pest Tertullus is speaking as if Paul was literally spreading disease. He means that Paul is causing trouble. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a troublemaker” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 24 5 k1v1 figs-hyperbole πᾶσι τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις τοῖς κατὰ τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 among all the Jews are throughout the world Tertullus says this as overstatements for emphasis. Since Luke is quoting directly from his speech, it would be appropriate to retain this overstatement in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 24 5 zg4a translate-names τῶν Ναζωραίων 1 the Nazarenes In this context, the word **Nazarenes** is a name that people used at this time to describe believers in Jesus. Jesus himself was known as a Nazarene because he came from the town of Nazareth. See how you translated the same word in [2:22](../02/22.md), where it has that meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 24 6 a547 figs-ellipsis ὃν καὶ ἐκρατήσαμεν 1 whom also we arrested— Tertullus is making the case that Paul is a criminal, but he is leaving it up to Felix to decide what Paul’s punishment should be, so he is deliberately breaking off this sentence here. If this might be unclear to your readers, you could indicate his meaning in your translation. Alternate translation: “whom we also arrested, and who deserves to be punished, but we will leave it to you to decide his punishment.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 24 6 a548 translate-textvariants 0 As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this second half of this verse, all of verse 7, and the first part of verse 8 are found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting this material in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this material if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this material may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
|
||
ACT 24 8 a549 writing-pronouns παρ’ οὗ 1 from whom The pronoun **whom** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “From him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 24 9 rq5f figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders who had come to Caesarea to accuse Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 24 11 a550 figs-litotes οὐ πλείους εἰσίν μοι ἡμέραι δώδεκα, ἀφ’ ἧς 1 it is not more than 12 days for me from when Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it was only 12 days ago that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 24 12 my1c writing-pronouns εὗρόν 1 they found The pronoun **they** refers to the Jews who are accusing Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these Jews who are accusing me found” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 24 14 k79p translate-names τὴν Ὁδὸν 1 the Way As the General Notes to chapter 9 explain, **the Way** was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it in your translation. See what you did in [9:2](../09/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 24 14 a551 figs-activepassive τοῖς ἐν τοῖς προφήταις γεγραμμένοις 1 the things written in the Prophets If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that the prophets wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 24 14 a552 translate-names τοῖς προφήταις 1 the Prophets The word **Prophets** is the name of a section of the Bible that contains the books in which the prophets recorded the messages that God gave them. Alternate translation: “the books that the prophets wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 24 15 nv5a writing-pronouns οὗτοι 1 these The pronoun **these** refers to the Jewish leaders who are accusing Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “my accusers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 24 15 qza8 figs-abstractnouns ἀνάστασιν μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι, δικαίων τε καὶ ἀδίκων 1 that there is going to be a resurrection of both the righteous and the unrighteous If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **resurrection**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that God will make both the righteous and the unrighteous alive again after they have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 24 15 x1yd figs-nominaladj δικαίων τε καὶ ἀδίκων 1 of both the righteous and the unrighteous Paul is using the adjectives **righteous** and **unrighteous** as nouns to mean different groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “of both people who have done what is right and people who have not done what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 24 16 a553 writing-pronouns ἐν τούτῳ 1 in this The pronoun **this** refers to what Paul has just said in verses 14 and 15 about what he believes. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Because I believe these things,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 24 16 va3b figs-metonymy πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν 1 before God and men Paul is using this phrase to refer to the opinion or judgment of God and men by association with the way that they would assess anything that came to their attention in front of them. Alternate translation: “in the perspective of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 24 16 a554 figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀνθρώπους 1 men Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 24 17 p92m writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Paul is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new phase of his defense. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 24 17 lrs4 figs-go παρεγενόμην 1 I came In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
|
||
ACT 24 17 ryk6 figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ἔθνος μου 1 to my nation Paul is actually referring to the place where the people of the Jewish **nation** live. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the place where my Jewish people live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 24 17 a555 figs-explicit ἐλεημοσύνας ποιήσων & καὶ προσφοράς 1 bringing alms and offerings By **alms** Paul means gifts for the poor that the Gentile churches had collected and that he was delivering. By **offerings** he means the sacrifices that he and four other men offered at the end of a period of vows. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to bring gifts for the poor and to offer sacrifices at the end of a vow period” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 24 18 a556 writing-pronouns ἐν αἷς 1 in which The pronoun **which** refers to the offerings that Paul described in the previous verse. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here, ending verse 17 with a period. Alternate translation: “While I was making those offerings,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 24 19 a557 figs-ellipsis τινὲς & ἀπὸ τῆς Ἀσίας Ἰουδαῖοι, οὓς ἔδει & παρεῖναι 1 certain Jews from Asia—who ought to be present As Paul defends himself by telling what happened in Jerusalem, he suddenly realizes that his actual accusers are not present. So he breaks off his sentence to bring this fact to the attention of Governor Felix. If this might be unclear to your readers, in your translation you could finish this part of the story and begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “certain Jews from Asia saw me in Jerusalem with a Gentile and they thought that I had brought him into the temple. Now they ought to be present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 24 20 a558 figs-imperative3p αὐτοὶ οὗτοι εἰπάτωσαν 1 let these themselves say If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may these themselves say” or “these themselves should say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
|
||
ACT 24 20 ag5d writing-pronouns αὐτοὶ οὗτοι 1 these themselves These pronouns refer to the Jewish leaders who have come to Caesarea to accuse Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these Jewish leaders who have come here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 24 20 a559 figs-metonymy στάντος μου ἐπὶ τοῦ Συνεδρίου 1 when I stood before the Sanhedrin Paul is referring to what he said to the Sanhedrin to defend himself by association with the way he **stood** in front of the council as he said it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when I defended myself at a meeting of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 24 21 a560 figs-quotesinquotes ἢ περὶ μιᾶς ταύτης φωνῆς, ἧς ἐκέκραξα ἐν αὐτοῖς ἑστὼς, ὅτι περὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν ἐγὼ κρίνομαι σήμερον ἐφ’ ὑμῶν. 1 {other} than regarding this one utterance that I shouted out standing among them, ‘Concerning the resurrection of the dead I am being judged by you today!’” If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “other than that when I was standing among them, I shouted that I was being judged by them that day concerning the resurrection of the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 24 21 ds1s figs-abstractnouns περὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν 1 concerning the resurrection of the dead If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **resurrection**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Because I believe that God will make those who have died alive again,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 24 21 d2lm figs-activepassive ἐγὼ κρίνομαι & ἐφ’ ὑμῶν 1 I am being judged by you If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you are judging me today” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 24 22 z5f9 figs-idiom καταβῇ 1 may come down Felix says **may come down** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 24 23 a561 figs-doublenegatives μηδένα κωλύειν 1 to forbid none If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **none** and the negative verb **forbid**. Alternate translation: “to allow all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 24 23 a562 figs-explicit τῶν ἰδίων αὐτοῦ 1 of his own By **his own**, Luke implicitly means Paul’s **own** friends. You can indicate this in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of his friends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 24 24 qy9y translate-names Δρουσίλλῃ 1 Drusilla The word **Drusilla** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 24 24 xmq5 translate-names οὔσῃ Ἰουδαίᾳ 1 being a Jewess The word **Jewess** is the name for a woman who is Jewish. Alternate translation: “who was a Jewish woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 24 25 a563 writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ 1 he The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 24 26 h4v7 figs-activepassive χρήματα δοθήσεται αὐτῷ ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου 1 money would be given to him by Paul If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul would give him money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 24 27 a564 figs-idiom διετίας & πληρωθείσης 1 two years being fulfilled Luke is describing this time period in the way in which his culture and language spoke about time. The expression can refer to any period of time between one year and two years in length. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “after a couple of years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 24 27 ur2y translate-names Πόρκιον Φῆστον 1 Porcius Festus The words **Porcius Festus** are the names of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 24 27 p59c figs-synecdoche τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jews who were hostile to Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 24 27 gln6 figs-activepassive δεδεμένον 1 bound If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in bonds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 24 27 a566 figs-synecdoche δεδεμένον 1 bound Luke is using one thing that the Romans did to keep Paul prisoner to represent all of what they did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 25 intro b6uk 0 # Acts 25 General Notes<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Favor<br><br>This word is used in two different ways in this chapter. When the Jewish leaders asked Festus for a favor, they were asking him to do something special for them on that day. They wanted him to do for them something that he would not usually do. When Festus “wanted to gain the favor of the Jews,” he wanted them to like him and be willing to obey him in the months and years to come. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/favor]])<br><br>### Roman citizenship<br><br>The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens; others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. Roman officials could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way they would treat a non-citizen.
|
||
ACT 25 1 w8h3 writing-newevent οὖν 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 25 1 a567 figs-synecdoche ἐπιβὰς 1 having set foot Luke is using one part of Festus, his **foot**, to represent all of himself in the act of arriving in Judea. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having arrived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 25 1 a568 figs-explicit τῇ ἐπαρχείᾳ 1 in the province By **the province**, Luke implicitly means the province of Judea. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “in Judea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 25 1 zz4l figs-idiom ἀνέβη εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀπὸ Καισαρείας 1 went up from Caesarea to Jerusalem Luke says that Festus **went up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 25 2 a569 figs-nominaladj οἱ πρῶτοι τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 the first of the Jews Luke is using the adjective **first** as a noun to mean a particular group of people. Here, **first** has the sense of most prominent. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the most prominent of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 25 3 w8um writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ & αὐτὸν & αὐτὸν 1 him … him … him The pronoun **him** refers to Paul in each of these instances. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … him … Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 25 3 pg8x figs-explicit ἐνέδραν ποιοῦντες ἀνελεῖν αὐτὸν κατὰ τὴν ὁδόν 1 making an ambush to kill him along the way It was the Jewish leaders who were secretly **making an ambush**. This was not part of what they were **requesting** Festus to do. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “But the Jewish leaders were secretly preparing an ambush to kill Paul along the way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 25 4 v5f9 figs-quotations ὁ & Φῆστος ἀπεκρίθη, τηρεῖσθαι τὸν Παῦλον εἰς Καισάρειαν, ἑαυτὸν δὲ μέλλειν ἐν τάχει ἐκπορεύεσθαι 1 Festus answered that Paul was being held at Caesarea but that he himself was about to depart soon It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “Festus answered, ‘Paul is being held at Caesarea but I myself am about to depart soon’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 25 4 a570 figs-activepassive τηρεῖσθαι τὸν Παῦλον 1 Paul was being held If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he was holding Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 25 4 a571 figs-explicit ἐκπορεύεσθαι 1 to depart Festus means implicitly that he is **about to depart** from Jerusalem and travel to Caesarea. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to depart Jerusalem for Caesarea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 25 5 a54h figs-nominaladj οἱ & ἐν ὑμῖν & δυνατοὶ 1 the powerful among you Festus is using the adjective **powerful** as a noun to mean a certain group of people. In this context, **powerful** means having the legal power to represent the Jewish nation. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “those of you who have legal standing in this matter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 25 5 a572 figs-idiom συνκαταβάντες 1 having come down together As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, here Festus says **come down** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 25 5 nei6 figs-imperative3p κατηγορείτωσαν αὐτοῦ 1 let them accuse him If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may they accuse him” or “they should accuse him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
|
||
ACT 25 6 a573 figs-litotes ἡμέρας, οὐ πλείους ὀκτὼ ἢ δέκα 1 not more than eight or ten days Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “less than eight or ten days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 25 6 qv24 translate-symaction καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος 1 having sat in the judgment seat Festus **sat in the judgment seat** as a symbolic action to show that he was ready to act as the judge in the case against Paul. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having sat in the judgment seat to show that he was ready to act as the judge in the case against Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 25 6 j7c5 figs-activepassive τὸν Παῦλον ἀχθῆναι 1 Paul to be brought to him If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his soldiers to bring Paul to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 25 7 v4v8 writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ & αὐτὸν 1 he … him The pronouns **he** and **him** refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 25 7 e7g2 πολλὰ καὶ βαρέα αἰτιώματα 1 many and serious charges It may be more natural in your language not to use the word **and** between these adjectives. Alternate translation: “many serious charges” or “many charges that were all serious”
|
||
ACT 25 8 a574 figs-synecdoche εἰς Καίσαρά 1 against Caesar Paul is using the leader of the Roman government to represent that entire government. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “against the Roman government” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 25 9 b49x figs-synecdoche θέλων τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις χάριν καταθέσθαι 1 wanting to do a favor for the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders who were opposing Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 25 9 a575 figs-metaphor τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις χάριν καταθέσθαι 1 to lay down a favor for the Jews Luke is speaking as if the Festus wanted to **lay down** a favor physically for the Jewish leaders, as if they would pick it up and leave something else for him in its place. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to do a favor for the Jewish leaders that they would later return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 25 9 l560 figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς τῷ Παύλῳ εἶπεν 1 answering Paul, said Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Festus responded to Paul. Alternate translation: “Festus responded to Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 25 9 qe8h figs-idiom εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀναβὰς 1 having gone up to Jerusalem Festus says **gone up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 25 9 wi2d figs-activepassive εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα & ἐκεῖ περὶ τούτων κριθῆναι ἐπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 to Jerusalem, to be judged there before me about these things If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to Jerusalem and have me judge you there about these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 25 10 u1ef figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος ἑστώς εἰμι 1 I stand before the judgment seat of Caesar Paul is referring to Caesar’s authority to judge him by association with the **judgment seat** where Caesar sat when he judged cases. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am being judged by Caesar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 25 10 a576 figs-synecdoche ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος ἑστώς εἰμι 1 I stand before the judgment seat of Caesar Paul is using **Caesar**, the leader of the Roman government, to represent that entire government. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am being judged by the Roman government” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 25 10 p78y figs-activepassive οὗ με δεῖ κρίνεσθαι 1 where it is necessary for me to be judged If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “where it is necessary for someone to judge me”; or, if you translated the previous phrase as “I am being judged by the Roman government”: “which is the authority that ought to judge me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 25 11 l561 figs-doublenegatives οὐ παραιτοῦμαι τὸ ἀποθανεῖν 1 I do not refuse to die If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **refuse**. Alternate translation: “I am willing to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 25 12 t96z figs-explicit τοῦ συμβουλίου 1 the council Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by **council** here, he does not mean the Jewish Sanhedrin. He means the group of officials who advised Festus. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “with his own government advisors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 25 12 a577 figs-declarative ἐπὶ Καίσαρα πορεύσῃ 1 to Caesar you will go Festus is using a future statement to give a ruling in Paul’s case. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for giving a ruling. Alternate translation: “so I grant your appeal and I am going to send you to Caesar for judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
|
||
ACT 25 13 c3gc writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 25 13 q0sv translate-names Ἀγρίππας ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ Βερνίκη 1 King Agrippa and Bernice The word **Agrippa** is the name of a man. He ruled a few territories in the area where Festus was the Roman governor. The word **Bernice** is the name a woman. She was the sister of King Agrippa. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 25 13 a578 figs-idiom κατήντησαν εἰς Καισάρειαν 1 having come down to Caesarea Luke speaks of Agrippa and Bernice **having come down** to Caesarea because that city is lower in elevation than Jerusalem, where they lived. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 25 14 x8jf figs-activepassive ἀνήρ τὶς ἐστιν καταλελειμμένος ὑπὸ Φήλικος δέσμιος 1 A certain man has been left a prisoner by Felix If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Felix has left a certain man a prisoner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 25 14 a579 writing-participants ἀνήρ τὶς ἐστιν καταλελειμμένος ὑπὸ Φήλικος δέσμιος 1 A certain man has been left a prisoner by Felix Festus is using the phrase **A certain man** to introduce **Paul** to Agrippa and Bernice. If your language has its own way of introducing people and their stories, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “There is a man named Paul whom Felix left as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 25 15 hyp5 figs-abstractnouns αἰτούμενοι κατ’ αὐτοῦ καταδίκην 1 requesting a judgment against him If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “requesting that I judge him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 25 16 l562 figs-activepassive ὁ κατηγορούμενος 1 the one being accused If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one against whom people are making accusations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 25 16 xjb4 figs-metonymy κατὰ πρόσωπον ἔχοι τοὺς κατηγόρους 1 may have his accusers by face Here, the word **face** represents the presence of a person by association with the way people can see the face of someone who is present. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “may meet face to face with the accusers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 25 17 rm5z writing-pronouns συνελθόντων 1 when they had come together The pronoun **they** refers to the chief priests and the elders of the Jews, whom Festus mentioned in verse 15. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the chief priests and the elders of the Jews had come together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 25 17 efe2 translate-symaction καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος 1 having sat in the judgment seat Festus **sat in the judgment seat** as a symbolic action to show that he was ready to act as the judge in the case against Paul. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having sat in the judgment seat to show that I was ready to act as the judge in this case” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 25 17 hm6g figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσα ἀχθῆναι τὸν ἄνδρα 1 I commanded the man to be brought If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I commanded soldiers to bring the man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 25 19 d1qm figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἰδίας δεισιδαιμονίας 1 their own religion If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **religion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “their religious beliefs” or “their beliefs about God and spiritual things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 25 20 l564 figs-quotations ἔλεγον εἰ βούλοιτο πορεύεσθαι εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, κἀκεῖ κρίνεσθαι περὶ τούτων 1 asked if he might be willing to go to Jerusalem and be judged there about these things It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “asked, ‘Might you be willing to go to Jerusalem and be judged there about these things?’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 25 20 y9bv figs-activepassive κρίνεσθαι 1 and be judged If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and have me judge him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 25 21 ie7x figs-activepassive τοῦ & Παύλου ἐπικαλεσαμένου τηρηθῆναι αὐτὸν 1 appealed that he be kept If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when Paul asked that I keep him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 25 21 l570 writing-politeness τοῦ Σεβαστοῦ 1 of the August one Festus is referring to the Roman emperor by a respectful title. Your language and culture may have a similar title that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “of His Majesty the Emperor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 25 21 ceq2 figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσα τηρεῖσθαι αὐτὸν 1 I commanded him to be kept If your language does not use this passive form, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I commanded the guards to keep him in custody” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 25 22 l565 figs-rpronouns ἐβουλόμην καὶ αὐτὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀκοῦσαι 1 I myself was also wanting to hear this man Agrippa is using the reflexive pronoun **myself** for emphasis. It may be more natural in your language to express this emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I too would certainly want to hear this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
|
||
ACT 25 22 l566 φησίν 1 he says To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “he said”
|
||
ACT 25 23 at4t figs-activepassive ἤχθη ὁ Παῦλος 1 Paul was brought If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the soldiers brought Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 25 24 l567 figs-gendernotations πάντες οἱ & ἄνδρες 1 all the men Although the term **men** is masculine, Festus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. (It is clear that women as well as men are **present**, since Luke notes in verse 23 that Bernice entered with Agrippa.) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
|
||
ACT 25 24 l571 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 with us By **us**, Festus means himself and King Agrippa but not the rest of the crowd to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 25 24 n8qj figs-hyperbole ἅπαν τὸ πλῆθος τῶν Ἰουδαίων ἐνέτυχόν μοι 1 the whole multitude of the Jews petitioned me Festus says **the whole** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the multitude of the Jews petitioned me urgently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 25 24 l568 figs-quotations βοῶντες μὴ δεῖν αὐτὸν ζῆν μηκέτι 1 shouting that he ought not to live any longer It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “shouting, ‘He ought not to live any longer!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 25 24 yv2q figs-doublenegatives μὴ δεῖν αὐτὸν ζῆν μηκέτι 1 he ought not to live any longer In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “he ought not to live no longer.” In Greek, the second negative creates a positive meaning by canceling the first negative. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he should die immediately” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 25 25 g856 writing-politeness τὸν Σεβαστὸν 1 to the August one Festus is referring to the Roman emperor by a respectful title. Your language and culture may have a similar title that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “to His Majesty The Empeor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 25 26 l569 writing-politeness τῷ κυρίῳ 1 to the lord Festus is referring to the emperor by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to our lord the emperor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 25 26 fe2n figs-yousingular ὑμῶν & σοῦ 1 of you … you Here the first instance of **you** is plural and refers to everyone assembled in the hall. The second **you** is singular and is directed only to Agrippa. Use the plural and singular forms in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
|
||
ACT 25 27 txs6 figs-doublenegatives ἄλογον & μοι δοκεῖ πέμποντα δέσμιον, μὴ καὶ & σημᾶναι 1 it seems unreasonable to me, sending a prisoner and not to state If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative adjective **unreasonable**. Alternate translation: “it seems reasonable to me, sending a prisoner, that I should state” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 26 intro e2q6 0 # Acts 26 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>This is the third account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: [Acts 9](../09/01.md) and [Acts 22](../22/01.md))<br><br>Paul told King Agrippa why he had done what he had done and said that the governor should not punish him for that.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Light and darkness<br><br>The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
|
||
ACT 26 1 l573 figs-activepassive ἐπιτρέπεταί σοι 1 it is permitted to you If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I permit you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 26 1 wme6 translate-symaction ἐκτείνας τὴν χεῖρα 1 stretching out his hand This could mean: (1) that Paul waved his hand to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. Alternate translation: “waving his hand to signal that he was about to speak” (2) that as Paul spoke, he used hand gestures to emphasize the points he was making. Alternate translation: “gesturing with his hand as he spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 26 2 mdq2 figs-activepassive ὧν ἐνκαλοῦμαι ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων 1 of which I am accused by the Jews If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the Jews accuse me of doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 26 2 cbr3 figs-synecdoche Ἰουδαίων 1 the Jews Paul is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “many of the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 26 3 kns2 figs-hyperbole πάντων τῶν κατὰ Ἰουδαίους, ἐθῶν τε καὶ ζητημάτων 1 in all the customs and controversies among the Jews Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in a wide range of customs and controversies among the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 26 4 t8bg figs-hyperbole ἴσασι πάντες οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 all the Jews know Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Jews know very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 26 4 x96h figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ἔθνει μου ἔν τε Ἱεροσολύμοις 1 in my nation and in Jerusalem By **nation**, Paul most likely means by association the people of his nation, that is, the Jews. Alternate translation: “among the Jews, especially in the city of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 26 5 y9a1 figs-exclusive τῆς ἡμετέρας θρησκείας 1 of our religion By **our**, Paul means himself and his fellow Jews but not Agrippa to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 26 6 s9kr writing-newevent νῦν 1 Now Paul is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new phase of his defense. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 26 6 i9y5 figs-activepassive ἕστηκα κρινόμενος 1 I stand here being judged If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you are judging me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 26 6 r42g figs-abstractnouns ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τῆς εἰς τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν ἐπαγγελίας, γενομένης ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 because of hope of the promise made to our fathers by God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because I hope in the promise made to our fathers by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 26 6 l574 figs-activepassive τῆς εἰς τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν ἐπαγγελίας, γενομένης ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 of the promise made to our fathers by God If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “of the promise that God made to our fathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 26 6 l575 figs-extrainfo τῆς εἰς τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν ἐπαγγελίας, γενομένης ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 of the promise made to our fathers by God Since Paul explains in verse 8 that the **promise** for which he has **hope** is the resurrection from the dead, here you do not need to explain further what Paul means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
|
||
ACT 26 6 l576 figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 26 6 l577 figs-exclusive τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν 1 our fathers By **our**, Paul means himself and his fellow Jews but not Agrippa to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 26 7 hnf1 figs-metonymy τὸ δωδεκάφυλον ἡμῶν 1 our 12 tribes Paul is referring to the people of Israel by association with the way that nation was historically composed of 12 tribes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 26 7 l578 figs-exclusive τὸ δωδεκάφυλον ἡμῶν 1 our 12 tribes By **our**, Paul means himself and his fellow Jews but not Agrippa to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 26 7 l579 figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἐκτενείᾳ & λατρεῦον 1 serving in earnestness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **earnestness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “serving earnestly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 26 7 kzg4 figs-merism νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν 1 night and day Paul is using the two parts of a full day, **night** and **day**, to refer to continuous activity throughout a full day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “continually” or, if you translated **serving in earnestness** as “serving earnestly”: “and continually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||
ACT 26 7 a580 figs-activepassive ἐνκαλοῦμαι ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων 1 I am being accused by the Jews If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Jews are accusing me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 26 7 c4lm figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων 1 by the Jews Paul is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by these Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 26 8 de83 figs-rquestion τί ἄπιστον κρίνεται παρ’ ὑμῖν, εἰ ὁ Θεὸς νεκροὺς ἐγείρει? 1 Why is it judged unbelievable among you that God raises the dead? Paul is using the question form to challenge the Jewish leaders who are accusing him. Many of them are Pharisees who believe that God does raise the dead, and yet they do not believe that God raised Jesus from the dead. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “By accusing me, you are acting as if you do not believe that God raises the dead!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 26 8 l581 figs-yousingular παρ’ ὑμῖν 1 among you While to this point Paul has used the word **you** in the singular to refer to Agrippa, here he uses it in the plural to refer to the Jewish leaders who are present. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
|
||
ACT 26 8 a599 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ὁ Θεὸς νεκροὺς ἐγείρει 1 if God raises the dead Paul is speaking as if what he is saying is a hypothetical possibility, but he believes that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if the speaker believes that it is true, then you can translate these words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “that God raises the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
|
||
ACT 26 8 ukk6 figs-idiom νεκροὺς ἐγείρει 1 raises the dead Here, **raises the dead** is an idiom that refers to making someone who has died alive again. Alternate translation: “God makes the dead alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 26 8 l582 figs-nominaladj νεκροὺς 1 the dead Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun to mean people who have died. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 26 9 r4df figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα Ἰησοῦ 1 the name of Jesus While in such contexts the word **name** often represents the person who has that name, Paul is describing a time when he did not believe that Jesus was still alive. So here the word **name** seems to represent the reputation and influence of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the reputation and influence of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 26 10 b581 figs-metonymy τῶν ἁγίων 1 of the saints Paul is using the term **saints** by association to mean believers in Jesus. See how you translated the term in [9:33](../09/33.md). Alternate translation: “of the believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 26 10 b582 figs-synecdoche ἀναιρουμένων & αὐτῶν 1 when they were being executed Paul is using one part of the process of putting someone on trial for a capital offense and punishing that person if he is found guilty to represent the entire process. Since he speaks of casting his **vote** in favor of execution, here he means specifically the trial part of the process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when they were being put on trial for crimes with a penalty of death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 26 10 nys7 figs-activepassive ἀναιρουμένων & αὐτῶν 1 when they were being executed If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the Sanhedrin was considering whether to execute them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 26 10 l584 figs-explicit κατήνεγκα ψῆφον 1 I cast my vote against them The implication is that Paul **cast his vote** as a member of the Sanhedrin. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “as a member of the Sanhedrin, I cast my vote against them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 26 11 b584 figs-hyperbole κατὰ πάσας τὰς συναγωγὰς & τιμωρῶν αὐτοὺς 1 punishing them in all the synagogues Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “going from one synagogue to another to punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 26 12 ajp6 figs-hendiadys μετ’ ἐξουσίας καὶ ἐπιτροπῆς 1 with authority and a commission This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **authority** tells what kind of **commission** the **chief priests** gave Paul. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “with an authoritative commission” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
|
||
ACT 26 14 l585 figs-quotesinquotes ἤκουσα φωνὴν, λέγουσαν πρός με τῇ Ἑβραΐδι διαλέκτῳ, Σαοὺλ, Σαούλ, τί με διώκεις? σκληρόν σοι πρὸς κέντρα λακτίζειν 1 I heard a voice speaking to me in the Hebrew language, ‘Saul, Saul, why are you persecuting me? It is hard for you to kick against a goad.’ If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “I heard a voice speaking to me in the Hebrew language, calling me twice by name, asking me why I was persecuting him, and telling me it was hard for me to kick against a goad.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 26 14 sip5 figs-personification ἤκουσα φωνὴν, λέγουσαν πρός με 1 I heard a voice speaking to me Paul is speaking of this **voice** as if it were a living thing that could speak on its own. Alternate translation: “I heard someone saying to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 26 14 du3t figs-rquestion τί με διώκεις? 1 why are you persecuting me? The voice is using the question form to rebuke Saul. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate its words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the rebuke in another way. Alternate translation: “you should not be persecuting me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 26 14 zsi2 figs-metaphor σκληρόν σοι πρὸς κέντρα λακτίζειν 1 It is hard for you to kick against a goad The voice is speaking as if Paul were literally kicking against a **goad**, that is, a sharp object that people use to prod an animal. The voice means that by opposing Jesus and persecuting believers, Paul is hurting himself. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You are hurting yourself by what you are doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 26 15 l586 figs-quotesinquotes ἐγὼ δὲ εἶπα, τίς εἶ, κύριε? ὁ δὲ Κύριος εἶπεν, ἐγώ εἰμι Ἰησοῦς, ὃν σὺ διώκεις 1 And I said, ‘Who are you, Lord?’ And the Lord said, ‘I am Jesus, whom you are persecuting If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And I asked the Lord who he was, and the Lord said that he was Jesus, whom I was persecuting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 26 15 l587 writing-politeness τίς εἶ, κύριε 1 Who are you, Lord When Paul replied to the voice, he was not yet acknowledging that Jesus was **Lord**. He used that respectful title because he recognized that he was speaking to someone of divine power. If this might be confusing for your readers, in your translation you could use a similar term of respect. Alternate translation: “Who are you, Sir” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 26 15 l588 writing-politeness ὁ & Κύριος εἶπεν 1 the Lord said In this case Paul is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 26 16 l589 figs-quotesinquotes ἀλλὰ ἀνάστηθι, καὶ στῆθι ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας σου; εἰς τοῦτο γὰρ ὤφθην σοι, προχειρίσασθαί σε ὑπηρέτην καὶ μάρτυρα, ὧν τε εἶδές με ὧν τε ὀφθήσομαί σοι 1 But get up and stand on your feet, because for this I have appeared to you, to appoint you a servant and a witness both of the things in which you have seen me and of the things in which I will be shown to you If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “He told me to get up and stand on my feet, because for this he had appeared to me, to appoint me a servant and a witness both of the things in which I had seen him and of the things in which he would be shown to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 26 16 a590 figs-explicitinfo ἀνάστηθι, καὶ στῆθι ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας σου 1 get up and stand on your feet It might seem that the expression **get up and stand on your feet** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten it. Alternate translation: “stand up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
|
||
ACT 26 16 a591 figs-activepassive ὀφθήσομαί σοι 1 I will be shown to you If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I will show myself to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 26 17 a592 figs-quotesinquotes ἐξαιρούμενός σε ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ καὶ ἐκ τῶν ἐθνῶν, εἰς οὓς ἐγὼ ἀποστέλλω σε, 1 rescuing you from the people and from the Gentiles, to whom I am sending you, If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He told me that he would rescue me from the peoples and from the Gentiles, to whom he was sending me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 26 17 a593 figs-explicit τοῦ λαοῦ 1 the people By **the people**, Jesus means specifically the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 26 18 a594 figs-quotesinquotes ἀνοῖξαι ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν, τοῦ ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ σκότους εἰς φῶς, καὶ τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ Σατανᾶ ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν, τοῦ λαβεῖν αὐτοὺς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν καὶ κλῆρον ἐν τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ 1 to open their eyes to turn from darkness to light and from the authority of Satan to God, for them to receive forgiveness of sins and an inheritance among the ones having been sanctified by faith in me.’ If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “to open their eyes to turn from darkness to light and from the authority of Satan to God, for them to receive forgiveness of sins and an inheritance among the ones having been sanctified by faith in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 26 18 fk1k figs-metaphor ἀνοῖξαι ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν, τοῦ ἐπιστρέψαι 1 to open their eyes to turn Jesus is speaking of Paul helping people to understand the truth about him as if Paul would literally **open** the **eyes** of these people. Alternate translation: “to help them understand the truth about me so that they will turn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 26 18 gw8f figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ σκότους εἰς φῶς 1 to turn from darkness to light Jesus is speaking of Paul helping people to stop doing what is wrong and to start obeying God as if the Paul would be literally helping these people stop directing their attention to **darkness** and start directing it to **light**. Alternate translation: “so that they will stop doing what is wrong and start obeying God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 26 18 q3h8 figs-explicit καὶ τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ Σατανᾶ ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 and from the authority of Satan to God By **authority**, Jesus implicitly means the control that **Satan** has over people who are under his authority. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “and no longer have Satan control them but have God control them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 26 18 m65i figs-abstractnouns τοῦ λαβεῖν αὐτοὺς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν καὶ 1 for them to receive forgiveness of sins and If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **forgiveness**, you could express the same idea with the verb “forgive.” Alternate translation: “so that God may forgive their sins and give them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 26 18 m9ve figs-metaphor κλῆρον ἐν 1 an inheritance among Jesus is speaking of the blessings that he gives to those who believe in him as if they were an **inheritance** such as children receive from their parents. Alternate translation: “the blessings that I give to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 26 18 c5ij figs-activepassive τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ 1 the ones having been sanctified by faith in me If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones whom I sanctify because they have faith in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 26 19 zv2u figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἐγενόμην ἀπειθὴς 1 I was not disobedient If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative adjective **disobedient**. Alternate translation: “I was obedient” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 26 19 sn4h figs-metonymy τῇ οὐρανίῳ ὀπτασίᾳ 1 to the heavenly vision Paul is referring to Jesus by association with the way Jesus spoke to him in this **vision**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to Jesus, who spoke to me from heaven in this vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 26 20 fei4 figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 turn to God Paul is speaking as if he declared that people should physically **turn** to God. He means that he proclaimed they should stop living in one way and begin to live in another way. Alternate translation: “start obeying God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 26 20 h1v2 figs-abstractnouns ἄξια τῆς μετανοίας ἔργα πράσσοντας 1 doing deeds worthy of repentance If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **repentance**, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “doing deeds that showed that they had truly repented” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 26 21 tl6t figs-synecdoche Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Paul is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jews who opposed me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 26 22 t8f4 figs-merism μικρῷ τε καὶ μεγάλῳ 1 to both small and great Paul is referring to people of every kind by naming two extremes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to people of every kind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||
ACT 26 22 f6py grammar-connect-exceptions οὐδὲν ἐκτὸς & ὧν 1 nothing except the things If it would appear in your language that Paul was contradicting himself by saying that he spoke **nothing** and then describing what he spoke, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “the same things that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
|
||
ACT 26 23 pe9h figs-explicit εἰ παθητὸς ὁ Χριστός; εἰ πρῶτος ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν, φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν 1 if the Christ would be a sufferer, if he, the first from the resurrection of the dead, was going to proclaim Paul could be saying that this is what Moses and the prophets said about the Messiah. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They addressed the question as to whether the Christ would be a sufferer, as to whether he, the first from the resurrection of the dead, was going to proclaim” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 26 23 l597 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ παθητὸς ὁ Χριστός; εἰ πρῶτος ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν, φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν 1 if the Christ would be a sufferer, if he, the first from the resurrection of the dead, was going to proclaim Paul could be speaking as if what he is saying is a hypothetical possibility even though he believes that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if the speaker believes that it is true, then you can translate these words as an affirmative statement. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Now since the Christ was a sufferer, since he was the first from the resurrection of the dead, then he was going to proclaim light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
|
||
ACT 26 23 p9t8 figs-abstractnouns πρῶτος ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν 1 the first from the resurrection of the dead If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **resurrection**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the first person whom God made alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 26 23 sc5f figs-nominaladj νεκρῶν 1 of the dead Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun to mean people who have died. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 26 23 z2ms figs-metaphor φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν 1 was going to proclaim light Paul is saying that the truth that Jesus proclaimed about God was like a **light** that allowed people to see. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “was going to proclaim the truth about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 26 23 a595 figs-explicit τῷ & λαῷ 1 to the people By **the people**, Paul means specifically the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “to the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 26 24 a596 ὁ Φῆστος & φησιν 1 Festus says To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Festus said”
|
||
ACT 26 24 tk27 figs-personification τὰ πολλά σε γράμματα εἰς μανίαν περιτρέπει 1 Great learning is turning you to insanity Festus is speaking of **learning** as if it were a living thing that was **turning** Paul from sanity to insanity. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You have become insane from learning so much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 26 25 dur9 figs-doublenegatives οὐ μαίνομαι 1 I am not insane If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative adjective **insane**. Alternate translation: “I am completely sane” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 26 25 a6pb writing-politeness κράτιστε Φῆστε 1 most excellent Festus The expression **most excellent** was a formal title by which people addressed Roman officials. Your language and culture may have a comparable title that you can use in your translation. See how you translated the similar expression in [Acts 23:26](../23/26.md). Alternate translation: “Honorable Governor Festus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 26 25 a597 figs-possession ἀληθείας καὶ σωφροσύνης ῥήματα 1 words of truth and of sanity Paul is using the possessive form to describe the character of the **words** he is **speaking**. Alternate translation: “words that are true and sane” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
|
||
ACT 26 26 cs7b writing-politeness πρὸς ὃν καὶ παρρησιαζόμενος λαλῶ 1 to whom indeed, speaking boldly, I am talking Paul recognizes that he is being very outspoken in response to King Agrippa’s invitation to speak for himself, so he implicitly apologizes. In your translation, you could use a comparable expression from your language and culture. Alternate translation: “and I hope that he will pardon me for speaking so boldly as I talk to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
|
||
ACT 26 26 tta8 figs-doublenegatives λανθάνειν & αὐτὸν τι τούτων οὐ πείθομαι οὐθέν 1 I am not persuaded that any of these things at all eludes him In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “I am not persuaded that not any of these things eludes him.” In Greek, the second negative creates a positive meaning by canceling the first negative. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I am persuaded that not one of these things at all eludes him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 26 26 v1uu figs-activepassive οὐ & ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο 1 this has not been done in a corner If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this did not happen in a corner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 26 26 xqr1 figs-litotes οὐ & ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο 1 this has not been done in a corner Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this has been done openly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 26 26 i5wg figs-metaphor ἐν γωνίᾳ 1 in a corner Paul is speaking as if Jesus might have done things secretly, as if he had done them **in a corner** of a room where no one could see him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “secretly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 26 27 a4a2 figs-rquestion πιστεύεις, Βασιλεῦ Ἀγρίππα, τοῖς προφήταις? 1 Do you believe the prophets, King Agrippa? Paul asks this question to challenge **King Agrippa** to recognize that if he believes what the prophets wrote, then he should believe that Jesus rose from the dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should believe what I am saying about Jesus since you believe the prophets, King Agrippa.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 26 28 y8qq figs-rquestion ἐν ὀλίγῳ με πείθεις Χριστιανὸν ποιῆσαι? 1 In little are you persuading me to make me a Christian? Agrippa is using the question form to challenge Paul. He is asserting that what Paul has said so far is not sufficiently persuasive. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. The term **little** could mean: (1) little proof. Alternate translation: “You cannot persuade me to become a Christian with so little proof.” (2) little time. Alternate translation: “You cannot persuade me to become a Christian in such a short time.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
|
||
ACT 26 29 a598 καὶ ἐν ὀλίγῳ καὶ ἐν μεγάλῳ 1 either in little or in much The term **little** could mean: (1) little proof. Alternate translation: “whether what I have said is enough or whether you need more proof” (2) little time. Alternate translation: “whether it takes a short time or a long time”
|
||
ACT 26 29 k7kq figs-synecdoche παρεκτὸς τῶν δεσμῶν τούτων 1 without these chains Paul is using one aspect of imprisonment, the **chains** that bound prisoners at this time, to mean the entire state of being imprisoned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “without being imprisoned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 26 31 blz8 figs-metonymy οὐδὲν θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἄξιον τι πράσσει ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος 1 This man is not doing anything worthy of death or of chains The king and governor are referring to a penalty of death by association with **death** itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “This man does not deserve to receive the death penalty or to be kept in chains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 26 31 dwyb figs-synecdoche δεσμῶν 1 of chains These people who heard Paul speak are using one aspect of imprisonment, the **chains** that bound prisoners at this time, to mean the entire state of being imprisoned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of being imprisoned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 26 32 n293 figs-activepassive ἀπολελύσθαι ἐδύνατο ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος 1 This man was able to have been released If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You could have released this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 intro r82x 0 # Acts 27 General Notes<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Sailing<br><br>People who lived near the sea traveled by boats powered by the wind. During some months of the year, the wind would blow in the wrong direction or so hard that sailing was impossible.<br><br>### Trust<br><br>Paul trusted God to bring him safely to land. He told the sailors and soldiers to trust that God would also keep them alive. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])<br><br>### Paul breaks bread<br><br>Luke uses almost the same words here to describe Paul taking bread, thanking God, breaking it, and eating it that he used to describe the last supper Jesus ate with his disciples. However, your translation should not make your reader think that Paul was leading a religious celebration here.
|
||
ACT 27 1 b2yz figs-activepassive ἐκρίθη τοῦ ἀποπλεῖν ἡμᾶς 1 it was decided for us to sail If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Roman authorities decided that we should sail” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 1 l604 figs-explicit ἐκρίθη τοῦ ἀποπλεῖν ἡμᾶς 1 it was decided for us to sail Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he says **us** because he joined Paul at this point in the story. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand what is happening. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 27 1 a600 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 us As the General Notes to this chapter explain, here and in several other places Luke says “we,” **us**, and “our” to mean himself and others who were traveling with him, but not his readers. So use the exclusive form of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 27 1 s6ny writing-participants ἑκατοντάρχῃ ὀνόματι Ἰουλίῳ 1 a centurion, Julius by name Luke is using the phrase **a centurion** to introduce **Julius** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
|
||
ACT 27 1 un2s translate-names Ἰουλίῳ 1 Julius The word **Julius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 1 d22f translate-names σπείρης Σεβαστῆς 1 of the Augustan regiment The **Augustan regiment** was the name of the military unit from which this centurion came. Some versions translate this as the “Imperial regiment.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 2 efe4 translate-names Ἀδραμυντηνῷ 1 Adramyttium The word ** Adramyttium ** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 2 dnr9 figs-metonymy πλοίῳ & μέλλοντι πλεῖν 1 a ship … being about to sail Luke is referring to what the crew of this ship was about to do by association with the ship itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a ship whose crew was about to sail it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 27 2 h3uy translate-names Ἀριστάρχου 1 Aristarchus The word **Aristarchus** is the name of a man who came from Macedonia but who had been working with Paul in Ephesus. See how you translated his name in [19:29](../19/29.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 3 a602 figs-idiom κατήχθημεν εἰς Σιδῶνα 1 we came down to Sidon As the General Notes to this chapter explain, Luke says that he and the other travelers **came down** to Sidon because that was the customary way in this culture of describing people arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “we landed at Sidon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 27 3 rp73 figs-abstractnouns ἐπιμελείας τυχεῖν 1 to receive their care If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **care**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “so that they could care for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 27 4 mjt8 figs-idiom ὑπεπλεύσαμεν τὴν Κύπρον 1 we sailed under Cyprus The expression **sailed under** does not mean that the travelers sailed south of the island of Cyprus, such as Luke describes in [21:3](../21/03.md), even though that would have been the shortest route. Rather, **sailed under** means that the ship kept close to the northern shore of the island, which loomed above the ship and blocked the wind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that meaning plainly. However, if the people of your culture are familiar with sea travel, you could use the corresponding expression that is most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we stayed close to the northern shore of Cyprus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 27 5 y6m6 figs-explicit κατήλθαμεν εἰς Μύρρα τῆς Λυκίας 1 we came down to Myra of Lycia Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the travelers got off the ship at **Myra**. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “we came down to Myra of Lycia, where we got off the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 27 5 ni2x translate-names Μύρρα τῆς Λυκίας 1 Myra of Lycia The word **Myra** is the name of a city, and the word **Lycia** is the name of the province in which that city was located. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 6 j4cf figs-metonymy πλοῖον Ἀλεξανδρῖνον, πλέον εἰς τὴν Ἰταλίαν 1 an Alexandrian ship sailing to Italy Luke is referring to what the crew of this ship was doing by association with the ship itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a ship whose crew was sailing it to Italy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 27 6 fdq2 translate-names Ἀλεξανδρῖνον 1 from Alexandria The word **Alexandrian** is the name for someone or something that comes from the city of Alexandria. See how you translated it in [18:24](../18/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 7 zzw1 figs-explicit ἐν ἱκαναῖς δὲ ἡμέραις, βραδυπλοοῦντες καὶ μόλις, γενόμενοι κατὰ τὴν Κνίδον 1 sailing slowly for many days and having arrived with difficulty near Cnidus Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the ship was **sailing slowly** and **with difficulty** because it was sailing into the wind. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “sailing slowly for many days and having arrived with difficulty near Cnidus because we were sailing into the wind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 27 7 pye5 translate-names τὴν Κνίδον 1 Cnidus The word **Cnidus** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 7 mq4n translate-names τὴν Κρήτην & Σαλμώνην 1 Crete … Salmone The word **Crete** is the name of an island. See how you translated the word “Cretans” in [2:11](../02/11.md). The word **Salmone** is the name of a cape on the east end of the island of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 8 b604 writing-pronouns παραλεγόμενοι αὐτὴν 1 sailing along it The pronoun **it** refers the island of Crete. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “sailing along the island of Crete” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 27 8 p4ri figs-explicit μόλις 1 with difficulty The implication is that even under the shelter of the island of Crete, the winds were still so strong as to make sailing to the west difficult. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “with difficulty because the winds from the west were strong even there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 27 8 a64y translate-names Καλοὺς Λιμένας 1 Fair Havens The word **Fair Havens** is the name of a port on the south coast of the island of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 8 n7re translate-names πόλις ἦν Λασαία 1 the city of Lasea The word **Lasea** is the name of a city on the coast of the island of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 9 a605 figs-explicit τὸ καὶ τὴν νηστείαν ἤδη παρεληλυθέναι 1 even the fast had already passed Luke assumes that his readers will understand that after this **fast**, which came in the last part of September or the first part of October according to Western calendars, there was a higher risk of seasonal storms. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “even the fast had already passed and so there was a higher risk of seasonal storms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 27 9 u6x5 figs-metonymy τὴν νηστείαν 1 the fast Luke is referring to the Day of Atonement by association with the way that Jews observed a **fast** in connection with that sacred day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Day of Atonement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 27 9 a606 writing-pronouns παρῄνει ὁ Παῦλος 1 Paul was warning them The pronoun **them** refers to the centurion and to the pilot and owner of the ship, as verse 11 makes clear. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul was warning Julius and the pilot and the owner of the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 27 10 p29v figs-metaphor θεωρῶ 1 I see Paul is speaking as if he could literally **see** the things he describes. He means that God has revealed them to him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God has revealed to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 27 10 nx9c figs-abstractnouns μετὰ ὕβρεως καὶ πολλῆς ζημίας, οὐ μόνον τοῦ φορτίου καὶ τοῦ πλοίου, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῶν ψυχῶν ἡμῶν, μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι τὸν πλοῦν 1 the voyage is about to be with injury and much loss, not only of the cargo and the ship, but also of our lives If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **injury** and **loss**, you could express the same ideas in other ways. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “on this voyage, many of us will be injured and we will lose many valuable things. We will not only lose the cargo and the ship, we will lose our lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 27 11 b1kz figs-activepassive ὁ & ἑκατοντάρχης τῷ κυβερνήτῃ καὶ τῷ ναυκλήρῳ μᾶλλον ἐπείθετο, ἢ τοῖς ὑπὸ Παύλου λεγομένοις 1 the centurion was being persuaded more by the pilot and by the captain than by the things being spoken by Paul If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in other ways that are natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the pilot and the captain were persuading the centurion more by what they were saying than Paul was persuading him by what he was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 11 a607 figs-explicit τῷ ναυκλήρῳ 1 by the captain Here the word **captain** could mean: (1) someone who was in command of the ship. Alternate translation: “the ship’s commander” (2) someone who owned the ship and was in command of it. However, while this is a common meaning of the word, it is unlikely in this context. We learn from the story that this ship was carrying grain from Egypt to Italy and so it would have belonged to the emperor’s own fleet. Alternate translation: “the shipowner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 27 12 jmi3 translate-unknown λιμένος 1 harbor A **harbor** is a place on the coast whose location and shape allow ships to come safely close to the land. If your language does not have a term for such a place, you could use a general description in your translation. Alternate translation: “place of access to the shore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 27 12 z1lf translate-unknown παραχειμασίαν & παραχειμάσαι 1 wintering … to winter there The terms **wintering** and **to winter** mean to stay in a place that is safe during the winter, which is a cold and stormy season in this location. If the seasons do not vary much in your location or if there is not a cold and stormy season, you could explain this with a general expression. Alternate translation: “staying during a cold and stormy season … to stay there during the cold and stormy season” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 27 12 k2ti translate-names Φοίνικα 1 Phoenix The word **Phoenix** is the name of a port city on the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 12 a608 figs-idiom βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον 1 looking according to the southwest wind and according to the northwest wind This expression means that the Phoenix harbor provided access for ships to sail out in the directions that the winds coming from the **southwest** and the **northwest** blew. That is, ships would sail out to the northeast and southeast from the harbor, and they would enter the harbor from the northeast or southeast. Your language and culture may have a comparable expression of its own that you can use in your translation. Otherwise, you could describe this in general terms. Alternate translation: “looking down the northwest wind and down the southwest wind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 27 12 x6vl figs-metaphor βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον 1 looking according to the southwest wind and according to the northwest wind Luke is speaking as if the harbor of Phoenix was literally **looking** in these directions. He means that it gave access for ships to sail in those directions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “giving access for sailing to the northeast or to the southeast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 27 12 gyd2 translate-unknown λίβα & χῶρον 1 the southwest … the northwest These directions are based on the rising and setting of the sun. The **southwest** is somewhat to the left of the setting sun, and the **northwest** is somewhat to the right of the setting sun. If you decide to use the terms “northeast” and “southeast” instead, based on the two previous notes, the northeast is somewhat to the left of the rising sun and the southeast is somewhat to the right of the rising sun. Your language and culture may have their own terms for these directions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 27 13 xx67 translate-unknown ἄραντες 1 having raised {the anchor} An **anchor** is a heavy object that is attached to a rope that is tied to a ship. The ship’s crew tosses the anchor into the water and it sinks to the bottom of the sea, keeping the ship from drifting about. The crew raises the anchor out of the water when it is time for the ship to travel. Your language may have a specific expression for this action. Alternate translation: “having weighed anchor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 27 13 a603 writing-pronouns παρελέγοντο 1 they were sailing The pronoun **they** refers to the crew of the ship. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the crew was sailing the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 27 14 m2xe figs-litotes μετ’ οὐ πολὺ 1 not long after Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “after a short time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 27 14 g1ek translate-transliterate ὁ καλούμενος Εὐρακύλων 1 called Eurakylon The term **Euraklyon** is a combination of the Greek word for the east wind and the Latin word for the north wind. Luke spells out the term using Greek letters so that his readers will know how it sounds. This seems to be the name that Luke heard the sailors give to this wind. In your translation, you could spell it the way it sounds in your language. You could also say what it means. Alternate translation: “called the Northeaster” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
|
||
ACT 27 14 lrs7 figs-activepassive ὁ καλούμενος 1 called If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the sailors called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 14 tz2k writing-pronouns αὐτῆς 1 it The pronoun **it** refers to the island of Crete. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the island of Crete” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 27 15 a609 figs-activepassive συναρπασθέντος δὲ τοῦ πλοίου, καὶ μὴ δυναμένου ἀντοφθαλμεῖν τῷ ἀνέμῳ 1 the ship having been seized and not being able to face into the wind If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the wind seized the ship, so that we were not able to face into the wind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 15 a610 figs-personification συναρπασθέντος & τοῦ πλοίου, καὶ μὴ δυναμένου ἀντοφθαλμεῖν τῷ ἀνέμῳ 1 the ship having been seized and not being able to face into the wind Luke is speaking of the **wind** as if it were a living thing that **seized** the **ship**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the wind blowing with such force that it kept the ship from sailing in the direction from which it was coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 27 15 a611 figs-metaphor ἀντοφθαλμεῖν τῷ ἀνέμῳ 1 to face into the wind Luke is speaking as if the ship literally had a **face** that it could turn towards the wind. Your language may have an expression that suits this context and that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “to bear up against the wind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 27 15 w1hl figs-activepassive ἐφερόμεθα 1 we were driven along If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the wind drove us along” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 16 c4cg figs-idiom νησίον & τι ὑποδραμόντες, καλούμενον Καῦδα 1 running under a certain island called Cauda The expression **running under** is a sailing term that means to go along a specific side of some land in order to block the wind. Your language may have a specific expression for this action. If not, you could explain the meaning generally. Alternate translation: “sailing under the lee of a certain island called Cauda” or “sailing on the side of an island called Cauda where the wind was not so strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 27 16 a612 figs-activepassive νησίον & τι & καλούμενον Καῦδα 1 a certain island called Cauda If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a certain island that people called Cauda” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 16 aq56 translate-names Καῦδα 1 Cauda The word **Cauda** is the name of a small island located off the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 16 h9z2 translate-unknown τῆς σκάφης 1 of the lifeboat A **lifeboat** is a smaller boat that crews sometimes tow behind their larger ship and sometimes bring up onto the ship and tie down. They use the smaller boat for various reasons, including escaping from the larger ship if it is sinking. If your language does not have a term for a smaller boat like this, you could use a general expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “of the smaller utility boat that the ship was towing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 27 17 tx1f figs-idiom βοηθείαις ἐχρῶντο, ὑποζωννύντες τὸ πλοῖον 1 they were using helps, undergirding the ship The word **helps** is a nautical term that means ropes or cables. The word **undergirding** describes the process of running ropes or cables around the bottom of a ship so that the ship will not come apart during a storm. If your language does not have comparable nautical terms, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “they were tying ropes around the bottom of the ship so that it would not come apart during the storm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 27 17 a613 writing-pronouns ἐχρῶντο 1 they were using Here and in the next two verses, the pronoun **they** refers to the sailors of the ship. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the sailors were using” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 27 17 a614 figs-idiom μὴ εἰς τὴν Σύρτιν ἐκπέσωσιν 1 they might fall into the Syrtis The expression **fall into** is a nautical term that in this context describes a ship becoming stuck in quicksand. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “they might run aground on the Syrtis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 27 17 dvv4 translate-names τὴν Σύρτιν 1 the Syrtis The word **Syrtis** is the name of a large mass of quicksand near the north coast of Africa. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 17 l615 translate-unknown τὴν Σύρτιν 1 the Syrtis Quicksand, which the word **Syrtis** describes, is sand that is saturated with water. It does not support the weight of a person, so sailors cannot get out of a ship to free it if the ship gets stuck in quicksand. If your readers would not be familiar with quicksand, you could describe it generally in your translation. Alternate translation: “the large mass of waterlogged sand off the north coast of Africa” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 27 17 l8kl translate-unknown χαλάσαντες τὸ σκεῦος 1 lowering the gear The term **gear** could mean: (1) the sails of the ship and the rigging that the sailors uses to raise and lower the sails. If this is the meaning, then Luke is saying that without sails, the sailors could not steer the ship and it had to go wherever the wind drove it. Alternate translation: “taking down the sails” (2) a sea anchor, that is, some object that the sailors would drag along in the water behind the ship in order to slow the ship down. If this is the meaning, then the sailors lowered this sea anchor in the hopes that the storm would end before they reached the quicksand. Alternate translation: “putting a sea anchor into the water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 27 17 g7rw figs-activepassive ἐφέροντο 1 they were being driven along If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the wind was driving them along” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 18 fx4m figs-activepassive σφοδρῶς & χειμαζομένων ἡμῶν 1 we being exceedingly storm-tossed If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as the storm was tossing us exceedingly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 18 nd5h figs-idiom ἐκβολὴν ἐποιοῦντο 1 they were doing a jettison The word **jettison** is a nautical term that describes sailors throwing the cargo of a ship (the goods that the ship is transporting) into the sea to lighten the weight of the ship in an effort to prevent it from sinking. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “they were throwing the cargo of the ship into the sea to make the ship lighter to try to keep it from sinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 27 19 l617 figs-idiom τῇ τρίτῃ 1 on the third day In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” tomorrow was the “second day,” and the day after tomorrow was the “third day.” So here, **the third day** means two days after the sailors tied ropes around the ship and one day after the sailors threw the cargo overboard. You may wish to express this in your translation in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “on the day after that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 27 19 a641 translate-ordinal τῇ τρίτῃ 1 on the third day If you retain this idiom but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “on day three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||
ACT 27 19 vm2k figs-explicit τὴν σκευὴν τοῦ πλοίου ἔριψαν 1 they threw the equipment of the ship {overboard} Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the sailors **threw the equipment … overboard** in a desperate effort to make the ship even lighter. In this context, **equipment** refers to everything the sailors needed to sail the ship: tackle, hoists, beams of wood, block and tackle, ropes, lines, sails, and the like. This indicates that they had given up on sailing the ship and were hoping just to survive. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they became so desperate that they threw overboard everything they needed to sail the ship, hoping just to survive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 27 19 l616 figs-synecdoche αὐτόχειρες 1 with their own hands Luke is using one part of the sailors, their **hands**, to represent all of them in the act of throwing the cargo overboard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 27 20 if7a figs-explicit μήτε & ἡλίου μήτε ἄστρων ἐπιφαινόντων ἐπὶ πλείονας ἡμέρας 1 neither sun nor stars appearing for many days Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the **sun** and **stars** did not appear because the dark storm clouds obscured them. Luke also assumes that his readers will understand that sailors needed to see the sun and stars in order to know where they were and in what direction they were headed. So this is a further indication of how desperate the situation was. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “since the sailors could not determine their position or nagivate the ship because the dark storm clouds prevented the sun and stars from appearing for many days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 27 20 p2wd figs-litotes χειμῶνός & οὐκ ὀλίγου 1 no small storm Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great storm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 27 20 lrs6 figs-personification ἐπικειμένου 1 lying upon us Luke is speaking of the storm as if they were a living thing that was **lying upon** the ship. He means that the storm continued to buffet the ship without ever letting up. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “continually buffeting the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 27 20 mnj5 figs-activepassive λοιπὸν περιῃρεῖτο ἐλπὶς πᾶσα, τοῦ σῴζεσθαι ἡμᾶς 1 all hope for us to be saved was finally being taken away If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the same ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we finally lost all hope that we could save ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 20 l618 figs-abstractnouns λοιπὸν περιῃρεῖτο ἐλπὶς πᾶσα, τοῦ σῴζεσθαι ἡμᾶς 1 all hope for us to be saved was finally being taken away If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “we finally stopped hoping that we could save ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 27 20 l619 figs-hyperbole λοιπὸν περιῃρεῖτο ἐλπὶς πᾶσα, τοῦ σῴζεσθαι ἡμᾶς 1 all hope for us to be saved was finally being taken away Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “it finally became very difficult to hope that we could save ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 27 21 d1le figs-abstractnouns πολλῆς & ἀσιτίας ὑπαρχούσης 1 as there had been much abstinence If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **abstinence**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as we had gone a long time without eating food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 27 21 zns2 translate-symaction σταθεὶς & ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν 1 having stood up in the midst of them Paul **stood up** to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “having stood up in the midst of them to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
|
||
ACT 27 21 bc1x figs-doublet τὴν ὕβριν ταύτην, καὶ τὴν ζημίαν 1 this injury and loss The terms **injury** and **loss** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “such a great loss” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 27 22 djh4 figs-ellipsis ἀποβολὴ & ψυχῆς οὐδεμία ἔσται ἐξ ὑμῶν, πλὴν τοῦ πλοίου 1 there will be no loss of life among you, only of the ship Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “there will be no loss of life among you, there will only be loss of the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 27 23 a620 figs-parallelism τοῦ Θεοῦ, οὗ εἰμι, ᾧ καὶ λατρεύω 1 of the God whose I am and whom I serve The phrases **whose I am** and **whom I serve** mean similar things. Paul is using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these phrases in your translation. Alternate translation: “of the God I worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||
ACT 27 24 a621 figs-quotesinquotes λέγων, μὴ φοβοῦ, Παῦλε; Καίσαρί σε δεῖ παραστῆναι, καὶ ἰδοὺ, κεχάρισταί σοι ὁ Θεὸς πάντας τοὺς πλέοντας μετὰ σοῦ 1 saying, ‘Do not be afraid, Paul. It is necessary for you to stand before Caesar, and behold, God has graciously granted to you all the ones sailing with you.’ If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The angel told me that I should not be afraid, because it was necessary for me to stand before Caesar, and behold, God had graciously granted to me all the ones sailing with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 27 24 a622 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 behold The angel is using the term **behold** to focus Paul’s attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 27 24 z1j8 figs-synecdoche Καίσαρί σε δεῖ παραστῆναι 1 You must stand before Caesar The angel is using one aspect of the trial process, the fact that an accused person would **stand before** a judge, to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You must appear in Caesar’s court so that he can judge you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 27 25 r9t8 figs-activepassive καθ’ ὃν τρόπον λελάληταί μοι 1 according to the way it was told to me If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “according to the way the angel told me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 26 vmp6 figs-idiom εἰς νῆσον & τινα & ἐκπεσεῖν 1 to fall upon some island The expression **fall upon** is a nautical term that in this context describes a ship running aground on the shore of an island. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “to run aground on some island” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 27 27 rrm5 translate-ordinal τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτη νὺξ 1 the fourteenth night If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “night 14” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||
ACT 27 27 la7u figs-activepassive διαφερομένων ἡμῶν 1 as we were being driven about If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as the storm was driving us about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 27 afs6 translate-names τῷ Ἀδρίᾳ 1 the Hadria The word **Hadria** is the term that people of this culture used to describe the open Mediterranean Sea between Italy and Malta on the west and Greece and Crete on the east. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 27 27 a623 figs-personification προσάγειν τινὰ αὐτοῖς χώραν 1 some land to be approaching them Luke is speaking of this **land** as if it were a living thing that was **approaching** the sailors on the ship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that they were approaching some land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 27 28 ruj1 figs-idiom βολίσαντες 1 taking soundings The expression **taking soundings** is a nautical term that describes sailors determining the depth of the water. Sailors measure this by dropping a marked line with a weight tied to the end of it into the water. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “measuring the depth of the sea water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 27 28 tq53 translate-numbers ὀργυιὰς εἴκοσι & ὀργυιὰς δεκαπέντε 1 20 fathoms & 15 fathoms A **fathom** is a unit of measurement of the depth of water. One fathom is equal to about two meters or about six feet. Alternate translation: “40 meters … 30 meters” or “120 feet … 90 feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
|
||
ACT 27 29 a624 figs-idiom κατὰ & ἐκπέσωμεν 1 we might fall upon a rugged place The expression **fall upon** is a nautical term that in this context describes a ship running aground on **some rugged place**. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “we might run aground on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 27 29 q4am figs-idiom πρύμνης 1 the stern The word **stern** is a nautical term that means the back of a ship. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “the back of the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 27 30 rr89 figs-idiom πρῴρης 1 the bow The word **bow** is a nautical term that means the front of a ship. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “the front of the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 27 31 sz8y figs-activepassive ὑμεῖς σωθῆναι οὐ δύνασθε 1 you are not able to be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you will not be able to save yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 32 a625 figs-idiom ἐκπεσεῖν 1 fall away The expression **fall away** is a nautical term that in this context could mean: (1) that the soldiers let the lifeboat fall into the water where none of the sailors could get into it, because it was no longer tied to the ship. Alternate translation: “fall into the water” (2) that the soldiers let the lifeboat, which was already in the water, drift away where none of the sailors could get into it. Alternate translation: “drift away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 27 33 j5yg translate-ordinal τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτην σήμερον ἡμέραν, προσδοκῶντες & διατελεῖτε 1 Anxiously waiting for a fourteenth day today, you are continuing If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you could use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “This is now day 14 that you have been anxiously waiting, and you are continuing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
|
||
ACT 27 33 a626 figs-doublet ἄσιτοι & μηθὲν προσλαβόμενοι 1 fasting, having eaten nothing The expressions **fasting** and **having eaten nothing** mean similar things. Paul is using the two expressions together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express this emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “to eat nothing at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 27 34 a627 figs-abstractnouns τοῦτο & πρὸς τῆς ὑμετέρας σωτηρίας ὑπάρχει 1 this is for your salvation If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “this will save you” or “this will keep you alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 27 34 j3qx figs-synecdoche οὐδενὸς & ὑμῶν θρὶξ ἀπὸ τῆς κεφαλῆς ἀπολεῖται 1 a hair from the head of none of you will perish Paul is using one part of each of his listeners, a **hair** from his **head**, to represent all of that listener. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “each of you will survive without suffering harm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 27 36 zt9q figs-activepassive εὔθυμοι & γενόμενοι πάντες 1 they were all encouraged The phrase **were … encouraged** is not actually a passive form in Greek. The word translated **encouraged** is an adjective. However, this phrase might sound like a passive verbal form in other langauges. If your language does not use passive forms, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this encouraged them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 37 ynq3 writing-background ἤμεθα & αἱ πᾶσαι ψυχαὶ ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, διακόσιαι ἑβδομήκοντα ἕξ 1 we, all the souls in the ship, were 276 This is background information about the number of people on the ship. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 27 37 a628 figs-synecdoche αἱ & ψυχαὶ 1 the souls Luke is using one part of the people on the ship, their **souls**, to represent their entire selves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 27 38 a629 figs-activepassive κορεσθέντες & τροφῆς 1 having been satisfied with food If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having eaten enough food to satisfy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 39 a643 writing-pronouns οὐκ ἐπεγίνωσκον 1 they were not recognizing Here and in the rest of this verse and in the next verse, the pronoun **they** refers to the sailors. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the sailors were not recognizing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 27 39 vdk2 translate-unknown κόλπον & τινα 1 a certain bay A **bay** is a large area of water that partly surrounded by land but open to a larger body of water. Your language may have a specific expression for this kind of area. If not, you could explain the meaning generally. Alternate translation: “a certain area of water sheltered by the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 27 40 ntr9 figs-idiom τὰς ζευκτηρίας τῶν πηδαλίων 1 the bands of the rudders The words **bands** and **rudders** are nautical terms. The **rudders** were large pieces of wood at the back of the ship that the sailors used for steering the ship. The **bands** were ropes or cords that held the rudders out of the water while anchors were holding the ship in one place. If your language does not have comparable nautical terms, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “the ropes that held out of the water the pieces of wood that the sailors used to steer the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 27 40 cn2w translate-unknown τὸν ἀρτέμωνα 1 the topsail A sail is a large piece of cloth that catches the wind in order to propel a ship through the water. A **topsail** is a sail that sailors place at the top of a mast on a ship. A mast is a vertical pole with cross-poles that hold sails. Alternate translation: “the sail that sailors put at the top of a pole, high above the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 27 40 pa1k figs-idiom κατεῖχον εἰς τὸν αἰγιαλόν 1 they were heading to the beach In this context, the expression **they were heading** is a nautical term that describes a ship moving in a specific direction. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “they were steering the ship toward the beach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 27 41 a630 figs-idiom περιπεσόντες & εἰς 1 having fallen into The expression **having fallen into** is a nautical term that in this context describes a ship striking land. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “striking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 27 41 y22n figs-idiom τόπον διθάλασσον 1 a place between two seas The expression **a place between two seas** is a nautical term that describes a sandbar that extends out from the land. A sandbar forms when a sea current coming from one direction flows across a sea current coming from another direction. This causes the sand under the water to pile up, making the water shallow and dangerous for ships. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you could state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “a sandbar extending out from the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 27 41 a631 figs-activepassive ἡ δὲ πρύμνα ἐλύετο ὑπὸ τῆς βίας 1 the stern was being loosed by the violence If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but the violence was breaking up the stern” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 27 41 a632 figs-explicit ὑπὸ τῆς βίας 1 the violence Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he is referring to the **violence** of the waves that were hitting the **stern** of the ship. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “by the violence of the waves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 27 41 a634 figs-abstractnouns ὑπὸ τῆς βίας 1 by the violence If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **violence**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because the waves that were hitting it were so strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 27 44 a644 figs-ellipsis καὶ τοὺς λοιποὺς 1 and the rest Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the previous verse if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and the rest to depart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
|
||
ACT 28 intro w8yn 0 # Acts 28 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>No one knows for sure why Luke ends his history without telling what happened to Paul after he had been in Rome for two years.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### “Letters” and “brothers”<br><br>The Jewish leaders were surprised that Paul wanted to speak with them, because they had received no letters from the high priest in Jerusalem telling them that Paul was coming.<br><br>When the Jewish leaders spoke of “brothers,” they were referring to fellow Jews, not to Christians.<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “He was a god”<br><br>The native people believed that Paul was a god, but they did not believe that he was the one true God. We do not know why Paul did not tell the native people that he was not a god.
|
||
ACT 28 1 j1yf figs-activepassive διασωθέντες 1 having been brought safely through If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it seems that Luke means to say that it was God. Alternate translation: “after God had brought us safely through” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 28 1 a635 figs-activepassive Μελίτη ἡ νῆσος καλεῖται 1 the island was called Malta If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people called the island Malta” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 28 1 f8y4 translate-names Μελίτη 1 Malta The word **Malta** is the name of an island located south of the island of Sicily. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 28 2 e7w6 figs-idiom οἵ & βάρβαροι 1 the barbarians Luke is using the word **barbarians** in the specific sense that it had in his culture. He means people who did not speak Greek or Latin. From his perspective and the perspective of the others with him, they were “foreigners,” but from their own perspectives, they were “natives” of the island. It may be appropriate to describe them that way in your translation. Alternate translation: “the natives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 28 2 r7jy figs-litotes οὐ τὴν τυχοῦσαν φιλανθρωπίαν 1 no ordinary benevolence Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “extraordinary benevolence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
|
||
ACT 28 3 g4ad translate-unknown ἔχιδνα 1 a viper A **viper** is a dangerous poisonous snake. If your readers would not recognize this name, you could use the name of another poisonous snake they might recognize or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a snake whose venom was poisonous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 28 4 ma1b translate-names ἡ δίκη 1 Justice The word **Justice** is the name of a false god who the people of this time believed would avenge crimes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 28 6 m11i figs-activepassive αὐτὸν μέλλειν πίμπρασθαι, ἢ καταπίπτειν ἄφνω νεκρόν 1 him to begin to be inflamed or suddenly to fall down dead If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the effects of the venom would begin to inflame him or that he would suddenly fall down dead” or “that the effects of the venom would make his body start to swell or that he would suddenly fall down dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 28 6 i6i6 figs-doublenegatives μηδὲν ἄτοπον εἰς αὐτὸν γινόμενον 1 nothing unusual happening to him If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **nothing** and the negative adjective **unusual**. Alternate translation: “everything happening to him as usual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
|
||
ACT 28 6 u81u figs-metaphor μεταβαλόμενοι 1 turning themselves around Luke is speaking as if the natives of Malta were literally **turning themselves around**. He means that they came to a different opinion about who Paul was. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an expression from your own language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “changing their minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 28 6 cfe9 figs-quotations ἔλεγον αὐτὸν εἶναι θεόν 1 they said that he was a god It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “they said, ‘He is a god!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
|
||
ACT 28 7 r95r writing-background δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word **Now** to introduce background information about **Publius** that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
|
||
ACT 28 7 wx6t figs-nominaladj τῷ πρώτῳ 1 of the first Luke is using the adjective **first** as a noun to mean a particular kind of person. In this context, **first** has the sense of most prominent. Since **Publius** is a Roman name, this man was probably the Roman governor of the island. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of the most prominent man” or “of the Roman governor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 28 7 wh2d translate-names Ποπλίῳ 1 Publius The word **Publius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 28 8 m154 figs-activepassive πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον 1 being afflicted with fevers and dysentery If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom fevers and dysentery were afflicting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 28 8 fr46 translate-unknown δυσεντερίῳ 1 dysentery The word **dysentery** describes an infectious intestinal disease. In your translation, you could use a term a similar disease, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “intestinal disease” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 28 9 yk6u figs-activepassive ἐθεραπεύοντο 1 being healed If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul was healing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 28 10 ydg4 figs-explicit πολλαῖς τιμαῖς ἐτίμησαν ἡμᾶς 1 honored us with many honors Luke assumes that his readers will understand that these **honors** probably included gifts. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “gave us many gifts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 28 11 jc5t translate-names παρασήμῳ Διοσκούροι 1 with a Dioscouri figurehead The word **Dioscouri** is the name of two false gods, Castor and Pollux, whom some sailors considered to be their patron gods. The name means “Sons of Zeus” in Greek. Alternate translation: “with Castor and Pollux as their figurehead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 28 11 a636 translate-unknown παρασήμῳ Διοσκούροι 1 with a Dioscouri figurehead A **figurehead** was an image of a god, human being, animal, or object that was painted or sculpted on the prow (front) of a ship as a good luck token. If your readers would not be familiar with this, you could use a general expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “with images of Castor and Pollux sculpted on the prow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
|
||
ACT 28 12 a637 figs-idiom καταχθέντες εἰς Συρακούσας 1 having come down to Syracuse Luke says that he and the others traveling with him had **come down** to Syracuse because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “having landed at Syracuse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 28 12 w5c6 translate-names Συρακούσας 1 Syracuse The word **Syracuse** is the name of a city on the southeast coast of the island of Sicily, just southwest of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 28 13 a638 figs-idiom κατηντήσαμεν εἰς Ῥήγιον 1 we came down to Rhegium Luke says that he and those traveling with him **came down to Rhegium** because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “we landed at Rhegium” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 28 13 z2u4 translate-names Ῥήγιον 1 Rhegium The word **Rhegium** is the name of a port city that was located at the southwestern tip of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 28 13 tz4h translate-names Ποτιόλους 1 Puteoli The word **Puteoli** is the name of a city that was located on the west coast of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 28 14 m1is figs-metaphor ἀδελφοὺς 1 brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “some believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 28 14 a2c5 figs-activepassive παρεκλήθημεν 1 we were begged If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they begged us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 28 14 bc3j figs-go οὕτως εἰς τὴν Ῥώμην ἤλθαμεν 1 thus we went towards Rome Since Luke describes in the next verse how believers from Rome came some distance to meet Paul and his companions on their way to Rome, by **thus** he means that after staying with the believers in Puetoli for seven days, they continued on their way to Rome. In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “we came near Rome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
|
||
ACT 28 15 a639 figs-explicit κἀκεῖθεν 1 From there By **there**, Luke implicitly means Rome. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “From Rome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 28 15 a640 figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “some believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 28 15 k754 figs-explicit ἀκούσαντες, τὰ περὶ ἡμῶν 1 having heard the things about us The implication is that these believers had heard from the believers in Puteoli while Paul and his companions were staying with them that they were on their way to Rome. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “having learned from the believers in Puteoli that we were coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 28 15 m9tz figs-metaphor ἔλαβε θάρσος 1 took courage Here, **courage** is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could **take**. Alternate translation: “became encouraged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 28 15 se8v translate-names Ἀππίου Φόρου & Τριῶν Ταβερνῶν 1 the Forum of Appius … Three Taverns The phrase **the Forum of Appius** is the name of a popular market on the main highway to Rome that was called the Appian Way. The Forum of Appius was about 40 miles or about 60 kilometers south of Rome. The phrase **Three Taverns** is the name of an inn on that same highway about 30 miles or about 45 kilometers south of Rome. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
|
||
ACT 28 16 te8v figs-activepassive ἐπετράπη τῷ Παύλῳ 1 Paul was allowed If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Roman officials allowed Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 28 16 a642 figs-explicit καθ’ ἑαυτὸν 1 by himself Since there was a **soldier** with Paul who was **guarding him**, Luke does not mean that Paul stayed all **by himself**. Rather, he means that the Roman authorities allowed Paul to live in a rented house (as verse 30 indicates) rather than putting him in prison. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “in a rented house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 28 17 vf7r writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke is using this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
|
||
ACT 28 17 d77z figs-nominaladj τῶν Ἰουδαίων πρώτους 1 first among the Jews Luke is using the adjective **first** as a noun to mean a particular group of people. Here, **first** has the sense of most prominent. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “most prominent among the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 28 17 e1dd figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 28 17 a615 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “My fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 28 17 a664 figs-metaphor τοῖς ἔθεσι τοῖς πατρῴοις 1 to the fathers’ customs Paul is using the term **fathers’** to describe customs that have been passed down among the Jews through the generations. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the ancestral customs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 28 17 g55i figs-explicit τῷ λαῷ 1 the people By **the people**, Paul means specifically the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “to the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
|
||
ACT 28 17 hgk4 figs-activepassive ἐγώ & δέσμιος ἐξ Ἱεροσολύμων παρεδόθην 1 I was delivered as a prisoner from Jerusalem If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders in Jerusalem delivered me as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 28 17 x3r2 figs-metonymy τὰς χεῖρας 1 the hands Here, **hands** represents the power of someone, in this case the power of an authority to hold an accused person in custody. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the custody” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 28 18 fed7 figs-metonymy τὸ μηδεμίαν αἰτίαν θανάτου ὑπάρχειν ἐν ἐμοί 1 there was no reason in me for death Paul is referring to a penalty of death by association with **death** itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I had done nothing to deserve the death penalty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 28 19 lr96 figs-synecdoche τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 the Jews Paul is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 28 19 n6vf figs-activepassive ἠναγκάσθην 1 I was forced If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “my concern for my safety forced me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 28 19 e7gr figs-metonymy τοῦ ἔθνους μου 1 my nation Paul is referring by association to the people of the Jewish **nation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 28 20 a616 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ 1 the hope of Israel If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what Israel is hoping for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 28 20 b1fd figs-metonymy εἵνεκεν & τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ 1 on account of the hope of Israel Paul is referring by association to something that the people of Israel had **hope** for. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. This could mean: (1) the hope that God would send the Messiah. Alternate translation: “because I believe God has sent the Messiah” (2) the hope that God would make people who had died alive again. Alternate translation: “because I believe that God will make people who have died alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 28 20 n3s7 figs-personification τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ 1 of Israel Paul is referring to all of the people of Israel as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
|
||
ACT 28 20 a617 figs-activepassive τὴν ἅλυσιν ταύτην περίκειμαι 1 I am bound with this chain If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this chain is binding me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 28 20 pgr8 figs-synecdoche τὴν ἅλυσιν ταύτην περίκειμαι 1 I am bound with this chain Paul is using one aspect of imprisonment, the **chain** with which he is bound, to mean the entire state of being imprisoned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Romans are keeping me as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
|
||
ACT 28 21 x5d5 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 We By **We**, these Jewish leaders mean themselves but not Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
|
||
ACT 28 21 y4bx figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 of the brothers These Jewish leaders are using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of our fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 28 21 a618 figs-doublet οὔτε παραγενόμενός τις τῶν ἀδελφῶν ἀπήγγειλεν ἢ ἐλάλησέν τι 1 reported or said anything The terms **reported** and **said** mean similar things. The Jewish leaders are using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “nor have any of the brothers, coming, told us anything at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
|
||
ACT 28 22 gy8t figs-activepassive γνωστὸν ἡμῖν ἐστιν 1 it is known to us If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 28 22 j12v figs-activepassive ἀντιλέγεται 1 it is spoken against If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people speak against it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 28 22 a619 figs-hyperbole πανταχοῦ 1 everywhere The Jewish leaders say **everywhere** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in places throughout the empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|
||
ACT 28 23 a645 figs-nominaladj πλείονες 1 more Luke is using the adjective **more** as a noun to mean the larger number of people who came to hear Paul speak. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “more people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
|
||
ACT 28 23 dg5f figs-abstractnouns διαμαρτυρόμενος τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 testifying about the kingdom of God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **kingdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “testifying about how God had begun to rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 28 23 peu1 figs-merism ἀπό τε τοῦ νόμου Μωϋσέως, καὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 both from the Law of Moses and the Prophets Luke is referring to all of the Hebrew Scriptures by naming two of their major parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from passages throughout the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
|
||
ACT 28 24 pmd6 figs-activepassive οἱ & ἐπείθοντο τοῖς λεγομένοις 1 some were convinced by the things being said If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was saying convinced some” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 28 25 n7pm figs-metonymy εἰπόντος & ῥῆμα ἓν 1 having spoken one word Luke is using the term **word** to mean a statement that Paul made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having made this last statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
|
||
ACT 28 25 a646 figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν 1 your fathers Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “your ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 28 26 qj7q figs-quotesinquotes λέγων, πορεύθητι πρὸς τὸν λαὸν τοῦτον, καὶ εἰπόν, ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 saying, ‘Go to this people and say, “By hearing you will hear but you will not understand at all, and seeing you will see but you will not perceive at all.” If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation and then another quotation inside the first one. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit told Isaiah to go to the people of Israel and tell them that by hearing they would hear but they would not understand at all and that seeing they would see but they would not perceive at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 28 26 a647 figs-quotemarks λέγων, πορεύθητι 1 saying, ‘Go This is the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. You may be able to indicate that with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 28 26 a648 figs-quotemarks εἰπόν, ἀκοῇ 1 say, “By hearing This is the beginning of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. You may be able to indicate that with an opening third-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a third-level quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 28 26 pax8 figs-idiom ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε & βλέποντες βλέψετε 1 By hearing you will hear … by seeing you will see Isaiah is using a Hebrew idiom, the repetition of a verb to express the intensity of an action. It may not be possible to translate this Hebrew practice of verb repetition directly into many languages. Use a natural form of strengthening a verb in your language. Alternate translation: “You will try very hard to hear … you will try very hard to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 28 26 a649 figs-parallelism ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 By hearing you will hear but you will not understand at all, and seeing you will see but you will not perceive at all These two phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “You will become aware of what is happening around you but you will not understand the significance of what is happening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||
ACT 28 26 s1ti figs-parallelism καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε & καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 but you will not understand at all … but you will not perceive at all Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing. They emphasize that the Jewish people will not understand God’s plan. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||
ACT 28 26 a650 figs-quotemarks οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 you will not perceive at all.” This is the end of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. You may be able to indicate that with a closing third-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the end of a third-level quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 28 27 fz42 figs-quotesinquotes ἐπαχύνθη γὰρ ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν, μήποτε ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσιν, καὶ τῇ καρδίᾳ συνῶσιν, καὶ ἐπιστρέψωσιν, καὶ ἰάσομαι αὐτούς 1 For the heart of this people has been thickened, and with their ears they have hardly heard, and they have shut their eyes, lest they might see with their eyes, and they might hear with their ears, and they might understand with their heart and turn back, and I would heal them If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit told Isaiah to say that because the heart of that people had been thickened, and with their ears they had hardly heard, and they had shut their eyes. Otherwise they might have seen with their eyes, and they might have heard with their ears, and they might have understood with their heart and turned back, and God would have healed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
|
||
ACT 28 27 a651 figs-parallelism ἐπαχύνθη γὰρ ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν 1 For the heart of this people has been thickened, and with their ears they have hardly heard, and they have shut their eyes These three phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “For this people is stubbornly refusing to use its senses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||
ACT 28 27 ts5a figs-metaphor ἐπαχύνθη & ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου 1 the heart of this people has been thickened Isaiah is speaking as if the **heart** of the people of Israel has literally been **thickened**. He means that they are resisting God stubbornly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this people has become stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 28 27 a652 figs-metaphor ἡ καρδία 1 the heart Isaiah is speaking as if the **heart** of the people of Israel has literally been **thickened**. He means that they are resisting God stubbornly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this people has become stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 28 27 a653 ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου 1 the heart of this people If it would not be natural in your language to speak as if a group of people had only one **heart**, you could use the plural form of that word in your translation. Alternate translation: “the hearts of these people”
|
||
ACT 28 27 ngve figs-metaphor ἡ καρδία & τῇ καρδίᾳ 1 the heart … with their heart Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts of people. Alternate translation: “the thinking … with their thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 28 27 a654 figs-activepassive ἐπαχύνθη 1 has been thickened If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “has become thick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 28 27 f5m4 figs-metaphor καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν 1 and with their ears they have hardly heard, and they have shut their eyes Isaiah is speaking as if the people of Israel have become unable to hear and have **shut their eyes** so that they will not see. He means that they are refusing to consider what God wants to tell them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and they are refusing to consider what God wants to tell them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 28 27 a655 figs-explicitinfo τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν & ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς & τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσιν 1 with their ears they have hardly heard … they might see with their eyes … they might hear with their ears It might seem that these expressions contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you could shorten them. Alternate translation: “they have hardly heard anything … they might see clearly … they might hear clearly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
|
||
ACT 28 27 a656 figs-parallelism ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσιν 1 they might see with their eyes, and they might hear with their ears These two phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “they might use their senses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
|
||
ACT 28 27 q8c2 figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψωσιν 1 turn back Isaiah is speaking of the people of Israel as if they had been traveling somewhere and had taken the wrong way and needed to **turn back** onto the right way. Alternate translation: “start obeying the Lord again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 28 27 vb9f figs-metaphor ἰάσομαι αὐτούς 1 I would heal them This does not mean God would only **heal** the people physically. He would also heal them spiritually by forgiving their sins. Alternate translation: “I would heal them and forgive them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
|
||
ACT 28 27 a657 figs-quotemarks ἰάσομαι αὐτούς 1 I would heal them.’” This is the end of a quotation within a quotation. You may be able to indicate that with closing second-level quotation marks or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the end of a second-level quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
|
||
ACT 28 28 a658 figs-imperative3p γνωστὸν & ἔστω 1 let it be known to you If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may it be known to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
|
||
ACT 28 28 e8hb figs-activepassive τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπεστάλη τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 this salvation of God has been sent to the Gentiles If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who has done the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God has sent me to proclaim this salvation of his to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
|
||
ACT 28 28 b2za figs-abstractnouns τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 this salvation of God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “this message about how God saves people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 28 28 d18n figs-idiom αὐτοὶ & ἀκούσονται 1 they will hear In this context the word **hear** likely means “understand and obey,” since Paul is drawing a contrast with the stubborn response of many of the Jews. You may wish to make this clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “they will understand the message and obey it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
|
||
ACT 28 29 a659 translate-textvariants 0 As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this verse is found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but it is not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting the verse in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
|
||
ACT 28 30 c56e writing-endofstory ἐνέμεινεν δὲ διετίαν ὅλην ἐν ἰδίῳ μισθώματι 1 And he stayed for two whole years in his own rented house This is the beginning of information that Luke presents to bring the story of the book of Acts to a close. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
|
||
ACT 28 30 a660 writing-pronouns ἐνέμεινεν 1 he stayed The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul stayed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
|
||
ACT 28 31 wv1l figs-abstractnouns τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the kingdom of God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **kingdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how God had begun to rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 28 31 a661 figs-abstractnouns μετὰ πάσης παρρησίας ἀκωλύτως 1 with all boldness, without hindrance If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **boldness** and **hindrance**, you could express the same ideas in other ways. Alternate translation: “very boldly, with no one hindering him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
|
||
ACT 28 31 a662 figs-hyperbole μετὰ πάσης παρρησίας 1 with all boldness Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
|